Apollo

Version 9.0

Reference Manual
Apollo Reference Manual
V9.0
Catalog No: X93433
Drawing No: 497016-2701-183-A00
October 2019
Rev01

ECI Telecom's NPT-1800, NPT-1300, NPT-1200, NPT-1050, NPT-1022, NPT-1021, NPT-1020,

and NPT-1010 are CE2.0 certified/compliant.

ECI Telecom's qualification lab is accredited by A2LA for competence in electrical testing
according to the International Standard ISO IEC 17025-2005 General Requirements for the
Competence of Testing and Calibration Laboratories.

ECI Telecom's management applications run on VMWare virtualization hypervisors.

© Copyright by ECI Telecom, 2012-2019. All rights reserved worldwide.

This is a legal agreement between you, the end user, and ECI Telecom Ltd. (“ECI Telecom”). BY OPENING THE DOCUMENTATION AND/OR DISK
PACKAGE, YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT,
PROMPTLY RETURN THE UNOPENED DOCUMENTATION AND/OR DISK PACKAGE AND THE ACCOMPANYING ITEMS (INCLUDING WRITTEN MATERIALS
AND BINDERS OR OTHER CONTAINERS), TO THE PLACE FROM WHICH YOU OBTAINED THEM.
All documentation and/or disk and all information and/or data contained in the documentation and/or disk ["ECI Telecom's Proprietary"] is ECI
Telecom's proprietary and is subject to all copyright, patent, and other laws protecting intellectual property, and any international treaty provisions,
as well as any specific agreement protecting ECI Telecom's rights in the aforesaid information. Any use of ECI Telecom's Proprietary for any purposes
[included but not limited: published, reproduced, or disclosed to third parties, in whole or in part] other than those for which it was disclosed, without
the express prior written permission of ECI Telecom, is strictly forbidden.
ECI Telecom's Proprietary is provided "AS IS" and may contain flaws, omissions, or typesetting errors. No responsibility and or liability whatsoever are
assumed by ECI Telecom for you or any other party, for the use thereof, nor for the rights of third parties, nor for any loss or damage whatsoever or
howsoever caused, arising directly or indirectly in connection with ECI Telecom's Proprietary, which may be affected in any way by the use and/or
dissemination thereof. ECI Telecom reserves the right, without prior notice or liability, to make changes in equipment design or specifications including
any change in and to the ECI Telecom's Proprietary.
Any representation(s) in ECI Telecom's Proprietary concerning performance of ECI Telecom's product(s) are for informational purposes only and are
not warranties of product performance or otherwise, either express or implied. No warranty is granted nor liability assumed in relation thereto, unless
specifically undertaken in ECI Telecom's sales contract or order confirmation. ECI Telecom's Proprietary is periodically updated, and changes will be
incorporated in subsequent editions. All graphics included in this document are for illustrative purposes only and might not correspond with your
specific product version.
The documentation and/or disk and all information contained therein is owned by ECI Telecom and is protected by all relevant copyright, patent, and
other applicable laws and international treaty provisions. Therefore, you must treat the information contained in the documentation and disk as any
other copyrighted material (for example, a book or musical recording).
Other Restrictions. You may not rent, lease, sell, or otherwise dispose of ECI Telecom's Proprietary, as applicable.
YOU MAY NOT USE, COPY, MODIFY, OR TRANSFER THE DOCUMENTATION AND/OR DISK OR ANY COPY IN WHOLE OR PART, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY
PROVIDED IN THIS LICENSE. ALL RIGHTS NOT EXPRESSLY GRANTED ARE RESERVED BY ECI Telecom.
All trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their respective holders.
Notwithstanding the generality of the aforementioned, you expressly waive any claim and/or demand regarding liability for indirect, special,
incidental, or consequential loss or damage which may arise in respect of ECI Telecom's Proprietary contained therein, howsoever caused, even if
advised of the possibility of such damages.
The end user hereby undertakes and acknowledges that they read the "Before You Start/Safety Guidelines" instructions (when provided by ECI
Telecom) and that such instructions were understood by them. ECI Telecom shall not be liable to you or to any other party for any loss or damage
whatsoever or howsoever caused, arising directly or indirectly in connection with you fulfilling and/or failure to fulfill in whole or in part the "Before
You Start/Safety Guidelines" instructions.
Contents
Useful information ............................................................................................... xiii
Related documents ............................................................................................................................. xiii
Contact information ............................................................................................................................ xiii
Revision history ................................................................................................................................... xiii

1 OPT9932/9914 platform layout and architecture ........................................ 1-1

1.1 OPT9932 platform layout....................................................................................................... 1-3
1.2 OPT9914 platform layout....................................................................................................... 1-5
1.3 OPT99xx control and communications subsystem ................................................................ 1-6
1.3.1 OPT99xx control ...................................................................................................................... 1-6
1.3.2 OPT99xx communications ....................................................................................................... 1-7
1.3.3 OPT99xx flexible support for management mixtures ............................................................. 1-8
1.3.4 OPT99xx routing and forwarding functionality ....................................................................... 1-9
1.3.5 OPT99xx management channel with dynamic OSPF ............................................................... 1-9
1.4 OPT99xx timing and synchronization .................................................................................. 1-10
1.5 OPT99xx universal fabric system ......................................................................................... 1-11
1.6 OPT99xx cross-connect functionality................................................................................... 1-13
1.7 OPT99xx Lite Packet support ............................................................................................... 1-14
1.8 OPT99xx power feed subsystem .......................................................................................... 1-15
1.9 OPT99xx air cooling subsystem ........................................................................................... 1-18
1.10 OPT99xx management system ............................................................................................ 1-23

2 OPT9932/9914 common cards..................................................................... 2-1

2.1 xRCP/xRCP1............................................................................................................................ 2-1
2.2 xFM ........................................................................................................................................ 2-4
2.3 xMIM ...................................................................................................................................... 2-6
2.4 xTAM ...................................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.5 xTEM .................................................................................................................................... 2-11
2.6 xPFM-14 ............................................................................................................................... 2-13
2.7 xFCM-14 ............................................................................................................................... 2-15
2.8 xCBM .................................................................................................................................... 2-19
2.9 xPFM-32 ............................................................................................................................... 2-21
2.10 xFCM-32 ............................................................................................................................... 2-23

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary iii

Apollo Reference Manual Contents

3 OPT9932/9914 service cards ....................................................................... 3-1

3.1 HIO500/HIO400 ..................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 HIO500 applications ................................................................................................................ 3-5
3.1.2 HIO500 port configuration rules ............................................................................................. 3-6
3.2 HIO100_2 ............................................................................................................................... 3-7
3.3 HIO10_40 ............................................................................................................................... 3-9
3.4 HIO10_20 ............................................................................................................................. 3-11
3.5 TIOMR_32 ............................................................................................................................ 3-13

4 OPT9904X platform layout and architecture................................................ 4-1

4.1 OPT9904X platform layout .................................................................................................... 4-2
4.2 OPT9904X common cards ...................................................................................................... 4-3
4.2.1 RCP04X .................................................................................................................................... 4-3
4.2.2 PFM04X ................................................................................................................................... 4-5
4.2.3 FCM04X ................................................................................................................................... 4-7
4.2.4 TAMIM04X ............................................................................................................................ 4-10
4.3 OPT9904X passive and photonic cards ................................................................................ 4-13
4.4 MIO200 ................................................................................................................................ 4-13

5 OPT96xx platform layout and architecture .................................................. 5-1

5.1 OPT9624 platform layout....................................................................................................... 5-2
5.1.1 OPT9624 platform configurations ........................................................................................... 5-3
5.2 OPT9608 platform layout....................................................................................................... 5-5
5.3 OPT9603 platform layout....................................................................................................... 5-6
5.4 OPT96xx control and communications subsystem ................................................................ 5-7
5.4.1 OPT96xx control ...................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.4.2 OPT96xx communications ....................................................................................................... 5-8
5.4.3 OPT96xx flexible support for management mixtures ............................................................. 5-9
5.4.4 OPT96xx routing and forwarding functionality ..................................................................... 5-10
5.4.5 OPT96xx management channel with dynamic OSPF ............................................................. 5-10
5.4.6 VoIP in OPT96xx .................................................................................................................... 5-11
5.5 OPT96xx universal fabric functionality ................................................................................ 5-11
5.6 Cross-connect functionality ................................................................................................. 5-11
5.6.1 Types of cross-connections ................................................................................................... 5-13
5.7 OTN technology ................................................................................................................... 5-16
5.7.1 OTN topologies ...................................................................................................................... 5-17
5.8 OPT96xx power feed subsystem .......................................................................................... 5-19

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary iv

Apollo Reference Manual Contents

6 OPT9624 common cards .............................................................................. 6-1

6.1 RCP ......................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.1 RCP24_T: universal controller ................................................................................................. 6-2
6.1.2 RCP24_O: optimized for pure DWDM ..................................................................................... 6-5
6.2 PFM24 .................................................................................................................................... 6-8
6.3 CEM24 .................................................................................................................................. 6-11
6.4 FCM24 .................................................................................................................................. 6-14
6.4.1 FCM24 air filters .................................................................................................................... 6-15
6.5 FM1000 ................................................................................................................................ 6-17

7 OPT9608 common cards .............................................................................. 7-1

7.1 RCP08_O ................................................................................................................................ 7-1
7.2 RCP1_4AD_T .......................................................................................................................... 7-4
7.3 PFM08_AC.............................................................................................................................. 7-7
7.4 PFM with a circuit breaker (DC) ............................................................................................. 7-9
7.5 PFM without a circuit breaker ............................................................................................. 7-11
7.6 PFM08H_DC ......................................................................................................................... 7-13
7.7 FCM ...................................................................................................................................... 7-14
7.7.1 FCM air filters ........................................................................................................................ 7-16

8 OPT9603 common cards .............................................................................. 8-1

8.1 RCP03/RCP03R ....................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.2 PFM03 .................................................................................................................................... 8-3
8.3 PFM03_AC.............................................................................................................................. 8-5
8.4 PFM03_RAC ........................................................................................................................... 8-6
8.5 FCM03 .................................................................................................................................... 8-8
8.5.1 FCM03 air filter...................................................................................................................... 8-10

9 OPT96xx optical cards and modules ............................................................ 9-1

9.1 Understanding I/O card slot sizes .......................................................................................... 9-2
9.2 Understanding CD and CDC DWDM architecture .................................................................. 9-3
9.3 Understanding optical network control parameters ............................................................. 9-5
9.4 Multi-degree CDC ROADM cards ........................................................................................... 9-8
9.4.1 ROADM_20TF .......................................................................................................................... 9-9
9.4.2 ROADM_20CF ........................................................................................................................ 9-13
9.4.3 ROADM_8x24CDCF ............................................................................................................... 9-18
9.4.4 ROADM_9TF .......................................................................................................................... 9-20

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary v

Apollo Reference Manual Contents

9.4.5 ROADM_9FS .......................................................................................................................... 9-24

9.4.6 ROADM_9F ............................................................................................................................ 9-27
9.4.7 ROADM_9A50 ....................................................................................................................... 9-30
9.4.8 ROADM_4FS .......................................................................................................................... 9-33
9.4.9 ROADM_4F ............................................................................................................................ 9-36
9.4.10 ROADM_4A ........................................................................................................................... 9-39
9.4.11 ROADM_4A50 ....................................................................................................................... 9-42
9.4.12 ROADM_2A ........................................................................................................................... 9-45
9.4.13 ROADM_2A50 ....................................................................................................................... 9-48
9.4.14 TFA_8..................................................................................................................................... 9-51
9.5 Mux/DeMux cards ............................................................................................................... 9-54
9.5.1 MXD88 ................................................................................................................................... 9-55
9.5.2 MXD44 ................................................................................................................................... 9-57
9.5.3 MXD16 ................................................................................................................................... 9-59
9.5.4 MXD8 ..................................................................................................................................... 9-61
9.5.5 MXD4_B................................................................................................................................. 9-62
9.6 CWDM components ............................................................................................................. 9-65
9.6.1 CMXD8................................................................................................................................... 9-65
9.6.2 COADM4_xx .......................................................................................................................... 9-68
9.7 OADM cards ......................................................................................................................... 9-70
9.7.1 FOADM2_xx........................................................................................................................... 9-71
9.7.2 FOADM4_xx........................................................................................................................... 9-74
9.7.3 FOADM850_xx....................................................................................................................... 9-76
9.7.4 OADMC4_xx .......................................................................................................................... 9-79
9.7.5 OADMC8_xx .......................................................................................................................... 9-81
9.8 Optical filters, splitters, and couplers .................................................................................. 9-84
9.8.1 CT_1310_2............................................................................................................................. 9-84
9.8.2 CT_1510_2............................................................................................................................. 9-86
9.8.3 CT_OTDR_2 ........................................................................................................................... 9-88
9.8.4 CT_OTDR_2_WIDE................................................................................................................. 9-90
9.8.5 C_OTDR_2 ............................................................................................................................. 9-92
9.8.6 SP_SM_4................................................................................................................................ 9-95
9.8.7 SP_MM_4 .............................................................................................................................. 9-97
9.8.8 SP_CE4_2 ............................................................................................................................... 9-99
9.8.9 SP_CE8_1 ............................................................................................................................. 9-101
9.8.10 SP_CE32_1 ........................................................................................................................... 9-103
9.9 Bidirectional single-fiber DWDM networks ....................................................................... 9-106

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary vi

Apollo Reference Manual Contents

9.9.1 R/B_2 ................................................................................................................................... 9-107

9.9.2 CLT_1510/1590 ................................................................................................................... 9-109
9.10 Optical protection cards .................................................................................................... 9-111
9.10.1 OMSP ................................................................................................................................... 9-111
9.10.2 OLP_S2 ................................................................................................................................ 9-116
9.11 Optical amplifiers ............................................................................................................... 9-119
9.11.1 Raman amplification: Principles of operation ..................................................................... 9-120
9.11.2 High power laser safety ....................................................................................................... 9-120
9.11.3 Automatic laser shutdown (ALS) ......................................................................................... 9-121
9.11.4 OA_FB .................................................................................................................................. 9-123
9.11.5 OA_ML ................................................................................................................................. 9-125
9.11.6 OA_PA ................................................................................................................................. 9-129
9.11.7 OA_M .................................................................................................................................. 9-132
9.11.8 OA_L .................................................................................................................................... 9-135
9.11.9 OA_LF .................................................................................................................................. 9-137
9.11.10 OA_HF ................................................................................................................................. 9-140
9.11.11 OA_FHBS ............................................................................................................................. 9-142
9.11.12 OA_MHS .............................................................................................................................. 9-145
9.11.13 OA_HRS ............................................................................................................................... 9-148
9.11.14 OA_EHRS ............................................................................................................................. 9-151
9.11.15 OA_HRSF ............................................................................................................................. 9-155
9.11.16 OA_EHRSF ........................................................................................................................... 9-159
9.11.17 OA_LEHRSF .......................................................................................................................... 9-162
9.11.18 OA_USPBF ........................................................................................................................... 9-166
9.11.19 OA_DLF ................................................................................................................................ 9-169
9.11.20 OA_DLHF ............................................................................................................................. 9-172
9.11.21 OA_DPR ............................................................................................................................... 9-175
9.11.22 OA_DFBL.............................................................................................................................. 9-178
9.11.23 OPA_FBS .............................................................................................................................. 9-181
9.11.24 OPA_LFS .............................................................................................................................. 9-182
9.11.25 OPA_HFS.............................................................................................................................. 9-184
9.12 Miniature OTDR ................................................................................................................. 9-185
9.12.1 OTDR commands ................................................................................................................. 9-186
9.13 OTDR_8 .............................................................................................................................. 9-187
9.13.1 OTDR_8 test applications .................................................................................................... 9-190
9.13.2 OTDR_8 one end test .......................................................................................................... 9-191
9.13.3 OTDR_8 two end test for high power EDFAs ...................................................................... 9-192

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary vii

Apollo Reference Manual Contents

9.13.4 OTDR_8 Raman span test .................................................................................................... 9-192

9.14 DCF ..................................................................................................................................... 9-193
9.14.1 DCF652_xx ........................................................................................................................... 9-193
9.14.2 DCF655_xx ........................................................................................................................... 9-194
9.14.3 RM_DCF652_xx ................................................................................................................... 9-195
9.15 OSC_8 ................................................................................................................................. 9-196

10 OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards ................................................... 10-1

10.1 Advanced OTN features ....................................................................................................... 10-1
10.1.1 Understanding ODU0 containers .......................................................................................... 10-2
10.1.2 Understanding ODUflex ........................................................................................................ 10-4
10.1.3 Understanding PT21 (Payload Type = 21) ............................................................................. 10-5
10.2 AoC10/AoC10B .................................................................................................................... 10-6
10.2.1 Assignment of AoC10 as AoC25 .......................................................................................... 10-10
10.3 TR10_4 ............................................................................................................................... 10-11
10.4 Encrypted transponder/muxponder cards ........................................................................ 10-13
10.4.1 Cryptography: basic terminology ........................................................................................ 10-14
10.5 TR10_4EN ........................................................................................................................... 10-16
10.5.1 Optical encryption in TR10_4EN ......................................................................................... 10-20
10.5.2 TR10_4EN protection schemes ........................................................................................... 10-23
10.6 TR10_12/TR10_12R ........................................................................................................... 10-24
10.7 TR10_12ULL ....................................................................................................................... 10-27
10.7.1 ULL channels for transponder applications ......................................................................... 10-30
10.8 CMR40B ............................................................................................................................. 10-32
10.9 CMR100 and CMR100L ...................................................................................................... 10-34
10.9.1 CMR100/CMR100L transceivers.......................................................................................... 10-37
10.10 CMR100M .......................................................................................................................... 10-38
10.11 TR100/TR100L .................................................................................................................... 10-42
10.11.1 TR100 and TR100L applications and options ...................................................................... 10-45
10.12 TM100 10-47
10.12.1 TM100 applications ............................................................................................................. 10-51
10.13 TM100_2EN ....................................................................................................................... 10-53
10.14 TM100_2ENB ..................................................................................................................... 10-58
10.15 TM200EN ........................................................................................................................... 10-63
10.15.1 TR10_12EN assignment rules and features ......................................................................... 10-68
10.16 TM200ENB ......................................................................................................................... 10-69
10.17 FIPS 140-2 Level 2 security implementation...................................................................... 10-75

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary viii

Apollo Reference Manual Contents

10.17.1 FIPS 140-2 Level 2 encryption ............................................................................................. 10-75

10.17.2 Understanding FIPS 140-2 Level 2 security ......................................................................... 10-76
10.17.3 FIPS installation procedure and guidelines ......................................................................... 10-79
10.18 TR200_2 ............................................................................................................................. 10-81
10.18.1 TR200_2 applications .......................................................................................................... 10-84
10.18.2 TR200_2 line and client ports configuration options .......................................................... 10-85
10.19 TM400 10-86
10.19.1 TM400 configuration options .............................................................................................. 10-89
10.19.2 TM400_REG100 regenerator application ............................................................................ 10-90
10.20 TM800 10-91
10.21 TM1200 .............................................................................................................................. 10-92
10.22 FIO10_5/5B ........................................................................................................................ 10-94
10.23 FIOMR_16/16B................................................................................................................... 10-97
10.24 FIO100 10-99
10.25 FIO100M .......................................................................................................................... 10-101
10.26 Pluggable transceiver modules ........................................................................................ 10-104

11 OPT96xx Layer 2 service cards ................................................................... 11-1

11.1 AoC10_L2 ............................................................................................................................. 11-1

12 Artemis product line.................................................................................. 12-1

12.1 Artemis features and functions ........................................................................................... 12-2
12.2 Artemis platform layout....................................................................................................... 12-2
12.2.1 Artemis-1P ............................................................................................................................. 12-2
12.2.2 Artemis-2A ............................................................................................................................ 12-3
12.2.3 Artemis-2PE ........................................................................................................................... 12-3
12.2.4 Artemis-4A ............................................................................................................................ 12-5

13 Accessories ................................................................................................ 13-1

13.1 Power Distribution Units (PDU) ........................................................................................... 13-1
13.1.1 PDU55AL................................................................................................................................ 13-2
13.1.2 PDU77AL................................................................................................................................ 13-6
13.1.3 PDU99.................................................................................................................................. 13-10
13.2 RAP-E.................................................................................................................................. 13-14
13.3 xRAP-100 ............................................................................................................................ 13-19
13.4 RAP-4B ............................................................................................................................... 13-23
13.5 AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 power system ................................................................................... 13-26
13.5.1 AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 front view ........................................................................................... 13-27

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary ix

Apollo Reference Manual Contents

13.5.2 AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 rear view ............................................................................................ 13-28

13.6 AC/DC PS 6/8.7kW power system ..................................................................................... 13-30
13.6.1 AC/DC PS 6/8.7kW front view ............................................................................................. 13-31
13.6.2 AC/DC PS 6/8.7kW rear view............................................................................................... 13-32
13.7 Fiber storage accessories ................................................................................................... 13-35
13.7.1 FST ....................................................................................................................................... 13-35
13.7.2 Fiber spooler ....................................................................................................................... 13-36
13.8 FMT-1U patch panel .......................................................................................................... 13-37
13.8.1 FMT4F-10x10G-MM fiber connection module.................................................................... 13-37
13.8.2 FMT4F-2x4x10G-SM fiber connection module ................................................................... 13-38
13.8.3 FMT4F-2x4x10G-MM fiber connection module .................................................................. 13-39
13.9 Cable guiding accessories .................................................................................................. 13-39
13.9.1 Fiber/cable guide ................................................................................................................ 13-39
13.9.2 Fiber bridges ........................................................................................................................ 13-42
13.10 External fiber duct ............................................................................................................. 13-42

14 Protection and restoration mechanisms .................................................... 14-1

14.1 OMSP 1:1 protection ........................................................................................................... 14-1
14.2 OLP 1+1 protection .............................................................................................................. 14-2
14.3 OCH protection .................................................................................................................... 14-4
14.4 SNC-N protection ................................................................................................................. 14-5
14.5 Y-protection for network traffic on 10G cards .................................................................... 14-5
14.6 Client traffic protection ....................................................................................................... 14-6
14.7 Combined network traffic and equipment protection ........................................................ 14-7
14.8 ODU DNI and DRI protection ............................................................................................... 14-8
14.9 WSS ROADM protection .................................................................................................... 14-10
14.10 ASON, WSON, and SSON GMPLS-based restoration ......................................................... 14-13
14.10.1 Apollo optical control plane architecture ........................................................................... 14-15
14.10.2 Multiple protection and restoration schemes .................................................................... 14-20
14.10.3 Priority and preemption ...................................................................................................... 14-22
14.11 Equipment protection ........................................................................................................ 14-22

15 Management system ................................................................................. 15-1

15.1 LightSOFT NMS management .............................................................................................. 15-1
15.1.1 Layered architecture maximizes flexibility ............................................................................ 15-3
15.1.2 Graphic user interface ........................................................................................................... 15-4
15.1.3 Topology management ......................................................................................................... 15-5

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary x

Apollo Reference Manual Contents

15.1.4 DWDM trails .......................................................................................................................... 15-6

15.1.5 Optical trail provisioning and management .......................................................................... 15-8
15.1.6 LightPath availability maps .................................................................................................. 15-10
15.1.7 Control map......................................................................................................................... 15-11
15.1.8 Management security mechanisms .................................................................................... 15-12
15.1.9 Management interfaces ...................................................................................................... 15-12
15.2 Shade Tree Management System (STMS).......................................................................... 15-13
15.2.1 STMS key features ............................................................................................................... 15-16
15.3 CLI configuration ................................................................................................................ 15-18
15.3.1 Command line interface ...................................................................................................... 15-18
15.4 Integration with other products ........................................................................................ 15-20
15.5 DC power management ..................................................................................................... 15-20

16 Embedded management ........................................................................... 16-1

16.1 Equipment management ..................................................................................................... 16-1
16.1.1 Shelf types ............................................................................................................................. 16-2
16.1.2 Card types ............................................................................................................................. 16-2
16.1.3 Transceiver types .................................................................................................................. 16-3
16.1.4 Equipment hierarchy ............................................................................................................. 16-3
16.1.5 Equipment entities ................................................................................................................ 16-3
16.1.6 Transport entities .................................................................................................................. 16-6
16.1.7 Compliance with "Green" requirements ............................................................................... 16-7
16.1.8 Inventory information ........................................................................................................... 16-8
16.1.9 Auto discovery ....................................................................................................................... 16-8
16.2 Fault management ............................................................................................................... 16-9
16.3 Configuration management ............................................................................................... 16-11
16.3.1 Apollo platforms minimal configuration ............................................................................. 16-11
16.3.2 User configuration ............................................................................................................... 16-11
16.3.3 Implicit configuration .......................................................................................................... 16-12
16.3.4 Preplanned and manual configuration ................................................................................ 16-12
16.3.5 Transactions ........................................................................................................................ 16-13
16.3.6 Rollback operations ............................................................................................................. 16-13
16.4 Performance monitoring ................................................................................................... 16-14
16.5 Security .............................................................................................................................. 16-14
16.6 Fiber connectivity .............................................................................................................. 16-15
16.6.1 Power control and equalization .......................................................................................... 16-15
16.6.2 Diagnostic information ........................................................................................................ 16-16

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary xi

Apollo Reference Manual Contents

16.6.3 LightSOFT top-down information ........................................................................................ 16-17

16.6.4 NE alarm correlation ........................................................................................................... 16-17
16.6.5 Alien lambda ....................................................................................................................... 16-18
16.6.6 Fiber connectivity to external equipment ........................................................................... 16-18
16.7 Built-In Test (BIT) ............................................................................................................... 16-19
16.8 Ease of use ......................................................................................................................... 16-19

17 Maintenance ............................................................................................. 17-1

17.1 Maintenance operations...................................................................................................... 17-1
17.2 Built-In Test .......................................................................................................................... 17-1
17.3 Alarms system ...................................................................................................................... 17-2
17.4 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................... 17-3

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary xii

Useful information
This Apollo Reference Manual describes the key components of the Apollo platforms, including cards,
modules, accessories, and related capabilities. It also provides detailed descriptions for interpreting
indicator functions, enabling field personnel to troubleshoot hardware-related problems.

Related documents
 Apollo Documentation Suite
 STMS Documentation Suite
 LightSOFT® Documentation Suite

Contact information
Telephone Email

ECI Documentation Group +972-3-9268145 techdoc.feedback@ecitele.com

ECI Customer Support +972-3-9266000 on.support@ecitele.com

Revision history
Revision Section Description
1 N/A New

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary xiii

1 OPT9932/9914 platform layout and
architecture
This section describes the layout and architecture of the OPT9932 and OPT9914 platforms (referred to as
OPT99xx in this section). Apollo OPT99xx platforms support ODU-XC applications as well as being
data-ready for MPLS-TP applications. System capacity starts at 5.6 Tbps/12.8 Tbps/16 Tbps configurable,
upgradeable to multiple 10 x Tbps capacity.
The OPT99xx service interface cards are a set of hybrid cards that can be used on the line or client side,
supporting OTN and Packet over OTN uplinks. Consistent with our modular distributed architecture design
philosophy, the OPT99xx platforms utilize the same fabric/controller and service cards. Service cards or
photonic modules can be installed in any of the I/O slots.
Apollo platforms have been designed to facilitate simple installation and easy maintenance. Hot insertion
of cards and modules enables quick maintenance and repair activities without affecting traffic. The cage
design and mechanical practice of all platforms conform to international mechanical standards and
specifications.
This section describes the layout and architecture of the OPT99xx platforms, focusing on the following
components:
 Platform layout
 Control and communications subsystems, including:
 Control
 Communications
 Timing and synchronization
 Universal fabric
 Cross-connect functionality
 Distributed forwarding architecture
 Packet processing
 Power feed subsystem
 Cooling subsystem
 Management system
The simplified block diagram of the OPT9914 is shown in the following figure.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 1-1

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 platform layout and architecture

OPT9914 block diagram

NOTE: All installation instructions, technical specifications, restrictions, and safety warnings
are provided in the Apollo Platform Installation and Maintenance Manuals. See these manuals
for specific instructions before beginning any Apollo installation.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 1-2

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 platform layout and architecture

1.1 OPT9932 platform layout

The OPT9932 platform is sized for ETSI racks, with 2000 mm height, 600 mm width, and 300 mm depth.
Redundant protection mechanisms include 1:1 protection for control, timing, and power mechanisms, as
well as 7 + 2, or 8+1 switching fabric protection. The OPT9932 platform includes the following:
 32 universal slots for hybrid service cards that support a mix of Layer 1 and Layer 2 (MPLS-TP)
services, up to 400G/500G single-slot density, (correlated to fabrics configuration, 7+2/8+1) with slot
allocation optimized per application.
 2 xRCP/xRCP1 main controller cards, integrated with FM fabric modules.
 7 xFM universal fabric cards
 Both 2 xRCP/xRCP1 and 7 xFM create 7+2 or 8+1 fabric configuration providing 12.8 Tbps or 16 Tbps
(with integrated xRCP/xRCP1), ready for 32/64 Tbps (cascading shelves). The universal fabric supports
OTN switching (ODUk cross-connect 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, Flex) and packet switching (Layer 2 and MPLS-TP).
 12 xPFM-32 power supply cards. Enabling up to 14 kW future Maximal power utilization making the
platform ready for future high density and capacity transceivers.
 3 xFCM fan units, distributed across the platform for maximum cooling effect.
 One xMIM card providing an interface to external management.
 One xTAM card providing the physical interface to alarms and hardware ready clock devices, including
the following:
 BITS interface T3/T4 – E1 (framed) or 2MHz/1.5MHz (unframed).
 External 1588v2 (input or output) with the following interfaces: 10MHz clock, 1PPS, ToD, 1PPS
monitor point.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 1-3

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 platform layout and architecture

OPT9932 platform layout and slot allocation

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 1-4

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 platform layout and architecture

1.2 OPT9914 platform layout

The OPT9914 platform is sized for 19" racks, with 974 mm height (22U), 477 mm width, and 305 mm depth.
One OPT9914 platform can be installed in a 19" rack together with up to two OPT9608 platforms.
Redundant protection mechanisms include 1:1 protection for control, timing, and power mechanisms, as
well as 1+3 switching fabric protection. The OPT9914 platform includes the following:
 14 universal slots for hybrid service cards that support a mix of Layer 1 and Layer 2 (MPLS-TP)
services, up to 400G single-slot density, with slot allocation optimized per application.
 2 xRCP/xRCP1 main controller cards, integrated with FM fabric modules.
 Two xFM plus two FE (Fabric Elements) on the xRCP/xRCP1 cards providing 5.6 Tbps universal fabric
for OTN switching (ODUk cross-connect 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, Flex) and packet switching (Layer 2 and MPLS-TP).
 Both 2 xRCP/xRCP1 and 2 xFM create 3+1 fabric configuration.
 xPFM-14 power supply cards. Enabling up to 7.2 kW future Maximal power utilization, making the
platform ready for future high density and capacity transceivers (e.g. 1Tbps).
 Two xFCM-14 fan units, distributed across the platform for maximum cooling effect.
 One xMIM card providing an interface to external management.
 One xTAM card providing the physical interface to alarms and hardware ready clock devices, including
the following:
 BITS interface T3/T4 – E1 (framed) or 2MHz/1.5MHz (unframed).
 External 1588v2 (input or output) with the following interfaces: 10 MHz clock, 1PPS, ToD, 1PPS
monitor point.
 One CEM card providing the physical interface to external management and clock devices.

OPT9914 platform layout and slot allocation

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 1-5

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 platform layout and architecture

1.3 OPT99xx control and communications

subsystem
The controller subsystem (xRCP/xRCP1) is responsible for the following functionality in the OPT99xx
platforms:
 Internal control and traffic processing, accomplished through the main processor that has the main
activation software and a nonvolatile backup memory (NVM).
 Internal platform and card control.
 Internal communications and processing.
 Timing and synchronization.
 ODUk cross connection or packet switching.
 High availability (HA), ensuring xRCP/xRCP1 switching from the active to the standby is non-traffic
affecting.
 Communication with external equipment and management.
 Comprehensive management functionality using General Communications Channel (GCC), out of band
management, or in-band management, with dynamic Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) routing.
 Fault management, performance monitoring (PM), and maintenance.
 Optical and traffic planning tools with smooth automation and plug&play capabilities.
 Built-In Test (BIT).
 NE software and configuration backup.

1.3.1 OPT99xx control

The main controller subsystem supports central control, alarms, maintenance, and communication
functions. It also communicates with the control processors of the various cards using a master-slave
control hierarchy.
Each controller unit contains an NVM that stores a complete backup of both the system software and its NE
configuration. Through the NVM, the OPT99xx benefits from superior management and control availability,
ensuring that a faulty controller unit does not affect traffic.
Double redundancy in every platform can be obtained using a redundant NVM unit in the second
redundant controller subsystem, which is updated automatically on a regular basis. To maintain
synchronization, the operator can also initiate a manual NVM update whenever a change occurs in the
configuration.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 1-6

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 platform layout and architecture

The controller also provides the following functions:

 Manages software versions of the platform
 Downloads software to the I/O cards
 Collects PM and log information
 Manages SNCP protection scheme
 Collects LightPulse (AKA ONCP) information
 Controls the fabric matrix
In the OPT9932 and OPT9914, the platforms are operated in a redundant configuration, in which the main
controller card is protected with a second identical card. The redundant card contains a database identical
to the active card, and operates as a full capability standby control and communication card.

OPT99xx control subsystem

The controller subsystem enables easy software upgrades using a remote software procedure operated
from the STMS® management system. It can store several different software versions at the same time and
enables quick switchover between the different versions when required.

1.3.2 OPT99xx communications

The main control processor subsystem is responsible for communications with external NEs and
management stations.
Communications with other NEs is through one of the following mechanisms:
 GCC channel - embedded in each OTU/ODU link via OTN services cards
 In band management over Ethernet signals in Layer 2 cards
 External Data Communications Network (DCN)
Apollo performs IP forwarding between all network interfaces, including gateway management interfaces.
The management communication channel enables operators to integrate several platforms with their own
workstations, and to pass this management traffic through the Apollo system.
Apollo implements dynamic OSPF routing over the network interfaces to automatically determine the
routing table. OSPF support includes P2P protocol, (PPP) encapsulation of IP packets with high-level data
link control (HDLC), and framing over one of the management channels.
An Ethernet interface is used to communicate with STMS. The controller subsystem can also communicate
with a desktop or laptop PC-based craft terminal (Apollo CLI) via serial interface or Ethernet.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 1-7

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 platform layout and architecture

Communications module
All OPT99xx platform configurations work with a communications module, featuring:
 Electrical interface connectors that are integrated into the I/O modules, eliminating the need for
separate electrical interface modules
 Easy routing of external management interfaces
 A monitoring system for acceptance test purposes
 Hot insertion of cards and modules to support quick maintenance and repair activities, without
affecting traffic

1.3.3 OPT99xx flexible support for management mixtures

Management information is transmitted from the NMS/EMS to individual NEs through one of the following
mechanisms:
 External DCN
 GCC channel: Apollo platforms support in band management utilizing the GCC incorporated in Layer 1
service cards (either standalone or fabric I/O cards). The GCC enables remote management of
equipment at any site where optical channels are dropped. This can increase margins and extend
distances of optical links as OSC filters are eliminated. Apollo supports GCC0, GCC1, and GCC2. GCC1
and GCC2, integrated in the ODU overhead bytes, are usually used when transmitting management
over a third party domain that is not based on vendor equipment. GCC0 is transmitted over OTU
overhead bytes and terminated every time the OTN signal is terminated. GCC is available for OTU 1,
OTU 2, OTU 3, and OTU 4 signals.
 In band Ethernet channel: OPT99xx platforms can transmit management information over a
dedicated VLAN via in band Ethernet signals. In band Ethernet can be transmitted over GbE, 10 GbE,
and 100 GbE interfaces. In band Ethernet management is only available when using Layer 2 cards. The
Layer 2 cards terminate the VLAN and extract the management information. Management
infrastructure, routing communications, and internal system control traffic all go through the internal
link between the xRCP/xRCP1 and the XC Packet Control Processor Module (XPT-CPM) on the data
cards.
The Apollo OPT99xx platforms fully integrates the GCC, in band Ethernet, and external DCN management
channels, thus providing the operator with the flexibility to choose the most appropriate management
channel. Operators can even mix the different channels in a network or in the same platform.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 1-8

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 platform layout and architecture

1.3.4 OPT99xx routing and forwarding functionality

The routing and forwarding capabilities of the OPT99xx platforms are based on standard OSPF dynamic
routing, suitable for small, medium, and larger networks, and including a richer set of features for network
communications management.
In the OPT99xx platforms, the main control processor subsystem is responsible for communications with
external NEs and management stations. Communications with other Apollo NEs is via the GCC in each OTN
link, in band Ethernet, or external DCN.
An Ethernet interface is used to communicate with STMS. The controller subsystem can also communicate
with a desktop or laptop PC-based craft terminal (Apollo CLI) via a serial interface or Ethernet. It also
provides alarm outputs. Some of these network communications components and their functionality are
described in this chapter.

1.3.5 OPT99xx management channel with dynamic OSPF

A management channel enables operators to integrate several platforms with their own workstations and
to pass this management traffic through the Apollo OPT99xx platforms. The operator sets up an IP–based
DCN to carry IP packets between the management stations and the NEs. The DCN is composed of
Embedded Communication Channels (ECCs) supported by the equipment itself and an external DCN
supported by standard data equipment.
The Apollo performs IP forwarding between all network interfaces, implementing dynamic OSPF routing
over these network interfaces to automatically determine the routing table. OSPF can be configured for any
subset of network interfaces and supports:
 P2P and broadcast interfaces
 Up to four OSPF areas
 Address summarization
 Area Border Router functionality
 Autonomous System Border Router functionality, including redistribution of static routes
 Loopback address as a router ID
 Configuration of HELLO protocol parameters
 "Passive" interfaces to allow distribution of routes to attached devices
OSPF functionality enables a wide range of DCN configurations, adds resiliency to management
communications between NEs and the management stations, and reduces the ECC load, for a significant
improvement in management performance and NE capacity.
Under dynamic ECC routing, NEs ping each other through the available ECC interfaces and build their own
routing tables. Working with dynamic routing tables that respond to real time circumstances simplifies ECC
planning and maintenance, and reduces the ECC load by making it unnecessary to reserve ECC protection
paths in advance. There is also no need to plan ECC rings, since dynamic ECC routing enables NEs to
automatically set up new routes if the existing ones fail.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 1-9

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 platform layout and architecture

1.4 OPT99xx timing and synchronization

Apollo OPT99xx platforms feature a central synchronization subsystem that provides fully redundant high
quality system timing to all traffic cards and functions.
Timing and alarm interfaces of the OPT99xx shelves are located on timing and alarm module (xTAM). The
xTAM is hardware ready for terminating/driving BITS (T3/T4) and 1588v2 (Clk, 1PPS, ToD, 1PPS monitor)
standard interfaces to/from the Central Timing Module (xCTM) residing on the xRCP/xRCP1.
Timing is distributed redundantly from the xCTM to all traffic cards requiring synchronization, minimizing
unit types and reducing operation and maintenance costs.
The following figure shows the timing signals distribution in the OPT99xx platforms.

OPT9914 timing distribution

The xCTM and internal and external timing paths are fully redundant. The distributed BIT mechanism
ensures top performance and availability.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 1-10

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 platform layout and architecture

To provide a reliable timing source, the OPT99xx is hardware ready to support multiple synchronization
reference options. Up to seven of the following timing references can be monitored simultaneously by each
OPT99xx platform:
 2 x 2MHz/1.5MHz (T3) external timing input sources
 2 x E1 (T3) external timing input sources
 1588v2 (In clock, 1PPS, ToD) External
 1588v2 (PTP massages)
 2 x Reference clock from Line cards (like Sync-E/Sync-O)
 Mate CTM (Mate xRCP/xRCP1)
High Availability of the timing system is guaranteed by the fact that the OPT99xx is always operating with
two xRCP/xRCP1 cards in the shelf. HA includes also the xCTM function redundancy. The active xCTM
always resides on the active xRCP/xRCP1 and HA switch-over refers both to xRCP/xRCP1 and xCTM logics.
The xCTM provides direct control over the source selection (which it receives from the system software)
and the frequency control loop. The definition of the synchronization source depends on the source quality
and on the synchronization mode, according to the network timing topology.
The operator can remotely manage network synchronization and can select and determine the priority for
each OPT99xx timing source reference.
Synchronization references are classified at any given time according to a predefined priority and prevailing
signal quality. The Apollo OPT99xx synchronization subsystem synchronizes to the best available timing
source using the Synchronization Status Message (SSM) protocol. The system is synchronized to this central
timing source.
In addition, the system provides synchronization outputs to synchronize external equipment within the site.
Two external T4 interfaces can provide 2 MHz/E1 external timing as required. These outputs can be used to
synchronize any peripheral equipment or switch.
Apollo supplies a 4.6 ppm stable holdover mode when all alternative synchronization sources are
temporarily unavailable.
Apollo default clock accuracy complies with applicable ITU-T and Telcordia standards at the network level.
Optional G.812 or G.811 synchronization quality can be provided using additional external units. In
addition, the system infrastructure supports distributions of phase and frequency synchronization via 1PPS
and ToD interfaces.

1.5 OPT99xx universal fabric system

The heart of the OPT99xx product family is a powerful, high capacity, non-blocking universal fabric. The
universal fabric supports ODU cross connecting (packet and Hybrid XC will be supported in a future
release). The fabric system is built of xFM cards and Fabric Elements (FEs) residing on the xRCP/xRCP1
cards. Each xRCP/xRCP1 is equipped with a single FE.
FEs on the xRCP/xRCP1 operate as independent units and have no direct reference to the xRCP/xRCP1
functions. That means the FE on both xRCP/xRCP1 cards, main and standby, are always operating.
The OPT9932 platform is equipped with seven xFM cards working together with the two FEs on the
xRCP/xRCP1 in a 7+2 or 8+1 protection scheme.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 1-11

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 platform layout and architecture

Two xFM cards are installed in the OPT9914 platform that work together with the two FEs on the
xRCP/xRCP1 in a 3+1 protection mode. The fabric capacity is 5.6 Tbps (in the first release xIO cards are of
200 Gbps, so only 2.8 Tbps is used).
All xIO cards are directly connected to all fabric cards and elements (FEs) with 36 lanes:
 In the OPT9932 with 9 FEs (7 xFM cards + 2 FEs on xRCP/xRCP1) the connection includes : 9 x 4 = 36
lanes; OPT9932 can work in two modes:
 7+2 FEs – provide up to 400 Gbps per slot, up to two FEs failure will not cause system traffic
degradation
 7+1 FEs – provide up to 500 Gbps per slot, up to one FE failure will not cause system traffic
degradation
 In the OPT9914 with 4 FEs (2 xFM cards + 2 FEs on xRCP/xRCP1) the connection includes : 4 x 9 = 36
lanes; OPT9914 has a single mode:
 3+1 FEs – provide up to 400 Gbps per slot, up to one FE failure will not cause system traffic
degradation
The following functionality is provided:
 Each xIO card works with all FEs in the system
 Traffic load is balanced over all active links of the fabric
The following figures show the simplified OPT9932 and OPT9914 internal traffic connectivity. It provides an
overview of both the physical and functional partitioning of the system. Each I/O slot can accommodate any
type of card with 400/500 Gbps bitrate and service.

OPT9932 universal fabric connectivity

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 1-12

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 platform layout and architecture

OPT9914 universal fabric connectivity

1.6 OPT99xx cross-connect functionality

Cross-connects are used to define connectivity between tributaries and L1 interfaces having compatible
bandwidth. The connectivity can be between tributaries on the same card or between different cards via
the fabric matrix (ODU XC). The Apollo OPT99xx fabric (xFM) enables efficient and cost-effective cross-
connect capabilities with ODUk granularity for all tributary signals.
There are three XC modes in the Apollo OPT99xx:
 Fixed XC: configured by the NE when there is one single fixed connectivity, for example XC in passive
optical or amplifier cards
 User-configurable XC: connection between cards via the fabric, or connection between services in a
card
 Signaling/dynamic XC: created and deleted by signaling protocols
The traffic cross-connect functions are implemented by the non-blocking high capacity cross connect xFM
fabric and FEs on the xRCP/xRCP1 cards. Four cards in the OPT9914 are configured in a 3+1, (Nine for
OPT9932 in 7+2 or 8+1) protection scheme that provides a capacity of 5.6Tbps (OPT9914), 12.8Tbps or
16Tbps (OPT9932) with 400 Gbps or 500 Gbps per I/O slot.
The fabric matrix cards receive the traffic from the various xIO cards installed in the platform through
wideband buses, using a format that does not depend on the type of xIO card installed in any specific slot.
At any time, the main and protection card are active (that is, switch the traffic).
The fabric supports ODU XC at the ODUk level for Layer-1 services and ODU-Flex for Layer-2 services. The
XC is supported for cards residing on the same platform.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 1-13

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 platform layout and architecture

Examples of different ODU XC options through the fabric cards

1.7 OPT99xx Lite Packet support

OPT9914 and OPT9932 support Lite Packet capabilities over existing fiber and HIO cards. Lite Packet
features provide E-Line services over ODU XC domains. Lite Packet for Apollo platforms enhances the
network performance with the following capabilities:
 LAG-based resiliency for packet connectivity
 I/O port protection for packet ports that are not part of a LAG configuration
 Enhanced traffic grooming for traffic aggregation on Layer 2
 Hitless BW adaptation using Layer 2 CIR/EIR and G.HAO for hitless BW adaptation for ODUflex
The primary application for which Lite Packet features were designed is a classic router interconnect across
an ODU XC domain. Lite Packet capabilities and enhancements are implemented through a combination of
software and hardware functionality.
A license is required to enable Lite Packet.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 1-14

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 platform layout and architecture

1.8 OPT99xx power feed subsystem

OPT99xx platforms are designed to support high power consumption for future 400 Gbps and 1 Tbps
transceivers, thus they support up to 9.6 kW in the OPT9914 and up to 14.4 kW in OPT9932, (the typical
power consumption is significantly lower).
Multiple Power Filtering Modules (xPFM) are used to connect power to the OPT99xx platforms. In the
OPT9914, the power sources are connected to the external Power Distribution Unit (PDU) and the output
from the PDU is connected to the xPFMs in the platform. In the OPT9932, the power sources are connected
directly to xCBM (housed in the platform) that feeds the xPFMs. The xCBMs provide a PDU-like functionality
for the OPT9932.
OPT99xx features a distributed fully redundant power feed subsystem. Two different power sources
(Source A and Source B) feed the xPFMs, connected in pairs in a 1:1 protection scheme. In the OPT99xx
platforms, the power distribution was divided into separate areas such that each pair of xPFMs is
responsible to supply power to one area. This enables customers to use the "Install as you Grow" approach
and turn on more xPFMs as additional cards are installed in the system.
The xPFM filters and monitors the -48 VDC nominal input voltage, distributes it to cards, protects the
system from external abnormal voltage connectivity and provides Hold up capacitors.
Two types of xPFM modules are available for the OPT99xx according to the platform type:
 xPFM-14 - for the OPT9914; 6 units are required for a fully populated platform
 xPFM-32 - for the OPT9932; 12 units are required for a fully populated platform
Both modules have the same electronic design and differ only in the 48 VDC power input connection and
mechanical dimensions.

NOTE: The generic name xPFM is used to describe features that are common to both types:
xPFM-14 and xPFM-32.

The output voltage of a redundant xPFM pair is connected together to a bus-bar that feeds an area in the
shelf (specific slots of its responsibility). The module with the higher voltage provides the power to the shelf
area. If a fault occurs in the active xPFM, the standby takes over and is capable of supplying the full power
to that area.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 1-15

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 platform layout and architecture

The following figure shows the power distribution structure in the OPT9914. In this figure, the color of an
xPFM-14 pair is identical to the color of the corresponding cards it is feeding. For example, the color of the
pair xPFM-14 A1 and xPFM-14 B1 is blue and it is feeding the following cards: xMIM-L, xTAM, xMIM-R,
xFCM-M, xRCP-A, xRCP-B, xFM-1, xFM-2, xIO-00, and xIO-01.

Power distribution in the OPT9914

In the OPT9914, the power sources are connected to the xPFM-14 cards via a PDU55AL, PDU77AL, or
PDU99 unit. In the OPT9932, the power sources are connected directly to xCBM modules, saving the need
for an external PDU.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 1-16

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 platform layout and architecture

In the OPT9932, an xCBM module connects the input power source to the xPFM-32.
There are 12 independent xCBMs in the platform arranged in six pairs. To ensure platform power
redundancy each module in a pair must be connected to a different source. The xCBM provides a PDU-like
functionality for the OPT9932, saving the need for an external PDU. Each xCBM feeds an xPFM-32 installed
under it, which in-turn feeds the cards (xRCP, xFM, xMIM, xIO, etc.) and subsystems in the OPT9932. The
two leftmost pairs must always be connected to power, as they provide power to common cards and
subsystems.
The left xCBM in a pair connects to source A and the right to source B. The following figure identifies the
xCBMs and the corresponding power sources. The colors of the xPFM-32 cards correspond to colors of the
cards they are feeding.

Power distribution areas in the OPT9932

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 1-17

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 platform layout and architecture

1.9 OPT99xx air cooling subsystem

The Apollo ventilation system is designed with fan units that efficiently pump cold air to flow over the cards
and components and cool them. The OPT9932 is divided into three independent cooling areas, and that of
the OPT9914 into two, without thermal interaction between them.
The routes of cold and hot air in the system are schematically shown in the following figures. Cold air flow is
marked blue; hot flow is marked red; air flow through the platforms is marked orange.
In the OPT9932 platform, fan units in the upper part of the platform pump cooling air from the top part
over the components; the hot air is expelled through the exhaust in the upper mid-section. Fan units in the
middle part pump cooling air from the right; the hot air is expelled through the exhaust to the left. Fan
units in the lower part pump cooling air from the bottom over the components; the hot air is expelled
through the exhaust in the lower mid-section.

OPT9932 Cold and hot air routes in the ventilation system

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 1-18

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 platform layout and architecture

The OPT9932 cooling subsystem includes three fan trays:

 xFCMH-32 - horizontally installed at the upper area of the OPT9932. Draws air from an air duct at the
middle of the chassis (under the upper xIO card cage) and pumps it through the vertically mounted
cards xIO, xPFM-32, and xCBM cards through the top of the chassis.
 xFCMH-32 - horizontally mounted at the bottom of the OPT9932. Draws air from an air duct at the
lower part (under the common card cage: xRCP/xRCP1, xFM, etc.) and pumps it through the vertically
mounted cards (lower xIO cage) through the bottom of the chassis.
 xFCMV-32 - vertically mounted at the middle-left side of the OPT9932. Draws air from the middle-
right side of the chassis and pumps it through the horizontally mounted cards (xRCP/xRCP1, xFM, etc.)
through the left side of the chassis.
In the OPT9914 platform, fan units in the upper part of the platform pump cooling air from right and expel
the hot air through the exhaust to the left. Fan units in the lower part pump cooling air from the bottom
over the components; the hot air is expelled through the exhaust in the mid-section.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 1-19

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 platform layout and architecture

OPT9914 Cold and hot air routes in the ventilation system

The OPT9914 cooling subsystem includes two fan trays:

 xFCMH-14 - horizontally installed at the bottom of the OPT9914. Draws air from an air duct at the
middle of the chassis and pumps it through the vertically mounted cards (xIO) through the bottom of
the chassis.
 xFCMV-14 - vertically mounted at the upper-left side of the OPT9914. Draws air from the upper-right
side of the chassis and pumps it through the horizontally mounted cards through the left side of the
chassis.

NOTE: The generic term xFCM is used to describe functions that are common to all xFCM
types.

To increase the OPT99xx reliability, air is pumped into the system by the xFCMs through air filters that
reduce dust and air particles that can be accumulated on the fans.

CAUTION: Filter cleaning intervals must be strictly observed, as clogging by trapped particles
can severely impair equipment reliability and performance.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 1-20

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 platform layout and architecture

OPT9932 location of fan trays and cooling areas

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 1-21

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 platform layout and architecture

OPT9914 location of fan trays and cooling areas

The different xFCM types have the same electrical design and principal of operation and differ only in the
number of fans and mechanical layout. Because there is no redundancy for each xFCM, high availability
must be guaranteed by each fan unit. This is achieved by a separate power supply and controller for each
fan in the xFCM.
xFCM fan control mechanism is based on temperature sensors located on each common and xIO card in the
OPT99xx platforms. The sensor measures the ambient temperature in each card and reports it to the active
xRCP/xRCP1. The xRCP/xRCP1 processes this data and in-turn sends control signals to the corresponding fan
controller. The controller can change the speed of the fan in 16 steps to keep the temperature in the
allowed range. The speed change is controlled by changing a Pulse Width Modulator (PWM).
The xFCM is turned into turbo mode (fans operate in highest speed) in case a major failure is detected like,
failure of the xRCP/xRCP1, control bus, etc.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 1-22

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 platform layout and architecture

1.10 OPT99xx management system

Description
The xMIM is the Management Interface Module card of the OPT99xx family. It is connected to both
xRCP/xRCP1 cards and provides a physical interface between the OPT99xx platforms and the external
management (STMS).

Functions
 Out-of-band management Ethernet port supporting 10/100/1000 Mbps, connected to the STMS.
 Four slave management interfaces for subtending platforms; enables managing five shelves with a
single IP (future option).
 Redundancy of management interfaces by a second xMIM (optional); both operate together in a 1:1
protection mode (future option).

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 1-23

2 OPT9932/9914 common cards
The OPT99xx family includes cards and modules that provide its common functionality, such as routing and
control, management and timing connections, power supply, air cooling, control required for operation,
and cross-connect and packet switching fabric.

2.1 xRCP/xRCP1
Supported platforms
 OPT9932
 OPT9914

Description
The xRCP/xRCP1 is the central control component in the OPT99xx platforms, providing the main system
processor responsible for essential system management, timing, and control. The card supports timing
functionality for a wide range of synchronization standards by the Central Timing Module (xCTM) residing
on it. In addition, xRCP/xRCP1 cards include a Fabric Element (FE) used as part of the OPT99xx system
fabric.
xRCP/xRCP1 cards enable comprehensive management communication functionality with dynamic OSPF
routing. These cards are responsible for communications with external NEs and network management
(STMS) communication. xRCP/xRCP1 cards can be configured for 1:1 redundancy. All connectivity from the
xRCP/xRCP1 to any card is kept redundant via the dedicated internal communication links.

Functions
The xRCP/xRCP1 provides the following main functions:
 Control:
 Control and alarms from/to all other cards in the platforms
 Software versions management
 Downloads SW to the managed xIO cards
 Collects PM and log information
 SNCP traffic protection
 Fabric control
 Collects ONCP information
 Supports xRCP/xRCP1 redundancy by two cards operating in 1:1 protection scheme (High
Availability - HA)
 Management:
 Connectivity to the STMS/LCT-STMS management systems
 Supports DCN network functionality
 Management of subtending shelves (future)

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-1

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 common cards

 Timing:
 Distributes timing signals to all cards
 Synchronizing 3rd party equipment via external timing interfaces (on xTAM)
 Hardware ready to support various clock signals including: BITS (T3/T4), 1588v2 (10 MHz, 1PPS,
ToD), Sync-E
 Redundancy via xCTM located on each xRCP/xRCP1
 Fabric system:
 FEs on the xRCP/xRCP1 cards are part of the universal fabric
 7+2 or 8+1 fabric protection scheme available in the OPT9932
 3+1 fabric protection scheme available in the OPT9914
 Provides connectivity and fabric switching functions between xIO cards in OPT99xx platforms

WARNING: When an OPT99xx platform is configured to operate in ODU-XC, removal of both

xRCP/xRCP1 cards and insertion of one or both cards will cause a traffic down time of about 3
minutes.

Card views
General view

Front panel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-2

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 common cards

Ports
Port indicators
Marking Connector Functions
CONSOLE RJ-45 connector Serial RS-232 communication port for use by technical support
personnel (debug, maintenance, etc.).
EXP1 RJ-45 connector L2 debug port
EXP2 RJ-45 connector L3 debug port
CRAFT RJ-45 connector Management interface for connecting to an LCT

LED indicators

Marking Item Functions

Controller LEDs
ACT Green LED On -
During upload time
xRCP/xRCP1 is active and has no BIT failure
Off - xRCP/xRCP1 has BIT failure
SBY Yellow LED On -
1. During upload time
2. xRCP/xRCP1 configured as SB
Blinks - One of microswitches is open
Off – xRCP/xRCP1 is defined as Active
FAIL Red LED On - xRCP/xRCP1 has BIT failure or has not come out of
reset
Off - no BIT failure
Fabric LEDs
ACT Green LED On - FE (on this xRCP/xRCP1) is Active, both micro-switches
are close and no BIT failure
Off -
1. During upload time
2. One of the micro-switches is open
3. Fabric element has BIT failure
SBY Yellow LED On - During upload time or green shutdown
Off -
1. Fabric element is in service (Active)
2. Fabric element has BIT failure
FAIL Red LED On - Fabric element has BIT failure or has not come out of
reset
Off - no BIT failure on the fabric element
SD LED

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-3

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 common cards

Marking Item Functions

SD WRITE Blue LED Blinks - Writing operation on SD card
Off - No writing operation on SD card
Ethernet (RJ-45) link speed and port traffic activity LEDs
Rate Link and Speed LED color Activity LED color
1 Gbps Green - solid Yellow – blinks
100 Mbps Yellow - solid Yellow – blinks

2.2 xFM
Supported platforms
 OPT9932
 OPT9914

Description
The xFM card is part of the universal fabric in <OPT9XX> platforms together with FEs residing on the
xRCP/xRCP1 cards.

Functions
The xFM provides the following main functions:
 TDM (ODU) and data (packet) matrix
 Multicast transmission at the fabric level
 Fabric redundancy scheme (HA)
 200G per xIO slot (phase 1) and 400G (phase 2)
 Card can be removed without affecting traffic
Note that the FE on each xRCP/xRCP1 is always active, even on the xRCP/xRCP1 that is in Standby mode.
From this perspective the FEs on the xRCP/xRCP1 are independent entities, physically located on the
xRCP/xRCP1 and powered from its circuits.
The traffic is coming in via the xIO card, which converts it to a common structure regardless of the ingress
traffic type. This fabric can process this common type. In the opposite, the fabric provides the traffic in the
common structure to a xIO card that translated the traffic back to a format required at the egress port of
this card.
The xFM also transmits multicast traffic as required to different parts of the fabric system. In addition, it is
responsible to transmit multicast traffic to required xIO cards connected to the fabric system.
The xFM and FE on the xRAPs operate in N+m protection mode. All fabric elements in the system are active
and forwarding traffic. In case an xFM, an FE on an xRCP/xRCP1, or a link fails, the traffic continues to flow
through the available links. The OPT9914 operates with 4 FMs in a 3+1 protection scheme; it means that if
one of the fabric elements is not active the system continues to work without performance degradation.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-4

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 common cards

Card views
General view

Front panel

Ports
Marking Item Functions
ACTIVE Green LED On - the xFM is Active, both micro-switches are closed and no BIT
failure was detected.
Off -
1. During upload time
2. One of the micro-switches is open
3. xFM has BIT failure
NOT IS Yellow LED On - During software upload
Blinks - one µswitch is open
Off -
1. In Service (xFM is Active)
2. xFM has a BIT failure
FAIL Red LED On - xFM has BIT failure or has not come out of reset
Off - no BIT failure

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-5

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 common cards

2.3 xMIM
Supported platforms
 OPT9932
 OPT9914

Description
The xMIM is the connection unit between the OPT99xx family and the external management. It is installed
at the upper part of the OPT9914 section or at the middle section of the OPT9932 platform (near the xRCP-
A).

Functions
The xMIM provides the following main functions:
 Out-of-band management interface for connecting an STMS
 Four management ports for cascading up to four OPT96xx or OPT9914 platforms (future)
 Connects to both xRCP/xRCP1 cards to support service continuity in case one of the xRCP/xRCP1 fails
 Management redundancy can be supported by two xMIM cards working in a 1:1 protection scheme
(future)

Card views
General view

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-6

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 common cards

Front panel

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
ACT Green LED On –
1. During upload time
2. xMIM is Active and no BIT failure
Off - xMIM has BIT failure
SB Yellow LED On -
1. During upload time
2. xMIM is Active and no BIT failure
Off - xMIM is defined as Active
FAIL Red LED On -
1. During upload time
2. xMIM has BIT failure
Off - no BIT failure
IMG RJ-45 connector Out-of band management Ethernet interface
(10/100/1000BaseT) for connecting to an element
management station (STMS) or a CLI terminal.
MULTI SHELF Four RJ-45 connectors Management interface (10/100/1000BaseT) for connecting
MNG. 1 to 4 management to up to 4 subtending shelves.
RJ45 Connector LEDs
Port link Green LED Indicate the port link rate:
 3 blinks and pause - 1 Gbps
 2 blinks and pause - 100 Mbps
 1 blink and pause - 10 Mbps
Off - During upload time
Port Activity Yellow LED Indicate the port activity:
Blinks - Activity
Off -
1. During upload time
2. No Activity

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-7

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 common cards

2.4 xTAM
Supported platforms
 OPT9932
 OPT9914

Description
xTAM is the Timing and Alarm interfaces Module, serving as the connection between the OPT99xx
platforms and the external world. It provides interfaces for timing and alarms. The xTAM is installed at the
upper part of the OPT9914 or middle part of the OPT9932 between the two xMIM cards. It is connected to
both xRCP/xRCP1 cards and provides a physical interface between the OPT99xx platforms, the
synchronization system (BITS, 1588v2), and the alarms system (severity, in/out).

Functions
The xTAM features:
 Hardware ready for terminating/driving BITS (T3/T4) and 1588v2 (Clk, 1PPS, ToD) standard interfaces
to/from the xCTM.
 Terminates Alarm In (through opto-couplers) and drives system and Alarms Out directly to the client
or through a PDU relay dry contacts.
 Provides a LED Test pushbutton to check all LEDs in the system.
 Provides an ACO pushbutton that stops the buzzer of the system.
The xTAM provides the following main functions:
 Timing and synchronization inputs and outputs, including:
 BITS-T3/BITS-T4 (for future support)
 1 PPS for supporting IEEE 1588v2 (for future support)
 ToD for supporting IEEE 1588v2 (for future support)
 10 MHz clock for IEEE 1588v2 (for future support)
 Alarm interfaces and indications, including:
 Severity alarm outputs (Critical, Major, Minor)
 External alarm outputs and inputs to client or :
 4 output alarms (relay dry contacts)
 4 input alarms (opto-couplers)
 LEDs for displaying the operation and alarms of the system
 Activations, including:
 LED tests for the entire platform
 ACO

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-8

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 common cards

Card views
General view

Front panel

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
ACT Green LED On:
 During upload time
 xTAM is Active and no BIT failure
Off: xTAM has BIT failure
FAIL Red LED On:
 During upload time
 xTAM has BIT failure
Off: no BIT failure

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-9

Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 common cards

Marking Item Functions

System Severity Alarm LEDs
CR Red LED On: System has a Critical Alarm
Off:
 During upload time
 no Alarms
MJ Orange LED On: System has a Major Alarm
Off:
 During upload time
 no Alarms
MIN Yellow LED On: System has a Minor Alarm
Off:
 During upload time
 no Alarms

Ports and pushbuttons

Marking Connector Functions
1PPS OUT DIN 1.0/2.3 connector 1PPS output signal for supporting Ethernet timing per IEEE
1588v2 standard (for future support).
10 MHz IN/OUT DIN 1.0/2.3 connector 10 MHz input/output signals for supporting Ethernet timing
per IEEE 1588v2 standard (for future support).
ToD & 1PPS RJ-45 connector Time of Day and 1PPS input/output signals for supporting
IN/OUT Ethernet timing per IEEE 1588v2 standard (for future
support).
BITS (T3/T4) 1 RJ-45 connector Main timing input/output clock using an E1/2MHz/1.5MHz
signal (for future support).
BITS (T3/T4) 2 RJ-45 connector Additional timing input/output clock using an
E1/2MHz/1.5MHz signal (for future support).
ALARMS 36-pin VHDCI female Connects alarm input and output lines via a RAP or directly to
connector the client.
LED-TEST Pushbutton Turns on all LEDs located on cards/modules installed in the
platform, for test purposes.
ACO Pushbutton Used to temporarily disable the buzzer and set off the
corresponding alarm LED when an alarm condition is present.
The buzzer is activated again when a new alarm condition is
detected.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-10

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 common cards

2.5 xTEM
Supported platform
 OPT9624

Description
The xTEM is an optional extension module for the xTAM card. The OPT9914 uses a PDU for power supply
and alarm connectivity. The OPT9932 is designed with direct connections to the power sources (via the
xCBM modules) and PDU is not used with it. To support client alarm connectivity and other PDU functions,
the xTEM emulates PDU-like functionality for the OPT9932. The xTEM is an optional card in the OPT9932. In
addition to client alarms, it provides a buzzer and system alarms LEDs.

Functions
 Alarms:
 Severity alarms – Critical, Major, Minor
 4 x output alarms
 4 x Input alarms
 Buzzer
 LED test pushbutton
 System severity LEDs: Critical, Major, Minor.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-11

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 common cards

Card Views
General view

Front panel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-12

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 common cards

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
ON Green LED On - xTEM get power
Off - no power
System Severity Alarm LEDs
CRITICAL Red LED On - System has a Critical Alarm
Off - no Alarms
MAJOR Orange LED On - System has a Major Alarm
Off - no Alarms
MINOR Yellow LED On - System has a Minor Alarm
Off -no Alarms

Connectors and pushbuttons

Marking Connector Functions
xTAM 36-pin SCSI connector Connects the alarm input and output lines between the xTAM
and xTEM.
CLIENT 36-pin VHDCI connector Connects the alarm input and output lines to the client's
alarm collecting facility.
LED-TEST Pushbutton Turns on all LEDs located on cards/modules installed in the
platform, for test purposes.

2.6 xPFM-14
Supported platform
 OPT9914

Description
The xPFM-14 is an input power filter for the DC voltage connected to the OPT9914. Each platform has up to
six xPFM-14 units for redundancy purposes. To support redundancy, the xPFM-14 work in pairs, where each
module is connected to a different power source. Each pair is responsible to supply power to one feed area
in the OPT9914. The output voltages of each module in a pair are connected together and the module with
the higher voltage supplies power to the dedicated area. In case of a failure in the active xPFM-14, the
standby module takes over and supply the full power. The faulty unit can be replaced without affecting
traffic.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-13

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 common cards

Functions
The xPFM-14 provides the following main functions:
 Input DC voltage filtering (-48 V)
 Control and alarms
 Temperature sensing
 Input voltage monitoring
 Reverse polarity protection
 Surge protection (2 kV line to line, 4 kV line to ground)
 Redundancy between PFM units
 Passive 10 msec Hold-up capacitors
 Under voltage detection
 Lightning strike protection
 Input power measurement
 Fail indication

Card views
General view

Front panel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-14

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 common cards

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
POWER ON Green LED Lights steadily when the xPFM-14 input supply voltage through
the POWER IN connector is in the allowed range.
FAIL Red LED Normally off. Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the unit.
POWER IN 5W5 D-type connector Connects DC input power to the filter in the unit.

2.7 xFCM-14
Supported platform
 OPT9914

Description
The OPT9914 has two types of fan trays that provide cooling air to the platform: xFCMV-14, and xFCMH-14.
The two types have identical electronic design and cooling and control functionality, and differ only in
physical structure and number of fan units. The xFCMV-14 includes six fans and the FCMH-14 eight. The
fans are fed through circuits that improve the system's performance and support its redundancy.

NOTE: The generic name xFCM-14 is used through this manual to describe functions related
to both card types.

Functions
Features of the xFCM-14 include:
 Separate power supply for each fan unit
 Each adjacent pair of fans have a control of its own:
 16 speed levels are defined for each pair
 The levels are controlled by the active xRCP/xRCP1 via a control bus
 Separate psophometric filter with a separate fuse for each fan
 Large capacitor with a fuse on the DC supply bus
 Parallel dual inrush current circuit with a separate fuse for each circuit
 Hold up capacitors (serves the xPFM-14)
A controller in the active xRCP/xRCP1 controls the fans operation. If one of the fans fails, the remaining
start to operate in turbo mode and the fail LED lights until the xFCM-14 is replaced. If done in a few
minutes, the xFCM-14 can be extracted and replaced without interrupting the OPT9914 operation (hot
swapping).

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-15

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 common cards

WARNING: Do not leave the system without one of the fan tray units for more than five
minutes.

Card views
General view

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-16

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 common cards

General view

xFCMH-14 front panel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-17

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 common cards

xFCMV-14 front panel

LEDs
xFCMH-14

Marking Item Functions

ACTIVE Green LED Lights steadily when the card is powered and operating normally.
FAIL Red LED Normally off. Lights steadily when a fault is detected.

xFCMV-14

Marking Item Functions

ACTIVE Green LED Lights steadily when the card is powered and operating normally.
FAIL Red LED Normally off. Lights steadily when a fault is detected.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-18

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 common cards

2.8 xCBM
Supported platform
 OPT9624

Description
The xCBM provides power input terminals for connecting the - 48 VDC power source to the xPFM-32 card.
Each xPFM-32 connects to an independent xCBM, totaling up to 12 xCBM modules in an OPT9932 platform.
The OPT9932 comes with 12 xCBM modules installed in the platform.
You must connect power source input cables and install the circuit breaker on each xCBM. These
procedures are described in the OPT9932 Installation and Maintenance Manual.
There are 12 independent xCBMs in the platform arranged in six pairs. To ensure platform power
redundancy each module in a pair must be connected to a different source. The xCBM provides a PDU-like
functionality for the OPT9932, saving the need for an external PDU. Each xCBM feeds an xPFM-32 installed
under it, which in-turn feeds the cards (xRCP, xFM, xMIM, xIO, etc.) and subsystems in the OPT9932. The
two leftmost pairs must always be connected to power, as they provide power to common cards and
subsystems.
The left xCBM in a pair connects to source A and the right to source B. The following figure identifies the
xCBMs and the corresponding power sources. The colors of the xPFM-32 cards correspond to colors of the
cards they are feeding.

Power distribution areas in the OPT9932

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-19

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 common cards

Functions
 Sockets for the Circuit Breaker (CB)
 Surge protection
 Connector for the xPFM-32 card
 Pin guide for connection of the xPFM-32

Card views
General view

Connection of xPFM-32 to the xCBM

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-20

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 common cards

2.9 xPFM-32
Supported platform
 OPT9624

Description
The xPFM-32 is an input power filter for the DC voltage connected to the OPT9932. Each platform has up to
12 xPFM-32 units for redundancy purposes. To support redundancy, the xPFM-32 work in pairs, where each
module is connected to a different power source. Each pair is responsible to supply power to one feed area
in the OPT9932. The output voltages of each module in a pair are connected together and the module with
the higher voltage supplies power to the dedicated area. In case of a failure in the active xPFM-32, the
standby module takes over and supply the full power. The faulty unit can be replaced without affecting
traffic.
The connection of the xPFM-32 to the power source is made through two power plugs at the rear of the
card; one plugs into a socket on the xCBM module and the other plugs into the OPT9932 motherboard. The
following figure shows the xPFM-32 with the two power plugs. To ensure good contact of the power plugs
with their mates, a guide pin in the xCBM is inserted into the xPFM-32 during its insertion.

Functions
The xPFM-32 provides the following main functions:
 Input DC voltage filtering (-48 V)
 Control and alarms
 Temperature sensing
 Input voltage monitoring
 Reverse polarity protection
 Surge protection (2 kV line to line, 4 kV line to ground)
 Redundancy between PFM units
 Passive 10 msec Hold-up capacitors
 Under voltage detection
 Lightning strike protection
 Input power measurement
 Fail indication

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-21

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 common cards

Card views
General view

Front panel

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
POWER ON Green LED Lights steadily when the xPFM-32 input supply voltage through
the POWER IN connector is in the allowed range.
FAIL Red LED Normally off. Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the unit.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-22

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 common cards

2.10 xFCM-32
Supported platform
 OPT9624

Description
The OPT9932 has two types of fan trays that provide cooling air to the platform: xFCMV-32, and xFCMH-32.
The two types have identical electronic design and cooling and control functionality, and differ only in
physical structure and number of fan units. The xFCMV-32 includes six fans and the FCMH-32 ten. The fans
are fed through circuits that improve the system's performance and support its redundancy.

NOTE: The generic name xFCM-32 is used to describe functions related to both card types.

Functions
Features of the xFCM-32 include:
 Separate power supply for each fan unit
 Each adjacent pair of fans have a control of its own:
 16 speed levels are defined for each pair
 The levels are controlled by the active xRCP/xRCP1 via a control bus
 Separate psophometric filter with a separate fuse for each fan
 Large capacitor with a fuse on the DC supply bus
 Parallel dual inrush current circuit with a separate fuse for each circuit
 Hold up capacitors (serves the xPFM-32)
A controller in the active xRCP/xRCP1 controls the fans operation. If one of the fans fails, the remaining
start to operate in turbo mode and the fail LED lights until the xFCM-32 is replaced. If done in a few
minutes, the xFCM-32 can be extracted and replaced without interrupting the OPT9932 operation (hot
swapping).

WARNING: Do not leave the system without one of the fan tray units for more than five
minutes.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-23

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 common cards

Card views
General view:xFCMH-32

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-24

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 common cards

General view: xFCMV-32

Front panel: xFCMH-32

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-25

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 common cards

Front panel: xFCMV-32

LEDs

Marking Item Functions

ACTIVE Green LED Lights steadily when the card is powered and operating normally.
FAIL Red LED Normally off. Lights steadily when a fault is detected.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-26

3 OPT9932/9914 service cards
The Apollo OPT99xx high capacity switching platforms work with a set of service cards, supporting a mix of
Layer 1 and Layer 2 services. These cards have access to the universal switching fabric that supports OTN
switching (ODUk cross-connect 0,1,2,3,4,Flex) and packet switching (Layer 2). The HIO cards are
hardware-ready for MPLS-TP software upgrade.
This section provides a detailed description of the service cards available for the OPT99xx platforms. The
prefix of the card name refers to the type of traffic supported:
 HIO - Hybrid traffic
 TIO - OTN traffic
 PIO - Packet (Data) traffic (future)

OPT99xx service cards

Name Description
HIO500 Up to 400G capacity in the current release, supporting a mixture of L1/L2
client/line interfaces with a configurable mixture of 200G/100G/10G rates.
HIO100_2 2 x 100G CFP based ports, each port can be used as line or client, 100GbE, OTU4,
with coherent CFPs or Non-colored CFPs.
HIO10_40 Up to 400G capacity, supporting a mixture of L1/L2 interfaces with a configurable
mixture of rates, both client (OTU4, OTU2e, OTU2, 40GbE, STM-64) and line (OTU4
with ODUflex NNI uplinks).
HIO10_20 20 port 10G multi-service interface card for any mix of: OTU2, OTU2e, STM-64/OC-
192, OC-192, FC1200, FC800, 40GbE, and 10GbE.
TIOMR_32 32 port low-rate service interface card for any mix of: STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12,
STM-16/OC-48, FC1/FC2/FC4, and GbE.

3.1 HIO500/HIO400
Supported platforms
 OPT9932
 OPT9914

Description
HIO500 is a Hybrid (OTN/Packet) fabric I/O card for OPT9932 and OPT9914 platforms that can provide up to
400G capacity in the current release. It can support a mixture of Layer1/Layer2 client/line interfaces
supporting a rate mixture of 200G/100G/10G. This is a single slot configurable-rate card based on coherent
transmission with adaptive modulation, 15% SD-FEC, NCG 11-12dB.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-1

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 service cards

The HIO500 enables full utilization of the OPT99xx slot capacity of 400/500 Gbps (500 Gbps in a future
release, and supported on the OPT9932 platform only). From a management perspective the card can be
configured in two operation modes:
 HIO400: With a capacity of 400 Gbps (current release)
 HIO500: With a capacity of 500 Gbps (future release)
The HIO500 is optimized for client/line low rate/high rate solutions that provide up to 2 x 200G lines for
short-medium ranges, or up to 4 x 100G lines for high ranges, or 4 x 100G/40 x 10G clients.
The HIO500 works with D-CFP2 coherent line transceivers, supporting configurable DP-QPSK, 8-QAM, or 16-
QAM modulation, with Flex-Grid capabilities. This transceiver includes a coherent receiver, DSP processing,
and soft decision forward error correction, for superior noise tolerance, as well as an exceptional ability to
mitigate CD and PMD impairments.
The HIO500 and HIO400 cards are also available with an encryption option. When configured as
HIO500EN/HIO400EN, encryption is supported for OTU4 and OTUC2 rates on the line ports. Authentication
is via private/public keys, with the key period configured per NE.

Functions
The HIO500 provides the following main functions:
 Single-slot card
 Four (pluggable) optical interfaces with the following rates:
 200G (OTUC2)
 100G (ETY100G/OTU4)
 10 x 10G Fanout (10GbE)
 Hot insertion/removal of CFP2 transceivers without traffic affecting of other ports in the card.
 Protection mechanisms:
 SNCP, DRI and DNI
 Port Protection (excluding 10G Fanout cases)
 ASON
 WSON
 OLP/OMSP
 Lite-Packet (L2 over ODUflex, G.HAO)
 Interoperability support:
 HIO100_2 for OTU4 coherent and non-coherent modes.
 MIO200 for OTU4 coherent and non-coherent modes.
 TR200_2 for OTU4 coherent and OTUC2. OTU4 non-coherent mode is not supported.
 TM200EN for OTU4 coherent and OTUC2. OTU4 non-coherent mode is not supported.
 TM400 for OTU4 coherent differential mode (DQPSK) and non-coherent modes. OTUC2 is not
supported.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-2

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 service cards

 GCC interoperability with the following cards:

 HIO100_2
 MIO200
 TR200_2
 TM200EN
 TM400
 Communication channels:
 GCC0/1/2 is implemented for in-band management.
 GCC is supported in Standard mode only (full rate mode).
 Up to 4 (Full-Rate) GCC channels are supported by HIO500.
 One GCC (configurable to GCC0, GCC1, or GCC2) is supported per each OTU4/OTUC2 port.
When client ports are configured for 100G/OTU4, only SR10 and LR4 transceivers are supported.

Card views
General view

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-3

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 service cards

Front panel: (left)

Front panel: (right)

LEDs

Marking Item Functions

Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed
configurations). Off when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when
there is no fault in the HIO500.
CFP2 port LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the
port's transmitter is off.
F/L Red LED Blinks when a LOS condition is detected. Lights steadily when
a BIT fault is detected in the CFP2 pluggable transceiver, or the
supply voltage or temperature is OOR.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-4

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 service cards

Functional block diagram

3.1.1 HIO500 applications

The HIO500 supports the following main applications:
 Dual 200 Gbps operation for Short/Medium range links
 Four x 100 Gbps operation for Long-Haul links
 High Density and capacity of 10G clients – up to 40 x 10G (fanout-mode)
 Up to 400G L2 – ODUflex traffic
 Single card solution both for clients and for lines (Joker card) – the entire network can be based on
HIO500 – single card type
 Enabling 5.6 Tbps/12.8 Tbps capacities in OPT9914/OPT9932
 Better watt per bit – due to higher density

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-5

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 service cards

3.1.2 HIO500 port configuration rules

HIO500 supports up to 41 ports (Port 0 to Port 40) (Port 0 is disabled in the current release.
The card can house up to four CFP2 transceivers. Each transceiver may represent 10 potential ports (for
supporting 10G fan-out mode). The four CFP2 ports are divided into four Groups as follows:
 Group 1 (G1) - Ports 1 to 10
 Group 2 (G2) - Ports 11 to 20
 Group 3 (G3) Ports 21 to 30
 Group 4 (G4) Ports 31 to 40
If the first port in a group is configured to 100G/200G, all other ports in the group are disabled.

NOTE: A port type with a rate of 200G is OTUC2 (only supported in ports 11 & 31). Port types
with rates of 100G include: OTU4, ETY100G, GE100 and GE100-OTU4.

The following table describes the port groups configuration options.

HIO500 port groups configuration options

Group rates option Ports 1-10 (G1) Ports 11-20 (G2) Ports 21-30 (G3) Ports 31-40 (G4)
2 x 200G Disabled 200G (port 11) Disabled 200G (port 31)
4 x 100G 100G/10 x 10G 100G/10 x 10G 100G/10 x 10G 100G/10 x 10G
Mixed rates A Disabled 200G (port 11) 100G/10 x 10G 100G/10 x 10G
Mixed rates B 100G/10 x 10G 100G/10 x 10G Disabled 200G (port 31)

The following table describes the supported port types for the HIO500 in the current release.

Supported port types for the HIO500.

Port No. Ports 0 Port 1 and 21 Port 11 and 31 Ports 2-10, 12-20, 22-30, 32-
40
Supported port types Disabled OTU4 OTUC2 ETY10Goc
ETY100G OTU4 GE10
GE100 ETY100G
GE100-OTU4 GE100
ETY10Goc GE100-OTU4
GE10 ETY10Goc
GE10

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-6

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 service cards

3.2 HIO100_2
Supported platforms
 OPT9932
 OPT9914

Description
HIO100_2 provides an OTU4 uplink for the OPT9932 and OPT 9914 platforms. HIO100_2 also supports up to
two 100G ports in a single slot card with CFP pluggable optics. The client-side signals are mapped to G.709
ODU-k and cross connected through the central universal fabric to the egress side.
The HIO100_2 provides a multi-service, cost-effective solution to customers for Metro, Regional, and Long
haul applications over OTN DWDM networks.
The HIO100_2 works with D-CFP coherent line transceivers that enable transmission of 100Gbps DP-QPSK
modulation, with Flex-Grid capabilities. This transceiver includes a coherent receiver, DSP processing, and
soft decision forward error correction, for superior noise tolerance, as well as an exceptional ability to
mitigate CD and PMD impairments.

Functions
The HIO100_2 provides the following main functions:
 Single-slot card
 2 x 100 Gbps uplink for OTN switching sites
 100 G ports based on CFP pluggable. Each port can be configured by the user to one of the following:
 ETY 100G
 ODU4
 Optionally supports dual rate LR4 and SR10 CFPs
 Hybrid data and ODUk grooming capability:
 ODUk switching (L1)
 Low order ODUk L1 and L2 mixing (Lite Packet)
 OTU4 interfaces Metro coherent transceiver:
 Dual rate LR4 and SR10 CFP transceivers and if available CFP ER4 as well
 100 GbE interfaces:
 Supports LR4 and SR10 CFP transceivers and if available CFP ER4 as well
 Processes and multiplexes any combination of low-order ODUs and packets that arrive from the fabric
into ODU4 (100 Gbps line)
 Supports port protection (IOP) for 100GE client and SNCP
 Supports standard GCC (default) and Apollo proprietary (¼ rate GCC), user selectable

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-7

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 service cards

Card views
General view

Front panel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-8

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 service cards

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no
fault in the HIO100_2.
Client (CFP) port LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
F/L Red LED Blinks when a LOS condition is detected. Lights steadily when a BIT fault is
detected in the CFP pluggable transceiver, or the supply voltage or
temperature is OOR.

3.3 HIO10_40
Supported platforms
 OPT9932
 OPT9914

Description
The HIO10_40 is a high-density single-slot QSFP-based card with full hybrid capability. This card supports
any mix of the following client interface connections to the OPT9900 universal fabric:
 Maximum card capacity of 400G, in any port combination
 Elastic rate client configuration:
 4 x 100GbE/OTU4 L1 or L2
 40 x 10GbE/OTU2e L1 or L2
 40 x OTU2 L1
 8 x 40GbE L1
 24 x STM-64/OC-192
 Line configuration of OTU4 black & white uplinks, for L1 or L2, with ODUflex NNI uplinks and G.HAO
support
 SNCP and port protection
 Hardware ready for SyncE and 1588v2 synchronization
 GCC management channel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-9

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 service cards

Card views
General view

Front panel

Ports
The numbering of the HIO10_40 ports is from 0 to 39. The marking above each port identifies the Transmit
(Tx) and Receive signals (Rx). The client port LEDs are off when configured for a fan-out application.

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no
fault in the HIO10_20.
Client port (QSFP+ and QSFP28) LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
F/L Red LED Blinks when a LOS condition is detected. Lights steadily when a BIT fault
is detected in the SFP+/QSFP+ pluggable transceiver, or the supply
voltage or temperature is OOR. LOS condition is not indicated in FAN-out
mode.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-10

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 service cards

3.4 HIO10_20
Supported platforms
 OPT9932
 OPT9914

Description
The HIO10_20 is a 10G multi-service interface card for the OPT9932 and OPT9914 platforms that supports
up to 20 client interfaces, SFP+ based transceivers. Each port can be configured to OTU2, OTU2e, STM-
64/OC-192, OC-192, FC1200, FC800, 40GbE, or 10GbE. Client-side signals are mapped to G.709 ODU-k and
cross connected through the central universal fabric to the egress side. Two additional client interfaces can
be configured to 40 GbE. These are QSFP+ based ports and the configuration of such interface is at the
expense of four SFP+ ports.
The HIO10_20 provides a multi-service, cost-effective solution to customers for grooming 10G services over
OTN DWDM networks.

Functions
The HIO10_20 provides the following main functions:
 Single slot card
 20 SFP+ based client ports, software configurable to support any mix of the following services:
 OTU2
 OTU2e
 STM-64/OC-192
 OC-192
 FC1200
 FC800
 10 GbE
 2 QSFP+ based ports software configurable to 40 GbE:
 Configuration of an 40GbE port is at the expense of four SFP+ "regular" ports
 Interoperability with existing OPT96xx cards
 Transparent timing for SDH/SONET signals support CoC applications
 End-to-end PM (including regeneration) and OTN mapping and termination
 Pluggable client and line interfaces support in service upgrade
 Tunable line interfaces for dynamic networks
 1+1 OCH path and equipment protection based on ODU2 PM
 Supports port protection (IOP) and SNCP protection
 Hardware ready for SyncE and 1588v2 synchronization

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-11

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 service cards

Card views
General view

Front panel

Ports
The numbering of the HIO10_20 ports is from 0 to 21. The first two ports (0 and 1) are dedicated to QSFP+
interfaces that can be configured only to 40 GbE. The SFP+ ports are numbered from 2 to 21. When a
QSFP+ port is configured, four SFP+ ports are disabled; for example if port number 0 is configured the
corresponding SFP+ ports 2 to 5 will be disabled.
The marking above each port identifies the Transmit (Tx) and Receive signals (Rx).

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-12

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 service cards

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no
fault in the HIO10_20.
Client port (QSFP+ and SFP+) LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
F/L Red LED Blinks when a LOS condition is detected. Lights steadily when a BIT fault
is detected in the SFP+/QSFP+ pluggable transceiver, or the supply
voltage or temperature is OOR.

3.5 TIOMR_32
Supported platforms
 OPT9932
 OPT9914

Description
The TIOMR_32 is a single-slot multi-rate interface card that supports up to 32 low-rate client interfaces
using SFP transceivers. Each port can be configured to STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12, STM-16/OC-48,
FC100/FC200/FC400, or GbE. Client-side signals are mapped to G.709 ODU-k and cross connected through
the central universal fabric to the egress side. The TIOMR_32 provides a multi-service, cost-effective
solution to customers for grooming low-rate (< 10G) services over OTN DWDM networks.

Functions
The TIOMR_32 provides the following main functions:
 32 SFP-based client ports, software-configurable to support any mix of the following services:
 GbE (optical and electrical)
 FC100
 FC200
 FC400
 STM-1/OC-3
 STM-4/OC-12
 STM-16/OC-48
 OTU-1

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-13

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 service cards

 Interoperability with existing OPT96xx cards

 Transparent timing for SDH/SONET signals
 End-to-end PM (including regeneration) and OTN mapping and termination
 Pluggable client and line interfaces support in service upgrade
 Tunable line interfaces for dynamic networks
 SNCP and port protection based on PM
 ODU0, ODU1 and ODUflex FC4G cross-connections
 GCC0/1/2 on OTU1 interfaces

Card views
General view

Front panel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-14

Apollo Reference Manual OPT9932/9914 service cards

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed
configurations). Off when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when
there is no fault in the TM100.
Port LEDs
0 to 31
Bi-color LED
(Green or Red):
Green Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the
port's transmitter is off.
Red Blinks when a LOS condition is detected. Lights steadily when
a BIT fault is detected in the SFP+ pluggable transceiver, or the
supply voltage or temperature is OOR.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-15

4 OPT9904X platform layout and
architecture
This section describes the platform layout and cards of the OPT9904X platform. The OPT9904X is based on
a unique “fabric-less” design that enables smooth switching capacity expansion in 200G increments. This
can total up to 800G per shelf, without having to invest in separate switching fabrics. Moreover, the
OPT9904X integrates packet services, generating savings by aggregating L2 traffic and reducing the number
of costly router ports.
Apollo platforms have been designed to facilitate simple installation and easy maintenance. Hot insertion
of cards and modules enables quick maintenance and repair activities without affecting traffic. The cage
design and mechanical practice of all platforms conform to international mechanical standards and
specifications.
The OPT9904X system architecture includes the following components:
 Control and communications subsystems, including:
 Control
 Communications
 Timing and synchronization
 Cross-connect functionality
 Distributed forwarding architecture
 Packet processing
 Power feed subsystem
 Management system
The OPT9904X system architecture is based on the OPT96xx architecture, described in detail in OPT96xx
platform layout and architecture. The architecture design of the OPT9904X is identical except for the
section describing the universal fabric, since the OPT9904X operates with no fabric. Therefore, this section
focuses on the OPT9904X platform layout and cards.

NOTE: All installation instructions, technical specifications, restrictions, and safety warnings
are provided in the Apollo Platform Installation and Maintenance Manuals. See these manuals
for specific instructions before beginning any Apollo installation.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-1

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9904X platform layout and architecture

4.1 OPT9904X platform layout

The OPT9904X integrates full WDM functionality and Ethernet Layer 2 switching in a single compact
platform, and can be optimized for a range of working configurations. Platform dimensions are sized for
19" racks, with 220 mm height (5U) and 300 mm depth. The platform includes:
 Four universal I/O slots for hybrid service cards that support a mix of Layer 1 and Layer 2 and photonic
services, providing a density of up to 200G for each slot, 700G ready.
 Switching capacity of 0.8T, 2.8T ready. Universal support for OTN switching (ODUk cross-connect 0, 1,
2, 2e, 4, Flex) and packet switching. No separate switching fabric is required. Switching is integrated
into the MIO200 backplane, enabling smooth capacity expansion in 200G increments.
 Two high-availability RCP main shelf controllers (RCP04X).
 Two power feed modules (PFM04X) using a -40.5 - -75 VDC power source.
 One fan control module (FCM04X) with four fans.
 One timing, alarm, and management interface module (TAMIM04X)
 Filter tray.

Platform layout

Slot allocation

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-2

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9904X platform layout and architecture

4.2 OPT9904X common cards

The OPT9904X includes cards and modules that provide its common functionality, such as routing and
control, management and timing connections, power supply, air-cooling, control required for operation and
cross-connect.

4.2.1 RCP04X
Supported platform
 OPT9904X

Description
The RCP04X is the central control component in the platform, providing the main system processor
responsible for essential system management, timing, and control. The card supports timing functionality
for a wide range of synchronization standards by the Central Timing Module (xCTM) residing on it.

Functions
The RCP04X provides the following main functions:
 Main system processor, responsible for essential system management
 CTM
 Routing and control:
 Management communication
 CPU offload
 4 Gb CF (Compact Flash) card memory (NVM) hardware ready for 8 Gb memory
 Stores the platform's software code and configuration data base (on the NVM)
 Ethernet intra-platform networking
 Hardware ready for L2 (Lite Packet) switching
 Multi-platform infrastructure (future)
 EMS and LCT management support
 Timing to all I/O cards
 Announces the active RCP to all Field Replaceable Units (FRUs)
 Self BIT
 Single or redundant RCP
 Activations, including:
 LED tests for the entire platform
 ACO
 HA (High Availability):
 Active fabric distribution done immediately
 Hardware detection of major fabric card faults and switchover

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-3

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9904X platform layout and architecture

Card views
General view

Front panel

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Controller LEDs
ACT Green LED On -
1. During upload time
2. RCP04X is active and has no BIT failure
Off - RCP04X has BIT failure
SBY Yellow LED On -
1. During upload time
2. RCP04X configured as SB
Blinks - One of microswitches is open
Off – RCP04X is defined as Active
FAIL Red LED On - RCP04X has BIT failure or has not come out of reset
Off - no BIT failure
SD LED
SD Blue LED Blinks - Writing operation on SD card
Off - No writing operation on SD card

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-4

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9904X platform layout and architecture

Ports and pushbuttons

Marking Connector Functions
Connectors
CONSOLE RJ-45 connector Serial RS-232 communication port for connecting a CLI station.
LOCAL MNG. RJ-45 connector Interface for connecting an LCT.
DEBUG RJ-45 connector Interface for technical staff used to debug both L2 & L3 switches.
Pushbuttons
ACO Pushbutton Used to temporarily disable the buzzer and set off the
corresponding alarm LED when an alarm condition is present. The
buzzer is activated again when a new alarm condition is detected.
LED TEST Pushbutton Turns on all LEDs located on cards/modules installed in the
platform, for test purposes.

4.2.2 PFM04X
Supported platform
 OPT9904X

Description
The PFM04X is an input power filter for the DC voltage connected to the OPT9904X and protects the
equipment from external abnormal voltage connectivity. Each platform has two PFM04X units for
redundancy purposes. It is recommended to connect each to a different power source (unless only one
power source is available). When only one power source is available, it is recommended to connect it to the
two power inputs of both units. In such case, and provided a redundant PFM04X is installed, the faulty unit
can be replaced without affecting traffic.

Functions
The PFM04X performs the following functions:
 Input DC voltage filtering (-48 V)
 Control and alarms
 Provision of maximum power of 2000 W
 Reverse polarity protection
 Surge protection (2 kV line to line, 4 kV line to ground)
 Over-voltage protection
 Over-current and short circuit protection
 Temperature sensing
 Input voltage monitoring
 Part of Hold-up capacitors (other capacitors are on the FCM04X)

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-5

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9904X platform layout and architecture

 Power Good indication

 Fail indication
 Protection mechanism that prevents module extraction while connected to a power source

Card views
General view

Front panel

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
ACT Green LED Lights steadily when the PFM04X input supply voltage
through the POWER IN connector is in the allowed range.
FL Red LED Normally off. Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the
unit.
POWER IN 5W5 D-type connector Connects DC input power to the filter in the unit.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-6

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9904X platform layout and architecture

4.2.3 FCM04X
Supported platform
 OPT9904X

Description
The FCM04X provides cooling air to the system from nine separate fans and is positioned at the right side of
the OPT9904X. Air is drawn in by the fans from the right side of the chassis and pumped out through the
horizontally mounted cards and modules through the left side of the chassis. The fans are fed through
circuits that improve the system's performance and support its redundancy.
The FCM04X includes a controller that controls the operation of the fans. If one of the fans fails, the
remaining ones operate in turbo mode and the fail LED lights until the FCM04X is replaced. If the operation
does not take more than four minutes, the FCM04X can be extracted and replaced without interrupting the
router operation (hot swapping). We recommend preparing the replacement module in advance and so
shortening replacement time to a minimum.

WARNINGS:
 Don't leave the OPT9904X platform operating without an FCM04X.
 If you must replace an FCM04X, don't leave the system without an FCM unit for more
than 2 minutes.

Functions
Features of the FCM04X include:
 Separate power supply for each fan unit
 Each adjacent pair of fans have a control of its own:
 16 speed levels are defined for each pair
 The levels are controlled by the active RCP04X via a control bus
 Separate psophometric filter with a separate fuse for each fan
 Large capacitor with a fuse on the DC supply bus
 Parallel dual inrush current circuit with a separate fuse for each circuit
 Part of Hold up capacitors (serves the PFM04X)

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-7

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9904X platform layout and architecture

Views
General view

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-8

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9904X platform layout and architecture

Front panel

LEDs

Marking Item Functions

ACT Green LED Lights steadily when the card is powered and operating normally.
FAIL Red LED Normally off. Lights steadily when a fault is detected.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-9

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9904X platform layout and architecture

4.2.4 TAMIM04X
Supported platform
 OPT9904X

Description
The TAMIM04X is the timing, alarms, and management connection unit between the OPT9904X platform
and the external world. It provides interfaces for timing, alarms and the external management. The
TAMIM04X is installed at the upper part of the OPT9904X.

Functions
The TAMIM04X provides the following main functions:
 Out-of-band management interface for connecting an STMS
 Two management ports for cascading up to two OPT96xx platforms (future)
 Timing interfaces:
 Two BITS (T3/T4) connectors
 1588v2/PTP (ToD, 1PPS) in/out connectors
 10 MHz clock In/Out connector
 Alarm interfaces and indications, including:
 Severity alarm outputs (Critical, Major, Minor)
 External alarm outputs and inputs to client or:
 4 output alarms (relay dry contacts)
 4 input alarms (opto-couplers)
 LEDs for displaying the operation and alarms of the system

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-10

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9904X platform layout and architecture

Views
General view

Front panel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-11

Apollo Reference Manual OPT9904X platform layout and architecture

Ports
Marking Connector Functions
ALARMS 36-pin SCSI connector Connects alarm input and output lines via a RAP or
directly to the client.
BITS (T3/T4) 1 RJ-45 connector Main timing input/output clock using an
E1/2MHz/1.5MHz signal (for future support).
BITS (T3/T4) 2 RJ-45 connector Additional timing input/output clock using an
E1/2MHz/1.5MHz signal (for future support).
ToD & 1PPS RJ-45 connector Time of Day and 1PPS input/output signals for supporting
Ethernet timing per IEEE 1588v2 standard (for future
support).
MULTI SHELF RJ-45 connectors Management interfaces for Multi-shelf control (for
MNG. 1, 2 future support).
IMG RJ-45 connector In-band management Ethernet interface for connecting
to an element management station (STMS) or a CLI
terminal.
1PPS OUT DIN 1.0/2.3 connector 1PPS output signal for supporting Ethernet timing per
IEEE 1588v2 standard (for future support).
10 MHz IN/OUT DIN 1.0/2.3 connector 10 MHz input/output signals for supporting Ethernet
timing per IEEE 1588v2 standard (for future support).

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
ACT Green LED On -
1. During upload time
2. xTAM is Active and no BIT failure
Off - TAMIM04X has BIT failure
FL Red LED On -
1. During upload time
2. TAMIM04X has BIT failure
Off - no BIT failure
System Severity Alarm LEDs
MIN Yellow LED On - System has a Minor Alarm
Off -
1. During upload time
2. no Alarms

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-12

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9904X platform layout and architecture

Marking Item Functions

MAJ Orange LED On - System has a Major Alarm
Off -
1. During upload time
2. no Alarms
CRT Red LED On - System has a Critical Alarm
Off -
1. During upload time
2. no Alarms

4.3 OPT9904X passive and photonic cards

Passive cards for the OPT9904X are supported only via an Artemis shelf.
The following OPT96xx photonic cards are supported in the OPT9904X platform:
 OA_LF
 OA_DLF
 OA_DLHF
 OLP_S2
 OMSP
 OTDR_8

4.4 MIO200
Supported platform
 OPT9904X

Description
MIO200 is a multipurpose ODU-XC base card with 100G CFP based uplink interface and up to 12 x SFP/SFP+
based client ports. The card also supports packet switching over OTN and 200G bandwidth.
The card throughput is 200 Gbps, and four cards together comprise a 800G mesh cross-connect, without
the need for a central matrix. MIO200 is a multi-rate IO card and supports 100G, 10G, and 1G clients.
The OPT9904X equipped with MIO200 cards provides a multi-service, low cost, minimal size sub 1T ODU-XC
solution to customers for grooming 10G and sub 10G services over the OTN DWDM networks.
The MIO200 works with D-CFP coherent line transceivers that enable transmission of 100Gbps DP-QPSK
modulation, with Flex-Grid capabilities. This transceiver includes a coherent receiver, DSP processing, and
soft decision forward error correction, for superior noise tolerance, as well as an exceptional ability to
mitigate CD and PMD impairments.
The MIO200 card is also available with an encryption option. When configured as an MIO200EN, encryption
is supported for OTU4 rates on the line ports. Authentication is via private/public keys, with the key period
configured per NE.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-13

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9904X platform layout and architecture

Functions
The MIO200 is a double-slot long card that provides the following main features:
 CFP line interface supporting ETY100G and OTU4
 12 x SFP/SFP+ based client ports, software-configurable to support any mix of the following services:
 GbE (optical and electrical)
 10GE
 FC1G
 FC2G
 FC4G
 FC8G
 FC16G
 STM-1/OC-3
 STM-4/OC-12
 STM-16/OC-48
 STM-64/OC-192
 OTU2
 OTU2e
 Client Ports 1 to 4 support SFP+ transceivers only
 Client Ports 5 to 12 support SFP or SFP+ transceivers
 800G ODU-XC capacity
 ODU0 granularity
 High port density
 Supports SD-FEC for coherent CFP and FEC for non-coherent CFP
 All services (SDH/SONET, FC, Ethernet) are supported with full transparency, including timing and OH
 SNCP for ODU0/1/2/2e and ODU-flex services
 Support port protection in ODU-XC configuration using splitters and couplers
 Pluggable client and line interfaces support in service upgrade

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-14

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9904X platform layout and architecture

Card views
General view

Front panel

Ports
The line port is numbered 0. The numbering of the client ports is from 1 to 12.

NOTE: Several limitations apply when configuring MIO200 ports to specific rates. These
limitations are described in the following table. Yes in the table indicates the allowed
(supported) configuration option.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-15

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9904X platform layout and architecture

MIO200 port configuration rules

Port No.  1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Rate 
OC192, STM64,
X X X X X X X X X X
ETY10G, FC8G, FC10G
FC16G X X X X
STM16, OC48, STM1,
OC3, STM4, OC12, X X X X X X X X
FC1G, FC2G, ETY1G
FC4G
X X X X X X X X
(up to 4 ports)

The marking above each port identifies the Transmit (Tx) and Receive signals (Rx). The client port LEDs are
at the middle of the card. Each port has two LEDs: Tx and F/L, and can be identified according to the
number between the pair.

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed
configurations). Off when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when
there is no fault in the MIO200.
Line (CFP) port LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the
port's transmitter is off.
F/L Red LED Blinks when a LOS condition is detected. Lights steadily when
a BIT fault is detected in the CFP pluggable transceiver, or the
supply voltage or temperature is OOR.
Client port (SFP and SFP+) LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the
port's transmitter is off.
F/L Red LED Blinks when a LOS condition is detected. Lights steadily when
a BIT fault is detected in the SFP+/QSFP+ pluggable
transceiver, or the supply voltage or temperature is OOR.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 4-16

5 OPT96xx platform layout and
architecture
This section describes the layout and architecture of the OPT96xx platforms. OPT96xx transport platform
offer a total client and network capacity of up to 19.2T, with an arsenal of transponders and muxponders
including 100G, 200G, and 400G network interfaces that are software programmable for varied client
mixes. The platforms support up to 20 degrees of all-optical networking using flexible-grid CDC ROADMs.
Consistent with our modular distributed architecture design philosophy, the OPT99xx platforms utilize the
same optical, Layer 1, and Layer 2 service cards. Service cards or photonic modules can be installed in any
of the I/O slots. Once all the available slots are in use, one or more cages can be added to the system and
additional cards plugged in to the new cages with no disruption of service.
Apollo platforms have been designed to facilitate simple installation and easy maintenance. Hot insertion
of cards and modules enables quick maintenance and repair activities without affecting traffic. The cage
design and mechanical practice of all platforms conform to international mechanical standards and
specifications.
This section describes the layout and architecture of the OPT96xx platforms, focusing on the following
components:
 Platform layout
 Control and communications subsystems, including:
 Control
 Communications
 Timing and synchronization
 Universal fabric
 Cross-connect functionality
 Distributed forwarding architecture
 Packet processing
 Power feed subsystem
 Management system

NOTE: All installation instructions, technical specifications, restrictions, and safety warnings
are provided in the Apollo Platform Installation and Maintenance Manuals. See these manuals
for specific instructions before beginning any Apollo installation.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-1

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx platform layout and architecture

5.1 OPT9624 platform layout

The OPT9624 dimensions are sized for ETSI racks, with 674 mm height (15U), 492 mm width, and 311 mm
depth.
The OPT9624 integrates ODU cross connect, Ethernet Layer 2/MPLS/Layer 3 switching, and full WDM
functionality. This is a versatile, scalable, cost-effective system in a single compact platform that caters to
virtually every demand.
The OPT9624 platform includes:
 Two slots for redundant Routing Control Processor (RCP_24T) cards.
 Two slots for redundant Power Filter Modules (PFM24), using a DC power source.
 One slot for the FCM24 fan unit.
 One slot for the CEM24 card providing the physical interface between Apollo and external
management and clock devices.
 24 universal I/O slots, with slot allocation optimized per application:
 Up to 4 slots for fabric cards or service and photonic cards.
 Additional 20 slots for service and photonic cards.

Platform layout

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-2

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx platform layout and architecture

The following figure shows the OPT9624 slot allocation.

Slot allocation

The OPT9624 also includes fiber management areas to help neatly route cables, and fibers connected to the
platform and one slot for an air filter located at the bottom.

5.1.1 OPT9624 platform configurations

The OPT9624 platform can be configured with different fabric matrix cards or without fabric at all, to
support various applications. According to the fabric installed, there are two main OPT9624 configurations:
 High capacity 1 Tbps fabric, suitable for mixed OTN and data applications
 No fabric, suitable for pure WDM applications and packet OTS
The following figures depict the layout of the three OPT9624 configurations.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-3

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx platform layout and architecture

OPT9624 with four FM1000 cards

OPT9624 with no fabric cards

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-4

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx platform layout and architecture

The following table summarizes the OPT9624 configuration options.

OPT9624 platform configurations

Configuration Fabric Fabric Number of Number of I/O card types Application

capacity card type fabric cards I/O cards
High capacity 1 Tbps FM1000 3:1 20 Optical/data Mixed
OTN/data/WDM
No fabric -- -- -- 24 Optical only Pure OTN/WDM

5.2 OPT9608 platform layout

The OPT9608 dimensions are sized for 19" racks, with 221 mm height (5U), 443 mm width, and 253 mm
depth.
The OPT9608 platform includes:
 Two slots for redundant Routing Control Processor (RCP1_4AD_T) cards.
 Eight I/O slots for photonic and I/O cards.
 Two slots for redundant Power Filter Modules (PFMs), using a DC power source.
 One slot for Fan Control Module (FCM) drawer with nine fans, including an internal alarm connector
module (ACM) and built-in air filter. Airflow is directed horizontally from right to left.

OPT9608 platform layout

The following figure shows the OPT9608 slot layout.

OPT9608 slot layout

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-5

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx platform layout and architecture

5.3 OPT9603 platform layout

The OPT9603 dimensions are sized for 19" racks, with 88 mm height (2U), 442 mm width, and 240 mm
depth.
The platform includes:
 Three universal slots for data service and photonic cards.
 One slot for the main controller card.
 Two slots for redundant power feed modules using a -48 VDC power source.
 One drawer for the fan control module with nine fans.
 Filter tray.

OPT9603 platform layout

The following figure shows the OPT9603 slot allocation.

OPT9603 slot numbering

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-6

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx platform layout and architecture

5.4 OPT96xx control and communications

subsystem
In all Apollo platforms, the controller subsystem is responsible for the following functionality:
 Internal control and traffic processing, accomplished through the main processor that has the main
activation software and a nonvolatile backup memory (NVM).
 Internal platform and card control.
 Internal communications and processing.
 Timing and synchronization.
 ODUk cross connection or packet switching.
 Double redundancy backup protection.
 Communication with external equipment and management.
 Comprehensive management functionality using General Communications Channel (GCC), Optical
Supervisory Channel (OSC), out of band management, or in-band management, with dynamic Open
Shortest Path First (OSPF) routing.
 Fault management, performance monitoring (PM), and maintenance.
 Built-In Test (BIT).
 NE software and configuration backup.

5.4.1 OPT96xx control

The main controller subsystem supports central control, alarms, maintenance, and communication
functions. It also communicates with the control processors of the various cards using a master-slave
control hierarchy.
Each controller unit contains an NVM that stores a complete backup of both the system software and its NE
configuration. Through the NVM, Apollo benefits from superior management and control availability,
ensuring that a faulty controller unit does not affect traffic, even when only a single component is installed.
Double redundancy in every platform can be obtained using a redundant NVM unit in the second
redundant controller subsystem, which is updated automatically on a regular basis. To maintain
synchronization, the operator can also initiate a manual NVM update whenever a change occurs in the
configuration.
The choice of redundant or nonredundant configuration depends on user preferences.
In the OPT9624 and OPT9608, the platforms can be operated in a redundant configuration, in which the
main controller card is protected with a second identical card. The redundant card contains a database
identical to the active card, and operates as a full capability standby control and communication card.
In the OPT9603, the controller is implemented in a single RCP card (RCP03/RCP03R). The platform doesn't
support redundancy, therefore if the RCP fails or is extracted, communication capability with the
management station is lost; traffic that is already running is not affected but the ability to control the
platform is lost.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-7

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx platform layout and architecture

The OPT9624 and OPT9608 control subsystem is separate from the traffic subsystem. Traffic is not impaired
if the controller unit fails or is extracted. In this case, communication capability with the management
station is switched over to the second controller unit, as shown in the following figure. In fact, once started,
Apollo can operate without either controller unit when operating in pure WDM mode with timing
synchronization not required, since each unit has a separate local controller. In this case, however, it loses
its communication capability with the management station.

Control system block diagram

The controller subsystem enables easy software upgrades using a remote software procedure operated
from the STMS® management system. It can store several different software versions at the same time and
enables quick switchover between the different versions when required.

5.4.2 OPT96xx communications

The main control processor subsystem is responsible for communications with external NEs and
management stations.
Communications with other NEs is through one of the following mechanisms:
 GCC channel, embedded in each OTU/ODU link via OTN services cards
 Out of band OSC channel
 In band management over Ethernet signals in Layer 2 cards
 External Data Communications Network (DCN)
Apollo performs IP forwarding between all network interfaces, including gateway management interfaces.
The management communication channel enables operators to integrate several platforms with their own
workstations, and to pass this management traffic through the Apollo system.
Apollo implements dynamic OSPF routing over the network interfaces to automatically determine the
routing table. OSPF support includes P2P protocol (PPP) encapsulation of IP packets with high level data link
control (HDLC) framing over one of the management channels.
An Ethernet interface is used to communicate with STMS. The controller subsystem can also communicate
with a desktop or laptop PC-based craft terminal (Apollo CLI) via serial interface or Ethernet.

Communications module
All OPT96xx platform configurations work with a communications module, featuring:
 Electrical interface connectors that are integrated into the I/O modules, eliminating the need for
separate electrical interface modules
 Easy routing of external management interfaces
 A monitoring system for acceptance test purposes
 Hot insertion of cards and modules to support quick maintenance and repair activities, without
affecting traffic

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-8

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx platform layout and architecture

5.4.3 OPT96xx flexible support for management mixtures

Management information is transmitted from the NMS/EMS to individual NEs through one of the following
mechanisms:
 External DCN
 GCC channel: Apollo platforms support in band management utilizing the GCC incorporated in Layer 1
service cards (either standalone or fabric I/O cards). The GCC enables remote management of
equipment at any site where optical channels are dropped. This can increase margins and extend
distances of optical links as OSC filters are eliminated. Apollo supports GCC0, GCC1, and GCC2. GCC1
and GCC2, integrated in the ODU overhead bytes, are usually used when transmitting management
over a third party domain that is not based on vendor equipment. GCC0 is transmitted over OTU
overhead bytes and terminated every time the OTN signal is terminated. GCC is available for OTU 1,
OTU 2, OTU 3, and OTU 4 signals.
 In band Ethernet channel: OPT96xx platforms can transmit management information over a
dedicated VLAN via in band Ethernet signals. In band Ethernet can be transmitted over GbE, 10 GbE,
and 100 GbE interfaces (future). In band Ethernet management is only available when using Layer 2
cards. The Layer 2 cards terminate the VLAN and extract the management information. Management
infrastructure, routing communications, and internal system control traffic all go through the internal
link between the RCP and the Forwarding Control Processor Module (FCPM) on the data cards.
 OSC for WDM link management, implemented in one of the following modes:
 With an integrated Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) functionality on top of the
supervisory channel. This is implemented either through dedicated OSC cards or integrated into
certain Apollo amplifier cards. It is based on an OSC-OTDR SFP, with FE at 1510 nm for DWDM
links. The OSC-OTDR SFP supports:
 1510 nm 30dB OSC reach
 40-80km OTDR reach – depending on the fiber type
 When the data channels themselves do not include embedded communication channels or if
there are no channel drops, as at an in-line amplifier site. The OSC is used as a communication
channel to enable the STMS to communicate with and control the Apollo. OSC card enhances
the optical layer functionality of the Apollo with out-of-band signaling and a communications
and control channel, completely separating the management function from customer data.
This OSC implementation is either through dedicated OSC cards or integrated into certain Apollo
amplifier cards. OSC options include FE at 1310 nm for CWDM links, FE at 1510 nm for DWDM
links, or 2 Mbps at 1510 nm for extended spans (OSC card only). The OSC card supports:
 Six FE management ports, allowing management information connections of up to six
degrees, using 1510 nm (DWDM) and 1310 nm (CWDM) SFPs.
 Two 2 Mbps management ports for extended reach applications, using 1510 nm SFPs.
Since the OSC operates at either 1510 nm or 1310 nm, it does not interfere with optical
channels operating in the 1550 nm range (C band). In addition, since the Apollo fully integrates
the smart optical layer with the OTN layer, GCC management channels can also be used when
available.
The Apollo OPT96xx platforms fully integrates the GCC, OSC, in band Ethernet, and external DCN
management channels, thus providing the operator with the flexibility to choose the most appropriate
management channel. Operators can even mix the different channels in a network or in the same platform.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-9

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx platform layout and architecture

5.4.4 OPT96xx routing and forwarding functionality

The routing and forwarding capabilities of the Apollo platforms are based on standard OSPF dynamic
routing, suitable for small, medium, and larger networks, and including a richer set of features for network
communications management.
In the OPT96xx platforms, the main control processor subsystem is responsible for communications with
external NEs and management stations. Communications with other Apollo NEs is via the GCC in each OTN
link, OSC, in band Ethernet, or external DCN.
An Ethernet interface is used to communicate with STMS. The controller subsystem can also communicate
with a desktop or laptop PC-based craft terminal (Apollo CLI) via a serial interface or Ethernet. It also
provides alarm outputs. Some of these network communications components and their functionality are
described in this chapter.

5.4.5 OPT96xx management channel with dynamic OSPF

A management channel enables operators to integrate several platforms with their own workstations and
to pass this management traffic through the ApolloOPT96xx platforms. The operator sets up an IP–based
DCN to carry IP packets between the management stations and the NEs. The DCN is composed of
Embedded Communication Channels (ECCs) supported by the equipment itself and an external DCN
supported by standard data equipment.
The Apollo performs IP forwarding between all network interfaces, implementing dynamic OSPF routing
over these network interfaces to automatically determine the routing table. OSPF can be configured for any
subset of network interfaces and supports:
 P2P and broadcast interfaces
 Up to four OSPF areas
 Address summarization
 Area Border Router functionality
 Autonomous System Border Router functionality, including redistribution of static routes
 Loopback address as a router ID
 Configuration of HELLO protocol parameters
 "Passive" interfaces to allow distribution of routes to attached devices
OSPF functionality enables a wide range of DCN configurations, adds resiliency to management
communications between NEs and the management stations, and reduces the ECC load, for a significant
improvement in management performance and NE capacity.
Under dynamic ECC routing, NEs ping each other through the available ECC interfaces and build their own
routing tables. Working with dynamic routing tables that respond to real time circumstances simplifies ECC
planning and maintenance, and reduces the ECC load by making it unnecessary to reserve ECC protection
paths in advance. There is also no need to plan ECC rings, since dynamic ECC routing enables NEs to
automatically set up new routes if the existing ones fail.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-10

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx platform layout and architecture

5.4.6 VoIP in OPT96xx

The Apollo product line Voice over IP (VoIP) defines a way to carry voice calls over an IP network, including
the digitization and packetization of the voice streams.
Apollo VoIP is based on Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) for implementing the over-packet network design.
SIP is a signaling protocol, widely used for controlling multimedia communication sessions such as voice
and video calls over Internet Protocol. The protocol can be used for creating, modifying and terminating
two-party (unicast) or multiparty (multicast) sessions consisting of one or several media streams.
VoIP lines are used between a remote site and a central office during initial installation of the system, or
when no telephone line is available. All calls are bidirectional.
The VoIP capability is a fully integrated feature of the Apollo product line. It supports P2P, conference calls,
and all broadcast calls (future), and allows a person at any NE site to communicate individually or
simultaneously with the sites in the network.
The VoIP phone plugs into the Common External Module (CEM) in the OPT9624, or into the IMG connector
on the FCM in the OPT9608, or into the RCP03/RCP03R on the OPT9603 with Ethernet cable connections.

5.5 OPT96xx universal fabric functionality

The heart of the Apollo OPT9624 is a powerful, high capacity, non-blocking universal fabric. The universal
fabric supports ODUk cross connecting. Apollo is equipped with four fabric cards working in a 3:1
protection scheme. Each I/O module is directly connected to all four fabric cards. In case of fabric card
failure, the I/O interface cards switch to the fourth card within less than 50 msec.
The following figure illustrates the simplified Apollo internal traffic flow. It provides an overview of both the
physical and functional partitioning of the system. Each of the blocks represents an I/O slot that can
accommodate any type of card with any bitrate and service.

Universal fabric system architecture

5.6 Cross-connect functionality

Cross connects are used to define connectivity between tributaries and L1 interfaces having compatible
bandwidth. The connectivity can be between tributaries on the same card or between different cards via
the fabric matrix (ODU XC). The Apollo fabric (FM1000) enables efficient and cost-effective cross-connect
capabilities with ODUk granularity for all tributary signals.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-11

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx platform layout and architecture

There are three XC modes in the Apollo:

 Fixed XC: configured by the NE when there is one single fixed connectivity, for example XC in passive
optical or amplifier cards
 User-configurable XC: connection between cards via the fabric, or connection between services in a
card
 Signaling/dynamic XC: created and deleted by signaling protocols
The traffic cross-connect functions are implemented by the non-blocking high-capacity cross-connect
FM1000 fabric cards. Four cards are configured in a 3:1 protection scheme that provides a capacity of 1
Tbps with 50 Gbps per I/O slot.
The fabric matrix cards receive the traffic from the various I/O cards installed in the platform through
wideband buses, using a format that does not depend on the type of I/O card installed in any specific slot.
At any time, the main and protection card are active (that is, switch the traffic). This means that each trail
terminated in the platform is independently processed by each cross-connect matrix; the resulting streams
are sent in parallel to the trail I/O drop cards, and each card selects the stream to be connected to the
external equipment via the receive path.
The fabric supports ODU XC at the ODUk level for I/O cards. The XC is supported for cards residing on the
same platform. In addition to ODU XC, the fabric also supports data traffic switching for L2 cards (future).
ODUSlot (equivalent to ODU0), provides cross connect for ports with BW less than 1.25 Gbps. This enables
ODU XC of ports with STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12, 1 GbE, and FC100 rates.
The following figure shows examples of different ODU XC options through the fabric cards.

ODU XC in fabric cards example

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-12

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx platform layout and architecture

5.6.1 Types of cross-connections

Unidirectional and bidirectional
A unidirectional connection connects a single input port to a single output port in one direction only. A
bidirectional connection connects the input and output of a single port to the output and input of another
port in both directions. Both connection types are shown in the following figures.

Unidirectional XCs

Bidirectional XCs

Connectivity types
Apollo supports the following XC connectivity types:
 One way unprotected, implemented through one of the following options:
 Option 1: The XC is from one tributary/L1 interface in an input port to an equal (in bandwidth)
tributary/L1 interface in an output port. The corresponding tributaries/L1 interface in the
opposite direction can be used for a different XC. This option is shown in the following figure.

P2P one-way XC

 Option2: A tributary/L1 interface on an input port can be connected to more than one
tributary/L1 interface in output ports. We can use such a connectivity type for multicast
applications, broadcast applications, drop-and-continue, etc. This option is shown in the
following figure.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-13

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx platform layout and architecture

P2MP one-way XC

 Two way unprotected, from one tributary/L1 interface in an input port to an equal (in BW) output
port, and vice versa.

P2P 2-way XC

 One way protected, where the output port is protected by two input ports that are unidirectional.

One way protected XC

 Two way protected, where the input port is protected by two output ports. This is also called Sub-
Network Connection Protection (SNCP). When such an XC is applied inside a card, it is also called a YP
(Y-protection) XC.

2-way protected XC

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-14

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx platform layout and architecture

 Two way fully protected, where the XC comprises 4 x 2-way protected ports. The traffic is protected
against more than a single failure.

2-way XC with full protection

 SNCP N bidirectional XC: This XC has all alternative paths used to protect a line port. Since there is
more than one protecting leg, the operator must specify which leg is the main. The XC consists of N
legs that such an XC can have.
 Protection Group: The user can create a protection group that includes several Deg-n ports (user
selection). One of the Deg-n ports is the default active port connected to the line port. In case of a
defect in the active port, the line port switches to the other Deg-n port in the protection group, and if
this port is also in a fail state, it switches to the next one in the protection group.

SCNP N bidirectional XC

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-15

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx platform layout and architecture

5.7 OTN technology

The Apollo system is based on OTN technology, ensuring carrier-grade capabilities and unmatched Quality
of Service (QoS). OTN adapts capabilities developed for SDH/SONET technology and extends them to the
Optical Transport Hierarchy (OTH) layers. It enables clear supervision of the full optical channel data unit
(ODU) path or any section of the network, providing the ability to monitor, troubleshoot, and isolate any
fault in the network. This capability significantly reduces OPEX.
The OTN transmission layer provides a converged pathway for legacy SDH/SONET as well as advanced high-
capacity Ethernet offerings. Sub-lambda services can be groomed over a single pipe. Each service is kept
intact, with its own overhead and original timing clock, using its own protection scheme, according to the
customer SLA. Apollo combines OTN technology with ASON GMPLS-based control and restoration to
provide carrier-grade capabilities and ensure the appropriate QoS for each service type.

OTN as a universal transport layer, access to core

Apollo supports both Generic and Enhanced Forward Error Correction (GFEC/EFEC) compliant with G.709.
This increases maximum span length, reducing the need for regeneration sites and enabling more ROADM
nodes to be deployed along the signal path without 3R regeneration.
Similar to SDH/SONET, OTN is a simple technology to operate, with uncompromisingly strong OAM&P
capabilities. OTN also enjoys an advantage over SDH/SONET since it was designed to be "DWDM-friendly".
In addition, the OTN is not synchronized to a common clock source. Hence, OTN is capable of carrying
different services, providing full transparency for both overhead and timing.
With a full range of fixed and variable gain amplifiers, Apollo networks can be designed, simulated, and
implemented for distances greater than 2500 km (1550 miles). Apollo also provides highly cost-effective
solutions based on Raman amplifiers for repeaterless applications such as undersea implementations of up
to 400 km (250 miles).

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-16

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx platform layout and architecture

Optical Network Control Parameters (ONCP) software continuously ensures network resiliency,
automatically monitoring and adjusting to changes in optical power induced by variations in span loss
and/or in the number of active channels, while ignoring fiber cuts and maintenance actions as well as
providing comprehensive status and history information. In addition to reducing OPEX, improves service
reliability, enabling an agile response to customer expansion that can ultimately increase revenue.

5.7.1 OTN topologies

This section presents the terms used to describe OTN topologies. As the topology of networks is
determined by communication requirements, the actual topology of any practical network is often a
combination of several basic topologies. Because of the flexible fine granularity of their cross-connect
matrix, Apollo platforms can support any network topology. Moreover, they can easily adapt to changing
network topologies as the customer’s needs evolve.

Point-to-point topology
A point-to-point topology usually connects a terminal multiplexer (TM) to an access node with an ADM. The
link requires two fibers. An additional set of fibers, which can be implemented using OMSP cards, can be
used for protection.

Point-to-point topology

Ring topology
The ring topology is the basic topology for reliable OTNs. The ring provides two propagation directions, thus
providing a redundant path for recovery from the failure of any single segment. Although only two fibers
are generally needed, MSP 1+1 protection may be provided on critical segments. Such segments use four
fibers.

Ring topology

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-17

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx platform layout and architecture

Multi-ring topology
The multi-ring topology consists of several rings that interconnect at certain nodes. The main ring thus
provides connectivity between the secondary rings. Applications include metro and resilient backhaul
networks. When a secondary ring (for example, the top ring) joins the main ring at two different nodes, it
can provide additional protection paths.

Multi-ring topology

Mesh topology
The mesh topology consists of nodes interconnected by many point-to-point links. This provides dense
connectivity between the nodes. Any desired segment may be protected using MSP 1+1, SNC-N, or ASON
GMPLS based.

NOTE: The border between multi-ring and mesh topologies is often blurred. For example, the
network shown in the following figure could easily be redrawn as a complex set of
interconnected rings. Mesh topology also includes star topologies, since stars are simply
subset variations of a complete mesh structure.

Mesh topology

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-18

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx platform layout and architecture

5.8 OPT96xx power feed subsystem

OPT96xx platforms feature a distributed fully redundant power feed subsystem. Two different power
sources (Source A and Source B) feed the xPFMs. The two redundant PFM modules filter and distribute
the -48 VDC nominal battery plant inputs to all internal cards through fully redundant power buses. Each
card generates its own local voltage using high quality DC/DC converters. This distributed power concept
assures system upgrading and efficient heat distribution. It also ensures maximum reliability of the power
feed subsystem.

Power distribution

Both connectors in the PFM module must be connected for power to be supplied to the whole platform.
Additional features of the power subsystem include:
 Reverse polarity protection
 Surge protection (2 kV line to line, 4 kV line to ground)
 Over-voltage protection
 Over-current and short circuit protection
 Redundancy and current sharing between PFM units
 Power fail detection + up to 10 msec holdup
 Under-voltage detection
 Lightning strike protection

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 5-19

6 OPT9624 common cards
The OPT9624 platform includes cards and modules that provide its common functionality like:
 Routing and control
 Management and timing connections
 Power supply
 Air cooling
 Control required for operation
 Packet switching fabric.
These units are described in the following sections.

6.1 RCP
The RCP card is the central control component in the OPT9624 system architecture, providing the main
system processor responsible for essential system management and timing control. Two RCP modules must
be installed in the platform for redundancy.
RCP cards enable comprehensive management communication functionality with dynamic OSPF routing.
These cards are responsible for communications with external NEs and network management (STMS)
communication. RCP cards can be configured for 1:1 redundancy. All connectivity from the RCP to any card
is kept redundant via the dedicated internal communication links.
The OPT9624 offers two different RCP options, RCP24_T and RCP24_O.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 6-1

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9624 common cards

6.1.1 RCP24_T: universal controller

Supported platform
 OPT9624

Description
The RCP24_T is the central control component in the OPT9624 system. It supports the following
management and alarm interfaces and functions:
 Main system processor, responsible for essential system management.
 Serial RS232 interface for local CLI connection.
 Terminal Ethernet management interface port supporting 100 Mbps.
 Two management Ethernet ports for connections to subtending platforms used in multiplatform
configurations (future function).
 Operation and alarm LEDs.
 Active CTM.
Two RCP24_T modules may be installed in an OPT9624 platform for redundancy.
The Apollo product line relies on a highly scalable, internet-class routing engine designed specifically to
interoperate seamlessly with current IP backbones. As the main platform controller, the RCP runs the
system software and a full suite of routing protocols, including BGP, OSPF-TE, IS-IS-TE, and RIPv2, as well as
MPLS signaling (RSVP-TE, LDP), MPLS-TP, and multicast (PIM-SM, MBGP, IGMPv2).
The Apollo product line has an efficient modular design that is expressed in every aspect of the system. This
design works well with all the different line cards, offering the same top quality features and benefits
across all types of interfaces. Technology reuse also means a shorter time to market for later follow on’
cards.

Functions
The RCP24_T provides the following main functions:
 Routing and control:
 Management communication
 CPU offload
 8 Gb SD card memory (NVM)
 Stores the platform's software code and configuration data base (on the NVM)
 Ethernet intra-platform networking
 Multi-platform infrastructure (future)
 EMS and LCT management support
 Timing to all I/O cards

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 6-2

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9624 common cards

 Announces the active RCP to all Field Replaceable Units (FRUs)

 Announces the active fabric(s) to all FRUs
 Self BIT
 Single or redundant RCP
 HA (High Availability):
 Active fabric distribution done immediately
 Hardware detection of major fabric card faults and switchover

WARNING: When the OPT9624 is configured to operate in ODU-XC, removal of both RCP24_T
cards and insertion of one or both cards will cause traffic down time of about 3 minutes.

Card views
General view

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 6-3

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9624 common cards

Front panel

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
ACT Green LED Lights together with the STBY and FAIL LEDs during software
download. Lights steadily when the RCP is configured as the active
card. Off when the RCP has a failure or is configured as the standby
card.
STBY Yellow LED Lights together with the ACT and FAIL LEDs during software
download. Lights steadily when the RCP is configured as the standby
card. Off when the RCP is the active card.
FAIL Red LED Lights together with the ACT and STBY LEDs during software
download. Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off
when there is no fault in the RCP.
CTM Orange LED Lights when the CTM on the RCP24_T is active.

Ports
Marking Connector Functions
CONSOLE RJ-45 connector Serial RS-232 communication port for use by technical support
personnel (debug, maintenance, etc.).
EXP1 RJ-45 connector For future use.
EXP2
LOCAL MNG. RJ-45 connector Terminal management interface for connecting to an LCT.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 6-4

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9624 common cards

6.1.2 RCP24_O: optimized for pure DWDM

Supported platform
 OPT9624

Description
The RCP24_O is an RCP card optimized for pure optical DWDM applications. The RCP24_O module includes
all the functionality of the standard RCP24_T except for the CTM module, which is not relevant for pure
optical configurations.
The RCP24_O is the central control component in the OPT9624 system architecture, providing the main
system processor responsible for essential system management and control. Two RCP modules may be
installed in the platform for redundancy. The RCP24_O supports the following management and alarm
interfaces and functions:
 Main system processor, responsible for essential system management.
 Serial RS232 interface for local CLI connection.
 Terminal Ethernet management interface port supporting 100/1000 Mbps.
 Two management Ethernet ports for connections to subtending platforms used in multiplatform
configurations (future function).
 Operation and alarm LEDs.
Two RCP24_O modules may be installed in an OPT9624 platform for redundancy.
The Apollo product line relies on a highly scalable, internet-class routing engine designed specifically to
interoperate seamlessly with current IP backbones. As the main platform controller, the RCP runs the
system software and a full suite of routing protocols, including BGP, OSPF-TE, IS-IS-TE, and RIPv2, as well as
MPLS signaling (RSVP-TE, LDP), MPLS-TP, and multicast (PIM-SM, MBGP, IGMPv2).
The Apollo product line has an efficient modular design that is expressed in every aspect of the system. This
design works well with all the different line cards, offering the same top quality features and benefits
across all types of interfaces. Technology reuse also means a shorter time to market for later follow on
cards.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 6-5

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9624 common cards

Functions
The RCP24_O provides the following main functions:
 Routing and control:
 Management communication
 CPU offload
 8 Gb SD card memory (NVM)
 Stores the platform's software code and configuration data base (on the NVM)
 Ethernet intra-platform networking
 Multi-platform infrastructure (future)
 EMS and LCT management support
 Announces the active RCP to all Field Replaceable Units (FRUs)
 Self BIT
 Single or redundant RCP
 HA (High Availability)

Card views
General view

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 6-6

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9624 common cards

Front panel

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
ACT Green LED Lights together with the STBY and FAIL LEDs during software
download. Lights steadily when the RCP is configured as the active
card. Off when the RCP has a failure or is configured as the standby
card.
STBY Yellow LED Lights together with the ACT and FAIL LEDs during software
download. Lights steadily when the RCP is configured as the standby
card. Off when the RCP is the active card.
FAIL Red LED Lights together with the ACT and STBY LEDs during software
download. Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off
when there is no fault in the RCP.
EXP1 RJ-45 connector For future use.
EXP2
LOCAL MNG. RJ-45 connector Terminal management interface for connecting to an LCT.
CONSOLE RJ-45 connector Serial RS-232 communication port for use by technical support
personnel (debug, maintenance, etc.).

Ports
Marking Connector Functions
CONSOLE RJ-45 connector Serial RS-232 communication port for use by technical support
personnel (debug, maintenance, etc.).
EXP1 RJ-45 connector For future use.
EXP2
LOCAL MNG. RJ-45 connector Terminal management interface for connecting to an LCT.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 6-7

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9624 common cards

6.2 PFM24
Supported platform
 OPT9624

Description
OPT96xx platforms feature a distributed fully redundant power feed subsystem. Two different power
sources (Source A and Source B) feed the xPFMs. The two redundant PFM modules filter and distribute
the -48 VDC nominal battery plant inputs to all internal cards through fully redundant power buses. Each
card generates its own local voltage using high quality DC/DC converters. This distributed power concept
assures system upgrading and efficient heat distribution. It also ensures maximum reliability of the power
feed subsystem.

Power distribution

Additional features of the power subsystem include:

 Reverse polarity protection
 Surge protection (2 kV line to line, 4 kV line to ground)
 Over-voltage protection
 Over-current and short circuit protection
 Redundancy and current sharing between PFM units
 Power fail detection + 10 msec holdup
 Under-voltage detection
 Lightning strike protection
PFM24 power feed modules take a -48 VDC power feed input and distribute power to all cards in the
platform, providing up to 3500 W. Both connectors in the PFM module must be connected for power to be
supplied to the whole platform. OPT9624 platforms work with two PFM24 modules configured in a
load-sharing protection scheme.
The PFM24 serves as an input power filter for the DC voltage connected to the OPT9624. Each platform has
two PFM24 units for redundancy purposes. It is recommended to connect each to a different power source
(unless only one power source is available). When only one power source is available, it is recommended to
connect it to the two power inputs of both units. In such case, and provided a redundant PFM24 is
installed, the faulty unit can be replaced without affecting traffic.
The PFM24 provides power of up to 3500 W to the OPT9624. To supply this power, the unit structure
includes two input filters, each fed through a separate connector. Both connectors in the PFM module must
be connected for power to be supplied to the whole platform.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 6-8

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9624 common cards

IMPORTANT: Even if only one power source is used, both input power feed ports should be
connected to the power source with standard cables.

Functions
The PFM24 performs the following functions:
 Dual independent DC voltage input filters (-48 V)
 Control and alarms for each input
 Provision of maximum power of 3500 W
 Temperature sensing
 Input voltage monitoring
 Two DC power input connectors
 Power Good indication
 Fail indication

Card views
General view

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 6-9

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9624 common cards

PFM24 unit front panel

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
POWER ON 1 Green LED Lights steadily when the PFM24 input supply voltage through the
POWER IN 1 connector is in the allowed range.
POWER ON 2 Green LED Lights steadily when the PFM24 input supply voltage through the
POWER IN 2 connector is in the allowed range.
FAIL Red LED Normally off. Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the unit.

Connectors
Marking Connector Functions
POWER IN 1 5W5 D-type connector Connects DC input power to the first filter in the unit.
POWER IN 2 5W5 D-type connector Connects DC input power to the second filter in the unit.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 6-10

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9624 common cards

6.3 CEM24
Supported platform
 OPT9624

Description
The CEM24 module is connected to both RCP cards and provides a physical interface between the OPT9624
platform and the external management, alarms, and clock devices. The CEM24 is the connection unit
between the OPT9624 and the external world. It provides interfaces to management, timing, and alarms.
The CEM24 is installed at the middle top of OPT9624 between the two PFM24 filter modules.

Functions
The CEM24 provides the following main functions and interfaces:
 In-band management Ethernet port supporting 100 Mbps, connected to STMS
 Timing and synchronization inputs and outputs, including:
 E1/T1
 2MHz (BITS1/BITS2) (future)
 Pulse-per-second (1 PPS) (future)
 Time of Day (ToD) (future)
 Alarm interfaces and indications, including:
 Alarm severity LEDS (Critical, Major, Minor)
 External alarm outputs and inputs to client or RAP
 Operation LEDs displaying system operation and alarms
 Activations, including:
 LED tests for the entire platform
 Alarm Cut Off (ACO)

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 6-11

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9624 common cards

Card views
General view

CEM24 unit front panel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 6-12

Apollo Reference Manual OPT9624 common cards

Ports and pushbuttons

Marking Item Functions
ALARMS 36-pin SCSI connector Connects alarm input and output lines via a RAP or directly to the
client.
IMG RJ-45 connector In-band management Ethernet interface for connecting to an
element management station (STMS) or a CLI terminal.
TOD RJ-45 connector Time of Day signal for supporting Ethernet timing per IEEE 1588v2
standard (Not operational).
1PPS IN/OUT DIN 1.0/2.3 connectors 1PPS input/output signals for supporting Ethernet timing per
IEEE 1588v2 standard (Not operational).
ACO Pushbutton Used to temporarily disable the buzzer and set off the
corresponding alarm LED when an alarm condition is present. The
buzzer is activated again when a new alarm condition is detected.
LED-TEST Pushbutton Turns on all LEDs located on cards/modules installed in the
platform, for test purposes.
BITS1 RJ-45 connector Main timing input/output clock using an E1/2MHz/1.5MHz signal
(Not operational).
BITS2 RJ-45 connector Additional timing input/output clock using an E1/2MHz/1.5MHz
signal (Not operational).

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
POWER Green LED Indicates that the CEM24 card is powered and operating normally.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card.
CR Red LED Lights when a critical alarm is detected in the platform. Remains lit while
any such alarm is active. Turns off upon termination of all alarms of this
degree.
MAJ Orange LED Lights when a major alarm is detected in the platform. Remains lit while
any such alarm is active. Turns off upon termination of all alarms of this
degree.
MIN Yellow LED Lights when a minor (or warning) alarm is detected in the platform.
Remains lit while any such alarm is active. Turns off upon termination of
all alarms of this degree.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 6-13

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9624 common cards

6.4 FCM24
Supported platform
 OPT9624

Description
The FCM24 fan control module, installed at the lower edge of the platform, includes 10 separate and
independent fans for secured resiliency. In case one or more of the fans fails, the rest increase the
ventilation speed to compensate. Air is drawn in from the lower part of the chassis and pumped through
the vertically mounted cards through the top of the chassis. The fans are fed through circuits that improve
the system's performance and support its redundancy.

Functions
Features of the FCM24 include:
 Separate power supply for each fan unit
 Each adjacent pair of fans has a control of its own:
 Eight levels are defined for each pair
 The levels are controlled by the active RCP24_T via a control bus
 Separate psophometric filter with a separate fuse for each fan
 Large capacitor with a fuse on the DC supply bus
 Parallel dual inrush current circuit with a separate fuse for each circuit
 Hold up capacitors (serves the PFM24)
A controller in the active RCP24_T controls the fans operation. If one of the fans fails, the remaining start to
operate in turbo mode, and the fail LED lights until the FCU is replaced. If done in a few minutes, the FCU
can be extracted and replaced without interrupting the OPT9624 operation (hot swapping).

WARNING: Do not leave the system without an FCU unit for more than a couple of minutes.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 6-14

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9624 common cards

Card views
General view

Front panel

Ports
Marking Item Functions
ACTIVE Green LED Lights steadily when the card is powered and operating normally.
FAIL Red LED Normally off. Lights steadily when a fault is detected.

6.4.1 FCM24 air filters

OPT9624 platforms operating in extremely dusty and/or humid environments must be equipped with an air
filter. The OPT9624 has a dedicated slot for the air filter at the bottom of the platform.
The purpose of the air filter is to reduce the accumulation of dust and dirt on its internal components
carried by the cooling air flowing through the platform. The combination of dust and humidity produces a
capacitive/conductive layer between components installed on cards and modules. This may degrade
equipment performance or even cause malfunctions. Moreover, the insulating effect of a dust layer causes
components to operate at higher temperatures, so ultimately decreasing equipment reliability.
An air filter reduces dirt accumulation and thus prevents degradation of equipment reliability and
performance. However, filters do increase the resistance to airflow and should therefore carefully be
selected according to the actual operating conditions.
Apollo offers two types of FCM24 air filters:
 Low density foam filter, with a density of 10 PPI.
 High density foam filter (45 PPI) in compliance with NEBS standards. This is the default type supplied
with the OPT9624.

NOTE: The low density filter (10 PPI) must be ordered separately.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 6-15

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9624 common cards

Installing the air filter in the OPT9624

In extremely dusty sites or when NEBS compliance is required, the 45 PPI filter is suitable. For all other
sites, the 10 PPI filter is preferred.

NOTE: The insertion of the air filter into the OPT9624 activates a switch that reports its
presence to the system management. If an air filter is not installed, a "filter missing" alarm is
generated and reported.

Filter maintenance intervals must strictly be observed. These are application-specific and depend on the
environmental conditions. Clean or replace loaded filters. It is accepted for electronic equipment design to
recommend cleaning/replacing air filters every three months. The high density air filter (45 PPI) may
become blocked in a shorter time and must be maintained more frequently.

CAUTION: After maintaining an air filter, carefully examine the material. If holes or tears are
detected, replace with a new filter.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 6-16

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9624 common cards

6.5 FM1000
Description
FM1000 is a universal fabric switching matrix for the OPT9624 that provides up to 1 Tbps of ODU cross
connect, Ethernet Layer 2/MPLS packet switching, or any combination thereof OPT9624 is equipped with
four fabric cards working in 3:1 protection scheme. The cards are installed in four dedicated slots in the
middle of the platform. Each I/O card is directly connected to all four fabric cards. In case of fabric card
failure, the I/O interface cards switch to the fourth card within less than 50 msec.
The dedicated slots for the FM1000 in the OPT9624 are 8, 9, 10, and 11, as shown in the following figure.
The rest of the 20 slots can be populated with various optical, service, or data I/O cards.

OPT9624 with four FM1000 cards

NOTE: Configuration of the FM1000 in an OPT9624 must include two RCP24_Ts (redundancy
option).

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 6-17

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9624 common cards

Functions
The FM1000 provides the following main functions:
 Total capacity of 1 Tbps
 20 slots for I/O cards with 50 Gbps per slot
 Unified fabric for OTN and data applications
 FM1000 protection in 3:1 protection scheme with three active and one standby card
 1 Tbps traffic evenly divided between the three active FM1000 cards
 Each line card configured to work towards the fabric in either OTN or data mode
 Each ODUk container carrying its own timing

Card views
General view

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 6-18

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9624 common cards

Front panel

Ports
Front panel indicator functions

Marking Item Functions

Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no
fault in the FM1000.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 6-19

7 OPT9608 common cards
The OPT9608 platform includes cards and modules that provide its common functionality, such as power
supply, air cooling, and control required for operation. These units are described in the following sections.

7.1 RCP08_O
Supported platform
 OPT9608

Description
The RCP08_O is an RCP card optimized for pure optical applications. The card is the central control
component in the OPT9608 system architecture, providing the main system processor responsible for
essential system management. Two RCP modules may be installed in the platform for redundancy. Two
RCP08_O modules may be installed in an OPT9608 platform for redundancy.
The Apollo product line relies on a highly scalable, internet-class routing engine designed specifically to
interoperate seamlessly with current IP backbones. As the main platform controller, the RCP runs the
system software and a full suite of routing protocols, including BGP, OSPF-TE, IS-IS-TE, and RIPv2, as well as
MPLS signaling (RSVP-TE, LDP), MPLS-TP, and multicast (PIM-SM, MBGP, IGMPv2).
The Apollo product line has an efficient modular design that is expressed in every aspect of the system. This
design works well with all the different line cards, offering the same top quality features and benefits
across all types of interfaces. Technology reuse also means a shorter time to market for later follow on
cards.

Functions
The RCP08_O supports the following management and alarm interfaces and functions:
 Main system processor, responsible for essential system management.
 Serial RS232 interface for local CLI connection.
 Terminal Ethernet management interface port supporting 100 Mbps.
 Two management Ethernet ports for connections to subtending platforms used in multiplatform
configurations (future function).
 Operation and alarm LEDs.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-1

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9608 common cards

The RCP08_O provides the following main functions:

 Routing and control:
 Management communication
 CPU offload
 8 Gb SD card memory (NVM)
 Stores the platform's software code and configuration data base (on the NVM)
 Ethernet intra-platform networking
 Multi-platform infrastructure (future)
 EMS and LCT management support
 Announces the active RCP to all Field Replaceable Units (FRUs)
 Self BIT
 Single or redundant RCP
 HA (High Availability)

Card views
General view

Front panel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-2

Apollo Reference Manual OPT9608 common cards

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
ACT Green LED Lights together with the STBY and FAIL LEDs during software download.
Lights steadily when the RCP is configured as the active card. Off when the
RCP has a failure or is configured as the standby card.
STBY Yellow LED Lights together with the ACT and FAIL LEDs during software download.
Lights steadily when the RCP is configured as the stand-by card. Off when
the RCP is the active card.
FAIL Red LED Lights together with the ACT and STBY LEDs during software download.
Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no
fault in the RCP.
CRT. Red LED Lights when the highest severity unacknowledged alarm in the platform is
critical.
MAJ. Orange LED Lights when the highest severity unacknowledged alarm in the platform is
major.
MIN. Yellow LED Lights when the highest severity unacknowledged alarm in the platform is
minor.

Ports and pushbuttons

Marking Connector Functions
CONSOLE RJ-45 connector Serial RS-232 communication port for use by technical
support personnel (debug, maintenance, etc.).
LOCAL MNG. RJ-45 connector Terminal management interface for connecting to an LCT.
EXP1 RJ-45 connector For future use
EXP2 RJ-45 connector
ACO Pushbutton Used to temporarily disable the buzzer and set off the
corresponding alarm LED when an alarm condition is present.
The buzzer is activated again when a new alarm condition is
detected.
LED-TEST Pushbutton Turns on all LEDs located on cards/modules installed in the
platform, for test purposes.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-3

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9608 common cards

7.2 RCP1_4AD_T
Supported platform
 OPT9608

Description
The RCP1_4AD_T card is the central control component in the OPT9608 system architecture, providing the
main system processor responsible for essential system management and timing control. Two RCP1_4AD_T
modules may be installed in an OPT9608 platform for redundancy.
The Apollo product line relies on a highly scalable, internet-class routing engine designed specifically to
interoperate seamlessly with current IP backbones. As the main platform controller, the RCP runs the
system software and a full suite of routing protocols, including BGP, OSPF-TE, IS-IS-TE, and RIPv2, as well as
MPLS signaling (RSVP-TE, LDP), MPLS-TP, and multicast (PIM-SM, MBGP, IGMPv2).
The Apollo product line has an efficient modular design that is expressed in every aspect of the system. This
design works well with all the different line cards, offering the same top quality features and benefits
across all types of interfaces. Technology reuse also means a shorter time to market for later follow on
cards.
The RCP1_4AD_T supports the following management and alarm interfaces and functions:
 Main system processor, responsible for essential system management.
 Serial RS232 interface for local CLI connection.
 Terminal Ethernet management interface port supporting 100 Mbps.
 Two management Ethernet ports for connections to subtending platforms used in multiplatform
configurations (future function).
 Operation and alarm LEDs.
 Active CTM.

Functions
 Routing and control:
 Management communication
 CPU offload
 8 Gb CF (Compact Flash) card memory (NVM)
 Stores the platform's software code and configuration data base (on the NVM)
 Ethernet intra-platform networking
 Multi-platform infrastructure (future)
 EMS and LCT management support
 Timing to all I/O cards

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-4

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9608 common cards

 Announces the active RCP to all Field Replaceable Units (FRUs)

 Self BIT
 Single or redundant RCP
 HA (High Availability):
 Active fabric distribution done immediately
 Hardware detection of major fabric card faults and switchover

NOTE: The RCP1_4AD_T is supported only in the OPT9608 platforms.

Card views
General view

Front panel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-5

Apollo Reference Manual OPT9608 common cards

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
ACT Green LED Lights together with the STBY and FAIL LEDs during software download. Lights
steadily when the RCP is configured as the active card. Off when the RCP has a
failure or is configured as the standby card.
STBY Yellow LED Lights together with the ACT and FAIL LEDs during software download. Lights
steadily when the RCP is configured as the stand-by card. Off when the RCP is
the active card.
FAIL Red LED Lights together with the ACT and STBY LEDs during software download. Lights
steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no fault in the
RCP.
CRT. Red LED Lights when the highest severity unacknowledged alarm in the platform is
critical.
MAJ. Orange LED Lights when the highest severity unacknowledged alarm in the platform is
major.
MIN. Yellow LED Lights when the highest severity unacknowledged alarm in the platform is
minor.

Ports and pushbuttons

Marking Connector Functions
CONSOLE RJ-45 connector Serial RS-232 communication port for use by technical support
personnel (debug, maintenance, etc.).
LOCAL MNG. RJ-45 connector Terminal management interface for connecting to an LCT.
EXP1 RJ-45 connector For future use
EXP2 RJ-45 connector
ACO Pushbutton Used to temporarily disable the buzzer and set off the corresponding
alarm LED when an alarm condition is present. The buzzer is
activated again when a new alarm condition is detected.
LED-TEST Pushbutton Turns on all LEDs located on cards/modules installed in the platform,
for test purposes.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-6

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9608 common cards

7.3 PFM08_AC
Supported platform
 OPT9608

Description
The PFM08_AC is an AC to DC power converter that supplies 48 VDC to the OPT9608 platform. The unit
occupies one PFM slot in the OPT9608. While a single card can provide the total power required by the
OPT9608, AC power redundancy is supported by installing two PFM08_AC cards in the platform. To support
full redundancy, each PFM08_AC must be fed from a different AC source. You can also install a mixture of
one PFM08_AC module and one PFM module (DC, with or without circuit breaker).
The AC input voltage plug on this card has a special front cover that protects it against unintended
disconnection. After inserting the AC plug, the cover is lifted on the plug and the captive screw is fastened,
to protect the AC plug from removal.

CAUTION: To protect the PFM08_AC against lightning (up to 4 Kv) Line to protected Ground,
the customer must add the following components on the AC power source feeding the card:
 Surge protection Varistors between Line to Neutral
 Surge arrestors between Line to Ground

WARNING: Before connecting the PFM08_AC to power, make sure that the 230 VAC source is
protected by an 8A circuit breaker, or if you are using 110 VAC source, by a 16A circuit
breaker.

Functions
The PFM08_AC provides the following main functions:
 Wide AC input voltage range from 110 VAC to 230 VAC (50/60 Hz)
 Output voltage ranging from 52 VDC to 55 VDC, with up to 650 W of power
 Input and output voltage filters
 Hot swappable card
 Control and alarms
 Temperature sensing
 Redundancy
 DC output voltage indication
 Fail indication

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-7

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9608 common cards

Card views
General view

Front panel

Ports
LEDs

Marking Item Functions

ACT Green LED  On  48 VDC output is OK
 Off  48 VDC output is Out of Range
FAIL Red LED  On  3.3 VDC power supply and 3.3 VDC backplane are
under 3 VDC or high temperature on the card
 Off  3.3 VDC and card temperature are OK

Connectors

Marking Connector Functions

POWER IN C14, 3-pin connector Connects AC power to the unit.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-8

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9608 common cards

7.4 PFM with a circuit breaker (DC)

Supported platform
 OPT9608

Description
The PFM serves as an input power filter for the DC voltage connected to the OPT9608, and provides the
alarm interfaces for the platform. Each platform has two PFM units for redundancy purposes. To support
full redundancy, each PFM should be fed from a different power source, if available. When only one power
source is available, it should be connected to both units. The PFM can then be replaced without affecting
traffic. The standard PFM module for the OPT9608 platform is available either with or without a circuit
breaker. A mix of both types is allowed in the same platform. You can also install a mixture of one
PFM08_AC module and one PFM module (DC, with or without circuit breaker).

Functions
 Input DC voltage filtering (range from -40.5 VDC to -72 VDC)
 Control and alarms
 Temperature sensing
 Input voltage monitoring
 Circuit breaker on the module's front panel used as an ON/OFF switch for the platform and over-
current protection for the DC power source
 Hold-up capacitors
 Power Good indication
 Fail indication
 Simple protection mechanism that prevents module extraction while connected to a power source

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-9

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9608 common cards

Card views
General view with circuit breaker

PFM (with circuit breaker) front panel

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
ACTIVE Green LED Lights steadily when the PFM receives input
power and operates normally.
FAIL Red LED Normally off. Lights steadily when a fault is
detected in the unit.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-10

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9608 common cards

Connectors
Marking Connector Functions
- 2W2 D-type connector Connects the DC power source to the
module.
- Protection lever Activated by the power cable when plugged
into the corresponding connector on the
front panel. As a result, the lever slides a
locking pin into the chassis and prevents
extraction of the module.
- Circuit breaker 40 A Used as an ON/OFF power switch for the
platform and over-current protection for the
DC power source.

7.5 PFM without a circuit breaker

Supported platform
 OPT9608

Description
The PFM serves as an input power filter for the DC voltage connected to the OPT9608, and provides the
alarm interfaces for the platform. Each platform has two PFM units for redundancy purposes. To support
full redundancy, each PFM should be fed from a different power source, if available. When only one power
source is available, it should be connected to both units. The PFM can then be replaced without affecting
traffic. The standard PFM module for the OPT9608 platform is available either with or without a circuit
breaker. A mix of both types is allowed in the same platform. You can also install a mixture of one
PFM08_AC module and one PFM module (DC, with or without circuit breaker).

Functions
The PFM performs the following functions:
 Input DC voltage filtering (range from -40.5 VDC to -72 VDC)
 Control and alarms
 Temperature sensing
 Input voltage monitoring
 Hold-up capacitors
 Power Good indication
 Fail indication
 Simple protection mechanism that prevents module extraction while connected to a power source

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-11

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9608 common cards

Card views
General view without circuit breaker

Front panel

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
ACTIVE Green LED Lights steadily when the PFM receives input power
and operates normally.
FAIL Red LED Normally off. Lights steadily when a fault is
detected in the unit.

Connectors
Marking Connector Functions
- 2W2 D-type connector Connects the DC power source to the module.
- Protection lever Activated by the power cable when plugged into
the corresponding connector on the front panel.
As a result, the lever slides a locking pin into the
chassis and prevents extraction of the module.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-12

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9608 common cards

7.6 PFM08H_DC
Description
The PFM08H_DC serves as a high-power input power filter for the DC voltage connected to the OPT9608,
and provides the alarm interfaces for the platform. When using the PFM08H_DC module, the platform is
configured as an OPT9608H (higher-power) platform, supporting the use of more high-power components,
such as the higher-capacity I/O modules.
Each platform has two PFM08H_DC units for redundancy purposes. To support full redundancy, each PFM
should be fed from a different power source, if available. When only one power source is available, it
should be connected to both units. The PFM08H_DC can then be replaced without affecting traffic. The
PFM08H_DC supplies up to 1800W of power, a higher amount than the standard PFM module, and
therefore cannot be installed in combination with a different type of PFM module.

Functions
The PFM performs the following functions:
 Input DC voltage filtering (range from -40.5 VDC to -72 VDC)
 Power supply of up to 1800W
 Control and alarms
 Temperature sensing
 Input voltage monitoring
 Hold-up capacitors
 Power Good indication
 Fail indication
 Simple protection mechanism that prevents module extraction while connected to a power source

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
ACTIVE Green LED Lights steadily when the PFM receives input power and operates normally.
FAIL Red LED Normally off. Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the unit.

Connectors
Marking Connector Functions
- 5W5 D-type connector Connects the DC power source to the module.
- Protection lever Activated by the power cable when plugged into the corresponding
connector on the front panel. As a result, the lever slides a locking
pin into the chassis and prevents extraction of the module.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-13

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9608 common cards

7.7 FCM
Supported platform
 OPT9608

Description
The FCM is positioned at the right side of the OPT9608 platform and provides cooling air to the system
from nine separate fans. Air is drawn in by the fans from the right side of the chassis and pumped out
through the horizontally mounted cards and modules through the left side of the chassis.
The FCM includes a controller that controls the operation of the fans. If one of the fans fails, the remaining
ones operate in turbo mode and the fail LED lights until the FCM is replaced. If the operation does not take
more than four minutes, the FCM can be extracted and replaced without interrupting the router operation
(hot swapping). Apollo recommends preparing the replacement module in advance and so shortening
replacement time to a minimum.

WARNINGS:
 Don't leave the OPT9608 platform operating without an FCM.
 If you must replace an FCM, don't leave the system without an FCM unit for more than 4
minutes.

Functions
The main functions of the FCM include:
 Cooling air for the OPT9608 platform
 Controlling the operation of the nine fans according to the ambient temperature and sensors on the
OPT9608 platform
 Supporting hot swapping
 Collecting system alarms via the internal ACM:
 Four alarm inputs
 Four alarm outputs (dry contacts)
 Alarm Severity : Critical, Major, Minor
 Alarm buzzer
 Accommodating the air filter for the fans
 Supplying -48 VDC power for the fans
 In-band management (IMG) (for future use)

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-14

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9608 common cards

Card views
General view

Front panel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-15

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9608 common cards

Ports and LEDs

Marking Item Functions
EXP RJ-45 connector For future use.
IN-BAND MNG. RJ-45 connector Used to connect the management station.
ACT. Green LED Lights steadily when the card is powered and operating normally.
FAIL Red LED Normally off. Lights steadily when a fault is detected.
ALARMS 36-pin SCSI Connects alarm input and output lines via a RAP or directly to the
connector client.
AIR FILTER Housing Accommodates the air filter.

7.7.1 FCM air filters

Supported platform
 OPT9608

Description
OPT9608 platforms operating in extremely dusty and/or humid environments must be equipped with an air
filter in the dedicated slot on the right side of the FCU.
The purpose of the air filter is to reduce the accumulation of dust and dirt carried by the cooling air flowing
through the platform on its internal components. The combination of dust and humidity produces a
capacitive/conductive layer between components installed on cards and modules. This may degrade
equipment performance or even cause malfunctions. Moreover, the insulating effect of a dust layer causes
components to operate at higher temperatures, so ultimately decreasing equipment reliability.
An air filter reduces dirt accumulation and thus prevents degradation of equipment reliability and
performance. However, filters do increase the resistance to airflow and should therefore carefully be
selected according to the actual operating conditions.
Apollo offers two types of air filters:
 Low density foam filter, with a density of 10 PPI.
 High density foam filter (45 PPI) in compliance with NEBS standards. This is the default type supplied
with the OPT9608.

NOTE: The low density filter (10 PPI) must be ordered separately.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-16

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9608 common cards

Installing the air filter in the OPT9608

In extremely dusty sites or when NEBS compliance is required, the 45 PPI filter is required. For all other
sites, the 10 PPI filter is sufficient.

NOTE: The insertion of the air filter into the FCM activates a switch that reports its presence
to the system management. If an air filter is not installed, a "filter missing" alarm is generated
and reported.

Filter maintenance intervals must strictly be observed. These are application-specific and depend on the
environmental conditions. Loaded filters are handled by cleaning or replacing. It is accepted for electronic
equipment design to recommend cleaning/replacing air filters every three months. The high density air
filter (45 PPI) may become blocked in a shorter time and must be maintained more frequently.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 7-17

8 OPT9603 common cards
The OPT9603 platform includes cards and modules that provide its common functionality, such as routing
and control, and management connections, power supply, air cooling, and control required for operation.
These units are described in the following sections.

8.1 RCP03/RCP03R
Supported platform
 OPT9603

Description
The RCP03/RCP03R card is the central control component in the OPT9603 system architecture, providing
the main system processor responsible for essential system management and control. The card has no
redundancy, as only one RCP03/RCP03R can be installed in the OPT9603 platform.

NOTE: The RCP03 card has been replaced by the RCP03R. The same feature description
applies to both cards.

Functions
The RCP03/RCP03R provides the following main functions:
 Control processor for the system
 Controls all cards and modules in the platform using Ethernet and I2C busses
 Supports Ethernet/IP connectivity between the RCP and all optical cards (OPBs) for GCC, OSC, and
internal communication
 Stores the platform's software code and configuration data base on an NVM (SD type, 8 Gb)
 Performance monitoring logging
 Alarm interfaces and indications, including:
 Alarm severity outputs (Critical, Major, Minor)
 External alarm outputs and inputs to client or RAP
 LEDs for displaying the operation and alarms of the system
 Activations, including:
 LED tests for the entire platform
 ACO
 Management and debug interfaces via GbE and RS-232 ports

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-1

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9603 common cards

Card views
General view

Front panel

Ports and LEDs

Marking Item Functions
ACT Green LED Indicates that the RCP03/RCP03R card is powered and operating normally.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card.
ALARMS 36-pin SCSI Connects alarm input and output lines via a RAP or directly to the client.
connector
CR Red LED Lights when a critical alarm is detected in the platform. Remains lit while any
such alarm is active. Turns off upon termination of all alarms of this degree.
MAJ Orange LED Lights when a major alarm is detected in the platform. Remains lit while any
such alarm is active. Turns off upon termination of all alarms of this degree.
MIN Yellow LED Lights when a minor (or warning) alarm is detected in the platform. Remains lit
while any such alarm is active. Turns off upon termination of all alarms of this
degree.
ACO Pushbutton Used to temporarily disable the buzzer and set off the corresponding alarm LED
when an alarm condition is present. The buzzer is activated again when a new
alarm condition is detected.
LED-TEST Pushbutton Turns on all LEDs located on cards/modules installed in the platform, for test
purposes.
IMG RJ-45 In-band management Ethernet interface for connecting to an element
connector management station (STMS) or a CLI terminal.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-2

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9603 common cards

Marking Item Functions

LCT RJ-45 Terminal management interface for connecting to an LCT.
connector
CONSOLE RJ-45 Serial RS-232 communication port for use by technical support personnel
connector (debug, maintenance, etc.).

8.2 PFM03
Supported platform
 OPT9603

Description
The PFM03 serves as an input power filter for the DC voltage connected to the OPT9603. Each platform has
two PFM03 units for DC redundancy purposes. It is recommended to connect each to a different power
source (unless only one power source is available). When only one power source is available, it is
recommended to connect it to both units. The PFM03 can then be replaced without affecting traffic,
provided that the second PFM03 is installed and connected to power.

NOTE: The OPT9603 can also be equipped with a PFM03_AC card. In this case the PFP03_AC
occupies both PFM slots and power redundancy is not supported.

Functions
The PFM03 performs the following functions:
 Input DC voltage filtering (-48 V)
 Control and alarms
 Input voltage monitoring
 Hold-up capacitors
 Power Good indication
 Fail indication

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-3

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9603 common cards

Card views
General view

Front panel

Ports and LEDs

Marking Item Functions
POWER ON Green LED Lights steadily when the PFM03 receives input power and operates
normally.
FAIL Red LED Normally off. Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the unit.
POWER IN 2-pin connector Connects the DC power source to the module.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-4

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9603 common cards

8.3 PFM03_AC
Supported platform
 OPT9603

Description
The PFM03_AC is an AC to DC power converter that supplies power to the OPT9603 platform. The unit
occupies the two PFM slots in the OPT9603 and power redundancy is not supported in this option. A divider
bracket, located between the two PFM slots, must be removed to enable the installation of the PFM03_AC
in the OPT9603. The procedure for performing it is described in the OPT9603 Installation and Maintenance
Manual.

Functions
The PFM03_AC provides the following main functions:
 Wide AC input voltage range from 110 VAC to 230 VAC
 Output voltage of 48 VDC with up to 320 W of power
 Input and output voltage filters
 Control and alarms
 DC output voltage indication
 Fail indication

Card views
General view

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-5

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9603 common cards

Front panel

Ports and LEDs

Marking Item Functions
ACTIVE Green LED Lights steadily when the PFM03_AC provides DC output voltage.
FAIL Red LED Normally off. Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the unit.
AC POWER IN 3-pin connector Connects AC power to the unit.

8.4 PFM03_RAC
Supported platform
 OPT9603

Description
The PFM03_RAC is an AC to DC power converter that supplies 48 VDC to the OPT9603 platform. The unit
occupies one PFM slot in the OPT9603. AC power redundancy is supported by installing two PFM03_RAC
cards in the platform. To support the redundancy each PFM03_RAC must be fed from a different AC source.
A single card can provide the total power required by the OPT9603.

WARNING: Before connecting the PFM03_RAC to power, make sure that the AC source is
protected by a 6A circuit breaker.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-6

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9603 common cards

Functions
The PFM03_RAC provides the following main functions:
 Wide AC input voltage range from 110 VAC to 230 VAC (50/60 Hz)
 Output voltage of 48 VDC with up to 320 W of power
 Input and output voltage filters
 Hot swappable card
 Control and alarms
 DC output voltage indication
 Fail indication

Card views
General view

Front panel

Ports and LEDs

Marking Item Functions
POWER ON Green LED Lights steadily when the PFM03_RAC provides DC output voltage.
FAIL Red LED Normally off. Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the unit.
POWER IN 3-pin connector Connects AC power to the unit.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-7

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9603 common cards

8.5 FCM03
Supported platform
 OPT9603

Description
The FCM03 is positioned at the right side of the OPT9603 platform and provides cooling air to the system
from two separate fans. Air is drawn in by the fans from the right side of the chassis and pumped out
through the horizontally mounted cards and modules through the left side of the chassis.
The FCM03 includes a controller that controls the operation of the fans. If one of the fans fails, the second
one operates in turbo mode and the fail LED lights until the FCM03 is replaced. If the operation does not
take more than four minutes, the FCM03 can be extracted and replaced without interrupting the platform
operation (hot swapping). Apollo recommends preparing the replacement module in advance and so
shortening replacement time to a minimum.

WARNINGS:
 Don't leave the OPT9603 platform operating without an FCM03.
 If you must replace an FCM03, don't leave the system without an FCM03 unit for more
than 4 minutes

Functions
The main functions of the FCM03 include:
 Cooling air for the OPT9603 platform
 Controlling the operation of the two fans according to the ambient temperature and sensors on the
OPT9603 platform
 Supporting hot swapping
 Dual power supply -48 VDC support redundancy
 Accommodating the air filter for the fans
 Parallel dual inrush current circuit
 Psophometric filter

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-8

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9603 common cards

Card views
General view

Front panel

Ports and LEDs

Marking Item Functions
ACTIVE Green LED Lights steadily when the card is powered and operating normally.
FAIL Red LED Normally off. Lights steadily when a fault is detected.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-9

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT9603 common cards

8.5.1 FCM03 air filter

Supported platform
 OPT9603

Description
OPT9603 platforms operating in extremely dusty and/or humid environments must be equipped with an air
filter in the dedicated slot on the right side of the FCU.
The purpose of the air filter is to reduce the accumulation of dust and dirt carried by the cooling air flowing
through the platform on its internal components. The combination of dust and humidity produces a
capacitive/conductive layer between components installed on cards and modules. This may degrade
equipment performance or even cause malfunctions. Moreover, the insulating effect of a dust layer causes
components to operate at higher temperatures, so ultimately decreasing equipment reliability.
An air filter reduces dirt accumulation and thus prevents degradation of equipment reliability and
performance. However, filters do increase the resistance to airflow and should therefore carefully be
selected according to the actual operating conditions.
The vendor offers a medium density foam filter, with a density of 25 PPI for the FCM03.

Installing an air filter in the FCM03

Filter maintenance intervals must strictly be observed. These are application-specific and depend on the
environmental conditions. Loaded filters are handled by cleaning or replacing. It is accepted for electronic
equipment design to recommend cleaning/replacing air filters every three months.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 8-10

9 OPT96xx optical cards and modules
Apollo platforms support a wide range of passive optical cards, including C/DWDM Mux/DeMuxes, OADMs,
splitters/couplers, filters, and Dispersion Compensating Fibers (DCFs). These platforms can be deployed
together with Artemis passive optical platforms (that also include a wide range of similar optical cards),
offering a low cost, high modularity, and very high density solution. This leaves the photonic slots in the
Apollo platforms available for active cards, such as optical amplifiers, ROADMs, service cards, and fabric.
In addition we offer a variety of optical amplifiers for the Apollo platforms based on different technologies:
 Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier (EDFA) optical amplifiers, capable of amplifying the entire C band and
supporting multichannel applications. Both fixed gain and variable gain EDFA-based amplifiers are
available.
 Raman optical amplifiers for long-span applications. Raman amplifiers are used in conjunction with
EDFA-based amplifiers to achieve distributed amplification along the fiber, thus minimizing Optical
Signal to Noise Ratio (OSNR) degradation on the amplified link and avoiding nonlinear effects.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-1

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.1 Understanding I/O card slot sizes

The Apollo I/O cards have different sizes. In the following sections the size of each card is defined according
to the number of slots it occupies in Apollo platforms, for example:
 Single-slot cards
 Double-slot cards
 Double-wide-slot cards
 Quad-slot cards
The installation of single-slot and double-wide-slot cards is simple and does not require any preparations.
The installation of the other cards (with slot size other than these), requires removal of mechanical
brackets between the slots to form the slot size. The mechanical procedures required for these operations
are described in the corresponding OPT9624, OPT9608, and OPT9603 Installation and Maintenance
Manual.

Slot size definitions

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-2

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.2 Understanding CD and CDC DWDM

architecture
Apollo's cutting-edge colorless, directionless, and contentionless ROADM architecture addresses operator
demands for greater flexibility and enhanced optical protection options.
 Directionless switching enables the ROADM to connect any signal from any direction (“degree”) or
drop port to any other degree without restriction.
 Colorless switching enables the ROADM to connect an add/drop port to any wavelength without
restriction.
 Contentionless switching means that two or more services can be transmitted from the site in
different directions using the same wavelength channel.
The colorless, directionless, and contentionless (CDC) ROADM network solutions commonly implemented
in the industry today are based on combinations of multicast switches (MCS) and EDFA arrays. Several
limitations are inherent to this approach:
 Insertion loss and EDFA array power scaling
 An EDFA array is required for MCS when working with more than 4-6 add/drop ports. The MCS
loss increases directly with the number of add/drop ports.
 EDFA arrays can leverage uncooled pumps when supporting up to about 16 add/drop ports. For
greater numbers of ports, higher complexity pumps are required.
 Transmitter wideband noise accumulation
Transceivers emit wideband optical noise (Tx_OSNR specification). This wideband noise accumulates
in filterless MCS modules, degrading OSNR before any transmission. More MCS add/drop ports means
proportionately more accumulated noise and degraded OSNR. Using a tunable filter array solves noise
accumulation degradation, by effectively increasing Tx_OSNR. But this approach increases cost, size,
and insertion loss.
 Impact of unwanted channels on Rx
Network configurations include a large number of wavelengths at a single coherent receiver. As port
count (N) increases, the dynamic range of the receiver can become inadequate, resulting in signal
quality degradation. This issue is significantly worse for superchannel transceivers.
 Support for NG superchannel transceivers
The telecom industry is evolving to superchannel transceivers with multiplexed wavelength
subcarriers, such as 2 x 200Gbps for 400Gb/s, and even 4 x 250Gb/s for 1Tbps. A superchannel has
n times more power per CDC add/drop port, where n is the number of superchannel carriers.
Currently, EDFA array power is engineered for only a single channel per port. Multiple channels per
add/drop port requires n-times more output power in the EDFA array. Therefore, supporting 2- and 4-
carrier superchannels with >10 ports per MCS requires complex EDFA arrays.
With all these limitations built into the MCS+EDFA array combination, this approach simply will not work
for NG CDC ROADM networks, which will require:
 Improved cost per add/drop port, allowing them to leverage higher port count modules.
 More add/drop ports per module, increasing from 16 to 24 and up to 32 ports per module with better
total node capacity scalability.
 Support for more degrees, increasing from 8 to 16 and even more.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-3

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

 Channel filtering for improved performance and relaxed transceiver requirements, including Tx_OSNR
and receiver dynamic range.
 Support for superchannel transceivers, which emit multiplexed superchannels, such as 2 x 200Gbps.
Apollo's contentionless solution is not based on the current MCS + EDFA approach. Instead, we 'skip a
generation', and use a NG contentionless MxN WSS configuration, which is a far superior solution:
 Low loss eliminates the need for EDFA arrays, offering a lower cost total solution.
 WSS device cost and loss scales minimally with port count, enabling higher port count and lower cost
per port.
 Without EDFA arrays, there is no power dependency on port count, and we support superchannel
transceivers without specification of power per port.
 WSS passband filters wideband noise, providing high performance independent of port count while
relaxing requirements on Tx and Rx.
For example, in a typical configuration, the ROADM20CF and ROADM_8x24CDCF cards' degree ports are
linked to the degree ports of other ROADMs in the site. The OCHP client ports are linked directly to
transceivers while the OMS client ports are linked to transceivers through splitters and Mux cards. The
client ports can be configured for single or multiple wavelengths per port.

20 degrees of any-to-any CD and CDC connectivity

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-4

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

The preceding figure depicts a typical 3-degree ROADM node that sends/receives traffic to/from East,
West, and North. Each line connecting between the ROADMs represents a physical jumper fiber connection
carrying a programmable, flexible spectrum allocation. The ROADM_20CF (CD) and ROADM_8x24CDCF
(CDC) ROADM units operate as add/drop collectors that concentrate the channels from all directions (East,
West, North) and enable extraction of the required ones.

9.3 Understanding optical network control

parameters
Network designers know what an ideal optical network should include. Modern dynamic mesh optical
networks require automatic power control (APC) based on changes in the network; optical amplifiers
should automatically set their gain to the desired value, and ROADMs should automatically equalize the
power of all channels passing through.
To enable proper gain setting and power equalization along the entire network, Apollo platforms utilize a
set of optical network control parameters (ONCPs) transmitted periodically. These values are generated
independently at any optical node and transmitted through the network, from one optical card to the next
and from one node to the next, following the actual optical transmission direction. Each optical card
updates the ONCP values before transmitting them onward to the adjacent card. The optical gain values are
changed accordingly, as needed.
ONCP data include advanced channel and link parameters beyond power, such as OSNR, dispersion, and
other estimated parameters (a combination of measurements and calculations) that can be used to
dynamically monitor and control the network. Note that real time monitoring of channel parameters is
available at the optical trail (OMS and OCH) and port (OCH or OTS) levels.
The result is simplicity, easier network operation, and significant savings of time and money in terms of real
time fault management, since instead of sending a technician to a remote site with expensive testing
equipment, you have complete information and remote control.

ONCP monitored parameters

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-5

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Optical data is collected from all active optical components, such as transceivers, amplifiers (photo diode
measurements), and ROADM optical channel monitors, as well as intra-node and inter-node connectivity.
Optical data communicated between sites includes fiber type, fiber loss, amplification levels, number of
channels (maximum and active), channel rate, OSNR, chromatic dispersion, distance, attenuation,
non-linear status, and more. As the measured optical parameters are propagated inside each site and then
transferred between the sites, a network and site topology map is created, reflecting the information
collected.
A proprietary algorithm run through the embedded software at the NE level analyzes the gathered
information and fine-tunes the network for equalization and optimization. ONCP functionality is supported
for alien wavelengths too; just create a UME alien transceiver and define the optical parameters according
to the object specifications.
ONCP calculations are used for:
 Automatic gain and power control (APC) for automatic amplifiers and ROADM configuration. With
ONCP, automatic responses to changes in the network, such as fiber attenuation and channel
changes, optimize network efficiency 24/7. This constant automatic tuning is essential for efficient
management of dynamic colorless-directionless networks with WSON restoration, running high bit
rates such as 100 Gbps and 200 Gbps per carrier.
 Indicating optical impairments in real time, informing the NOC engineer of all link optical values,
including OSNR, power, dispersion, and non-linear values. ONCP's real time network analysis gives
network operator full remote control. Collecting the necessary optical information in hand, such as
OSNR and Non-Linear status, is always the first step in analyzing network abnormalities. ONCP
provides all this information with high accuracy, in real time - a key factor in saving precious
debugging time. For example, measuring 100 Gbps/200 Gbps OSNR, especially in ROADM networks,
would otherwise require complicated and expensive Optical Spectrum Analyzers, as well as the time
and overhead required for traveling to the relevant sites.
 Enhanced path finding for WSON. WSON configuration takes into consideration the optical values of
alternative restoration paths. WSON networks use ONCP data to calculate an optically validated
restoration path, crucial to ensure that restored services will actually be able to maintain the highest
SLA.
ONCPs are generated by the transceivers and transmitted along the network following the optical
transmission path. A port receives and transmits the ONCP from/to the ports to which it is physically
connected (either in the same node or in an adjacent node). Upon receiving the ONCP in an input port, the
card updates the ONCP according to predetermined rules, and transmits the updated ONCP to the next
card via an output port. The following figures illustrate ONCP propagation within a site and between sites.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-6

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

ONCP propagation inside a site

Transmission of ONCPs along the network

ONCP enables the following network functionalities:

 Power/gain control in EDFA, ROADM, and FOADM cards.
 Real time diagnostics.
 Span/connection loss diagnostics.
 Performance diagnostics, including channel OSNR, dispersion, polarization mode dispersion (PMD),
and nonlinear phase.
 Performance verification for a preinstalled trail.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-7

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.4 Multi-degree CDC ROADM cards

Operators’ increasing need for capacity and flexibility in DWDM networks is the driving force behind the
development and deployment of a comprehensive set of reconfigurable optical add-drop multiplexer
(ROADM) solutions. ROADMs permit E2E routing of optical wavelengths through multiple nodes without a
need for electronic conversion. They reduce CAPEX and OPEX while providing full management of
wavelength services. A key building block in today's network is the multi-degree ROADM (MD-ROADM).
Apollo offers 2-degree and multi-degree ROADMs that provide native support for 96 channels with 50 GHz
or flexible grid spacing. Native 50 GHz spacing means that there are no additional “Day 2” expenses. The
96-channel ROADM provides better slot utilization, less energy consumption, simpler installation, and
enhanced channel-use flexibility for all 96 channels. Flexible grid spacing optimizes optical spectrum usage
to accommodate different transmission rates, particularly for super-channel transmission rates above 100G
(Flexible Grid DWDM Networks). The ROADM_20TF offers up to 20 degrees of connectivity with other
nodes in the optical network, with complete software-controlled flexibility to switch wavelengths between
incoming and outgoing DWDM streams.
Apollo ROADMs are based on Wavelength Selective Switches (WSS) using core technologies like optical
MEMS for fixed grid 50/100GHz MD-ROADMs, and LCOS for flexible grid MD-ROADMs. On the add side, the
ROADMs connect all wavelengths from input to output (line) ports. Operators can remotely switch or add
any wavelength from any input port to any output port at any time. In add configurations, these ROADMs
can connect access rings to the core ring, dropping wavelengths at remote sites, including star or full mesh
topologies. On the drop side, all wavelengths from the input port are broadcast to all drop ports, optimized
for broadcast video applications. The ROADM_20TF, built around a state-of-the-art 1x20 WSS, employs a
route and select architecture using back-to-back WSS that minimizes insertion loss across the ROADM
node. The ROADM8x24_CDCF is a 4-slot collector ROADM for CDC networks that provides the solution
needed for NG contentionless networks, with support for superchannel transceivers.
MD-ROADM cards support:
 Broadcast function.
 Full n-degree operation for multiple rings, star, and full mesh topologies.
 Cost-effective solution for high channel count.
 Full built-in optical channel monitoring (OCM) for all output channels
 Superior solution for alien wavelengths fed to Apollo DWDM networks from third party equipment
that supports the ITU-T DWDM grid.
 Low insertion loss for through channels.
 Advance protection and restoration.
 Flexible spectrum at 12.5GHz resolution.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-8

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Apollo's cutting-edge colorless, directionless, and contentionless ROADM architecture (CD and CDC DWDM
architecture) with Tunable Filter Array (TFA) modules connected to the local port supplements WSS
ROADM technology to meet operator demands for greater flexibility and enhanced optical protection
options.
 Directionless switching enables the ROADM to connect any signal from any direction (“degree”) or
drop port to any other degree without restriction.
 Colorless switching enables the ROADM to connect an add/drop port to any wavelength without
restriction.
 Contentionless switching means that two or more services can be transmitted from the site in
different directions using the same wavelength channel.

MD-ROADM with colorless/directionless/contentionless functionality

9.4.1 ROADM_20TF
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603

Description
The ROADM_20TF is a 20 degree double-long-slot ROADM card. The ROADM_20TF supports the following:
 Flex-Grid operation over the extended C-band
 96/48 fixed grid channels with 50/100 GHz spacing
 DROP and ADD components implemented by two WSS modules

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-9

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

 OCM (Optical Channel Monitor) including channel power monitoring

 Fiber connectivity module, based on an 100 Mbps, 1528 nm SFP enabling verification and inspection
of the fiber-connectivity for the ROADM OTS Degree ports
 Optical loopback
 WSON operation

Card views
General view

Front panel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-10

Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Ports
Port name Number Function
1-20 20 pairs Degree ports with LC connectors
The path-through (input) signal is connected to the IN connector in the pair
and the path-through (output) comes out through the OUT connector in the
pair. The marking OUT and IN near the connectors identifies the function of
each of the corresponding ports. Note: The function ADD and DROP of each
duplex connector in the upper row are reversed in the lower row.
LINE 1 pair
Line port with LC connector
MON -20dB 1
Monitor port for connection of line monitoring equipment

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is
no fault in the module.
Degree port LEDs
Red LED Each channel's indicator lights if insufficient power is detected at the
, DEGREE corresponding Degree (Add) input.
LOS (Ports 1 to 20)
Note: he direction of the arrow near each LED points to the
corresponding port it is indicating. For example, the arrow near the left
LED under ports 1 and 2 points up, meaning the LED will indicate a LOS
condition at the input (Add) of port 1. The arrow near the left LED,
under these ports, points down and will indicate a LOS condition at the
input (Add) of port 2.
Red LED Lights steadily when a LOS condition is detected at the line input.
LOS (LINE)

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-11

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Block diagram

External Tx-Rx optical loopback

ROADM optical loopback functionality enables fiber verification through loopback of any selected channel
entering the line input port. The optical loopback is provided only for the line port, and only for a single
channel at a time.
To enable loopback functionality, one of the Degree ports is physically connected to itself and then
configured as a "Tx-Rx-loop" using STMS. A channel entering the line input port is looped back by
configuring a bi-directional cross-connect between the line port and the Tx-Rx-loop port at the specified
wavelength.
To configure a Tx-Rx-loop port:
 Select a single Degree port to be configured as the Tx-Rx-loop port.
 Use STMS to:
 Delete all cross-connects on the selected Degree port.
 Delete all fiber-connectivity of the selected Degree port.
 Connect a fiber patch cord between the input and output connectors of the Degree port to be tested.
 Use STMS to configure the port as a Tx-Rx-loop. The necessary fiber connectivity between the port
input and output is generated automatically.
See Run an optical loopback in the STMS User Guide.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-12

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Simplified ROADM_20TF loopback block diagram

9.4.2 ROADM_20CF
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603

Description
The ROADM_20CF is a double-long-slot field configurable collector card with 20 ports. The ports are field
configured to be either degree or client ports. The ROADM_20CF supports the following:
 Field configurable: 4,6, or 8 degree ports with 16, 14, or 12 client ports respectively
 Flex-Grid operation over the extended C-band
 96/48 fixed grid channels with 50/100 GHz spacing
 Fiber connectivity module, based on an 100 Mbps, 1528 nm SFP enabling verification and inspection
of the fiber-connectivity for the ROADM OTS Degree ports
 WSON operation
 Internal optical loopback of client port
 OCM (Optical Channel Monitor) including channel power monitoring
 DROP and ADD components implemented by two WSS modules
 Colorless directionless applications
 Optical power monitoring (via PDs) of degree input ports

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-13

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

 Reconfigurable Add/Drop of any desired channel from any degree port to/from any client port
 Indirect connection between ROADM site transceivers and the line ROADMs

Card views
General view

Front panel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-14

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Ports
Each port has an input and an output connector. The function of each connector (input or output) varies
according to row and configuration. You must adhere to the port connectivity rules listed in the following
tables.
Port name Number Connector
1-4 4 pairs Degree ports with LC connectors
5-8 4 pairs
Configurable Degree or client ports with LC connectors

9-20 12 pairs Client only ports with LC connectors

Port Connectivity rules

Port Row Port Function Left side Right side

Upper
Degree B Output (Drop) A Input (Add)
Client B Input (Add) A Output (Drop)
Lower
Client A Output (Drop) B Input (Add)

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off when
the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no fault in
the module.
Degree Port LEDs
(Ports 1 Red LED Each channel's indicator lights if insufficient power is detected at the
to 8) corresponding Degree (Add) input.
Note: The card includes 8 Degree port LEDs at the bottom of the panel. These
LEDS relate to the ports in the upper row configured as Degree ports.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-15

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Block diagram

Internal Tx-Rx optical loopback

ROADM_20CF optical loopback functionality enables fiber verification through loopback of any selected
channel entering a client port. The loopback mechanism is implemented through an internal port in which
the transmit and receive are directly connected. Loopback is configured by directing the required channel
in a client port to the internal port and receiving it back again.
See Run an optical loopback in the STMS User Guide.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-16

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.4.2.1 ROADM_20CF applications

The ROADM_20CF main application is as a collector in Colorless-Directionless network nodes. A simplified
block diagram of this application is shown in the following figure.

ROADM_20CF applications

The node ROADMs, connected to the ROADM_20CF Degree ports can be of different types like:
ROADM_4F, ROADM_9F, ROADM_20TF, etc.
The ROADM_20CF supports several options for connecting to the Client ports, including:
 Direct connection of a single Coherent or non-Coherent transceiver to a Client port configured as
OCHP channel.
 When the Client port is configured as OTS channel, several Coherent transceivers, can be connected
through a Splitter/Coupler outputs/inputs. This application supports Coherent transceivers only. In
addition the connection of the Splitter/Coupler must be made through an amplification block to
compensates for the Splitter/Coupler attenuation.
 Another option to connect several transceivers to a single Client port configured as OTS channel is
through a Mux/DeMux. In this case, the transceivers are 10 G, non-Coherent connected to the
Mux/DeMux ports. The Mux/DeMux is connected to the Client port through an amplification block
that compensates for the Mux/DeMux attenuation.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-17

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.4.3 ROADM_8x24CDCF
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608

Description
The ROADM_8x24CDCF is a 4-slot (double-wide and double-long) ROADM card with 8 degree ports and 24
client ports. The ROADM_8x24CDCF supports the following:
 8 degree ports
 24 client colorless directionless contentionless (CDC) ports
 Flex-Grid operation over the extended C-band
 96/48 fixed grid channels with 50/100 GHz spacing
 Internal optical loopback
 DROP and ADD components implemented by double WSS modules

Card views
General view

Front panel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-18

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Ports
The OUT/IN label near the connectors identifies the function of each of the corresponding ports. The input
signal is connected to the IN (ADD) connector in the pair and the output signal comes out through the OUT
(DROP) connector
Port name Number Function
DEGREE (n) 8 pairs Degree ports with LC connectors
CLIENT (n) 24 pairs
Client ports with LC connectors
MON -20dB 1
Monitor port for connection of line monitoring equipment

(n) port number

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed
configurations). Off when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when
there is no fault in the module.
Port LEDs
DEGREES LOS (n) Red LEDs Each channel's indicator lights if insufficient power is detected
at the corresponding DEGREE port input.

(n) port number

Block diagram

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-19

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Internal Tx-Rx optical loopback

ROADM_8x24CDCF optical loopback functionality enables fiber verification through loopback of any
selected channel entering a client port. The loopback mechanism is implemented through an internal port
in which the transmit and receive are directly connected. Loopback is configured by directing the required
channel in a client port to the internal port and receiving it back again.
See Run an optical loopback in the STMS User Guide.

9.4.4 ROADM_9TF
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603

Description
The ROADM_9TF is a 9 degree double-slot ROADM card. The ROADM_9TF supports the following:
 Flex-Grid operation over the extended C-band
 96/48 fixed grid channels with 50/100 GHz spacing
 DROP and ADD components implemented by two WSS modules
 OCM (Optical Channel Monitor) including channel power monitoring
 Fiber connectivity module, based on an 100 Mbps, 1528 nm SFP enabling verification and inspection
of the fiber-connectivity for the ROADM OTS Degree ports
 Internal optical loopback
 Power equalization of the channels at the line output
 WSON operation

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-20

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Card views
General view

Front panel

Ports
Port name Number Function
DEGREES (n) 9 pairs Degree ports with LC connectors
The input (ADD) and output (DROP) of each port is identified by the marking
below each port as IN and OUT
LINE 1 pair
Line port with LC connector
The input output is identified by the marking as IN and OUT below the port
MON -20dB 1
Monitor port for connection of line monitoring equipment

(n) Port number

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-21

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is
no fault in the module.
Port LEDs
Red LED Lights steadily when a LOS condition is detected at the corresponding
LOS (DEG ports
Degree (Add) input.
1 to 9)
Red LED Lights steadily when a LOS condition is detected at the LINE input.
LOS (LINE)

Block diagram

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-22

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Internal Tx-Rx optical loopback

ROADM_9TF optical loopback functionality enables fiber verification through loopback of any selected
channel entering the line port. The optical loopback is provided only for the line port, and only for a single
channel at a time. The loopback mechanism is implemented through an internal ("10th Degree") port in
which the transmit and receive are directly connected. This port is then configured as a "Tx-Rx-loop" using
STMS. Any Degree port can be configured as a Tx-Rx-loop port.
A channel entering the line input port is looped back by configuring a bi-directional cross-connect between
the line port and the Tx-Rx-loop port at the specified wavelength.
To configure a Tx-Rx-loop port:
 Select a single Degree port to be configured as the Tx-Rx-loop port.
 Use STMS to:
 Delete all cross-connects on the selected Degree port.
 Delete all fiber-connectivity of the selected Degree port.
 Configure the port as a Tx-Rx-loop. The necessary fiber connectivity between the port input and
output is generated automatically.
See Run an optical loopback in the STMS User Guide.

Loopback block diagram

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-23

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.4.5 ROADM_9FS
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603

Description
The ROADM_9FS is a 9-degree single-slot ROADM card that supports the following:
 Flex-Grid operation over the extended C-band
 96/48 fixed grid channels with 50/100 GHz spacing
 DROP component implemented by a 1 x 9 splitter
 ADD component implemented by a WSS module
 OCM (Optical Channel Monitor)

Card views
General view

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-24

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Front panel

Ports
The path-through (input) signal is connected to the IN connector in the pair and the path-through (output)
comes out through the OUT connector in the pair. The marking OUT and IN near the connectors identifies
the function of each of the corresponding ports.
Marking Number Function
DEGREES (1-9) 9 pairs Add and Drop ports
LOCAL-DEG1 Dual purpose LOCAL and DEG1 port
LINE 1 pair
LINE IN (0) and LINE OUT (0)
MON -20dB 1
Monitors the line output signal for connecting monitoring
equipment

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed
configurations). Off when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when
there is no fault in the module.
Port LEDs
, LINE and Red LEDs Each channel's indicator lights if insufficient power is
DEGREES LOS detected at the corresponding LINE or DEGREE port input.
(Ports 0 to 9)

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-25

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Block diagram
ROADM_9FS functional block diagram

External Tx-Rx optical loopback

ROADM optical loopback functionality enables fiber verification through loopback of any selected channel
entering the line input port. The optical loopback is provided only for the line port, and only for a single
channel at a time.
To enable loopback functionality, one of the Degree ports is physically connected to itself and then
configured as a "Tx-Rx-loop" using STMS. A channel entering the line input port is looped back by
configuring a bi-directional cross-connect between the line port and the Tx-Rx-loop port at the specified
wavelength.
To configure a Tx-Rx-loop port:
 Select a single Degree port to be configured as the Tx-Rx-loop port.
 Use STMS to:
 Delete all cross-connects on the selected Degree port.
 Delete all fiber-connectivity of the selected Degree port.
 Connect a fiber patch cord between the input and output connectors of the Degree port to be tested.
 Use STMS to configure the port as a Tx-Rx-loop. The necessary fiber connectivity between the port
input and output is generated automatically.
See Run an optical loopback in the STMS User Guide.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-26

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.4.6 ROADM_9F
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603

Description
The ROADM_9F is a 9-degree double-slot ROADM card that supports the following:
 Flex-Grid operation over the extended C-band
 96/48 fixed grid channels with 50/100 GHz spacing
 DROP component implemented by a 1 x 9 splitter
 ADD component implemented by a WSS module
 OCM (Optical Channel Monitor)

Card views
General view

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-27

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Front panel

Ports
The path-through (input) signal is connected to the ADD connector in the pair and the path-through
(output) comes out through the DROP connector in the pair.
The marking ADD and DROP near the connectors identifies the function of each of the corresponding ports.
Port name Number Function
DEG (1-9) 9 pairs ADD and DROP ports
DEG1 Dual purpose LOCAL and DEG1 port
LINE 1 pair
LINE IN (0) and LINE OUT (0)
MON -20dB 1
Monitors the line output signal for connecting monitoring equipment

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
LOS Green Lights when the card is (assigned and completed configurations). Off
LED when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow Currently not in use.
LED
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is
no fault in the module.
Port LEDs
DEG (1)-DEG (9) LOS Red LEDs Each channel's indicator lights if insufficient power is detected at the
corresponding DEGREE port input.
LINE LOS Red LED Lights if insufficient power is detected at the LINE port input.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-28

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Block diagram

External Tx-Rx optical loopback

ROADM optical loopback functionality enables fiber verification through loopback of any selected channel
entering the line input port. The optical loopback is provided only for the line port, and only for a single
channel at a time.
To enable loopback functionality, one of the Degree ports is physically connected to itself and then
configured as a "Tx-Rx-loop" using STMS. A channel entering the line input port is looped back by
configuring a bi-directional cross-connect between the line port and the Tx-Rx-loop port at the specified
wavelength.
To configure a Tx-Rx-loop port:
 Select a single Degree port to be configured as the Tx-Rx-loop port.
 Use STMS to:
 Delete all cross-connects on the selected Degree port.
 Delete all fiber-connectivity of the selected Degree port.
 Connect a fiber patch cord between the input and output connectors of the Degree port to be tested.
 Use STMS to configure the port as a Tx-Rx-loop. The necessary fiber connectivity between the port
input and output is generated automatically.
See Run an optical loopback in the STMS User Guide.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-29

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.4.7 ROADM_9A50
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608

Description
The ROADM_9A50 is a 9-degree double-wide slot ROADM card that supports the following:
 88 channels with 50 GHz spacing in the C band
 Compatible with all 10 Gbps, 40 Gbps, and 100 Gbps cards

Card views
General view

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-30

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Front panel

Ports
The marking ADD and DROP near the connectors identifies the function of each of the corresponding ports.
Port name Number Function
DEG (1-9) 9 pairs Add and Drop ports
LOCAL-DEG1 Dual purpose LOCAL and DEG1 port
LINE 1 pair
LINE IN (0) and LINE OUT (0)
MON -20dB 1
Monitors the line output signal for connecting monitoring
equipment

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations).
Off when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is
no fault in the module.
Port LEDs
DEG (2-9) LOS Red LEDs Each channel's indicator lights if insufficient power is detected at the
corresponding port input.
LOCAL/DEG (1) LOS Red LED Lights if insufficient power is detected at the LOCAL port input.
LINE LOS Red LED Lights if insufficient power is detected at the LINE port input.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-31

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Block diagram

External Tx-Rx optical loopback

ROADM optical loopback functionality enables fiber verification through loopback of any selected channel
entering the line input port. The optical loopback is provided only for the line port, and only for a single
channel at a time.
To enable loopback functionality, one of the Degree ports is physically connected to itself and then
configured as a "Tx-Rx-loop" using STMS. A channel entering the line input port is looped back by
configuring a bi-directional cross-connect between the line port and the Tx-Rx-loop port at the specified
wavelength.
To configure a Tx-Rx-loop port:
 Select a single Degree port to be configured as the Tx-Rx-loop port.
 Use STMS to:
 Delete all cross-connects on the selected Degree port.
 Delete all fiber-connectivity of the selected Degree port.
 Connect a fiber patch cord between the input and output connectors of the Degree port to be tested.
 Use STMS to configure the port as a Tx-Rx-loop. The necessary fiber connectivity between the port
input and output is generated automatically.
See Run an optical loopback in the STMS User Guide.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-32

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.4.8 ROADM_4FS
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603

Description
The ROADM_4FS is a 4-degree single-slot ROADM card that includes all the features and functionality of the
double-slot ROADM_4F.
The ROADM_4FS supports the following:
 Flex-Grid operation over the extended C-band
 96/48 fixed grid channels with 50/100 GHz spacing
 DROP component implemented by a 1 x 4 splitter
 ADD component implemented by a WSS module
 OCM (Optical Channel Monitor)
 Colored, colorless/directionless, or colorless/directionless/contentionless (CDC) sites, by adding the
relevant collector cards
 2 pluggable CFP2 MSA amplifiers:
 Booster (OPA_FBS)
 Pre-amp (OPA_LFS or OPA_HFS)
 Built-in OSC

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-33

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Card views
General view

Front panel

Ports
The marking OUT and IN near the connectors identifies the function of each of the corresponding ports.
Marking Number Function
DEG (1-4) 4 pairs Add and Drop ports
DEG1 Dual purpose LOCAL and DEG1 port
LINE 1 pair
LINE IN (0) and LINE OUT (0)
MON -20dB 1
Monitors the line output signal for connecting monitoring equipment
Pluggable Pre-Amp/Booster EDFA amplifiers marked 11-13 and 21-23
PRE-AMP 2

OSC 1 Built-in OSC filter

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-34

Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
LED when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow Currently not in use.
LED
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no
fault in the module.
Amplifier LEDs
LOS Red LED Lights steadily when the signal on the return line (fiber) is missing. This
usually indicates a fiber cut.
ON Green Lights when the output power of the amplifier is above the threshold
LED level.
OSC LEDs
Tx Green Lights steadily when the OSC laser transmits.
LED
F/L Red LED Blinks when the OSC input signal is missing, or is too low for normal
operation. Lights when a fault is detected in the OSC path.
Port LEDs
, LINE and Red LEDs Each channel's indicator lights if insufficient power is detected at the
DEGREES LOS corresponding LINE or DEGREE port input.
(Ports 0 to 4)

Block diagram

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-35

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.4.9 ROADM_4F
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603

Description
The ROADM_4F is a 4-degree double-slot ROADM card that supports the following:
 Flex-Grid operation over the extended C-band
 96/48 fixed grid channels with 50/100 GHz spacing
 DROP component implemented by a 1 x 4 splitter
 ADD component implemented by a WSS module
 OCM (Optical Channel Monitor)

Card views
General view

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-36

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Front panel

Ports
The path-through (input) signal is connected to the ADD connector in the pair and the path-through
(output) comes out through the DROP connector in the pair.
The marking ADD and DROP near the connectors identifies the function of each of the corresponding ports.
Marking Number Function
DEGREE 4 pairs Add and Drop ports
LOCAL-DEG1 Dual purpose LOCAL and DEG1 port
LINE 1 pair
LINE IN (0) and LINE OUT (0)
MON -20dB 1
Monitors the line output signal for connecting monitoring equipment

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed
configurations). Off when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when
there is no fault in the module.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-37

Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Marking Item Functions

Port LEDs
DEG (2)-DEG (4) LOS Red LEDs Each channel's indicator lights if insufficient power is
detected at the corresponding port input.
LOCAL/DEG (1) LOS Red LED Lights if insufficient power is detected at the LOCAL port
input.
LINE LOS Red LED Lights if insufficient power is detected at the LINE port input.

Block diagram

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-38

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.4.10 ROADM_4A
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608

Description
The ROADM_4A is a 4-degree double-slot ROADM card that supports the following:
 44 channels with 100 GHz spacing in the C band
 Compatible with all 10 Gbps, 40 Gbps, and 100 Gbps cards

Card views
General view

Front panel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-39

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Ports
The path-through (input) signal is connected to the ADD connector in the pair and the path-through
(output) comes out through the DROP connector in the pair. The marking ADD and DROP near the
connectors identifies the function of each of the corresponding ports.
Marking Number Function
DEG (1-4) 4 pairs ADD and DROP ports
LOCAL-DEG1 Dual purpose LOCAL and DEG1 port
LINE 1 pair
LINE IN (0) and LINE OUT (0)
MON -20dB 1
Monitors the line output signal for connecting monitoring equipment

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
LED when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow Currently not in use.
LED
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is
no fault in the module.
Port LEDs
DEG (2)-DEG (4) LOS Red LEDs Each channel's indicator lights if insufficient power is detected at the
corresponding port input.
LOCAL/DEG (1) LOS Red LED Lights if insufficient power is detected at the LOCAL port input.
LINE LOS Red LED Lights if insufficient power is detected at the LINE port input.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-40

Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Block diagram

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-41

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.4.11 ROADM_4A50
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608

Description
The ROADM_4A50 was originally designed as a 4-degree double-slot ROADM card that supports the
following:
 88 channels with 50 GHz spacing in the C band
 Compatible with all 10 Gbps, 40 Gbps, and 100 Gbps cards
Upon system upgrade to V9.0, the ROADM_4A50 will automatically be upgraded to ROADM_4F
functionality, enabling Flex-Grid operation.

Card views
General view

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-42

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Front panel

Ports
The marking ADD and DROP near the connectors identifies the function of each of the corresponding ports.
Marking Number Function
DEG (1-4) 4 pairs Add and Drop ports
LOCAL/DEG1 Dual purpose LOCAL and DEG1 port
LINE 1 pair
LINE IN (0) and LINE OUT (0)
MON -20dB 1
Monitors the line output signal for connecting monitoring
equipment

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed
configurations). Off when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off
when there is no fault in the module.
Port LEDs
DEG (2)-DEG (4) LOS Red LEDs Each channel's indicator lights if insufficient power is
detected at the corresponding port input.
LOCAL/DEG (1) LOS Red LED Lights if insufficient power is detected at the LOCAL
port input.
LINE LOS Red LED Lights if insufficient power is detected at the LINE port
input.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-43

Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Block diagram

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-44

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.4.12 ROADM_2A
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608

Description
The ROADM_2A is a 2-degree double-slot ROADM card that supports the following:
 44 channels with 100 GHz spacing in the C band
 Compatible with all 10 Gbps, 40 Gbps, and 100 Gbps cards

Card views
Front panel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-45

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Ports
The path-through (input) signal is connected to the ADD connector in the pair and the path-through
(output) comes out through the DROP connector in the pair. The marking ADD and DROP near the
connectors identifies the function of each of the corresponding ports.
Marking Number Function
EXPRESS 1 pair EXPRESS IN and EXPRESS OUT
LOCAL 1 pair LOCAL IN and LOCAL OUT
LINE 1 pair
LINE IN and LINE OUT
MON -20dB 1
Monitors the line output signal for connecting monitoring equipment

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is
no fault in the module.
Port LEDs
EXPRESS LOS Red LEDs Lights if insufficient power is detected at the EXPRESS input.
LOCAL LOS Red LED Lights if insufficient power is detected at the LOCAL input.
LINE LOS Red LED Lights if insufficient power is detected at the LINE input.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-46

Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Block diagram

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-47

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.4.13 ROADM_2A50
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608

Description
The ROADM_2A50 is a 2-degree wide double-slot ROADM card. The ROADM_2A50 supports the following:
 88 channels with 50 GHz spacing in the C band
 Compatible with all 10 Gbps, 40 Gbps, and 100 Gbps cards

Card views
General view

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-48

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Front panel

Ports
The path-through (input) signal is connected to the ADD connector in the pair and the path-through
(output) comes out through the DROP connector in the pair. The marking ADD and DROP near the
connectors identifies the function of each of the corresponding ports.
Marking Number Function
EXPRESS 1 pair EXPRESS IN and EXPRESS OUT
LOCAL 1 pair LOCAL IN and LOCAL OUT
LINE 1 pair
LINE IN and LINE OUT
MON -20dB 1
Monitors the line output signal for connecting monitoring equipment

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is
no fault in the module.
Port LEDs
EXPRESS LOS Red LEDs Lights if insufficient power is detected at the EXPRESS input.
LOCAL LOS Red LED Lights if insufficient power is detected at the LOCAL input.
LINE LOS Red LED Lights if insufficient power is detected at the LINE input.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-49

Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Block diagram

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-50

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.4.14 TFA_8
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608

Description
The TFA_8 is a Tunable Filter Array card that occupies a double-slot. It provides the colorless functionality
for the ROADM cards. It enables the operator to control the color of the drop ports. The TFA_8 supports
the following:
 Colorless Add/Drop of up to eight 50 GHz spaced DWDM channels
 88 DWDM channels of the ITU-T 50 GHz grid (Ch. 17 to Ch. 60.5)
 Compatible with all 10 Gbps, 40 Gbps, and 100 Gbps cards

Card views
General view

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-51

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Front panel

Ports
The path-through (input) signal is connected to the IN connector in the pair and the path-through (output)
comes out through the OUT connector in the pair.
Port name Number Function
C (1-8) 8 pairs
MON 1 Local monitoring
LINE 1 pair
LINE IN and LINE OUT

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily if a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no
fault in the TFA_8.
Line Port LEDs
LOS Red LED Lights if insufficient power is detected at the LINE input.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-52

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Block diagram
The TFA_8 card includes eight tunable filters that determine the individual wavelength that will be dropped
in a certain port of a ROADM. The card has two sections (drop and add), each with its own line input and
line output connectors.

The incoming signal to the drop section is connected to the line connector LINE IN. The drop section is
implemented by a 1 x 8 splitter followed by an 8 channel tunable filter unit. In addition, a controller unit,
connected through the RS232 interface to the system's management, enables controlling the channels that
are dropped by the filters. The output signals from the eight splitter ports are fed into eight independent
tunable filters (wavelength blockers). The tunable filter can block or pass individual channels according to
control signals received from the management as configured by the user. The resulting drop signals are
provided at the C1 OUT to C8 OUT connectors.
The add section includes a 1 x 8 splitter that receives signals through eight input C1 IN to C8 IN connectors,
combines them, and provides the resulting signal at the LINE OUT connector. An isolator on the output line
prevents reflection from the connected WSS. In addition, a sample of the output add-signal is connected to
the monitoring port MON, enabling monitoring the signal for test or maintenance purposes.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-53

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.5 Mux/DeMux cards

Apollo platforms offer a range of passive Mux/DeMux cards. The DWDM Mux/DeMux cards are based on
flat-top technology, enabling back-to-back connectivity with lower attenuation compared to other
technologies. With this configuration, minimal (if any) regeneration is required for the back-to-back
Mux/DeMux connectivity. Mux/DeMux cards are available for DWDM with 8, 16, 44, 48, 88, or 96 channels.
The following sections describe the Mux/DeMux cards available for Apollo platforms:
 MXD88
 MXD44
 MXD16
 MXD8
 MXD4_B

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-54

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.5.1 MXD88
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608

Description
The MXD88 is a quad-slot DWDM Mux/DeMux card for 88 channels in the C band (includes Ch. 17 to Ch.
60.5 with 50 GHz spacing) and E/W configuration. The system management can detect and read MXD88
properties like the Serial No. and HW Rev. All connections to the card are through LC type connectors on
the front panel.

Card views
Front panel

The two sections of the front panel are:

 Mux: Operates as an 88-channel (50 GHz spacing) C band multiplexer. This section has a group of 88
CHxx connectors (xx designates the channel number), each marked with the number of the channel in
accordance with the ITU T Recommendation G.694.1 grid. The marking M at the right side of the
panel identifies the corresponding multiplexer port input. The Mux output connector is identified as
LINE OUT. The LINE OUT level can be monitored at the MON -20 dB OUT connector.
 DeMux: Operates as an 88-channel (50 GHz spacing) C band demultiplexer. This section has a group of
88 CH Dxx connectors (xx designates the channel number) also marked with the G.694.1 channel
number. The marking D at the right side of the panel identifies the corresponding demultiplexer port
output. The DeMux input connector is identified as LINE IN. The LINE IN level can be monitored at the
MON -20 dB IN connector.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-55

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Block diagram
88-channel C band Mux/DeMux functional block diagram

The functional block diagram of the MXD88 shows:

 The Mux section, whose functional block diagram is shown in part A of the preceding figure, combines
the optical signals applied to the CHxx connectors (xx designates the channel number), and provides
the resulting signal at the connector marked LINE OUT.
The -20 dB/0 dB splitter connected in the line output path provides a -20 dB sample of the optical
output signal to the MON -20dB OUT connector, thereby enabling monitoring of the optical Mux
output signal.
 The DeMux section, whose functional block diagram is shown in part B of the previous figure,
separates the optical signals applied to the LINE IN connector in accordance with their wavelength,
and provides the resulting signals at the CHxx connectors (xx designates the channel number).
The -20 dB/0 dB splitter connected in the line input path provides a -20 dB sample of the optical input
signal to the MON -20dB IN connector, thereby enabling monitoring of the optical DeMux input
signal.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-56

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.5.2 MXD44
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603

Description
The MXD44 is a double-slot DWDM Mux/DeMux card for 44 channels in the C band (Ch. 17-Ch. 60) with 100
GHz spacing and E/W configuration. The system management can detect and read MXD44 properties like
the Serial No. and HW Rev. All connections to the card are through LC type connectors on the front panel.

Card views
General view

Front panel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-57

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

The two sections of the front panel are:

 Mux: Operates as a 44-channel C band multiplexer. This section has a group of 44 CHxx connectors (xx
designates the channel number), each marked with the number of the channel in accordance with the
ITU T Recommendation G.694.1 grid. The marking M at the right side of the panel identifies the
corresponding multiplexer port input. The Mux output connector is identified as LINE OUT. The LINE
OUT level can be monitored at the MON -20 dB OUT connector.
 DeMux: Operates as a 44-channel C band demultiplexer. This section has a group of 44 CHxx
connectors (xx designates the channel number), also marked with the G.694.1 channel number. The
marking D at the right side of the panel identifies the corresponding demultiplexer port output. The
DeMux input connector is identified as LINE IN. The LINE IN level can be monitored at the MON -20 dB
IN connector.

Block diagram

The functional block diagram of the MXD44 shows:

 The Mux section, whose functional block diagram is shown in part A of the preceding figure, combines
the optical signals applied to the CHxx connectors (xx designates the channel number), and provides
the resulting signal at the connector marked LINE OUT.
The -20 dB/0 dB splitter connected in the line output path provides a -20 dB sample of the optical
output signal to the MON -20dB OUT connector, thereby enabling monitoring of the optical Mux
output signal.
 The DeMux section, whose functional block diagram is shown in part B of the previous figure,
separates the optical signals applied to the LINE IN connector in accordance with their wavelength,
and provides the resulting signals at the CHxx connectors (xx designates the channel number).
The -20 dB/0 dB splitter connected in the line input path provides a -20 dB sample of the optical input
signal to the MON -20dB IN connector, thereby enabling monitoring of the optical DeMux input
signal.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-58

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.5.3 MXD16
Description
The MXD16 is a single-slot DWDM Mux/DeMux card for 16 channels in the C band (Ch. 21-Ch. 36) with 100
GHz spacing and E/W configuration. All connections to the card are through LC type connectors on the
front panel.

Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603
 Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A

Card views
MXD16 general view

MXD16 front panel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-59

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

The two sections of the front panel are:

 Mux: Operates as a 16-channel C band multiplexer. This section has a group of 16 CHxx connectors (xx
designates the channel number), each marked with the number of the channel in accordance with the
ITU T Recommendation G.694.1 grid. The marking M at the right side of the panel identifies the
corresponding multiplexer port input. The Mux output connector is identified as LINE OUT. The LINE
OUT level can be monitored at the MON -20 dB OUT connector.
 DeMux: Operates as a 16-channel C band demultiplexer. This section has a group of 16 CHxx
connectors (xx designates the channel number) also marked with the G.694.1 channel number. The
marking D at the right side of the panel identifies the corresponding demultiplexer port output. The
DeMux input connector is identified as LINE IN. The LINE IN level can be monitored at the MON -20 dB
IN connector.

Functional block diagram

The functional block diagram of the MXD16 shows:

 The Mux section, whose functional block diagram is shown in part A of the preceding figure, combines
the optical signals applied to the CHxx connectors (xx designates the channel number), and provides
the resulting signal at the connector marked LINE OUT.
The -20 dB/0 dB splitter connected in the line output path provides a - 20 dB sample of the optical
output signal to the MON -20dB OUT connector, thereby enabling monitoring of the optical Mux
output signal.
 The DeMux section, whose functional block diagram is shown in part B of the previous figure,
separates the optical signals applied to the LINE IN connector in accordance with their wavelength,
and provides the resulting signals at the CHxx connectors (xx designates the channel number).
The -20 dB/0 dB splitter connected in the line input path provides a - 20 dB sample of the optical input
signal to the MON -20dB IN connector, thereby enabling monitoring of the optical DeMux input
signal.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-60

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.5.4 MXD8
Description
The MXD8 is a single-slot DWDM Mux/DeMux card for 8 channels in the C band (Ch. 21-Ch. 28) with 100
GHz spacing and E/W configuration. All connections to the card are through LC type connectors on the
front panel.

Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603
 Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A

Card views
MXD8 general view

MXD8 front panel

The two sections of the front panel are:

 Mux: Operates as a 8-channel C band multiplexer. This section has a group of 8 CHxx connectors (xx
designates the channel number), each marked with the number of the channel in accordance with the
ITU T Recommendation G.694.1 grid. The marking M at the right side of the panel identifies the
corresponding multiplexer port input. The Mux output connector is identified as LINE OUT. The LINE
OUT level can be monitored at the MON -20 dB OUT connector.
 DeMux: Operates as a 8-channel C band demultiplexer. This section has a group of 8 CHxx connectors
(xx designates the channel number) also marked with the G.694.1 channel number. The marking D at
the right side of the panel identifies the corresponding demultiplexer port output. The DeMux input
connector is identified as LINE IN. The LINE IN level can be monitored at the MON -20 dB IN
connector.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-61

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

MXD8 functional block diagram

The functional block diagram of the MXD8 shows:

 The Mux section, whose functional block diagram is shown in part A of the preceding figure, combines
the optical signals applied to the CHxx connectors (xx designates the channel number), and provides
the resulting signal at the connector marked LINE OUT.
The -20 dB/0 dB splitter connected in the line output path provides a - 20 dB sample of the optical
output signal to the MON -20dB OUT connector, thereby enabling monitoring of the optical Mux
output signal.
 The DeMux section, whose functional block diagram is shown in part B of the previous figure,
separates the optical signals applied to the LINE IN connector in accordance with their wavelength,
and provides the resulting signals at the CHxx connectors (xx designates the channel number).
The -20 dB/0 dB splitter connected in the line input path provides a - 20 dB sample of the optical input
signal to the MON -20dB IN connector, thereby enabling monitoring of the optical DeMux input
signal.

9.5.5 MXD4_B
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603
 Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A

Description
The MXD4_B is a single-slot Band Mux/DeMux for up to four bands into a transmission fiber. The MXD4_B
has 4 Band ports and a single line port. Each of its four Band ports enables the Multiplexing/DeMultiplexing
of the 100 Gbps Band transceivers (OTR100_ER10DR_Bx and OTR100_ZR10DR_Bx).
The bandwidth of each Band is slightly bigger than 1 Tbps, enabling add/drop of the 10 DWDM channels of
the OTR100. Each Band is composed of ten DWDM channels. Each of the MXD4_Band ports is connected to
an internal wide filter that enables the add/drop of the 10 DWDM channels.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-62

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Card views
General view

Front panel

The two sections of the front panel are:

 Mux: Operates as a 4-band (in the C band) multiplexer. This section has a group of 4 x LC connectors,
each marked with a range: CH 19-28, CH 30-39, CH 41-50, CH 52-61. The numbers correspond to the
first and last channel (out of 10), (in accordance with the ITU T Recommendation G.694.1 grid) that it
is capable to pass. The marking M at the right side of the panel identifies the corresponding
multiplexer port input. The Mux output connector is identified as LINE OUT. The LINE OUT level can
be monitored at the MON -20 dB OUT connector.
 DeMux: Operates as a 4-band (in the C band) demultiplexer. This section has a group of 4 x LC
connectors, also marked with the G.694.1 channel number range. The marking D at the right side of
the panel identifies the corresponding demultiplexer port output. The DeMux input connector is
identified as LINE IN. The LINE IN level can be monitored at the MON -20 dB IN connector.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-63

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Block diagram

The MXD4_B card is designed to operate in an E/W configuration. The card has two sections (drop and
add), each with its own line input and line output connectors:
 The incoming line signal is applied to the line input connector LINE IN. The drop section is
implemented by four serial 100 GHz band pass filters. Each filter extracts the corresponding band
signal (each composed of 10 channel signals) from the LINE IN signal.
 The dropped band channel signals appear at the corresponding connectors CH 19-28, CH 30-39, CH
41-50, and CH 52-61 (the numbers designate the range of the band and the specific channels).
The -20 dB/0 dB splitter connected in the line input path provides a - 20 dB sample of the optical input
signal to the MON -20dB IN connector, thereby enabling monitoring of the optical input signal.
 The add section includes four serial 100 GHz band pass filters which combine the corresponding band
signals (each composed of 10 channel signals) applied to the CH 19-28, CH 30-39, CH 41-50, and CH
52-61 connectors (the numbers designate the range of the band and the specific channels).

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-64

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

 The resulting muxed signal of the four bands appear at the LINE OUT connector.
The -20 dB/0 dB splitter connected in the line output path provides a - 20 dB sample of the optical
output signal to the MON -20dB OUT connector, thereby enabling monitoring of the optical Mux
output signal.

NOTE: The 100 GHz band pass filters in the Add and the Drop sections are chained in opposite
order, such as to achieve minimal round trip for each channel.

9.6 CWDM components

Artemis offers several CWDM optical components that enable direct interworking with Apollo CWDM
equipment. This provides the flexibility to add and drop CWDM channels directly at the DWDM site without
affecting other traffic. The designation of the CWDM cards includes the prefix C, for example, COADM4_xx
for a 4-channel CWDM OADM unit.
The components include:
 CMXD8 : CWDM Mux/DeMux card for eight channels with built-in 1310 nm OSC filters
 COADM4_xx : CWDM OADM card with four add/drop channels

9.6.1 CMXD8
Description
The CMXD8 is a single-slot CWDM Mux/DeMux card for eight channels with built-in 1310 nm OSC filters
and E/W configuration. The channels processed by the Mux/DeMux have nominal wavelengths of 1471 nm,
1491 nm, 1511 nm, 1531 nm, 1551 nm, 1571 nm, 1591 nm, and 1611 nm. All connections to the card are
through LC type connectors on the front panel.

Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603
 Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-65

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Card views
General view

Front panel

The card has two sections:

 Mux: Operates as an 8-channel CWDM multiplexer with an additional OSC channel at 1310 nm. This
section has a group of eight CHxx connectors (xx designates the channel number), each marked with
the number of the channel in accordance with the ITU T Recommendation G.694.2 grid. The marking
M at the right side of the panel identifies the corresponding multiplexer port input. In addition, the
Mux has a ninth input channel marked OSC 1310nm IN. The Mux output connector is identified as
LINE OUT. The LINE OUT level can be monitored at the MON -20dB OUT connector.
 DeMux: Operates as an 8-channel demultiplexer with an additional OSC channel output at 1310 nm.
This section has a group of eight CHxx connectors (xx designates the channel number) also marked
with the G.694.2 channel number. The marking D at the right side of the panel identifies the
corresponding demultiplexer port output. The ninth connector is for the OSC channel output, and is
marked OSC OUT. The DeMux input connector is identified as LINE IN. The LINE IN level can be
monitored at the MON -20dB IN connector.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-66

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Functional block diagram

The functional block diagram of the CMXD8 shows the Mux and DeMux sections with an OSC capability:
 The Mux section, whose functional block diagram is shown in part A of the previous figure, combines
the optical signals applied to the CHxx connectors (xx designates the channel number).
The -20 dB/0 dB splitter connected in the line output path provides a -20 dB sample of the optical
output signal to the MON -20 dB OUT connector, thereby enabling monitoring of the optical Mux
output signal.
A second Mux combines the main line signal with the OSC signal (1310 nm) applied to the OSC
1310nm IN connector, and provides the resulting signal at the connector marked LINE OUT.
 The DeMux section, whose functional block diagram is shown in part B of the previous figure, includes
two demultiplexer units. The first separates the supervisory channel (OSC 1310 nm) from the input
signal. The resulting OSC signal appears at the OSC 1310nm OUT connector.
The -20 dB/0 dB splitter connected in the line input path provides a -20 dB sample of the optical input
signal to the MON -20 dB IN connector, thereby enabling monitoring of the optical DeMux input
signal.
The second demultiplexer, separates the optical signals applied to the LINE IN connector in
accordance with their wavelength, and provides the resulting signals at the CHxx connectors (xx
designates the channel number).
 The card's OSC ports enable managing the card from a remote management station, without
occupying any of the eight CWDM channels used for data transmission.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-67

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.6.2 COADM4_xx
Description
The COADM4_x is a single-slot CWDM OADM card with four add/drop channels for E/W configuration. The
xx in the COADM4_xx designates the number of the first add/drop channel in the CWDM ITU-T grid. All
connections to the card are through LC type connectors on the front panel.

Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603
 Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A

Card views
General view

Front panel

In the preceding drawing, the markings D and A designate the Drop (output) and Add (input) of the port.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-68

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Add/Drop channels
The COADM4_xx family includes two members. One adds/drops the four center channels: 1511 nm, 1531
nm, 1551 nm, and 1571 nm; the second adds/drops the four side channels: 1471 nm, 1491 nm, 1591 nm,
and 1611 nm. The card types and add/drop channels are listed in the following table.

COADM4_xx card types and add/drop channels

Card type Add/Drop channels

COADM4_51 51, 53, 55, 57
COADM4_47 47, 49, 59, 61

Functional block diagram

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-69

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

The COADM4_xx card is a CWDM OADM designed to operate in an E/W configuration. The card has two
sections (drop and add), each with its own line input and line output connectors:
 The incoming line signal is applied to the line input connector LINE IN. The drop section is
implemented by four CWDM filters that extract the channel signal from the LINE IN signal.
 The dropped channel signals appear at the CHxx through CHxx+3 connectors (xx designates the
specific first channel).
 The output signal of the filters appears at the EXP OUT connector of the drop section.
 The add section includes four CWDM filters which combine the channel add signals applied to the
CHxx through CHxx+3 connectors (xx designates the specific first channel) with the signal applied to
the EXP IN connector. The resulting signal appears at the LINE OUT connector.
In addition, -20 dB splitters are installed at the drop line side and at the add line side, enabling the
monitoring of the OADM line input and output signals. The drop line side monitoring signal appears at the
MON -20 dB IN connector and the add line side monitoring signal at the MON -20 dB OUT connector.

9.7 OADM cards

Passive Optical ADM (OADM) cards perform the channel add-and-drop function. Artemis platforms work
with a wide range of passive OADM cards with various numbers of channels:
 2-channel
 4-channel
 8-channel
Two basic types of multichannel OADM cards are available for Apollo platforms:
 Fixed channel OADM cards which add/drop any of the predefined channels. The designation of the
fixed OADM cards includes the prefix F, for example, FOADM4_xx for a 4-channel fixed OADM unit.
 Colorless/Fixed OADM cards are a special branch of the FOADM family. These cards drop a
predetermined number of adjacent DWDM channels and enable adding any (colorless) same number
of DWDM channels. The designation of the colorless OADM cards includes the suffix C, for example,
OADMC8_xx for an 8-channel colorless OADM unit. In contrast to FOADMs, the OADMC cards enable
flexible transmission between nodes.
The following sections describe the OADM cards available for Apollo platforms:
 FOADM2_xx
 FOADM4_xx
 FOADM850_xx
 OADMC4_xx
 OADMC8_xx

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-70

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.7.1 FOADM2_xx
Description
The FOADM2_xx is a single-slot fixed OADM card with two add/drop channels for E/W configuration. The
card adds/drops two adjacent DWDM 100 GHz-spaced channels. The xx in the FOADM2_xx designates the
number of the first add/drop channel in the ITU-T grid. All connections to the card are through LC type
connectors on the front panel.

Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603
 Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A

Add/Drop channels
The FOADM2_xx enables operators to add/drop several of the propagating channels as a low-cost
alternative to the more expensive ROADM cards. The FOADM2_xx family includes 22 members
corresponding to 22 combinations of two adjacent channels. Note that in the FOADM2_xx the channels are
spaced 100 GHz from each other (increments of 1 in the ITU-T grid). The card types and add/drop channels
are listed in the following table.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-71

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

FOADM2_xx card types and add/drop channels

Card type Add/Drop channels

FOADM2_17 17, 18
FOADM2_19 19, 20
FOADM2_21 21, 22
FOADM2_23 23, 24
FOADM2_25 25, 26
FOADM2_27 27, 28
FOADM2_29 29, 30
FOADM2_31 31, 32
FOADM2_33 33, 34
FOADM2_35 35, 36
FOADM2_37 37, 38
FOADM2_39 39, 40
FOADM2_41 41, 42
FOADM2_43 43, 44
FOADM2_45 45, 46
FOADM2_47 47, 48
FOADM2_49 49, 50
FOADM2_51 51, 52
FOADM2_53 53, 54
FOADM2_55 55, 56
FOADM2_57 57, 58
FOADM2_59 59, 60

Card views
Front panel

The markings D and A designate the Drop (output) and Add (input) of the port.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-72

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Block diagram

The FOADM2_xx card is designed to operate in an E/W configuration. The card has two sections (drop and
add), each with its own line input and line output connectors:
 The incoming line signal is applied to the line input connector LINE IN. The drop section is
implemented by a 2-skip-0 filter followed by two serial 100 GHz filters that extract the channel signal
from the LINE IN signal.
 The dropped channel signals appear at the CHxx and CHxx+1 connectors (xx, designates the specific
channels).
 The output signal of the filters appears at the EXP OUT connector of the drop section.
 The add section includes two serial 100 GHz filters and a 2-skip-0 filter which combine the channel
add signals applied to the CHxx and CHxx+1 connectors (xx, designates the specific channels) with the
signal applied to the EXP IN connector. The resulting signal appears at the LINE OUT connector.
In addition, -20 dB splitters are installed at the drop line side and at the add line side, enabling the
monitoring of the OADM line input and output signals. The drop line side monitoring signal appears at the
MON -20 dB IN connector and the add line side monitoring signal at the MON -20 dB OUT connector.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-73

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.7.2 FOADM4_xx
Description
The FOADM4_xx is a single-slot fixed OADM card with four add/drop channels for E/W configuration. The
card adds/drops four adjacent DWDM 100 GHz-spaced channels. The xx in the FOADM4_xx designates the
number of the first add/drop channel in the ITU-T grid. All connections to the card are through LC type
connectors on the front panel.

Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603
 Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A

Add/Drop channels
The FOADM4_xx enables operators to add/drop several of the propagating channels as a low-cost
alternative to the more expensive ROADM cards. The FOADM4_xx family includes 11 members
corresponding to 11 combinations of four adjacent channels. Note that in the FOADM4_xx the channels are
spaced 100 GHz from each other (increments of 1 in the ITU-T grid). The card types and add/drop channels
are listed in the following table.

FOADM4_xx card types and add/drop channels

Card type Add/Drop channels
FOADM4_17 17, 18, 19, 20
FOADM4_21 21, 22, 23, 24
FOADM4_25 25, 26, 27, 28
FOADM4_29 29, 30, 31, 32
FOADM4_33 33, 34, 35, 36
FOADM4_37 37, 38, 39, 40
FOADM4_41 41, 42, 43, 44
FOADM4_45 45, 46, 47, 48
FOADM4_49 49, 50, 51, 52
FOADM4_53 53, 54, 55, 56
FOADM4_57 57, 58, 59, 60

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-74

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Card views
Front panel

The markings D and A designate the Drop (output) and Add (input) of the port.

Block diagram
FOADM4_xx functional block diagram

The FOADM4_xx card is designed to operate in an E/W configuration. The card has two sections (drop and
add), each with its own line input and line output connectors:
 The incoming line signal is applied to the line input connector LINE IN. The drop section is
implemented by a 4-skip-0 bandpass filter followed by a block of four 100 GHz filters that extract the
channel signal from the LINE IN signal.
 The dropped channel signals appear at the CHxx through CHxx+3 connectors (xx designates the
specific channels).
 The output signal of the filters appears at the EXP OUT connector of the drop section.
 The add section includes a block of four 100 GHz filters followed by a 4-skip-0 bandpass filter which
combine the channel add signals applied to the CHxx through CHxx+3 (xx designates the specific
channels) connectors with the signal applied to the EXP IN connector. The resulting signal appears at
the LINE OUT connector.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-75

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

In addition, -20 dB splitters are installed at the drop line side and at the add line side, enabling the
monitoring of the OADM line input and output signals. The drop line side monitoring signal appears at the
MON -20 dB IN connector and the add line side monitoring signal at the MON -20 dB OUT connector.

9.7.3 FOADM850_xx
Description
The FOADM850_xx is a fixed OADM single-slot card with seven add/drop channels for E/W configuration.
The card adds/drops seven adjacent DWDM 50 GHz-spaced channels; the eighth channel is cut by the card's
filter and cannot be used. The xx in the FOADM850_xx designates the number of the first add/drop channel
in the ITU-T grid. All connections to the card are through LC type connectors on the front panel.

Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603
 Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A

Card views
General view

Front panel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-76

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Add/Drop channels
The FOADM850_xx enables operators to add/drop several of the propagating channels, as a low-cost
alternative to the more expensive ROADM cards. The FOADM850_xx family includes 11 members
corresponding to 11 combinations of eight adjacent channels. Note that in the FOADM850_xx, the channels
are spaced 50 GHz from each other (increments of 0.5 in the ITU-T grid). Each card adds/drops seven
channels. The closest channel to these seven channels (at both ends) is blocked by the FOADM and does
not come out on any port.
The card types, add/drop, and blocked channels are listed in the following table.

FOADM850_xx card types, add/drop, and blocked channels

Card type Add/Drop channels Blocked channels

FOADM850_17 17, 17.5, 18, 18.5, 19, 19.5, 20 20.5
FOADM850_21 21, 21.5, 22, 22.5, 23, 23.5, 24 20.5, 24.5
FOADM850_25 25, 25.5, 26, 26.5, 27, 27.5, 28 24.5, 28.5
FOADM850_29 29, 29.5, 30, 30.5, 31, 31.5, 32 28.5, 32.5
FOADM850_33 33, 33.5, 34, 34.5, 35, 35.5, 36 32.5, 36.5
FOADM850_37 37, 37.5, 38, 38.5, 39, 39.5, 40 36.5, 40.5
FOADM850_41 41, 41.5, 42, 42.5, 43, 43.5, 44 40.5, 44.5
FOADM850_45 45, 45.5, 46, 46.5, 47, 47.5, 48 44.5, 48.5
FOADM850_49 49, 49.5, 50, 50.5, 51, 51.5, 52 48.5, 52.5
FOADM850_53 53, 53.5, 54, 54.5, 55, 55.5, 56 52.5, 56.5
FOADM850_57 57, 57.5, 58, 58.5, 59, 59.5, 60 56.5, 60.5

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-77

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Block diagram
FOADM850_xx functional block diagram

The FOADM850_xx card is designed to operate in an E/W configuration. The card has two sections (drop
and add), each with its own line input and line output connectors:
 The incoming line signal is applied to the LINE IN connector of the drop section. The drop function is
performed by a 7-skip-1 bandpass filter with 50 GHz spacing, followed by an interleaver and two
demultiplexers that extract the channel signals from the LINE IN signal.
 The dropped channel signals spaced 50 GHz apart appear at the CHxx, CHxx+0.5, CHxx+1,... to CHxx+3
connectors (xx designates the first drop channel, the marking D designates the drop channel output).
 The resulting signal after the channels drop appears at the EXP OUT (Express output) connector of the
drop section.
 The input signal to the add section is applied to the EXP IN (Express input) connector of the add
section and through a 75%/25% splitter to a 7-skip-1 filter. The add function is performed by three
100 GHz filters and three 50%/50% splitters followed by the 7-skip-1 bandpass filter with 50 GHz
spacing.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-78

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

 The add signals are applied through the CHxx, CHxx+0.5, CHxx+1,... to CHxx+3 connectors to the 100
GHz filters, except for the 7th that is directly applied to the second 50%/50% splitter (xx designates
the first add channel, the marking A designates the add channel input).
 The resulting signal of the express input with the added channels appears at the LINE OUT connector.
In addition, -20 dB/0 dB splitters are installed at the drop line side and at the add line side, enabling the
monitoring of the OADM line input and output signals. The drop line side monitoring signal appears at the
MON -20 dB IN connector and the add line side monitoring signal at the MON -20 dB OUT connector.

9.7.4 OADMC4_xx
Description
The OADMC4_xx is a single-slot colorless (flexible) OADM card with four add/drop 100 GHz spaced channels
for E/W configuration. The card drops four predetermined adjacent DWDM channels and enables adding
any (colorless) four DWDM channels, which must differ from each other. The xx in the OADMC4_xx
designates the number of the first drop channel in the ITU-T grid. All connections to the card are through LC
type connectors on the front panel.

Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603
 Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A

Card views
Front panel

In the preceding drawing, the markings D and A designate the Drop (output) and Add (input) of the port.

Add/Drop channels
The OADMC4_xx family includes 11 members corresponding to 11 combinations of four adjacent channels.
Note that in the OADMC4_xx, the channels are spaced 100 GHz from each other (increments of 1 in the
ITU-T grid). The card types, and drop channels are listed in the following table.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-79

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

OADMC4_xx card types and drop channels

Card type Drop channels

OADMC4_17 17, 18, 19, 20
OADMC4_21 21, 22, 23, 24
OADMC4_25 25, 26, 27, 28
OADMC4_29 29, 30, 31, 32
OADMC4_33 33, 34, 35, 36
OADMC4_37 37, 38, 39, 40
OADMC4_41 41, 42, 43, 44
OADMC4_45 45, 46, 47, 48
OADMC4_49 49, 50, 51, 52
OADMC4_53 53, 54, 55, 56
OADMC4_57 57, 58, 59, 60

Functional block diagram

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-80

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

The OADMC4_xx card is designed to operate in an E/W configuration. The card has two sections (drop and
add), each with its own line input and line output connectors:
 The incoming line signal is applied to the line input connector LINE IN. The drop section is
implemented by a 4-skip-0 bandpass filter, followed by four serial 100 GHz filters that extract the
channel signals from the LINE IN signal. A second 4-skip-0 filter is employed after the first to avoid
crosstalk.
 The dropped channel signals appear at the CHxx through CHxx+3 connectors (xx designates the
specific channels).
 The output signal of the filters appears at the EXP OUT connector of the drop section.
 The add section is implemented by a 1 x 4 coupler followed by a 1 x 2 coupler, which combine the
channel add signals applied to the CHxx through CHxx+3 connectors (xx, designates the specific
channels) with the signal applied to the EXP IN connector. The resulting signal appears at the LINE
OUT connector.
In addition, -20 dB splitters are installed at the drop line side and at the add line side, enabling the
monitoring of the OADM line input and output signals. The drop line side monitoring signal appears at the
MON -20 dB IN connector and the add line side monitoring signal at the MON -20 dB OUT connector.

9.7.5 OADMC8_xx
Description
The OADMC8_xx is a single-slot colorless (flexible) OADM card with eight add/drop 100 GHz spaced
channels for E/W configuration. The card drops eight predetermined adjacent DWDM channels and enables
adding any (colorless) eight DWDM channels, which must differ from each other. The xx in the OADMC8_xx
designates the number of the first drop channel in the ITU-T grid. All connections to the card are through LC
type connectors on the front panel.

Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603
 Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-81

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Card views
General view

Front panel

In the preceding drawing, the markings D and A designate the Drop (output) and Add (input) of the port.

Add/Drop channels
The OADMC8_xx family includes five members corresponding to five combinations of eight adjacent
channels. Note that in the OADMC8_xx, the channels are spaced 100 GHz from each other (increments of 1
in the ITU-T grid). The card types and drop channels are listed in the following table.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-82

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

OADMC8_xx card types, and add/drop channels

Card type Drop channels

OADMC8_21 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28
OADMC8_29 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36
OADMC8_37 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44
OADMC8_45 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52
OADMC8_53 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60

Functional block diagram

The OADMC8_xx card is designed to operate in an E/W configuration. The card has two sections (drop and
add), each with its own line input and line output connectors:
 The incoming line signal is applied to the line input connector LINE IN. The drop section is
implemented by two 4-skip-0 bandpass filters, each followed by four serial 100 GHz filters that extract
the channel signals from the LINE IN signal. Two more 4-skip-0 filters are employed after the second
4-skip-0 to avoid crosstalk.
 The dropped channel signals appear at the CHxx through CHxx+3 and CHxx+4 through CHxx+7
connectors (xx designates the specific channels).

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-83

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

 The output signal of the filters appears at the EXP OUT connector of the drop section.
 The add section is implemented by a 1 x 8 coupler followed by a 1 x 2 coupler, which combine the
channel add signals applied to the CHxx through CHxx+7 connectors (xx designates the specific
channels) with the signal applied to the EXP IN connector. The resulting signal appears at the LINE
OUT connector.
In addition, -20 dB splitters are installed at the drop line side and at the add line side, enabling the
monitoring of the OADM line input and output signals. The drop line side monitoring signal appears at the
MON -20 dB IN connector and the add line side monitoring signal at the MON -20 dB OUT connector.

9.8 Optical filters, splitters, and couplers

Artemis offers several options for optical filters, splitters, and couplers, described in this section.

9.8.1 CT_1310_2
Description
The CT_1310_2 is a single-slot optical card that includes two separate CT filters with a 1310 nm OSC port
each. All connections to the card are through LC type connectors on the front panel.

Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603
 Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A

Card views
CT_1310_2 front panel

The card incorporates two sets of filters whose ports are marked with suffix 1 and 2. Each filter works with
an OSC Mux/DeMux pair. The functions of set 1 are as follows (the functions of set 2 are identical):
 The OSC DeMux is used to separate the 1310 nm optical OSC from the C band payload signal (in the
1550 nm range). The DeMux has one input connector (LINE 1 IN) and two output connectors, C-BAND
1 OUT (C band) and 1310 nm 1 OUT (OSC signal).
 The OSC Mux is used to combine the two signals before they are sent to the line. The Mux has two
input connectors, C-BAND 1 IN and 1310 nm 1 IN (OSC signal), and one output connector, LINE 1 OUT.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-84

Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Functional block diagram

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-85

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.8.2 CT_1510_2
Description
The CT_1510_2 is a single-slot optical card that includes two separate CT filters with a 1510 nm OSC port
each. All connections to the card are through LC type connectors on the front panel.

Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603
 Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A

Card views
General view

Front panel

The card incorporates two sets of filters whose ports are marked with suffix 1 and 2. Each filter works with
an OSC Mux/DeMux pair. The functions of set 1 are as follows (the functions of set 2 are identical):
 The OSC DeMux is used to separate the 1510 nm optical OSC from the C band payload signal (in the
1550 nm range). The DeMux has one input connector (LINE 1 IN) and two output connectors, C-BAND
1 OUT (C band) and 1510 nm 1 OUT (OSC signal).
 The OSC Mux is used to combine the two signals before they are sent to the line. The Mux has two
input connectors, C-BAND 1 IN and 1510 nm 1 IN (OSC signal), and one output connector, LINE 1 OUT.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-86

Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Functional block diagram

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-87

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.8.3 CT_OTDR_2
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603
 Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A

Description
The CT_OTDR_2 is a single-slot optical card that includes two separate filters. Each filter Muxes/DeMuxes
the 1610 nm OTDR, C-Band, and 1510 nm OSC signals. The OTDR signal is a light pulse that enables to
determine the location of a fiber cut, by connecting an OTDR device to the OTDR port. All connections to
the card are through LC type connectors on the front panel.
The CT_OTDR_2 Muxes/DeMuxes the 1610 nm OTDR, C-band, and 1510 nm OSC signals. OTDR filter cards
may be placed at the end of the span that should be monitored by OTDR. Usually, it is placed between an
EDFA card and the transmission fiber end. The OTDR filter card should not be employed on spans that
include Raman amplification.

Card views
General view

Front panel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-88

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

The CT_OTDR_2 includes two independent CLT filter pairs – each performs full Mux/DeMux of the C-band,
1510nm OSC, and 1610nm OTDR signals. The card incorporates two sets of filters whose ports are marked
with suffix 1 and 2. Each filter works with a Mux/DeMux pair. The functions of set 1 are as follows (the
functions of set 2 are identical):
 The DeMux separates the 1510 nm optical OSC, C band payload signal (in the 1550 nm range), and
1610 nm OTDR from the line signal. The DeMux has one input connector (LINE 1 IN) and three output
connectors: C-BAND 1 OUT (C band), OSC-1510 1 OUT (OSC signal), and OTDR-1610 1.
 The Mux combines the three signals before they are sent to the line. The Mux has three input
connectors: C-BAND 1 IN, OSC -1510 1 IN (OSC signal), OTDR-1610 1 IN, and one output connector:
LINE 1 OUT.

Block diagram

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-89

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.8.4 CT_OTDR_2_WIDE
Description
The CT_OTDR_2_WIDE is a single-slot optical card that includes two separate filters. Each filter
Muxes/DeMuxes the 1610 nm OTDR, C-Band, and OSC 1510 nm with Wide-band channels (marked as WIDE
port). The OTDR signal is a light pulse that enables to determine the location of a fiber cut, by connecting an
OTDR device to the OTDR port. The CT_OTDR_2_WIDE is similar to the CT_OTDR_2 , and differs only in the
WIDE port that provides an option for transferring more optical channels. All connections to the card are
through LC type connectors on the front panel.
The CT_OTDR_2_WIDE Muxes/DeMuxes the 1610 nm OTDR, C-band, and WIDE port signals. OTDR filter
cards may be placed at the end of the span that should be monitored by OTDR. Usually, it is placed
between an EDFA card and the transmission fiber end. The OTDR filter card should not be employed on
spans that include Raman amplification.
The OSC-1510 WIDE port enables transmission of the following channels:
 OSC 1510 nm signal (supervisory channel)
 Additional wavelengths in the ranges:
 1450 ~ 1520 nm
 1580 ~ 1597 nm
 1623 ~ 1650 nm
This provides an additional option for transmitting extra channels more than the channels transferred via
the C-Band port.

Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603
 Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-90

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Card views
General view

Front panel

The CT_OTDR_2_WIDE includes two independent CLT filter pairs – each performs full Mux/DeMux of the C-
band, Wide-band, and 1610nm OTDR signals. The card incorporates two sets of filters whose ports are
marked with suffix 1 and 2. Each filter works with a Mux/DeMux pair. The functions of set 1 are as follows
(the functions of set 2 are identical):
 The DeMux separates the OSC-1510 signal and the other WIDE port channels, C band payload signal
(in the 1550 nm range), and 1610 nm OTDR from the line signal. The DeMux has one input connector
(LINE 1 IN) and three output connectors: C-BAND 1 OUT (C band), OSC-1510 WIDE 1 OUT (OSC and
other channels in the Wide-band), and OTDR-1610 1.
 The Mux combines the three signals before they are sent to the line. The Mux has three input
connectors: C-BAND 1 IN, OSC-1510 WIDE 1 IN (OSC and other Wide-band channels), OTDR-1610 1 IN,
and one output connector: LINE 1 OUT.
Note that the OSC 1510 nm signal must be mixed with the required Wide-band channels through an
additional filter before connecting it to the OSC-1510 WIDE port. Similarly, at the other end the OSC-1510
nm signal is mixed with the other Wide-band channels. A filter must be used at the OSC-1510 WIDE OUT
port to separate the signals.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-91

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Functional block diagram

9.8.5 C_OTDR_2
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603
 Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A

Description
The C_OTDR_2 is a single-slot optical card that includes two separate filters. Each filter Muxes/DeMuxes
the 1610 nm OTDR signal with the combined C-Band and 1510 nm OSC signals. The OTDR signal is a light
pulse that enables to determine the location of a fiber cut, by connecting an OTDR device to the OTDR port.
All connections to the card are through LC type connectors on the front panel.
The C_OTDR_2 Muxes/DeMuxes the 1610 nm OTDR signal with the combined C-band and 1510 nm OSC
signal. OTDR filter cards may be placed at the end of the span that should be monitored by OTDR. Usually,
it is placed between an EDFA card and the transmission fiber end. The OTDR filter card should not be
employed on spans that include Raman amplification.
The C_OTDR_2 differs from the CT_OTDR_2 by the fact that in this card the C-Band and OSC 1510 nm
signals arrive already combined at the input and the output for these signals is also a combined one.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-92

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Card views
General view

Front panel

The C_OTDR_2 includes two independent CLT filter pairs – each performs full Mux/DeMux of the C-band,
and the combined 1510nm OSC and 1610nm OTDR signals. The card incorporates two sets of filters whose
ports are marked with suffix 1 and 2. Each filter works with an OSC Mux/DeMux pair. The functions of set 1
are as follows (the functions of set 2 are identical):
 The DeMux separates the combined 1510 nm optical OSC and C band payload signals from the OTDR
1610 nm signal. The DeMux has one input connector (LINE 1 IN) and two output connectors, C-BAND
+ OSC 1 OUT (combined C-BAND and OSC signals) and OTDR-1610 nm 1 OUT (OTDR signal).
 The Mux combines the two signals before they are sent to the line. The Mux has two input
connectors: C-BAND 1 + OSC 1 IN and OTDR-1610 1 IN (OTDR signal), and one output connector, LINE
1 OUT.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-93

Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Block diagram

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-94

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.8.6 SP_SM_4
Description
The SP_SM_4 is a single-slot quad splitter/coupler for single mode (SM) fibers with 50% ratio card that
includes four identical splitter/coupler units. All connections to the card are through LC type connectors on
the front panel.
The splitters divide an input signal into two equal signals. The couplers combine two input signals. The
SP_SM_4 provides four splitter/coupler units, supporting up to four fixed protected services
simultaneously.

Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603
 Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A

Card views
General view

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-95

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Front panel

The front panel markings do not refer to splitter or coupler but rather to users and services. The
corresponding ports are marked with numbers from 1 to 4 accordingly.
The SP_SM_4 has four splitters/couplers, each marked with numbers from 1 to 4. Each unit has three
connectors, marked USER, SERV-A, and SERV-B with the corresponding number suffix. The following
describes the ports of unit 1 (the same functions are provided by the other three units). The input signal to
the splitter is connected to the USER 1 IN connector. Two equal output signals are received at connectors
SERV-A 1 OUT and SERV-B 1 OUT. The coupler in unit 1 receives two signals connected to connectors SERV-
A 1 IN and SERV-B 1 IN, and the resulting combined signal is provided at connector USER 1 OUT.

Functional block diagram

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-96

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.8.7 SP_MM_4
Description
The SP_MM_4 is a single-slot quad splitter/coupler for multi-mode (MM) fibers with 50% ratio card that
includes four identical splitter/coupler units. All connections to the card are through LC type connectors on
the front panel.
The splitters divide an input signal into two equal signals. The couplers combine two input signals. The
SP_MM_4 provides four splitter/coupler units, supporting up to four fixed protected services
simultaneously.

Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603
 Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A

Card views
Front panel

The front panel markings do not refer to splitter or coupler but rather to users and services. The
corresponding ports are marked with numbers from 1 to 4 accordingly.
The card has four splitters/couplers, each marked with numbers from 1 to 4. Each unit has three
connectors, marked USER, SERV-A, and SERV-B with the corresponding number suffix. The following
describes the ports of unit 1 (the same functions are provided by the three other units). The input signal to
the splitter is connected to the USER 1 IN connector. Two equal output signals are received at connectors
SERV-A 1 OUT and SERV-B 1 OUT. The coupler in unit 1 receives two signals connected to connectors SERV-
A 1 IN and SERV-B 1 IN and the resulting combined signal is provided at connector USER 1 OUT.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-97

Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Functional block diagram

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-98

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.8.8 SP_CE4_2
Description
The SP_CE4_2 is a single-slot double splitter/coupler card for four services with 25% ratio. The card includes
two identical splitter/coupler units. All connections to the card are through LC type connectors on the front
panel.
The splitters divide an input signal into four equal signals (25% ratio). The couplers combine four input
signals. The SP_CE4_2 provides two splitter/coupler units, supporting up to four fixed protected services
simultaneously suitable for directionless/colorless ROADM sites.

Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603
 Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A

Card views
General view

Front panel

The front panel markings refer to SPLITTER A and SPLITTER B, where each unit includes a 4-way
splitter/coupler. The corresponding ports are marked with numbers from 1 to 4 accordingly.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-99

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

The card has two splitters/couplers marked SPLITTER A and SPLITTER B. The following describes the ports of
unit A (the same functions are provided by the second unit (B)). The input signal to the splitter is connected
to the LINE-A IN connector. Four equal output signals (25% of the input signal each) are provided at
connectors P1-A OUT through P4-A OUT. The coupler in unit A receives four signals connected to
connectors P1-A IN through P4-A IN, and the resulting combined signal is provided at connector LINE-A
OUT.

Functional block diagram

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-100

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.8.9 SP_CE8_1
Description
The SP_CE8_1 is a single-slot 1 x 8 splitter/coupler card, used for CD reception of coherent channels in both
coherent networks and mixed networks (including both coherent and non-coherent channels). All
connections to the card are through LC type connectors on the front panel.
The SP_CE8_1 provides a splitter/coupler unit, supporting up to eight fixed protected services
simultaneously suitable for directionless/colorless ROADM sites. The splitter divides an input signal into
eight equal signals (12.5% ratio). The coupler combines eight input signals into a single signal.

Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603
 Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A

Card views
General view

Front panel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-101

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

The input signal to the splitter is connected to the LINE IN connector. Eight equal signals (12.5 % of the
input signal each) are provided at connectors P1 OUT to P8 OUT.
The coupler unit receives eight signal, connected to connectors P1 IN to P8 IN, and the resulting combined
signal is provided at connector LINE OUT.

Functional block diagram

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-102

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.8.10 SP_CE32_1
Description
The SP_CE32_1 is a double-slot card that includes two independent splitter/coupler sections: a 1 x 32
bidirectional splitter/coupler unit and a 1 x 2 bidirectional splitter/coupler unit. It is used for coherent CD
(colorless-directionless) and CDC reception in ROADM nodes. In particular, the card is employed in pure
coherent networks. All connections to the card are through LC type connectors on the front panel.

Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603
 Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A

Card views
General view

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-103

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Front panel

The line port of the 1 x 32 bidirectional splitter/coupler (at the left side of the card) is marked LINE; the
other ports are marked P1 to P32. Similarly, the line port of the 1 x 2 bidirectional splitter/coupler (at the
right side of the card) is marked LINE and the two other ports are marked P34 and P35.
The 1 x 32 section divides an input signal into 32 equal signals (3.125% ratio). The coupler combines 32
input signals.
The 1 x 2 section divides an input signal into two equal signals (50% ratio). The coupler of this section
combines 2 input signals.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-104

Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Functional block diagram

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-105

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.9 Bidirectional single-fiber DWDM networks

Most DWDM communication systems use two fibers, one for transmission and one for reception. Although
communication on a single fiber is not common, there might be cases where customers need to connect
systems with a single fiber (due to the relatively high cost of fiber deployment, or because they need to use
existing infrastructure, etc.). The following figure illustrates a typical DWDM communication system
connected with a pair of fibers. In this system we transmit the same channels in each direction, and the 32
channels (Ch. 1 to Ch. 32) can deliver 32 services. The figure below shows a two-fiber 32 channel system
that delivers 32 services.

Two-fiber DWDM link (unamplified)

In a single-fiber bidirectional DWDM communication system, half of the channels are used to transmit in
one direction, while the other half carries the traffic in the other direction. The 44 channels can deliver 22
services. The following figure illustrates a block diagram of a single-fiber bidirectional DWDM link.

Single-fiber bidirectional DWDM link (unamplified)

The following figure illustrates a typical single-fiber bidirectional DWDM link application.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-106

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Typical bidirectional DWDM link

The Blue channels are transmitted from left to right and the Red in the opposite direction. The R/B filters
separate the Blue and Red channels passing the link. Optical amplifiers compensate for the signal loss
caused by the various Mux/DeMux and filters. Two different OCS channels control the amplifiers'
operation; one at 1510 nm, and the second at 1590 nm. The CLT filters separate the traffic (Red/Blue
channels) and the OSC signals. In-Line amplifiers, as shown in the middle section, are required only for very
long spans.

9.9.1 R/B_2
Description
The R/B_2 is a single-slot Red/Blue filter card for use in single-fiber bidirectional network applications. It
includes two different Red/Blue filters. All connections to the card are through LC type connectors on the
front panel.

Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603
 Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A

Card views
R/B_2 front panel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-107

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

The card incorporates two sets of different R/B filters whose ports are marked with suffix 1 or 2:
 The functions of set 1 are as follows:
 The C-band payload is delivered to/from the filter through the bidirectional port LINE 1. The
filter separates the Blue channels from the incoming signal and provides them through the
unidirectional port BLUE 1 OUT.
 The filter combines the Red channels coming in through the unidirectional port RED 1 IN with
the C-band payload and provides the resulting signal in the opposite direction via port LINE 1.
 The functions of set 2 are as follows:
 The C-band payload is delivered to/from the filter through the bidirectional port LINE 2. The
filter separates the Red channels from the incoming signal and provides them through the
unidirectional port RED 2 OUT.
 The filter combines the Blue channels coming in through the unidirectional port BLUE 2 IN with
the C-band payload and provides the resulting signal in the opposite direction via port LINE 2.

Functional block diagram

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-108

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.9.2 CLT_1510/1590
Description
The CLT_1510/1590 is a single-slot CLT filter card for use in bidirectional network applications. It includes
two different CLT filters. All connections to the card are through LC type connectors on the front panel.
The CLT_1510/1590 enables to add/drop two Optical Supervisory Channels (OSCs) at 1590 nm and 1510 nm
that carry management information between optical nodes in bidirectional DWDM applications. SFP
transceivers (typically combined with optical amplifiers in ILA sites) support the OSC functions.

Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603
 Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A

Card views
Front panel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-109

Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Functional block diagram

Typical application

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-110

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.10 Optical protection cards

Apollo hardware provides comprehensive options for protection against equipment failure. In system
applications that require protection against any type of failure, including failure of the optical fibers, Apollo
platforms can be configured with the following optical protection cards:
 OMSP (Optical Multiplexer Section Protection)
 OLP_S2 (Optical Line Protection)

9.10.1 OMSP
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603
 OPT9904X

Description
The OMSP is a single-slot card that provides multiplex section protection at the optical line level. OMSP
modules switch traffic to the protection path when a failure occurs on the main path, and vice versa. The
OMSP provides the following main features and functions:
 Low-loss fiber protection
 Real-time monitoring of protected fibers
 Bidirectional operation
 Protection switching in less than 50 msec

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-111

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Card views
General view

Front panel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-112

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Ports
The OMSP card consists of two sections:
 Transmit section, including:
 Input signal monitor (PD in) for monitoring the incoming signal level (received at the COMMON
IN connector).
 Pilot transmitter for generating an optical signal that enables monitoring the condition of the
protection fiber; (in the preceding figure it's the PATH-B OUT connector. However, it can also be
the PATH-A OUT, depending which is the protection path).
 Path selector, an optical switch that normally connects the incoming signal to the main fiber (in
the preceding figure it's the PATH-A OUT connector. However, it can also be the PATH-B OUT,
depending which is the main path) and the pilot signal to the protection fiber.
The connections are interchanged when the path selector changes position (see dashed lines in
the preceding figure).
 Receive section, including:
 PD1 photo diode detector for monitoring the input power signal provided to the COMMON OUT
connector from the (far end) main path; (in the preceding figure it's the PATH-A IN connector.
However, it can also be PATH-B IN, depending which is the main path).
 PD2 pilot detector for monitoring the protection fiber (in the preceding figure it's the PATH-B IN
connector. However, it can also be the PATH-A IN, depending which is the protection path), and
evaluating the pilot optical signal received from the far side.
 Path selector, an optical switch that normally connects the optical signal received through the
main fiber (in the preceding figure it's the PATH-A IN connector. However, it can also be the
PATH-B IN, depending which is the protection path) to the COMMON OUT connector and the
optical signal received through the protection fiber to the PD2 pilot detector.
The connections are interchanged when the path selector changes position (see dashed lines in
the preceding figure).

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-113

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no
fault in the OLP_S2.
COMMON port LED
LOS Red LED Blinks when the input power signal is missing, or is too low for normal
operation (LOS condition). Off when the input signal is normal.
IVLD Red LED Blinks when a pilot signal is detected on the main path. This is mainly due to
a change between the Main and Protection fiber connections.
PATH port LEDs
ACT Green LED Lights steadily under the corresponding PATH port, which is selected by the
optical switch to pass the signal.
LOS Red LED Blinks when the corresponding PATH port input signal is missing or is too
low for normal operation.

Block diagram
OMSP functional block diagram

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-114

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.10.1.1 OMSP typical application

The following figure shows a typical application topology for OMSP modules. For simplicity, the figure omits
the ALS functions.

OMSP typical application

During normal operation, the OMSP modules connect the signals to the main fibers while monitoring the
protection fibers via the pilot signal.
In the event of a failure on one of the main fibers, the traffic is switched to the protection fibers by the
following process:
1. The signal no longer reaches the LOS detector at the receive side. This condition causes the path
selector at the corresponding side to interchange the main and protection fibers.
2. The detectors at the other side sense the interchange between the two paths as they receive the
signals on different fibers. In response, the path selector of the remote OMSP module also switches to
the protection path.
As a result, the payload paths through the whole system are restored, using the protection pair of fibers.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-115

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.10.2 OLP_S2
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603
 OPT9904X

Description
The OLP_S2 is an Optical Line Protection (OLP) card that provides protection for two services of Apollo
DWDM networks, while increasing the network's reliability and availability in a cost-effective manner. The
card enables protection against fiber cuts, signal failures, loss of signal quality or power degradation, and
card failures at the DWDM layer and saves duplicating the network infrastructure.
The card was designed as an integrated solution for Apollo platforms that saves the use of high-cost
external OEM protection units. It protects Apollo service cards such as transponders, combiners, AoC, and
FIO cards. The card occupies one slot in the platforms. The OLP_S2 is intended to work with SM (Single
Mode) fibers.
In a protection mechanism a single failure may trigger multiple recovery mechanisms, which may interact
with each other, and cause the protection switching respond to non-stable network states. To prevent this,
a hold-off timer is used. The timer is used by underlying traffic layers to filter out non-stable link faults.
The OLP_S2 has a configurable hold-off timer that can be provisioned by the user according to the
card/service it is protecting.
The hold-off timer is activated when one or more defect conditions are detected in the protection group,
and it runs for a provisioned period. When the time interval of the timer expires, the fault status of all
traffic signals is passed to the protection switching process to act upon them.
The OLP_S2 provides the following main features and functions:
 1 + 1 protection of two services for optical line and client.
 Service protection for all Apollo service cards with OTUk ports.
 Fiber protection for all Apollo optic cards with DWDM OTS ports. Useful in cases where pilot tone is
not required and/or using unidirectional protection.
 Protection switching in less than 50 msec.
 Ability to configure protection reversion. By default it is a non-reversion protection.
 Ability to configure hold-off timer values. By default its value is 0 seconds.
 Metro and long-haul traffic protection.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-116

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Card views
General view

Front panel

Protection mechanisms and triggers

OLP_S2 protection capabilities include:
 (1+1) service protection on network ports (i.e. OTUk)
 (1+1) fiber protection on DWDM ports
 (1+1) service protection on non OTUk ports (using non-colored transceivers)
 (1+1) service protection on non-OTUk ports (using colored transceivers)

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-117

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Triggers for protection

Protection type Triggers for protection

Service protection on network ports (OTUk ports) LOS signal
Fiber protection  LOS signal
 SF
(1+1) service protection on non OTUk ports (using non- LOS signal
colored transceivers)
(1+1) service protection on non-OTUk ports (using colored LOS signal
transceivers)

Port configurable LOS threshold

Protection type Common ports Path ports

Service protection (OTUk ports) -11 dBm -31 to -21 dBm
Default value:-21 dBm
Service protection on non- -11 dBm -31 to -21 dBm
OTUk ports with colored Default value: -21 dBm
transceivers
Fiber protection -30 to 0 dBm -33 to -24 dBm
Default value: -5 dBm Default value:-30 dBm
Service protection on non- -30 to-15 dBm -30 to-15 dBm
OTUk ports w/o colored Default value=-25 dBm Default value=-25 dBm
transceivers

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off when
the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no fault
in the OLP_S2.
COMMON port LED
LOS Red LED Blinks when the input power signal is missing, or is too low for normal
operation (LOS condition). Off when the input signal is normal.
PATH port LEDs
ACT Green LED Lights steadily under the corresponding PATH port, which is selected by the
optical switch to pass the signal.
LOS Red LED Blinks when the corresponding PATH port input signal is missing or is too low
for normal operation.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-118

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Block diagram

9.11 Optical amplifiers

As optical signals are attenuated by the fiber through which they travel, the signal can drop to power levels
below the sensitivity of the optical receiver at the other end. Before this occurs, the signal must be
regenerated. In the past this regeneration was performed exclusively using optical-to-electrical-to-optical
(OEO) transceivers. But since the development of the Optical Fiber Amplifier (OFA), amplification can be
performed more cost effectively in the optical domain, without expensive conversion to and back from the
electrical domain.
Apollo platforms offer a large variety of EDFAs and Raman amplifiers to suit any need and application, such
as:
 Amplified metro core DWDM networks.
 Regional and long-haul DWDM networks.
 Repeaterless undersea DWDM networks.
Apollo supports dynamic variable and fixed gain amplifiers. The variable gain EDFAs are typically used in
regional and long-haul networks. Using dynamic EDFA technology, these amplifiers automatically adjust
themselves to the attenuation of the fiber span for which they are compensating, providing optimized
amplification over the entire spectral band. By maintaining an optimal OSNR at the output of each
amplifier, far longer spans and many more amplifiers can be cascaded, resulting in an OSNR that is
sufficiently high for clear reception at the end of the link. This capability is essential in real world regional
and long-haul optical networks, where the fiber spans between amplifier sites vary in length and
attenuation. As a result, fewer spare amplifiers are needed.
Along with the ability to provide the correct gain at each site while maintaining flat amplification and
optimal OSNR, the two-stage amplifiers include midstage access optimized for DCF integration that does
not affect the link power budget.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-119

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Fixed gain amplifiers are offered as a low-cost alternative for specific configuration requirements, such as a
booster after ROADM nodes.
Several safety mechanisms are implemented in the optical amplifier cards to prevent human-eye exposure
to dangerous laser light.

9.11.1 Raman amplification: Principles of operation

Raman amplification is based on a nonlinear effect that uses the fiber itself as the amplification medium: by
driving the payload-carrying fiber with a very strong optical signal (called pump signal) having a wavelength
approximately 100 nm lower than the payload wavelength, the loss incurred by the payload signal is
significantly decreased.
By selecting an appropriate combination of pump signals, the Raman gain can be made available over the
full C band, and even at the T/OSC band used by the OSC (which uses a wavelength of 1510/1528 nm).
The Raman gain (that is, the difference between the signal levels received at the remote end with and
without a pump signal) depends on the pump signal power, attenuation per km, and the length and type of
the fiber. (Another factor is the fiber cross-sectional area, but this parameter is highly standardized.) Thus,
the Raman effect is optimal for long spans of fiber with low attenuation per km.

NOTE: Fiber discontinuities, such as those caused by sharp bends, improper splicing, and so
on, have a negative effect on the achievable gain. Therefore, discontinuities must carefully be
avoided.

The maximum pump power that can be used is influenced by safety considerations and not only by
component limitations (the pump signal remains at Hazard Level 3B for many kilometers, and special
precautions are needed to protect personnel in case the fiber is cut or disconnected at a remote location).

9.11.2 High power laser safety

The OA_HRS, OA_HRSF, and OA_USPBF amplifiers are designed to ensure that all optical power is confined
to the fiber during normal operation. Also, when optical connectors are opened, the optical power is
limited. Therefore, they are defined as a Class 1M Laser Product.
Special precautions have been taken to meet the safety requirements. These include physical protection for
the LINE connector and a safety subsystem.
The OA_HRS, OA_HRSF, and OA_USPBF amplifiers transmit high-power signals (up to 0.4/0.7 W) into the
fiber. These power levels correspond to a potential Hazard Level 3B, however, the inherent protection
mechanisms reduces the Hazard Level to 1M. During installation and maintenance it may be required to
bypass the protection mechanisms. In such case, personnel handling the card must use Fiber Telecom
protection optical goggles. Moreover, all personnel must pass laser safety training in accordance with
standard IEC 60825 (AS/NZS 2211.2) before being allowed to install and maintain these amplifiers and
systems including them. For detailed safety requirements, see the Apollo Installation, Operation, and
Maintenance Manual.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-120

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

The following special precautions have been taken:

 The high-power LINE output connector is located behind a special cover and is therefore not visible.
Moreover, a special interlock mechanism detects the opening of the connector and automatically
turns the laser pumps off, even when transmission is enabled.
 A special safety subsystem ensures that the high-power laser signals are confined to the fiber. During
transmission this subsystem continuously monitors and analyzes various optical parameters, for
example, input signal levels, back reflection, and supervisory channel signal. It is therefore capable of
detecting fiber disconnections and fiber cuts, even when they occur many kilometers from the card's
location. In these cases, the safety subsystem automatically turns the card's laser pumps off. After the
safety subsystem is activated, normal operation is automatically resumed once normal conditions
have been restored by the management system.
The signal sent to the line is always monitored, and an alarm is generated whenever its power is too low or
too high.
The other monitored signals that result in safety subsystem activation are:
 High back reflection from the LINE connector
 Loss of OSC1510/OSC1528 signal (OA_HRS, OA_HRSF)

9.11.3 Automatic laser shutdown (ALS)

The OA_FHBS, OA_MHS, and OA_USPBF cards support ALS. In the event of a fiber break, ALS stops the
transmission of the signal. This minimizes information loss and leads to greater safety by minimizing the
laser light leakage.
ALS requires a pair of OA_FHBS/OA_MHS/OA_USPBF amplifiers at either end of a span. The following figure
shows an example of ALS functionality with an OA_FHBS.

Automatic laser shutdown example

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-121

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Switching to ALS mode

(1) A fiber cut on the span causes LOS at the express input PD (2) in the right OA_FHBS. The right card shuts
down the transmission (3), causing LOS at express input PD (4) in the left OA_FHBS. The left-hand OA_FHBS
(5) shuts down, which enables full ALS.
Transition to ALS mode creates the following results:
 The EDFA module is disabled.
 The EDFA/Booster configuration is modified to AGC mode with a limited output of 20 dBm.
 The ALS LED turns on.

Restarting from ALS mode

The EDFA is disabled while in ALS mode. Once every three minutes, the EDFA is enabled for 30 seconds,
during which it transmits in AGC mode with output power (20 dBm) lower than the Hazard Level 1M. If
“pass-through” LOS is cleared, the EDFA is enabled (still with a 20 dBm output limit). If LOS is cleared for
more than 40 seconds, ALS mode is removed and the card returns to its previous normal operation mode
with the following results:
 Enabling the EDFA module.
 Modifying the EDFA configuration back to its last operation state (with the last normal Gain and Tilt
values).
 The ALS LED turns off.

NOTE: When an OA_FHBS/OA_MHS/OA_USPBF card is reset, the EDFA card begins in ALS
mode.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-122

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.11.4 OA_FB
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603

Description
The OA_FB is a fixed gain EDFA-based amplifier optimized as a power booster for terminal and ROADM
sites with up to 88 DWDM channels. The card occupies one slot in the platforms.
In addition to the standard amplifier mode, the OA_FB can work in two other modes:
 Automatic Power Control (APC) mode, for Noise Generator applications, intended to support to
support third parties requirements. In APC mode, the amplifier pumps are turned on although there is
no input signal. Such operation mode leads to generation of strong ASE (amplified spontaneous
emission) noise at the amplifier output, thereby turning the amplifier into a noise source.
 Automatic Current Control (ACC) mode, optimized to work in optical supervisory channel (OSC) signal
amplifier application for the OA_HRSF. Generally, the OA_HRSF is used to amplify optical signals on
ultra-high spans. The OSC has also to reach the end of these spans with adequate power. However,
this signal is significantly attenuated when traversing such distances. The solution is to amplify the
OSC to the required level. The OA_FB-R is used for this application.
In its regular operation an optical amplifier determines the gain by sampling the input and the output
signals and calculating the required amplification according to the average. Because the OSC control
signal operates at a relatively low rate (2 Mpbs, 5 Mbps, 100 Mbps) the sampling photo-diodes will
provide mistaken results. To overcome this problem, the OA_FB is operated in an ACC mode, in which
the pump current is automatically controlled. In addition, each amplifier gain is checked at
manufacturing to make sure it provides the required gain.
The OA_FB amplifier operates at a very specific gain value, maintaining a fixed ratio between input and
output power to provide flat amplification. To achieve this, the OA_FB uses a built-in VOA to automatically
adjust the fiber span loss it is compensating for to its optimized gain value. This VOA lowers the channel
power at the input of the amplifier, thereby degrading the OSNR at the output of the amplifier.

Functions
 Optical amplification (power and gain control)
 Transient suppression
 Output power monitoring point
 High output power
 Full PM by means of management stations, including monitoring of optical power levels and pump
current
 BR detection mechanism
 Monitoring and alarms
 1510 nm SFP for OSC channel (optional)

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-123

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Card views
General view

Front panel

NOTE: The EDFA amplifier LED markings are indicated in a rectangle at the lower left side of
the front panel.

Ports

Port name Connector Function

AMP IN LC Amplifier line input connector
AMP OUT LC Amplifier output connector
MON OUT -20dB LC Monitor connector used to connect test equipment (like OPM or OSA);
provides an -20 dB sample from the amplifier output signal.
OSC SFP To house an optional 1510 nm SFP that provides an FE control
communications channel.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-124

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

LEDs

Marking Item Functions

Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is
no fault
EDFA LEDs
IN Red LED Blinks when the input power signal is missing or is too low for normal
operation (LOS condition). Off when the input signal is normal.
OUT Green LED Lights steadily when the pump laser is on and the output power is
above the preset threshold. Off when the output power is below the
threshold (LOP condition).
BR Orange LED Lights when the level of BR exceeds the preset threshold. Usually this
indicates a disconnection or break in the fiber connected to the AMP
OUT connector.
OSC LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the OSC laser transmits.
F/L Red LED Blinks when the OSC input signal is missing or is too low for normal
operation. Lights when a fault is detected in the OSC path.

9.11.5 OA_ML
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603

Description
The OA_ML is a variable gain EDFA-based amplifier with-mid stage access (MSA), optimized for low gain
spans before In-Line and ROADM sites in Regional/LH applications with up to 88 DWDM channels. The card
occupies one slot in the platforms.
The OA_ML has variable gain control and high output power (+20.5 dBm). Considering its multistage design
that enables the insertion of a dispersion compensation unit (DCF) without affecting the link optical budget,
the OA_ML is especially suited for long-haul applications. High channel count DWDM networks with a reach
of beyond 1500 km without OEO regeneration are possible.
The OA_ML amplifier gain can be adjusted without using VOA, thereby maintaining optimal OSNR for any
fiber span length. In addition, it has a higher output power, which means that fewer amplifiers are needed.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-125

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Functions
 Optical amplification (power and gain control)
 Transient suppression
 Output power monitoring point
 Two amplification stages
 Mid-stage for connecting a dispersion compensation unit
 Full PM by means of management stations, including monitoring of optical power levels and pump
current
 BR detection mechanism
 Monitoring and alarms
 1510 nm SFP for OSC channel (optional)

Card Views
General view

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-126

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Front panel

Ports
Port name Connector Function
AMP IN LC
Amplifier external line input connector that is also the input to the
1st.stage.
MID STAGE OUT LC
Output from the 1st stage.
MID STAGE IN LC
Input to the 2nd stage
AMP OUT LC
Amplifier external line output connector that is also the output from
the 2nd stage.
MON OUT -20dB LC
Monitor connector used to connect test equipment (like OPM or OSA);
provides an -20 dB sample from the amplifier output signal.

OSC SFP To house an optional 1510 nm SFP that provides an FE control

communication channel.

NOTE: The EDFA amplifier LED markings are indicated in a rectangle at the lower left side of
the front panel.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-127

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no
fault in the OA_ML.
EDFA LEDs
IN Red LED Blinks when the input power signal is missing, or is too low for normal
operation (LOS condition). Off when the input signal is normal.
OUT Green LED Lights steadily when the pump laser is on and the output power is above
the preset threshold. Off when the output power is below the threshold
(LOP condition).
BR Orange LED Lights when the level of BR exceeds the preset threshold. Usually this
indicates a disconnection or break in the fiber connected to the AMP OUT
connector.
OSC LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the OSC laser transmits.
F/L Red LED Blinks when the OSC input signal is missing or is too low for normal
operation. Lights when a fault is detected in the OSC path.

Block diagram

The OA_ML consists of two amplification stages with separate input and output connectors. It is therefore
possible to insert optical components between the MID-STAGE OUT and MID-STAGE IN connectors (this is
referred to as “the midstage”). The high power second (output) stage is located at the middle of the card.
The external input line is connected to the AMP IN connector, and the external output line is connected to
the AMP OUT connector. The output power of the second stage can be monitored at the MON -20 dB
connector.
The advantages of this capability are evident in many typical applications. For example, when the OA_ML is
used as an inline amplifier in a long-haul network, a dispersion compensation device can be inserted in the
midstage to compensate for the chromatic dispersion of the fiber span.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-128

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.11.6 OA_PA
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603

Description
The OA_PA is a fixed gain EDFA-based amplifier optimized as a preamplifier for metro applications. The
card occupies one slot in the platforms.
The OA_PA amplifier operates at a very specific gain value, maintaining a fixed ratio between input and
output power to provide flat amplification. To achieve this, the OA_PA uses a built-in VOA to automatically
adjust the fiber span loss it is compensating for to its optimized gain value. This VOA lowers the channel
power at the input of the amplifier, thereby degrading the OSNR at the output of the amplifier.

Functions
 Optical amplification (power and gain control)
 Transients suppression
 Output power monitoring point
 High sensitivity
 Full PM by means of management stations, including monitoring of optical power levels and pump
current
 Back-reflection (BR) detection mechanism
 Monitoring and alarms
 1510 nm SFP for OSC channel (optional)

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-129

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Card views
General view

Front panel

NOTE: The EDFA amplifier LED markings are indicated in a rectangle at the lower left side of
the front panel.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-130

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Ports

Port name Connector Function

AMP IN LC Amplifier line input connector
AMP OUT LC Amplifier output connector
MON OUT -20dB LC Monitor connector used to connect test equipment (like OPM or OSA);
provides an -20 dB sample from the amplifier output signal.
OSC SFP To house an optional 1510 nm SFP that provides an FE control
communications channel.

LEDs

Marking Item Functions

Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is
no fault
EDFA LEDs
IN Red LED Blinks when the input power signal is missing or is too low for normal
operation (LOS condition). Off when the input signal is normal.
OUT Green LED Lights steadily when the pump laser is on and the output power is
above the preset threshold. Off when the output power is below the
threshold (LOP condition).
BR Orange LED Lights when the level of BR exceeds the preset threshold. Usually this
indicates a disconnection or break in the fiber connected to the AMP
OUT connector.
OSC LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the OSC laser transmits.
F/L Red LED Blinks when the OSC input signal is missing or is too low for normal
operation. Lights when a fault is detected in the OSC path.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-131

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.11.7 OA_M
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603

Description
The OA_M is a variable gain EDFA-based amplifier with MSA, optimized for high gain spans before In-Line
and ROADM sites in Regional/LH applications supporting up to 88 DWDM channels. The card occupies one
slot in the platforms.
The OA_M has variable gain control and high output power (+20.5 dBm). Considering its multistage design
which enables the insertion of a dispersion compensation unit without affecting the link optical budget, the
OA_M is especially suited for long-haul applications. High channel count DWDM networks with a reach of
beyond 1500 km without OEO regeneration are possible.
The OA_M amplifier gain can be adjusted without using VOA, thereby maintaining optimal OSNR for any
fiber span length. In addition, the OA_M has a higher output power, which means that fewer amplifiers are
needed.
The OA_M amplifier structure is very similar to the OA_ML; for a detailed description of the signal path in
the amplifier see OA_ML Functional Description.

Functions
 Optical amplification (power and gain control)
 Transient suppression
 Output power monitoring point
 Two amplification stages
 Midstage for connecting a dispersion compensation unit
 Full PM by means of management stations, including monitoring of optical power levels and pump
current
 BR detection mechanism
 Monitoring and alarms
 1510 nm SFP for OSC channel (optional)

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-132

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Card views
General view

Front panel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-133

Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Ports
Port name Connector Function
AMP IN LC
Amplifier external line input connector that is also the input to the
1st.stage.
MID STAGE OUT LC
Output from the 1st stage.
MID STAGE IN LC
Input to the 2nd stage
AMP OUT LC
Amplifier external line output connector that is also the output from
the 2nd stage.
MON OUT -20dB LC
Monitor connector used to connect test equipment (like OPM or OSA);
provides an -20 dB sample from the amplifier output signal.

OSC SFP To house an optional 1510 nm SFP that provides an FE control

communication channel.

NOTE: The EDFA amplifier LED markings are indicated in a rectangle at the lower left side of
the front panel.

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no
fault in the OA_ML.
EDFA LEDs
IN Red LED Blinks when the input power signal is missing, or is too low for normal
operation (LOS condition). Off when the input signal is normal.
OUT Green LED Lights steadily when the pump laser is on and the output power is above
the preset threshold. Off when the output power is below the threshold
(LOP condition).
BR Orange LED Lights when the level of BR exceeds the preset threshold. Usually this
indicates a disconnection or break in the fiber connected to the AMP OUT
connector.
OSC LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the OSC laser transmits.
F/L Red LED Blinks when the OSC input signal is missing or is too low for normal
operation. Lights when a fault is detected in the OSC path.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-134

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.11.8 OA_L
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603

Description
The OA_L is a variable gain single-stage EDFA optimized for medium gain spans in coherent networks
applications. The EDFA is supporting up to 88 DWDM channels. The card occupies one slot in the platforms.
The OA_L is an EDFA optimized for coherent networks that do not require DCF support.
The OA_L amplifier structure is very similar to the OA_FB and OA_PA; for a detailed description of the
signal path in the amplifier see OA_PA and OA_FB.

Functions
 Variable gain optical amplification (15-28 dB)
 High output power (20.5 dBm)
 Transient suppression
 Output power monitoring point
 Single amplification stage
 Full PM by means of management stations, including monitoring of optical power levels and pump
current
 BR detection mechanism
 Monitoring and alarms
 1510 nm SFP for OSC channel (optional)

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-135

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Card views
General view

Front panel

NOTE: The EDFA amplifier LED markings are indicated in a rectangle at the lower left side of
the front panel.

Ports

Port name Connector Function

AMP IN LC Amplifier line input connector
AMP OUT LC Amplifier output connector
MON OUT -20dB LC Monitor connector used to connect test equipment (like OPM or OSA);
provides an -20 dB sample from the amplifier output signal.
OSC SFP To house an optional 1510 nm SFP that provides an FE control
communications channel.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-136

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

LEDs

Marking Item Functions

Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is
no fault
EDFA LEDs
IN Red LED Blinks when the input power signal is missing or is too low for normal
operation (LOS condition). Off when the input signal is normal.
OUT Green LED Lights steadily when the pump laser is on and the output power is
above the preset threshold. Off when the output power is below the
threshold (LOP condition).
BR Orange LED Lights when the level of BR exceeds the preset threshold. Usually this
indicates a disconnection or break in the fiber connected to the AMP
OUT connector.
OSC LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the OSC laser transmits.
F/L Red LED Blinks when the OSC input signal is missing or is too low for normal
operation. Lights when a fault is detected in the OSC path.

9.11.9 OA_LF
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603
 OPT9904X

Description
The OA_LF is a variable gain single-stage EDFA optimized as an ILA for coherent networks with short span
applications. The amplifier supports up to 96 DWDM channels in the extended C-Band. The card occupies
one slot in the platforms and in addition to ILA can also be utilized in Booster or Preamp applications.
The OA_LF is an EDFA optimized for coherent networks that do not require DCF support.
The OA_LF amplifier structure is very similar to the OA_L; for a detailed description of the signal path in the
amplifier see OA_L.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-137

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Functions
 Variable gain optical amplification (15-28 dB)
 High output power (20.5 dBm)
 Transient suppression
 Output power monitoring point
 Single amplification stage
 Full PM by means of management stations, including monitoring of optical power levels and pump
current
 BR detection mechanism
 Monitoring and alarms
 1510 nm SFP for OSC channel (optional)

Card views
General view

Front panel

NOTE: The EDFA amplifier LED markings are indicated in a rectangle at the lower left side of
the front panel.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-138

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Ports

Port name Connector Function

AMP IN LC Amplifier line input connector
AMP OUT LC Amplifier output connector
MON OUT -20dB LC Monitor connector used to connect test equipment (like OPM or OSA);
provides an -20 dB sample from the amplifier output signal.
OSC SFP To house an optional 1510 nm SFP that provides an FE control
communications channel.

LEDs

Marking Item Functions

Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is
no fault
EDFA LEDs
IN Red LED Blinks when the input power signal is missing or is too low for normal
operation (LOS condition). Off when the input signal is normal.
OUT Green LED Lights steadily when the pump laser is on and the output power is
above the preset threshold. Off when the output power is below the
threshold (LOP condition).
BR Orange LED Lights when the level of BR exceeds the preset threshold. Usually this
indicates a disconnection or break in the fiber connected to the AMP
OUT connector.
OSC LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the OSC laser transmits.
F/L Red LED Blinks when the OSC input signal is missing or is too low for normal
operation. Lights when a fault is detected in the OSC path.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-139

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.11.10 OA_HF
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603

Description
The OA_HF is a variable gain single-stage EDFA optimized as an ILA for coherent networks with long span
applications. The amplifier supports up to 96 DWDM channels in the extended-C-Band. The card occupies
one slot in the platforms and in addition to ILA can also be utilized in Preamp applications.
The OA_HF is an EDFA optimized for coherent networks that do not require DCF support.
The OA_HF amplifier structure is very similar to the OA_M but without the midstage; for a detailed
description of the signal path in the amplifier see OA_M.

Functions
 Variable gain optical amplification (25-37 dB)
 High output power (20.5 dBm)
 Transient suppression
 Output power monitoring point
 Single amplification stage
 Full PM by means of management stations, including monitoring of optical power levels and pump
current
 BR detection mechanism
 Monitoring and alarms
 1510 nm SFP for OSC channel (optional)

Card views
General view

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-140

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Front panel

NOTE: The EDFA amplifier LED markings are indicated in a rectangle at the lower left side of
the front panel.

Ports

Port name Connector Function

AMP IN LC Amplifier line input connector
AMP OUT LC Amplifier output connector
MON OUT -20dB LC Monitor connector used to connect test equipment (like OPM or OSA);
provides an -20 dB sample from the amplifier output signal.
OSC SFP To house an optional 1510 nm SFP that provides an FE control
communications channel.

LEDs

Marking Item Functions

Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is
no fault
EDFA LEDs
IN Red LED Blinks when the input power signal is missing or is too low for normal
operation (LOS condition). Off when the input signal is normal.
OUT Green LED Lights steadily when the pump laser is on and the output power is
above the preset threshold. Off when the output power is below the
threshold (LOP condition).
BR Orange LED Lights when the level of BR exceeds the preset threshold. Usually this
indicates a disconnection or break in the fiber connected to the AMP
OUT connector.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-141

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Marking Item Functions

OSC LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the OSC laser transmits.
F/L Red LED Blinks when the OSC input signal is missing or is too low for normal
operation. Lights when a fault is detected in the OSC path.

9.11.11 OA_FHBS
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603

Description
The OA_FHBS is a high power fixed gain EDFA-based amplifier optimized for terminal and ROADM sites in
E/W configuration supporting up to 88 DWDM channels. For safety reasons the OA_FHBS is designed to
operate in E/W configuration, and it includes built-in C/T filters. The card occupies one slot in the platforms.

Functions
 Optical amplification (power and gain control)
 Transient suppression
 Output power monitoring point
 Mechanisms for ensuring eye-safety:
 Spring-loaded protective cover on the amplifier output connector
 BR detection
 LOS of signal detection from the far end
 Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)
 Built-in C/T filters to support OSC functionality
 Full PM by means of management stations, including monitoring of optical power levels and pump
current
 Monitoring and alarms
 1510 nm SFP for OSC channel (optional)

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-142

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Card views
General view

The OA_FHBS is an E/W configured card designed to provide enhanced ALS function to shut down the
amplifier in case of fiber cut. The “LINE IN” (Express In) and “EXP OUT” ports are connected to one of the
fiber directions. An internal photo-diode (PD) on the connection between these ports facilitates the ALS
function; see Automatic laser shutdown.

Front panel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-143

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Ports

Port name Connector Function

AMP IN LC Amplifier external line input connector that is also the input to the
1st.stage.
EXPOUT LC Express output signal after the PD (fiber cut detection)
OSC 1510 IN LC OSC input signal connector from built-in C/T filter
OSC 1510 OUT LC OSC output signal connector to built-in C/T filter
AMP OUT LC Amplifier external line output connector that is also the output from the
2nd stage.
MON OUT -20dB LC Monitor connector used to connect test equipment (like OPM or OSA);
provides an -20 dB sample from the amplifier output signal.
OSC SFP To house an optional 1510 nm SFP that provides an FE control
communication channel.
LINE IN LX Return line fiber connector located behind spring loaded cover for safety
AMP OUT LX Amplifier output connector located behind spring loaded cover for safety

LEDs

Marking Item Functions

Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no
fault in the OA_FHBS.
EDFA LEDs
IN Red LED Blinks when the input power signal is missing, or is too low for normal
operation (LOS condition). Off when the input signal is normal.
OUT Green LED Lights steadily when the pump laser is on and the output power is above
the preset threshold. Off when the output power is below the threshold
(LOP condition).
BR Orange LED Lights when the level of BR exceeds the preset threshold. Usually, this
indicates a disconnection or break in the fiber connected to the AMP OUT
connector.
OSC LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the OSC laser transmits.
F/L Red LED Blinks when the OSC input signal is missing, or is too low for normal
operation. Lights when a fault is detected in the OSC path.
LINE LEDs
LOS Red LED Lights steadily when the signal on the return line (fiber) is missing. This
usually indicates a fiber cut.
ALS Orange LED Lights steadily when the card is in ALS state.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-144

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.11.12 OA_MHS
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603

Description
The OA_MHS is a high power variable gain EDFA-based amplifier with MSA, optimized for in-line sites in
regional/LH applications, E/W configuration supporting up to 88 DWDM channels. For safety reasons the
OA_MHS is designed to operate in E/W configurations and it includes built-in C/T filters. The card occupies
one slot in the platforms.
he OA_MHS is an E/W configured card designed to provide enhanced ALS function to shut down the
amplifier in case of fiber cut. The “LINE IN” (Express In) and “EXP OUT” ports are connected to one of the
fiber directions. An internal photo-diode (PD) on the connection between these ports facilitates the ALS
function; see Automatic laser shutdown.

Functions
 Optical amplification (power and gain control)
 Transient suppression
 Output power monitoring point
 Two amplification stages
 Midstage for connecting a dispersion compensation unit
 Mechanisms for ensuring eye safety:
 Spring-loaded protective cover on the amplifier output connector
 BR detection
 LOS detection from the far end
 ALS
 Built-in C/T filters to support OSC functionality
 Full PM by means of management stations, including monitoring of optical power levels and pump
current
 Monitoring and alarms
 1510 nm SFP for OSC channel (optional)

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-145

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Card views
General view

Front panel

Ports
Port name Connector Function
AMP IN LC Amplifier line input connector
EXPOUT LC Express output signal after the PD (fiber cut detection)
OSC 1510 IN: LC OSC input signal connector from built-in C/T filter
OSC 1510 OUT: LC OSC output signal connector to built-in C/T filter
MID-STAGE OUT LC Output from the 1st stage.
MID-STAGE IN: LC Input to the 2nd stage.
MON OUT -20dB LC Monitor connector used to connect test equipment (like OPM or OSA);
provides an -20 dB sample from the amplifier output signal.
OSC SFP To house an optional 1510 nm SFP that provides an FE control
communication channel.
LINE IN (EXP IN) LX 5 Far end fiber connector (fiber cut detection) located behind spring loaded
cover
AMP OUT (LINE LX 5 Amplifier output connector located behind spring loaded cover
OUT)

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-146

Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no
fault in the OA_FHBS.
EDFA LEDs
IN Red LED Blinks when the input power signal is missing, or is too low for normal
operation (LOS condition). Off when the input signal is normal.
OUT Green LED Lights steadily when the pump laser is on and the output power is above
the preset threshold. Off when the output power is below the threshold
(LOP condition).
BR Orange LED Lights when the level of BR exceeds the preset threshold. Usually, this
indicates a disconnection or break in the fiber connected to the AMP OUT
connector.
OSC LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the OSC laser transmits.
F/L Red LED Blinks when the OSC input signal is missing, or is too low for normal
operation. Lights when a fault is detected in the OSC path.
LINE LEDs
LOS Red LED Lights steadily when the signal on the return line (fiber) is missing. This
usually indicates a fiber cut.
ALS Orange LED Lights steadily when the card is in ALS state.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-147

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.11.13 OA_HRS
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608

Description
The OA_HRS is a Raman optical amplifier especially optimized for long-haul multispan and undersea
applications. OA_HRS is intended for use in conjunction with EDFA amplifiers over G.652, G.654, and G.655
fibers. It supports multichannel applications capable of amplifying the entire C band, and also transports
the OSC at 1510 nm. For safety reasons the OA_HRS is designed to operate in E/W configurations and it
includes built-in C/T filters. The OA_HRS card occupies a double-wide I/O slot in Apollo platforms.
The OA_HRS operates in the backward mode. The mode indicates the direction of signal flow relative to the
amplifier line side. Backward mode means that the OA_HRS is located at the receiving end of an optical
span to provide an effect similar to that of using a low noise figure preamplifier before further amplifying
the low-level signals received from the line (C band and OSC) by an EDFA amplifier.
For additional safety information, see Raman amplification principles of operation and High power laser
safety.

Functions
 Raman amplification (power and gain control)
 Transient suppression
 Output power monitoring point
 Mechanisms for ensuring eye-safety:
 Spring-loaded protective covers on connectors carrying high power signals
 BR detection
 LOS detection from the far end
 ALS
 Built-in C/T filters to support OSC functionality
 Full PM by means of management stations, including monitoring of optical power levels and pump
current
 Monitoring and alarms
 1510 nm SFP for OSC channel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-148

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Card views
General view

OA_HRS front panel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-149

Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Ports
Port name Connector Function
NODE IN LX 5 Connects to a booster amplifier output to the line. This signal passes
through the unit and connects to the LINE OUT connector. Connector is
located behind spring loaded cover for safety
NODE OUT LX 5 Connects the Raman amplifier output to an EDFA amplifier. Connector is
located behind spring loaded cover for safety
MON OUT - LC Monitor connector used to connect test equipment (like OPM or OSA);
20dB provides an -20 dB sample from the Raman amplifier output signal
LINE IN (PUMP E2000 Connects the pump signal output to the line and the line signal to the
OUT) Raman input. Connector is located behind spring loaded cover for safety
LINE OUT E2000 Connects the line output signal (typically comes from a booster amplifier).
Connector located behind spring loaded cover for safety
OSC 1510 IN LC For connecting the input 1510 nm supervisory channel
OSC 1510 OUT LC For connecting the input 1510 nm supervisory channel
OTDR ACCESS LC For connecting an OTDR device to test the characteristics of the line fiber

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no
fault in the OA_HRS.
LINE LEDs
BR Orange LED Lights when the level of BR signal exceeds the preset threshold. Usually, this
indicates a disconnection or break in the fiber connected to the NODE
connector.
RAMAN ON Green LED Lights when laser power is transmitted through the line port (power source
may be the OA_HRS and/or the EDFA amplifier).
OSC LOS Red LED Blinks when the 1510 nm OSC signal is missing or below the preset
threshold.
LINE LOS Red LED Blinks when the signal on the line (fiber) is missing or under the preset
threshold. This usually indicates a fiber cut.
NODE LED
NODE LOS Red LED Blinks when the signal arriving from the node (normally connected to a
booster amplifier) is missing or under the preset threshold.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-150

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Marking Item Functions

OSC2M LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the OSC2M laser transmits.
F/L Red LED Blinks when the OSC2M input signal is missing, or is too low for normal
operation. Lights when a fault is detected in the OSC2M path.

9.11.14 OA_EHRS
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603

Description
The OA_EHRS is a hybrid Raman/EDFA optical amplifier, providing optimized high dynamic gain (23 to 37
dB), designed for DCF-less coherent networks. It combines a distributed low-noise Raman amplification and
high-power EDFA amplification in a single module, providing low-noise figure, wide gain, and high output
power, while improving the system OSNR. The OA_EHRS is intended for use over G.652, G.654, and G.655
fibers. It supports multichannel applications capable of amplifying the entire C band, and also transmits the
OSC on 1528 nm (ITU-T Ch. 62). For safety reasons the OA_EHRS is designed to operate in E/W
configurations and it includes special built-in C/T filters and OSC SFP (1528 nm) that provide an enhanced
safety mechanism and enable controlled Raman operation. The OA_EHRS card occupies a double I/O slot in
Apollo platforms.
The Raman section of the OA_EHRS operates in the backward mode. The mode indicates the direction of
signal flow relative to the amplifier line side. Backward mode means that the Raman pumps of the
OA_EHRS are located at the receiving end of an optical span to provide an effect similar to that of using a
low noise figure preamplifier before further amplifying the low-level signals received from the line (C band
and OSC) by the EDFA section of the OA_EHRS amplifier.
To ensure high reliability, the connectivity of the Raman amplifier output pump to the fibers is first
checked, before full output power is allowed, using built-in special software commands.

Functions
 Combines a Backward Raman amplification and an Erbium-based amplification in a single module
 Low NF (Noise Figure) across the entire C-Band
 High dynamic gain (23 to 37 dB)
 High output power (up to 20.5 dB ambient suppression
 Gain and tilt control
 Output power monitoring point
 Built-in SFP OSC operating on 1528 nm (ITU-T Ch. 62) at 100 Mbps

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-151

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

 Mechanisms for ensuring eye-safety:

 Spring-loaded protective covers on connectors carrying high power signals
 BR detection
 LOS detection from the far end
 OSC signal detection
 Built-in C/T filters for 1528 nm (ITU-T Ch. 62) to support OSC functionality
 Full PM by means of management stations, including monitoring of optical power levels and pump
current
 Monitoring and alarms

Card views
General view

Front panel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-152

Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Ports
Port name Connector Function
EXP IN LX 5 Connect to counter-propagating signal.
AMP OUT LX 5 Connect to amplified signal output.
MON OUT -20dB LC Monitor connector used to connect test equipment (like OPM or OSA);
provides a -20 dB sample from the amplifier output signal.
LINE IN (PUMP E2000HP For connecting the pump signal output to the line input fiber and the
OUT) line input signal to Raman input.
LINE OUT E2000HP For connecting the line output signal to the line output fiber.

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card IS is (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no
fault in the OA_EHRS.
OSC 100M LED
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the OSC SFP laser transmits.
LINE LEDs
LOS Red LED Blinks when the signal on the line (fiber) is missing or below the preset
threshold; this signal is valid only when the Raman is off. This usually
indicates a fiber cut.
BR Orange LED Lights when the level of BR line signal exceeds the preset threshold. Usually,
this indicates a disconnection or break in the fiber connected to the LINE IN
connector.
RAMAN ON Green LED Lights when laser power is transmitted through the line port.
OSC LOS Red LED Blinks when the 1528 nm (ITU-T Ch. 62) OSC signal is missing or below the
preset threshold.
AMP LEDs
BR Orange LED Lights when the level of BR amplifier output signal exceeds the preset
threshold. Usually, this indicates a disconnection or break in the fiber
connected to the AMP OUT connector.
ON Green LED Lights when the output power of the amplifier is above the threshold level.
EXP. IN LED
LOS Red LED Blinks when the EXP. IN input signal is missing, or is too low for normal
operation.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-153

Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Block diagram

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-154

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.11.15 OA_HRSF
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603

Description
The OA_HRSF is a Raman amplifier card that provides low-noise amplification for Apollo networks. It
provides a mean to improve the system OSNR, but specifically employed on ultra-long links (>40dB loss). In
addition, the Raman amplifier cards enable the generation and termination of the optical supervision
channel (OSC). The OSC is an optical channel at 1528 nm that operates at 2 Mbps and carries management
data between optical network nodes. For eye-safety reasons, operation of the 2 Mbps OSC channel is
essential.
The gain of the amplifier depends on the fiber type and fiber quality, connected to the Line input port: for
G.652/654 it's 11 to 14 dB; for G.655 it's 13 to 16 dB.
OA_HRSF is intended for use in conjunction with EDFA amplifiers over G.652, G.654, and G.655 fibers. It
supports multichannel applications capable of amplifying the entire C band, supports Flex-Grid, and also
transports the OSC at 1528 nm. For safety reasons the OA_HRSF is designed to operate in E/W
configurations and it includes built-in C/T filters. The OA_HRSF also includes an OTDR filter to enable
monitoring of the fiber span.
The OA_HRSF operates in the backward mode. The mode indicates the direction of signal flow relative to
the amplifier line side. Backward mode means that the OA_HRSF is located at the receiving end of an
optical span to provide an effect similar to that of using a low noise figure preamplifier before further
amplifying the low-level signals received from the line by an EDFA amplifier.
The OA_HRSF occupies a double (long) slot in the OPT96xx platforms.

Functions
 Output power monitoring point
 OSC termination (2 Mbps)
 OSC add and drop
 Mechanisms for ensuring eye-safety:
 Spring-loaded protective covers on connectors carrying high power signals
 BR detection
 LOS detection from the far end
 ALS
 Built-in C/T filters to support OSC functionality
 OTDR port to enable monitoring of the fiber span

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-155

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

 Full PM by means of management stations, including monitoring of optical power levels and pump
current
 Monitoring and alarms
 1528 nm SFP for OSC channel
For additional safety information, see Raman amplification principles of operation and High power laser
safety.

Card views
General view

Front panel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-156

Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Ports
Port name Connector Function
NODE IN LX 5 For connecting a booster amplifier output to the line. This signal passes
through the OA_HRSF and connects to the LINE OUT connector. Connector
is located behind spring loaded cover for safety
NODE OUT LX 5 For connecting the Raman amplifier output to an EDFA amplifier.
Connector is located behind spring loaded cover for safety
MON OUT -20dB LC Monitor connector used to connect test equipment (like OPM or OSA);
provides an -20 dB sample from the amplifier output signal
LINE IN (PUMP E2000 For connecting the pump signal output to the line and the line signal to
OUT) Raman input. Connector is located behind spring loaded cover for safety
LINE OUT E2000 For connecting the line output signal (typically comes from a booster
amplifier). Connector located behind spring loaded cover for safety
OSC 1528 IN LC For connecting the input 1528 nm supervisory channel
OSC 1528 OUT LC For connecting the input 1528 nm supervisory channel
OTDR ACCESS LC For connecting an OTDR device to test the characteristics of the line fiber

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no
fault in the OA_HRSF.
LINE LEDs
BR Orange LED Lights when the level of BR signal exceeds the preset threshold. Usually, this
indicates a disconnection or unclean connectors toward or at the LINE IN
port.
RAMAN ON Green LED Lights when laser power is transmitted through the line port (power source
may be the OA_HRSF and/or the EDFA amplifier).
OSC LOS Red LED Blinks when the 1528 nm OSC signal is missing or below the preset
threshold.
LINE LOS Red LED Blinks when the signal on the line (fiber) is missing or under the preset
threshold. This usually indicates a fiber cut.
NODE LED
NODE LOS Red LED Blinks when the signal arriving from the node (typically connected to a
booster amplifier) is missing or under the preset threshold.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-157

Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Marking Item Functions

OSC2M LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the OSC2M laser transmits.
F/L Red LED Blinks when the OSC2M input signal is missing, or is too low for normal
operation. Lights when a fault is detected in the OSC2M path.

Block diagram

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-158

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.11.16 OA_EHRSF
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603

Description
The OA_EHRSF is a hybrid Raman/EDFA optical amplifier supporting operation in Flex-Grid, for both ILA and
pre-amp configurations in DCF-less coherent networks. It combines a distributed low-noise Raman
amplification and a high-gain, high-power EDFA amplification in a single module, providing low-noise figure,
high gain, and high output power, while improving the system OSNR. The OA_EHRSF is intended for use
over G.652, G.654, and G.655 fibers. It supports multichannel applications capable of amplifying the entire
C band, and also transmits the OSC on 1528 nm. For safety reasons the OA_EHRSF is designed to operate in
E/W configurations and it includes special built-in C/T filters and OSC SFP (1528 nm) that provide an
enhanced safety mechanism and enable controlled Raman operation. The OA_EHRSF card occupies a
double I/O slot in Apollo platforms.
The Raman section of the OA_EHRSF operates in the backward mode. The mode indicates the direction of
signal flow relative to the amplifier line side. Backward mode means that the Raman pumps of the
OA_EHRSF are located at the receiving end of an optical span to provide an effect similar to that of using a
low noise figure preamplifier before further amplifying the low-level signals received from the line by the
EDFA section of the OA_EHRSF amplifier. The OA_EHRSF also includes an OTDR filter to enable monitoring
of the fiber span.
To ensure high reliability, the connectivity of the Raman amplifier output pump to the fibers is first
checked, before full output power is allowed, using built-in special software commands.

Functions
 Combines a Backward Raman amplification and an Erbium-based amplification in a single module
 Supports operation in Flex-Grid
 Low NF (Noise Figure) across the entire C-Band
 High dynamic gain (19 to 37 dB)
 High output power (up to 20.5 dBm)
 Transient suppression
 Gain and tilt control
 Output power monitoring point
 Built-in SFP OSC operating on 1528 nm, at 100 Mbps

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-159

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

 Mechanisms for ensuring eye-safety:

 Spring-loaded protective covers on connectors carrying high power signals
 BR detection
 LOS detection from the far end
 OSC signal detection
 Built-in C/T filters for 1528 nm to support OSC functionality
 OTDR port to enable monitoring of the fiber span
 Full PM by means of management stations, including monitoring of optical power levels and pump
current
 Monitoring and alarms

Card views
General view

Front panel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-160

Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Ports
Port name Connector Function
EXP IN LX 5 Connect to counter-propagating signal.
LINE OUT LX 5 Connect to amplified signal output.
MON OUT -20dB LC Monitor connector used to connect test equipment (like OPM or OSA);
provides a -20 dB sample from the amplifier output signal.
LINE IN (PUMP E2000HP For connecting the pump signal output to the line input fiber and the line
OUT) input signal to Raman input.
LINE OUT E2000HP For connecting the line output signal to the line output fiber.
OTDR 1610 LC To connect an OTDR device to test the characteristics of the line fiber.

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no
fault in the OA_EHRSF.
OSC 100M LED
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the OSC SFP laser transmits.
LINE LEDs
LOS Red LED Blinks when the signal on the line (fiber) is missing or below the preset
threshold; this signal is valid only when the Raman is off. This usually
indicates a fiber cut.
BR Orange LED Lights when the level of BR line signal exceeds the preset threshold. Usually,
this indicates a disconnection or unclean connectors toward or at the LINE
IN port.
RAMAN ON Green LED Lights when laser power is transmitted through the line port.
OSC LOS Red LED Blinks when the 1528 nm OSC signal is missing or below the preset
threshold.
AMP LEDs
BR Orange LED Lights when the level of BR amplifier output signal exceeds the preset
threshold. Usually, this indicates a disconnection or unclean connectors
toward or at the AMP OUT port.
ON Green LED Lights when the output power of the amplifier is above the threshold level.
EXP. IN LED
LOS Red LED Blinks when the EXP. IN input signal is missing, or is too low for normal
operation.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-161

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Block diagram

9.11.17 OA_LEHRSF
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603

Description
The OA_LEHRSF is a hybrid Raman/EDFA optical amplifier supporting operation in Flex-Grid, for both ILA
and pre-amp configurations in DCF-less coherent networks. These amplifiers are optimized for low-gain
100/200G coherent regional and long-haul in-line sites to increase network reach, providing optimized
dynamic gain for short spans (15 to 26 dB).
The OA_LEHRSF combines a distributed low-noise Raman amplification and a high-power EDFA
amplification in a single module, providing low-noise figure, wide gain, and high output power, while
improving the system OSNR. The OA_LEHRSF is intended for use over G.652, G.654, and G.655 fibers. It
supports multichannel applications capable of amplifying the entire C band, and also transmits the OSC on
1528 nm. For safety reasons the OA_LEHRSF is designed to operate in E/W configurations and it includes
special built-in C/T filters and OSC SFP (1528 nm) that provide an enhanced safety mechanism and enable
controlled Raman operation. The OA_LEHRSF card occupies a double I/O slot in Apollo platforms.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-162

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

The Raman section of the OA_LEHRSF operates in the backward mode. The mode indicates the direction of
signal flow relative to the amplifier line side. Backward mode means that the Raman pumps of the
OA_LEHRSF are located at the receiving end of an optical span to provide an effect similar to that of using a
low noise figure preamplifier before further amplifying the low-level signals received from the line by the
EDFA section of the OA_LEHRSF amplifier. The OA_LEHRSF also includes an OTDR filter to enable
monitoring of the fiber span.
To ensure high reliability, the connectivity of the Raman amplifier output pump to the fibers is first
checked, before full output power is allowed, using built-in special software commands.

Functions
 Combines a Backward Raman amplification and an Erbium-based amplification in a single module
 Supports operation in Flex-Grid
 Low NF (Noise Figure) across the entire C-Band
 Optimized dynamic gain for short spans (15 to 26 dB)
 High output power (up to 20.5 dBm)
 Transient suppression
 Gain and tilt control
 Output power monitoring point
 Built-in SFP OSC operating on 1528 nm, at 100 Mbps
 Mechanisms for ensuring eye-safety:
 Spring-loaded protective covers on connectors carrying high power signals
 BR detection
 LOS detection from the far end
 OSC signal detection
 Built-in C/T filters for 1528 nm to support OSC functionality
 OTDR port to enable monitoring of the fiber span
 Full PM by means of management stations, including monitoring of optical power levels and pump
current
 Monitoring and alarms

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-163

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Card views
General view

Front panel

Ports
Port name Connector Function
EXP IN LX 5 Connect to counter-propagating signal.
AMP OUT LX 5 Connect to amplified signal output.
.MON OUT - LC Monitor connector used to connect test equipment (like OPM or OSA);
20dB provides a -20 dB sample from the amplifier output signal.
LINE IN (PUMP E2000HP For connecting the pump signal output to the line input fiber and the
OUT) line input signal to Raman input.
LINE OUT E2000HP For connecting the line output signal to the line output fiber.
OTDR 1610 LC To connect an OTDR device to test the characteristics of the line fiber.

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card IS is (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no
fault in the OA_LEHRSF.
OSC 100M LED
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the OSC SFP laser transmits.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-164

Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Marking Item Functions

LINE LEDs
LOS Red LED Blinks when the signal on the line (fiber) is missing or below the preset
threshold; this signal is valid only when the Raman is off. This usually
indicates a fiber cut.
BR Orange LED Lights when the level of BR line signal exceeds the preset threshold. Usually,
this indicates a disconnection or unclean connectors toward or at the LINE
IN port.
RAMAN ON Green LED Lights when laser power is transmitted through the line port.
OSC LOS Red LED Blinks when the 1528 nm OSC signal is missing or below the preset
threshold.
AMP LEDs
BR Orange LED Lights when the level of BR amplifier output signal exceeds the preset
threshold. Usually, this indicates a disconnection or unclean connectors
toward or at the AMP OUT port.
ON Green LED Lights when the output power of the amplifier is above the threshold level.
EXP. IN LED
LOS Red LED Blinks when the EXP. IN input signal is missing, or is too low for normal
operation.

Block diagram

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-165

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.11.18 OA_USPBF
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603

Description
The OA_USPBF is a high-gain power booster amplifier with an output power of 26 dBm. It can be used in
dispersion-managed 10G networks, cascaded to MSA ILA, or in DCF-less coherent networks, cascaded to
non-MSA ILA. The OA_USPBF supports multichannel applications and is capable of amplifying the Extended-
C-band.
For safety reasons the OA_USPBF is designed to operate in E/W configurations and includes a special built-
in C/T filter for the OSC signal. The OSC signal can be connected from another amplifier or from an OSC_8
card. For additional safety information, see High power laser safety and Automatic laser shutdown.
The OA_USPBF occupies a double I/O slot in Apollo platforms.
The OA_USPBF is an E/W configured card designed to provide enhanced ALS function to shut down the
amplifier in case of fiber cut. The “LINE IN” and “LINE OUT” ports are connected to one of the fiber
directions. An internal photo-diode (PD) on the connection between these ports facilitates the ALS function
(for a detailed description see Automatic Laser Shutdown). A comprehensive APR system complements the
eye-safety mechanisms of the card (see Automatic Power Reduction).

NOTE: The OA_USPBF operation requires this amplifier type at both span ends.

Functions
 Low NF (Noise Figure) across the Extended-C-Band
 Optimized fixed gain (5 to 7 dB)
 High output power (up to 26 dBm)
 Transient suppression
 Gain and tilt control
 Output power monitoring point
 Mechanisms for ensuring eye-safety:
 Spring-loaded protective covers on connectors carrying high power signals
 BR detection
 Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)
 Automatic Power Reduction (APR)
 LOS detection from the far end

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-166

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

 OSC signal detection

 Built-in C/T filters for 1510 nm to support OSC functionality
 Full PM by means of management stations, including monitoring of optical power levels
 Monitoring and alarms

Card views
General view

Front panel

Ports
Port name Connector Function
AMP IN LC Amplifier line input connector
EXP OUT LC Express output signal after the PD (fiber cut detection)
OSC 1510 IN LC OSC input signal connector from built-in C/T filter
OSC 1510 OUT LC OSC output signal connector to built-in C/T filter
AMP OUT LC Amplifier external line output connector that is also the output from
the 2nd stage.
MON OUT -20dB LC Monitor connector used to connect test equipment (like OPM or OSA);
provides an -20 dB sample from the amplifier output signal.
LINE IN E2000 Connect the EDFA pump output to the line. Located behind spring
loaded cover for safety
LINE OUT E2000 Connect the line output signal (usually comes from a booster
amplifier). Located behind spring loaded cover for safety

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-167

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no
fault in the OA_USPBF.
AMP IN LED
Blinks when the AMP IN input signal is missing or below the preset
LOS Red LED
threshold.
LINE LEDs
ALS Orange LED Lights when the ALS protection mechanism is activated. Usually, this
indicates a disconnection in the fiber connected to the amplifier output.
APR Green LED Lights when the APR protection mechanism is activated. This occurs
when there is high back reflection and the amplifier's output power is
above the allowed threshold.
OUT BR Orange LED Lights when the level of BR amplifier output signal exceeds a preset
threshold. Usually, this indicates a disconnection or break in the fiber
connected to the amplifier output (LINE OUT) connector.
OUT ON Green LED Lights when the output power of the amplifier is above the threshold
level.
IN LOS Red LED Lights when there is no input signal, or the signal to the LINE IN
connector is under a preset threshold. Usually, this indicates a
disconnection or break in the fiber connected from the far side, or no
output power from the amplifier at the far side.

9.11.18.1 Automatic power reduction

A special Automatic Power Reduction (APR) subsystem ensures that the high-power signals are confined to
the fiber. During transmission this subsystem continuously monitors and analyzes various optical
parameters, for example, input signal levels, back reflection, and supervisory channel signal. It is therefore
capable of detecting fiber disconnections and fiber cuts, even when they occur many kilometers from the
card's location. In these cases, the APR subsystem automatically reduces the amplifier output power below
an eye-safe predetermined level in accordance with ITU-T Rec. G.664. After the APR subsystem is activated,
normal operation is automatically resumed once normal conditions have been restored by the
management system. Other monitored signals that result in APR activation are High back reflection from
the line output.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-168

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.11.19 OA_DLF
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603
 OPT9904X

Description
The OA_DLF is a dual EDFA card that includes two independent EDFA amplifiers in a single package. The
two EDFAs are defined as pre-amp and Booster amplifiers. The pre-amp EDFA amplifies the optical signal
received from the line, and the Booster amplifies the light transmitted to the line. The pre-amp EDFA in the
OA_DLF is optimized as an ILA for coherent networks with short span applications.
For safety reasons the OA_DLF is designed to operate in E/W configurations and includes built-in C/T filters.
The card occupies one slot in the OPT96xx platforms and includes an 1510nm OSC filter and a pluggable
100 Mbps 1510nm OSC SFP.
The EDFA amplifiers in the OA_DLF card includes extended C-band EDFAs, but in the current release
operation in the C-Band only is supported.

Functions
 Includes two independent EDFA modules
 Single-slot card for the OPT96xx family
 Accommodate an 100 Mbps 1510 nm OSC SFP
 Built-in E-W C/T filters to support OSC functionality
 Operates in Bi-directional configuration to support safety
 Optical amplification (power and gain control)
 Transient suppression
 Monitoring and alarms
 OSC termination (optional)
 Extended C-band (96 channels) HW ready (future)

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-169

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Card views
General view

Front panel

Ports
Port name Connector Function
NODE IN LC Booster input connector
NODE OUT LC Pre-amp output connector
MON OUT -20dB LC Monitor connector (near NODE) used to connect test equipment (like
OPM or OSA); provides an -20 dB sample from the Pre-amp output signal
LINE IN LC Pre-amp input connector
LINE OUT LC Booster output connector
MON OUT -20dB LC Monitor connector (near LINE): used to connect test equipment (like
OPM or OSA); provides an -20 dB sample from the Booster output signal.
OSC 1510 IN LC Input signal connector to built-in C/T filter.
OSC 1510 OUT LC Output signal connector to built-in C/T filter
OSC100M SFC Port that can house an optional 1510nm SFP that provides FE control
communication channel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-170

Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off when
the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no fault
in the OA_DLF.
Booster amplifier LEDs
ON Green LED Lights steadily when the pump laser is on and the output power is above the
preset threshold. Off when the output power is below the threshold (LOP
condition).
BR Orange LED Lights when the level of BR exceeds the preset threshold. Usually, this
indicates a disconnection or break in the fiber connected to the LINE OUT
connector.
LOS Red LED Blinks when the input power signal is missing, or is too low for normal
operation (LOS condition). Off when the input signal is normal.
Preamplifier LEDs
ON Green LED Lights steadily when the pump laser is on and the output power is above the
preset threshold. Off when the output power is below the threshold (LOP
condition).
BR Orange LED Lights when the level of BR exceeds the preset threshold. Usually, this
indicates a disconnection or break in the fiber connected to the NODE OUT
connector.
LOS Red LED Blinks when the input power signal to the Preamp is missing, or is too low for
normal operation (LOS condition). Off when the input signal is normal.
OSC LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the OSC laser transmits.
F/L Red LED Blinks when the OSC input signal is missing, or is too low for normal
operation. Lights when a fault is detected in the OSC path.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-171

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Block diagram

9.11.20 OA_DLHF
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603
 OPT9904X

Description
The OA_DLHF is a dual EDFA card that includes two independent EDFA amplifiers in a single package. The
two EDFAs are defined as pre-amp and Booster amplifiers. The pre-amp EDFA amplifies the optical signal
received from the line, and the Booster amplifies the light transmitted to the line. The pre-amp EDFA in the
OA_DLHF is optimized as an ILA for coherent networks with long span applications.
For safety reasons the OA_DLHF is designed to operate in E/W configurations and it includes built-in C/T
filters. The card occupies one slot in the OPT96xx platforms and includes an 1510nm OSC filter and a
pluggable 100 Mbps 1510nm OSC SFP.
The EDFA amplifiers in the OA_DLHF card includes extended C-band EDFAs, but in the current release
operation in the C-Band only is supported.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-172

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Functions
 Includes two independent EDFA modules
 Single-slot card for the OPT96xx family and for the OPT9904X
 Accommodate an 100 Mbps 1510 nm OSC SFP
 Built-in E-W C/T filters to support OSC functionality
 Operates in Bi-directional configuration to support safety
 Optical amplification (power and gain control)
 Transient suppression
 Monitoring and alarms
 OSC termination (optional)
 Extended C-band (96 channels) HW ready (future)

Card views
General view

Front panel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-173

Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Ports
Port name Connector Function
NODE IN LC Booster input connector
NODE OUT LC Pre-amp output connector
MON OUT -20dB LC Monitor connector (near NODE) used to connect test equipment (like OPM
or OSA); provides an -20 dB sample from the Pre-amp output signal
LINE IN LC Pre-amp input connector
LINE OUT LC Booster output connector
MON OUT -20dB LC Monitor connector (near LINE): used to connect test equipment (like OPM
or OSA); provides an -20 dB sample from the Booster output signal.
OSC 1510 IN LC Input signal connector to built-in C/T filter.
OSC 1510 OUT LC Output signal connector to built-in C/T filter
OSC100M SFC Port that can house an optional 1510nm SFP that provides FE control
communication channel

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off when
the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no fault in
the OA_DLHF.
Booster amplifier LEDs
ON Green LED Lights steadily when the pump laser is on and the output power is above the
preset threshold. Off when the output power is below the threshold (LOP
condition).
BR Orange LED Lights when the level of BR exceeds the preset threshold. Usually, this indicates
a disconnection or break in the fiber connected to the LINE OUT connector.
LOS Red LED Blinks when the input power signal is missing, or is too low for normal
operation (LOS condition). Off when the input signal is normal.
Preamplifier LEDs
ON Green LED Lights steadily when the pump laser is on and the output power is above the
preset threshold. Off when the output power is below the threshold (LOP
condition).
BR Orange LED Lights when the level of BR exceeds the preset threshold. Usually, this indicates
a disconnection or break in the fiber connected to the NODE OUT connector.
LOS Red LED Blinks when the input power signal to the Preamp is missing, or is too low for
normal operation (LOS condition). Off when the input signal is normal.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-174

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Marking Item Functions

OSC LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the OSC laser transmits.
F/L Red LED Blinks when the OSC input signal is missing, or is too low for normal operation.
Lights when a fault is detected in the OSC path.

Block diagram

9.11.21 OA_DPR
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603

Description
The OA_DPR is a low-cost Red Band, dual EDFA card that includes two independent EDFA amplifiers in a
single package. The two EDFAs are defined as pre-amp and Booster amplifiers. It can operate only in the
Red Band (ITU-T Ch. 21 to Ch. 36) and support 16 (100 GHz spacing), or 32 channels (50 GHz spacing).
The OA_DPR is designed to operate in E/W configurations and includes built-in C/T filters. The card
occupies one slot in the OPT96xx platforms and includes an 1510nm OSC filter and a pluggable 100 Mbps
1510nm OSC SFP.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-175

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Functions
 Includes two independent EDFA modules
 Single-slot card for the OPT96xx family
 Accommodate an 100 Mbps 1510 nm OSC SFP
 Supports 16 or 32 channels in the Red Band
 Built-in E-W C/T filters to support OSC functionality
 Operates in Bi-directional configuration to support safety
 Optical amplification (power and gain control)
 Transient suppression
 Monitoring and alarms
 OSC termination (optional)

Card views
General view

Front panel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-176

Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Ports
Port name Connector Function
NODE IN LC Booster input connector
NODE OUT LC Pre-amp output connector
MON OUT -20dB LC Monitor connector (near NODE) used to connect test equipment (like OPM
or OSA); provides an -20 dB sample from the Pre-amp output signal
LINE IN LC Pre-amp input connector
LINE OUT LC Booster output connector
MON OUT -20dB LC Monitor connector (near LINE): used to connect test equipment (like OPM
or OSA); provides an -20 dB sample from the Booster output signal.
OSC 1510 IN LC Input signal connector to built-in C/T filter.
OSC 1510 OUT LC Output signal connector to built-in C/T filter
OSC100M SFC Port that can house an optional 1510nm SFP that provides FE control
communication channel

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off when the
card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no fault in
the OA_DPR.
Booster amplifier LEDs
ON Green LED Lights steadily when the pump laser is on and the output power is above the
preset threshold. Off when the output power is below the threshold (LOP
condition).
BR Orange LED Lights when the level of BR exceeds the preset threshold. Usually, this indicates
a disconnection or break in the fiber connected to the LINE OUT connector.
LOS Red LED Blinks when the input power signal is missing, or is too low for normal operation
(LOS condition). Off when the input signal is normal.
Preamplifier LEDs
ON Green LED Lights steadily when the pump laser is on and the output power is above the
preset threshold. Off when the output power is below the threshold (LOP
condition).
BR Orange LED Lights when the level of BR exceeds the preset threshold. Usually, this indicates
a disconnection or break in the fiber connected to the NODE OUT connector.
LOS Red LED Blinks when the input power signal to the Preamp is missing, or is too low for
normal operation (LOS condition). Off when the input signal is normal.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-177

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Marking Item Functions

OSC LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the OSC laser transmits.
F/L Red LED Blinks when the OSC input signal is missing, or is too low for normal operation.
Lights when a fault is detected in the OSC path.

9.11.22 OA_DFBL
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603
 OPT9904X

Description
The OA_DFBL is a dual EDFA card that includes two independent EDFA amplifiers in a single package. The
two EDFAs are defined as pre-amp and Booster amplifiers. The pre-amp EDFA amplifies the optical signal
received from the line, and the Booster amplifies the light transmitted to the line. The card is optimized for
Metro applications with up to 44 channels.
For safety reasons the OA_DFBL is designed to operate in E/W configurations and it includes built-in C/T
filters. The card occupies one slot in the OPT96xx platforms and includes an 1510nm OSC filter and a
pluggable 100 Mbps 1510nm OSC SFP.
The pre-amp EDFA is a 16 dBm VGA (Variable Gain Amplifier), while the Booster is a 20 dBm FGA (Fixed
Gain Amplifier).

Functions
 Includes two independent EDFA modules
 Single-slot card for the OPT96xx family and for the OPT9904X
 Accommodate an 100 Mbps 1510 nm OSC SFP
 Built-in E-W C/T filters to support OSC functionality
 Operates in Bi-directional configuration to support safety
 Optical amplification (power and gain control)
 Monitoring and alarms
 OSC termination (optional)
 Reduced C-band ( channels)

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-178

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Card views
General view

Front panel

Ports
Port name Connector Function
NODE IN LC Booster input connector
NODE OUT LC Pre-amp output connector
MON OUT -20dB LC Monitor connector (near NODE) used to connect test equipment (like
OPM or OSA); provides an -20 dB sample from the Pre-amp output signal
LINE IN LC Pre-amp input connector
LINE OUT LC Booster output connector
MON OUT -20dB LC Monitor connector (near LINE): used to connect test equipment (like
OPM or OSA); provides an -20 dB sample from the Booster output signal.
OSC 1510 IN LC Input signal connector to built-in C/T filter.
OSC 1510 OUT LC Output signal connector to built-in C/T filter
OSC100M SFC Port that can house an optional 1510nm SFP that provides FE control
communication channel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-179

Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card IS is (assigned and completed configurations).
Off when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is
no fault in the OA_DFBL.
Booster amplifier LEDs
ON Green LED Lights steadily when the pump laser is on and the output power is
above the preset threshold. Off when the output power is below the
threshold (LOP condition).
LOS Red LED Blinks when the input power signal is missing, or is too low for normal
operation (LOS condition). Off when the input signal is normal.
Preamplifier LEDs
ON Green LED Lights steadily when the pump laser is on and the output power is
above the preset threshold. Off when the output power is below the
threshold (LOP condition).
LOS Red LED Blinks when the input power signal to the Preamp is missing, or is too
low for normal operation (LOS condition). Off when the input signal is
normal.
OSC LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the OSC laser transmits.
F/L Red LED Blinks when the OSC input signal is missing, or is too low for normal
operation. Lights when a fault is detected in the OSC path.

Block diagram

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-180

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.11.23 OPA_FBS
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603
The OPA_FBS pluggable booster amplifier is used in these platforms when installed within a ROADM_4FS
module.

Description
The OPA_FBS is a pluggable CFP2 form-factor amplifier, hosted by the ROADM_4FS module, for use as a
booster in the designated booster module slot. The OPA_FBS is a 20.5dBm single-stage variable gain
pluggable EDFA that operates over the extended C-band. The operating gain range is 15 to 28dB. A 1510nm
OSC channel may be added via the OSCin port.

Functions
 Variable gain booster amplifier (15-28 dB)
 High output power (20.5 dBm)
 Transient suppression
 Output power monitoring point
 Single amplification stage
 Full PM by means of management stations, including monitoring of optical power levels and pump
current
 Monitoring and alarms
 1510 nm add OSC filter built-in

Functional block diagram

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-181

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Pluggable amplifier indicators

The OPA_FBS pluggable booster amplifier is housed within a ROADM_4FS module. The amplifier port labels
and LEDs are marked on the ROADM_4FS module casing. The OPA ports are also marked on the amplifier
front panel. For convenience, the amplifier type is identified by the handle color, allowing you to distinguish
between the three types of OPA modules without any need to extract them.

Amplifier indicators

Panel marking Connector Function

 (IN) LC Amplifier line input connector.
 (OUT) LC Amplifier output connector.
 (OSC add) LC Built-in 1510 nm OSC filter that provides an FE control communications
channel.
Red handle Identifies the OPA_FBS booster amplifier.

9.11.24 OPA_LFS
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603
The OPA_LFS pluggable low-gain pre-amplifier is used in these platforms when installed within a
ROADM_4FS module.

Description
The OPA_LFS is a pluggable CFP2 form-factor amplifier, hosted by the ROADM_4FS module, for use as a
low-gain pre-amp in the designated pre-amp module slot. The OPA_LFS is a 20.5dBm single-stage variable
gain pluggable EDFA that operates over the extended C-band. The operating gain range is 15 to 28dB. A
1510nm OSC channel may be dropped via the OSCout port.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-182

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Functions
 Variable gain pre-amplifier (15-28 dB)
 High output power (20.5 dBm)
 Transient suppression
 Output power monitoring point
 Single amplification stage
 Full PM by means of management stations, including monitoring of optical power levels and pump
current
 Monitoring and alarms
 1510 nm drop OSC filter built-in

Functional block diagram

Pluggable amplifier indicators

The OPA_LFS pluggable pre-amplifier is housed within a ROADM_4FS module. The amplifier port labels and
LEDs are marked on the ROADM_4FS module casing. The OPA ports are also marked on the amplifier front
panel. For convenience, the amplifier type is identified by the handle color, allowing you to distinguish
between the three types of OPA modules without any need to extract them.

Amplifier indicators

Panel marking Connector Function

 (IN) LC Amplifier line input connector.
 (OUT) LC Amplifier output connector.
 (OSC drop) LC Built-in 1510 nm OSC filter that provides an FE control communications
channel.
Blue handle Identifies the OPA_LFS low-gain pre-amplifier.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-183

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.11.25 OPA_HFS
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603
The OPA_HFS pluggable high-gain pre-amplifier is used in these platforms when installed within a
ROADM_4FS module.

Description
The OPA_HFS is a pluggable CFP2 form-factor amplifier, hosted by the ROADM_4FS module, for use as a
high-gain pre-amp in the designated pre-amp module slot. The OPA_HFS is a 20.5dBm single-stage variable
gain pluggable EDFA that operates over the extended C-band. The operating gain range is 25 to 37dB. A
1510nm OSC channel may be dropped via the OSCout port.

Functions
 Variable gain pre-amplifier (25-37 dB)
 High output power (20.5 dBm)
 Transient suppression
 Output power monitoring point
 Single amplification stage
 Full PM by means of management stations, including monitoring of optical power levels and pump
current
 Monitoring and alarms
 1510 nm drop OSC filter built-in

Functional block diagram

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-184

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Pluggable amplifier indicators

The OPA_HFS pluggable pre-amplifier is housed within a ROADM_4FS module. The amplifier port labels and
LEDs are marked on the ROADM_4FS module casing. The OPA ports are also marked on the amplifier front
panel. For convenience, the amplifier type is identified by the handle color, allowing you to distinguish
between the three types of OPA modules without any need to extract them.

Amplifier indicators

Panel marking Connector Function

 (IN) LC Amplifier line input connector.
 (OUT) LC Amplifier output connector.
 (OSC drop) LC Built-in 1510 nm OSC filter that provides an FE control communications
channel.
Purple handle Identifies the OPA_HFS high-gain pre-amplifier.

9.12 Miniature OTDR

The Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) is an optoelectronic device used to test the characteristic
of an optical fiber. The OTDR injects a series of optical pulses into the tested fiber and examines the light
scattered or reflected back from the end of the fiber. The strength of the return pulses is measured and
integrated as a function of time.
OTDR functionality is supported in any Apollo amplifier that supports 100 Mbps OSC with an SFP, by simply
replacing the regular OSC SFP with the OTDR1_L5 transceiver.
The OTDR is implemented in the Apollo platforms by an OSC SFP that has also the capability to operate as
an OTDR. This application provides a low-cost and compact OTDR device, specifically designed to determine
the location of a fiber cut. The SFP used for the OTDR application is OTDR1_L5, which is a 1510 nm, 100
Mbps OSC SFP with OTDR capabilities.
The OTDR1_L5 provides the following main functions:
 Operates normally as a 100 Mbps OSC SFP
 OTDR functionality triggered by management commands
 OTDR commands can be from a CLI or STMS station.

NOTES:
 OTDR operation requires OTDR SFPs at both span ends
 The total span loss should not be more than 15 dB

For a description of the commands refer to OTDR Commands.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-185

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.12.1 OTDR commands

The user can control the OTDR by two commands sent from the CLI or STMS stations. These commands and
their outcome are described in this section.
The OTDR control commands are:
 Start OTDR calibration
 Start OTDR test
The OTDR calibration is an action initiated by the user after installation of a new fiber span and each time
after the fiber span is modified or repaired. The user is responsible to perform the calibration.
A "Start OTDR calibration" command results in the OTDR testing of the fiber span connected to the SFP
output. At the end of the calibration test the OTDR reports a list of numbers that represent the location of
points with high reflection. This list is stored by the RCP and used to evaluate the fiber characteristics in a
real test.
After a "Start OTDR calibration" command the following actions are performed:
1. The SFP stops transmitting as an OSC.
2. The SFP starts to transmit OTDR pulses.
3. The “Reference list” that shows the location (in km) of high-reflection points is retrieved.
4. The results are reported to the management station:
a. If the test has been completed successfully and a “Reference list” was achieved a “OTDR
calibration completion" is sent.
b. In case of time-out or another hardware failure a “OTDR calibration failed” message is reported.
5. The SFP returns to normal operation as an OSC in less than 15 sec.
If a new "Start OTDR calibration" is sent, a new “Reference list” is created, which is overwritten on the
previous.
If no reflection has been detected in a calibration test the “Reference list” will have a single value of 500
km.
The user can read the reflection points detected by the last OTDR test by a debug command.
After a "Start OTDR Test” command the following actions are performed:
1. The SFP stops transmitting as an OSC.
2. The SFP starts to transmit OTDR pulses.
3. The “Reference list” that shows the location (in km) of high-reflection points is retrieved.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-186

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

4. Compare the furthest reported point with the “Reference list” created by the last “calibration test”:
a. If the “furthest reported point” is different from any of the points in the “Reference list” by at
least +/-25 m – it will be considered as a “fiber cut” and its location will be reported to the
management station. )

b. If the “furthest reported point” is equal to one of the reference points +/-25m, the “furthest
reported point” will be reported as the fiber cut with the following warning note:
“Warning: Inconclusive results!!!
Fiber cut is indicated at a reference point”.
c. If no reflection point was detected a “No information” note will be reported.
d. If no “Reference list” exist (for example, because a calibration test was not performed) “furthest
point” will be reported with the following warning:
“Warning: Inconclusive results!!!
Calibration test has not been performed“.
e. In case of time-out or any other hardware failure the message “OTDR test failed” will be
reported.
5. The SFP returns to normal operation as an OSC in less than 15 sec.
The test results are displayed on the management station as "Distance to fiber cut” in units of meter. The
user can read the reflection points detected by the last OTDR test by a debug command.

9.13 OTDR_8
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603
 OPT9904X

Description
An Optical Time-Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) is an optoelectronic device used to characterize an optical
fiber. It injects a series of optical pulses into the fiber under test and extracts, from the same end of the
fiber, light that is scattered or reflected back from points along the fiber. The scattered or reflected light
that is gathered back is used to analyze the optical fiber characteristics.
The purpose of an OTDR is to detect, locate, and measure elements at any location on a fiber optical link.
The OTDR_8 test results are processed and enable to display a graphical representation of the entire fiber
optic link. The OTDR provides the user a trace (graphic representation) of the fiber's attenuation as a
function of distance from the OTDR connection point. An example of an OTDR trace signatures is shown in
the following figure.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-187

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

OTDR data graph

Operation of an OTDR can be simple, however it requires familiarity with fiber testing best practices to
perform good, reliable tests. OTDR traces can be analyzed and well interpreted only by trained and
experienced people. An intelligent software application, integrated into the device, can help technicians
use an OTDR more effectively, without the need to understand or interpret OTDR traces. The user only sets
the fiber span distance and the system automatically determines the pulse width, resolution, and
acquisition time.
The OTDR_8 is a low-cost dedicated OTDR test card for the Apollo OPT96xx family that occupies a double
(long) slot in the supported platforms. It can monitor up to 8 fibers (one at a time) and provide a maximum
reach on 40 dB fibers. The OTDR_8 operates at 1610 nm (outside the range of the C-band), which enables it
to perform in-service tests.

Features
 Various OTDR tests including:
 Manual - initiated by the user
 Scheduled - configured by the user to perform periodic test (Daily, Weekly, Monthly, etc.)
 Automatic - initiated by the system management (LightSOFT) in case a LOS is detected
 Saves a reference test for each fiber as a baseline to evaluate test results
 Raises alarms in case of fiber-cut or fiber-degradation compared to a reference test
 Provides a visualized OTDR GUI in LightSOFT
 Built-in intelligent software helps technicians use the OTDR more effectively
 Light pulse operates at 1610 nm (outside the C-band) to enable in-service tests
 Includes an 1610 nm passive filter to reject ASE noise (created by stimulated Raman)
 1 x 8 optical switch enables to connect up to eight fibers (one at a time)

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-188

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

 Saves records of test history in LightSOFT database

 In-service and out-of-service tests
 Pre-Raman test - enables evaluation of fiber quality to be connected to a Raman
 Range of 1 km to 250 km (in 1 km steps) with a default value of 80 km
A simplified block diagram of the OTDR_8 is shown in the following figure.

Card views
General view

The OTDR_8 includes an integrated OTDR module with an 1610 nm laser and an 1 x 8 optical switch that
enables to select one out of eight fibers connected to the card.
The following figure shows the front panel of the OTDR_8.

Front panel

Ports
Port marking Quantity Connector Functions
P1 to P8 8 LC 1 x 8 optical switch that enables to select one out of eight
fibers connected to the card.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-189

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off when
the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no fault
in the OTDR_8
OTDR port LEDs
P1 to P8 LED Lights when the fiber connected to the corresponding OTDR port (P1 to P8) is
tested.

Simplified block diagram

9.13.1 OTDR_8 test applications

The OTDR_8 main test applications OTDR_8 are:
 Determining the location of a fiber cut.
 Provide the characteristics of a fiber span before turning on services (out-of service test).
 Providing characteristics of a fiber span before connecting it to a Raman amplifier. It is most
important to receive a reliable report on the fiber's first 20 km characteristics because Raman
operation depends on high quality fibers.
One of the main uses of the OTDR_8 is for in-service fiber tests that can detect degradation in service
quality carried by the fiber. This can be due to bad splicing connection, fiber bents, damaged fiber, etc. In
such cases maintenance action like renewing the splice or replacing problematic parts of the fiber can be
performed in advance, before a serious fault occurs.

CAUTION: You can run OTDR_8 tests, in networks including Raman amplifiers only when the
Raman if not active.

In general, connection of an OTDR to a fiber doesn't affect traffic. However, traffic may affect the OTDR
signal and may cause inaccurate test results. Therefore, the OTDR_8 includes an internal 1610 nm passive
filter that reject ASE noise at 1610 nm (generated by stimulated Raman lasers).

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-190

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

In addition, to prevent other types of traffic to affect test results, the OTDR_8 is connected to the tested
fiber through OTDR filters. Two types of OTDR filter cards are offered:
 CT_OTDR_2: Used in applications where the OTDR, C-Band, and OSC signals are separate from each
other
 C_OTDR_2: Used in applications where the C-Band and OSC signals are combined and the OTDR signal
is separate
The OTDR operation is based on a light pulse sent into the fiber. The pulse width determines its power; the
wider the pulse the stronger the power it carries. To be able to test long span fibers we need a wide pulse;
on the other hand a wide pulse reduces the resolution of the OTDR test results. The pulse width is selected
as an optimal compromise between these contradictory requirements. In addition, the width of the pulse
creates an error of several meters in the test results named Dead-zone. This error can't be observed by the
OTDR_8. To improve the accuracy test results, a built-in 30 m fiber is connected inside the OTDR_8.

9.13.2 OTDR_8 one end test

The following figure shows a typical connection of the OTDR_8 to fibers for a test from one end.

OTRD_8 fiber test connection

The connection of OTDR_8 is typical for-20 dBm EDFA amplifiers fiber test and include:
 The user connects the OTDR_8 to the fiber span under test via OTDR filter (CT_OTDR_2 or C_otdr_2)
card
 The OTDR test parameters are automatically set according to span’s length
 The test enables to monitor both transmit and receive fibers from a single end
 A Reference Test is performed and stored as an expected baseline
 The user can set more manual or periodic tests
 If fiber cut or fiber-degradation is detected compared to the reference test alarms are raised by the
system

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-191

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.13.3 OTDR_8 two end test for high power EDFAs

A typical connection of OTDR_8 for high power EDFA amplifiers is shown in the following figure.

OTDR_8 connection to high EDFA amplifiers

This configuration is based on the following principals:

 The OTDR_8 is limited to monitor the receive fibers only, because of the high power
 Tow cards of this type are required one at each end
 It supports both in-service and out-of-service tests

9.13.4 OTDR_8 Raman span test

A typical connection of OTDR_8 for Raman span test is shown in the following figure.

OTRD_8 Raman span test

The configuration is based on the following principals:

 An OTDR_8 is required at both ends
 The test is limited to Out-of-Service operation (Raman amplifiers are shutdown)
 The OTDR_8 uses built-in OTDR filters on Raman cards

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-192

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.14 DCF
Apollo offers a variety of DCF cards to properly compensate for chromatic dispersion. To select the optimal
solution for specific installations, the following cards are available, differing mainly in their compensation
capabilities.
 DCF652_xx
 DCF655_xx
 RM_DCF652_xx

9.14.1 DCF652_xx
Description
The DCF652_xx is a single-slot DCF card that is suitable for G. 652 compliant fibers. The card is available for
compensation for various distances (5, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, or 120 km). The marking
xx in the name of the card indicates the compensated distance in km. All connections to the card are
through LC type connectors on the front panel.

Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603
 Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A

Card views
General view

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-193

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Front panel

9.14.2 DCF655_xx
Description
The DCF655_xx is a double-wide-slot DCF card that is suitable for G. 655 compliant fibers. The card is
available for compensation for various distances (40 km, 80 km, or 120 km). The marking xx in the name of
the card indicates the compensated distance in km. All connections to the card are through LC type
connectors on the front panel.

Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 Artemis 2A/4A

Card views
DCF655_xx general view

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-194

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

9.14.3 RM_DCF652_xx
Description
RM_DCF652_xx is a cost-effective family of DCF modules, suitable for G. 652 compliant fibers. A rack-mount
unit, RM_DCF can accommodate up to two of these modules. The RM_DCF is 1U high and can be installed
as a standalone unit in ETSI or 19" racks. The unit comes by default with ETSI brackets attached. To install
the unit in a 19" rack you must first remove the ETSI brackets and attach the 19" brackets, included in the
installation kit. For details see the corresponding Apollo Installation and Maintenance Manual.
The DCF modules are available for compensation for various distances (5, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90,
100, 110, or 120 km). The marking xx in the name of the module indicates the compensated distance in km.
The dispersion compensation range of the modules is -85 to -2040 ps/nm in the C Band. All connections to
the modules are made from the front panel and all connectors are LC type.
The following table lists the module name, and distance of compensation.

DCF rack-mount modules and unit

Module name Compensation distance (km) Type

RM_DCF652_5 5 DCF module
RM_DCF652_10 10 DCF module
RM_DCF652_20 20 DCF module
RM_DCF652_30 30 DCF module
RM_DCF652_40 40 DCF module
RM_DCF652_50 50 DCF module
RM_DCF652_60 60 DCF module
RM_DCF652_70 70 DCF module
RM_DCF652_80 80 DCF module
RM_DCF652_90 90 DCF module
RM_DCF652_100 100 DCF module
RM_DCF652_110 110 DCF module
RM_DCF652_120 120 DCF module
RM_DCF --- DCF unit

Card views
RM_DCF general view

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-195

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Sample panel: RM_DCF652_xx

9.15 OSC_8
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603

Description
The OSC_8 is a single-slot optical supervisory channel (OSC) card that provides up to eight OSC
management channels for the Apollo system. The OSC_8 provides the following main functions:
 Eight OSC SFP-based ports providing support for both 1510 nm and 1310 nm links as detailed in the
ports table that follows.
 Interoperability with Apollo optical amplifier OSC ports.
 Up to two cards in Apollo platforms.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-196

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

Card views
General view

Front panel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-197

Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx optical cards and modules

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no
fault in the OSC_8.
OSC port LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port is
unassigned.
F/L Red LED Lights steadily when a failure is detected in the port. Blinks when a LOS
condition is detected in the port. Off when the port is unassigned.

Ports
Port marking Number Connector Functions
6 SFP  Operates at 100 Mbps
OSC100M(0) to
OSC100M(5)  1510 nm with a typical span of 150Km or
 1310 nm with a typical span of 100Km for CWDM
applications
 Operates at 2 MHz using proprietary format
OSC2M(1) to 2 SFP
OSC2M(2)  1510 nm only used for long spans (typically over 200
km reach).

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 9-198

10 OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards
Apollo supports a variety of Layer 1 service cards, providing one of the densest systems in the market. The
Layer 1 cards are designed to support multiple rates and protocol services, thereby reducing the number of
I/O modules and spare parts required at each site.
To support this high density system, Apollo Layer 1 cards are designed as multichannel cards, with
pluggable transceivers providing a pay-as-you-grow option. In addition, tunable transceivers enable
development of a dynamic network from access to core.
Layer 1 cards are available for a range of line rates (10 Gbps, 40 Gbps, and 100 Gbps), in two configurations:
 As standalone cards, including transponders, muxponders, regenerators, and AoCs.
 As fabric interface cards, used with 1 Tbps universal fabric.
Layer 1 service cards support internal Pseudo-Random Binary Sequence (PRBS) generation and reception
both to and from any OTU2/2e/2f line port. PRBS capabilities enhance the efficiency of internal PM
operations such as loopback testing. PRBS pattern generation testing enables faster installation and easier
management since there is no need for additional optical testers.
Apollo service cards comply with ITU-T standards for 50 GHz and 100 GHz multichannel spacing (DWDM)
using fixed or tunable XFP transceivers. They support PM and GCC in-band management, with PM for client
side signals in the signals' native layer (SDH/SONET and Ethernet).

10.1 Advanced OTN features

The Optical Transport Network (OTN) is based on Recommendation G.709 of the ITU-T and includes all
aspects of optical networking including rates, formats, and optical Wavelength Division Multiplexing
(WDM). The foundations of this technology are based on the well experience and benefits gained from the
SDH and SONET networks including, a layered structure, in-service PM, protection, and other management
functions.
In addition, OTN offers more benefits that improves performance and reduces cost, including:
 Management of optical channels in the optical domain
 Forward error correction (FEC) to improve error performance and enable longer optical signal reach
Enhanced recommendations were released since the first publication of the G.709, and include:
 Support of new client signals
 ODU0
 GMP
 ODUflex (in two flavors: CBB and GFP)
 Hitless resizing of ODUflex (GFP)
 1.25 Gbps tributary slots (known as PT21 Payload Type)
 Multistage Multiplexing
 Delay Measurement
Several of these features are now supported in Apollo and described in the following sections.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-1

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

10.1.1 Understanding ODU0 containers

The world of telecommunications has changed dramatically since OTN emerged in the late 1990s. OTN was
originally defined in ITU-T Recommendation G.709. The initial standard supported three containers: ODU1,
ODU2, and ODU3. The migration towards packet-based networks introduced Ethernet as natural client
signals for the OTN. ITU-T faced the challenge of efficiently supporting these new client signals while
retaining backward compatibility with the installed base.
The rapid growth of GbE in metro networks increased the need for cost-effective transparent transport of
GbE over OTN. Transport equipment already supports GbE over SDH/SONET virtual concatenated
containers. However, this solution would not enable carriers to phase SDH/SONET out of their networks.
Therefore, an OTN-specific solution was required.
Although the existing standard already enabled mapping GbE into ODU1 using transparent GFP (GFP-T), this
approach wasted large amounts of bandwidth and was not acceptable for such a widely-used client signal.
Another solution was to multiplex two GbE signals into the same ODU1 using GFP's linear extension mode;
but this approach leads to the loss of client-level supervision and only allows networking at the undesirable
GFP level. Therefore, a new ODU0 container was added, sized to hold exactly half the payload area of an
ODU1 container. Since each ODU0 can transparently map one GbE client, the GbE transport capacity is
effectively doubled. By definition, ODU0 is a lower-order ODUk for sub-wavelength networking.

Mapping GbE into ODU1

ODU0 increases mapping efficiency

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-2

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

OTN hierarchy

The main benefits of ODU0 are that this is a switchable entity that is consistent with other ODUk signals
and is optimized for efficient transport of most sub-ODU1 clients. The ODU0 structure is similar to other
OTN containers, including three main areas:
 Overhead area for Operation, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning (OAM&P) functions
 Payload area for customers data
 Forward Error Correction (FEC) data

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-3

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

Since the payload area of an ODU0 container (half of ODU1) is not enough to transparently transport GbE, a
transcoding method is specified. The 1000BaseX signal (8B/10B coded, nominal bit rate of 1,250,000 kbit/s
and a bit-rate tolerance up to +100 ppm) is synchronously mapped into a 75-octet GFP-T frame stream with
a bit rate of 15/16 x 1,250,000 kbit/s +100 ppm (approximately 1,171,875 kbit/s +100 ppm). This process is
referred to as timing transparent transcoding (TTT). The 15/16 x 1,250,000 kbit/s +100 ppm signal is then
mapped into an OPU0 by means of the generic mapping procedure (GMP). GMP was also chosen for use
when mapping new client signals into OPU1, OPU2, and OPU3 signals. The main reason for the introduction
of GMP is the limited ability of AMP to conveniently accommodate new client signals with rates that are
significantly different than the OPUk payload rates, or to handle client signals with a clock tolerance
significantly greater than +20 ppm.

10.1.2 Understanding ODUflex

ODUflex was introduced to enable efficient client signal mapping also for the newer client signals produced
by evolving services. Experience with Ethernet clients has shown that it is difficult to predict the rate of
future client signals. As Ethernet services have evolved a number of other candidate clients appeared, such
as Fiber Channel and video distribution signals. Most of these would not fit into any existing ODUk without
significant loss of bandwidth. In addition, defining a new container each time a new client signal is added is
impractical. Using ODUk virtual concatenation to map CBR clients is considered too complex and does not
provide homogeneous mapping. For example, mapping a 12 Gbps client signal requires five ODU1 or two
ODU2 containers.
The solution is to define a flexible container (ODUflex) that can be "sized" to fit any client rate and thus
occupies the minimum time slots in the higher order ODUk. For example, an FC-400 (Fiber Channel, 4Gbps)
can be mapped into an ODUflex occupying four time slots of OPU2. This leaves the other time slots of the
OPU2 free for other use. The ODUflex frame is consistent with the generic ODUk frame.
ODUflex is standardized in two flavors:
 ODUflex (CBR):
 Supports any possible client bit rate as a service circuit transport networks.
 CBR clients use bit-sync mapping into ODUflex (239/238 x client rate).
 ODUflex (packet/GFP):
 Creates variable size packet trunks (containing GFP-F mapped packet data) for transporting
packet flows using L1 switching of LO ODU.
 In principal can be of any size; in practical implementation, set to multiples of the lowest
tributary slot in the network.
CBR clients are mapped into ODUflex using a bit-synchronous mapping procedure (BMP). The procedure is
simple and involves wrapping ODUk/OPUk overhead around the client data. Therefore, the later exactly fits
the ODUflex payload area without the need for justification. The ODUflex is exactly the right size for its
client.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-4

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

Flexible sizing of ODUflex

To map an ODUflex into a higher order ODUk, the appropriate number of higher order OPUk time slots is
allocated. The selection is arbitrary, but all time slots should be part of the same ODUk. The mapping of the
ODUflex into the ODUk is made through GMP, since both the ODUflex rate and the allocated time slot rate
can vary.
Another application of ODUflex is transport of GFP-encapsulated packet streams, like Ethernet and
MPLS-TP, providing resizable tunnels between L2/L3 switch fabric. The ODUflex make most efficient use of
the OTN bandwidth when configured in exact multiples of the lowest ODTUk.1 in the network.
It might be tempting to consider ODUflex as a generic solution for all CBR client mapping. However, this is
not always reasonable, since client signals with a rate close enough to an existing ODUk can be mapped
more efficiently directly into this ODUk. ODUflex is only preferred if it will occupy fewer time slots than the
smallest fixed-rate ODUk capable of fitting the client signal.
In the current version of Apollo only ODUflex for CBR is supported and only the AoCB card is supported.

10.1.3 Understanding PT21 (Payload Type = 21)

With ODU0, ODUflex (CBR), and ODUflex (GFP), lower tributary slot granularity than 2.5 Gbps is required.
To support this need, a 1.25 Gbps tributary slot was defined to enable efficient multiplexing of Low Order
(LO) client signals ODUj (j = 0, 1, 2, 3, flex) into High Order (HO) OPUk (k = 2, 3, 4). To distinguish this
structure from the 2.5 Gbps structure, a new Payload Type, 21 (PT = 21), was designated, which is
communicated in the Payload Structure Identifier byte of the High Order OPUk Overhead.
Similar to an ODU2 that is mapped into four 2.5 G tributary slots of an OPU3 (ODTU2.3, PT = 20), it can be
mapped into eight 1.25 G tributary slots of an OPU3 (ODTU2.3, PT = 21). Mapping of ODU1 to OPU2/3 and
ODU2 to OPU3 uses AMP regardless, if the tributary slots used are 1.25 Gbps or 2.5 Gbps.
Because ODU0 was defined before ITU-T G.709 Issue 3 (which included the Payload Type 21), ODU0 is
mapped into one 1.25 Gbps tributary slot of an OPU1 using AMP (ODTU0.1). All other mapping of ODUj into
1.25 Gbps tributary slots of OPUk use GMP.
The following table summarizes the payload type of mapping ODUj into OPUk.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-5

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

Mapping of ODUj to OPUk summary

2.5 Gbps tributary slots 1.25 Gbps tributary slots
OPU2 0PU3 OPU1 OPU2 OPU3 OPU4

ODU0 --- --- AMP GMP GMP GMP

(PT = 20) (PT = 21) (PT = 21) (PT = 21)
ODU1 AMP AMP --- AMP AMP GMP
(PT = 20) (PT = 20) (PT = 21) (PT = 21) (PT = 21)
ODU2 --- AMP --- --- AMP GMP
(PT = 20) (PT = 21) (PT = 21)
ODU2e --- --- --- --- GMP GMP
(PT = 21) (PT = 21)
ODU3 --- --- --- --- -- GMP
(PT = 21)
ODUflex --- --- --- GMP GMP GMP
(PT = 21) (PT = 21) (PT = 21)

PT21 is supported for the following Apollo cards:

 FIOMR_16B
 FIO10_5B
 AoC10B
 FIO100

10.2 AoC10/AoC10B
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603

Description
The AoC10/AoC10B provides 10 Gbps ADM service on a single-slot card. It supports up to 16 client
interfaces, which are multiplexed into the G.709 multiplexing structure and sent via two OTU2 line
interfaces.
Any of the client interfaces can be configured to accept an STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12, GbE, FC/FC2/FC4,
OTU-1, STM-16/OC-48, DVB-ASI, SDI, or HD-SDI signal. The card has integrated cross-connect capabilities,
providing more efficient utilization of the lambda. Any of the signals can be added or dropped at each site,
while the rest of the traffic continues on to the next site. Broadcast TV services can be dropped and
continued (duplicated), eliminating the need for external equipment to provide this functionality.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-6

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

Features
 16 SFP-based client ports, software configurable to support GbE, 1G FC, 2G FC, 4G FC, STM-1/OC-3,
STM-4/OC-12, STM-16/OC-48, and OTU-1 services
 Two independent XFP-based OTU2 line ports
 Supports new tunable XFP transceivers
 Can be used as a multi-rate combiner up to OTU2
 Can operate as two separate muxponders with sets of eight clients multiplexed into one OTU2 line
 Supports GFEC, EFEC (I.4 and I.7), and ignore-FEC modes towards the line
 Provides GFEC on the client side when it is configured to OTU-1
 Supports Subnetwork Connection Protection (SNCP) mechanisms
 Complies with ITU-T standards for 50 GHz and 100 GHz multichannel spacing (DWDM)
 Supports in-service module insertion and removal without any effect on other active ports
 Supports interoperability with XDM AoC cards

IMPORTANT: The AoC10B card is very similar to the AoC10. Both cards support the same
functionality except for the following OTN features, supported only by the AoC10B.

Features supported only by the AoC10B include:

 ODU0 (instead of OPTM-8) protection instead of ODU1; improves ODU resources utilization
 ODUflex including:
 Standard mapping of FC-4
 New client HD-SDI 3G based ODUflex
 New OTU1 port including two ODU0 containers

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-7

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

Card views
General view

Front panel

The port number is indicated under/above each port. The markings T (transmit) and R (receive) near each
port indicate only the port's output and input connections and don't relate to the port LEDs.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-8

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

Ports
Several limitations apply when configuring AoC10B/AoC10 ports to specific rates from V8.2 and on. These
limitations are described in the following table. X in the table indicates the allowed (supported)
configuration option.

AoC10/AoC10B port configuration rules

Port No.  0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Rate 
FC-4 X X X X

STM-16/ X X X X X X X X
FC2G/OTU1/HD-SDI
STM-1/4/GBE/FC- X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
1G/DVB/SDI

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no
fault in the AoC10/AoC10B.
Port LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
F/L Red LED Lights steadily when a BIT fault is detected in the pluggable transceiver, or
the supply voltage or temperature is OOR. Blinks when a LOS condition is
detected in the port.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-9

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

10.2.1 Assignment of AoC10 as AoC25

The AoC10 can be assigned as an AoC25 operating in 2.5 Gbps mode, and enabling the user high flexibility
in implementation of more applications with the same hardware. When assigned as an AoC25 the card can
work as a Multi-service OTU1 muxponder and/or transponder.
For convenience, the front panel of the AoC10 is illustrated again in the following figure.

Front panel: AoC10/AoC10B

The two Line ports (port 16 and 17) are disabled in this mode, and only the 16 client ports are used. The
first eight ports (Port 0 to Port 7) are configured as Client ports, and the last eight (Port 8 to Port 15), as
Line ports.
The AoC25 provides the following main features:
 8 x SFP-based client ports, software configurable to support GbE, 1G FC, 2G FC, STM-1/OC-3, STM-
4/OC-12, and STM-16/OC-48 services
 8 x SFP-based line ports configured to ODU1
 Quadruple OTU1 muxponder (two client ports connected to a single line port)
 Y-protected Quadruple OTU1 muxponder (two client ports connected to a double line ports)
 8 x OTU1 transponder card (one client connected to a single line port)
 Y-protected Quadruple OTU1 transponder (one client connected to a double line ports)
The following rules apply for assignment of the client ports (Port 0 to Port 7) and Line ports (Port 8 to
Port15):
 Port 0 to Port 7 can be assigned as clients only.
 Assignment of the client ports to OTU1 will be rejected.
 Ports 0 and 1, 2 and 3, 4 and 5, 6 and 7 are couples.
 If a member of a couple is assigned to a port type occupying ODU-slot, the second member can't be
assigned to a type occupying ODU1.
 All cross-connects must be explicitly configured by the user.
 Cross-connects are allowed only between ports 0 to 7 and ports 8 to 15.
 Cross-connects between client ports or between line ports are not supported.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-10

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

10.3 TR10_4
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603

Description
The TR10_4 is a single-slot 10 Gbps transponder card that maps the client signal according to G.709 and
transmits a colored signal towards the network. The card includes two transponders (client and line)
providing full functionality in a space saving form factor and operating in an East/West configuration. Each
one can be configured independently for transponder or regenerator applications.

Features
 20 Gbps total capacity
 Two pairs of independent 10 Gbps transponders (client + line)
 Multiservice client interfaces, software configurable, supporting:
 10G LAN
 GFP extended overhead (OH) mapping to ODU2
 BMP mapping to ODU2e (overclocking)
 STM-64/OC-192
 OTU-2/OTU2e
 FC800/FC1200
 Client signals mapped to OTU-2, OTU-2e, and OTU-2f
 Complies with ITU-T standards for 50 GHz and 100 GHz multichannel spacing (DWDM) using fixed or
tunable XFP transceiver
 Supports PM and GCC in-band management, with PM for client side signals in the signals' native layer
(SDH/SONET and Ethernet).
 Provides GFEC, EFEC (I.4 and I.7), and no FEC modes towards the line. GFEC is also available on the
client side when it is configured to OTU2 regeneration mode. In addition, the TR10_4 offers an
optional ignore-FEC mode.
 Can be configured for the following applications:
 Two independent transponders. Services in this mode can be configured as either unprotected
or with full equipment protection.
 Y-protected transponder with a single client.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-11

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

Card views
General view

Front panel

The transponder ports are marked C1 for client and L1 for line for the first transponder and similarly C2 and
L2 for the corresponding ports of the second transponder.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-12

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no
fault in the TR10_4.
Port LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
F/L Red LED Lights steadily when a BIT fault is detected in the pluggable transceiver, or
the supply voltage or temperature is Out of Range (OOR). Blinks when a
LOS condition is detected in the port.

10.4 Encrypted transponder/muxponder cards

The growing demand for bandwidth in metro networks is driven by the deployment of new infrastructure
for quadruple play (voice, data, video and mobile) delivery, business data, storage services and cellular
backhaul. Metro Core networks are based on ring, star and/or point-to-point topologies. The main
objective of encrypted transponder/muxponder cards is to provide a Multi-Service, low cost, minimal size
encrypted solution to customers for DWDM networks.
The Apollo offers the following encryption cards:
 TR10_4EN
 TM200EN
 TM100_2EN
 TM200ENB
 TM100_2ENB
These cards are targeted for applications that will be used in small regional or metro access networks
requiring flexible grooming 10G to OTU2 and 10G\100G OTU4\OTUC2, encrypted or non-encrypted.
Cryptography is a complex subject that involves industry standards, practices and mathematics; these
subjects are out the scope of this manual. However, the next section presents some basic terminology,
dealing with cryptography, which will facilitate the understanding of the encrypted cards functionality.
Encrypted card functionality is described in the sections following cryptography terminology.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-13

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

10.4.1 Cryptography: basic terminology

This section provides descriptions and definitions of several terms used in cryptography to help you
understand the functionality of the encryption system in the TR10_4EN and TM200EN.
In general, cryptography refers almost exclusively to encryption, which is the process of converting
meaningful information (called plaintext) into meaningless text (called ciphertext).
Encryption: the process of turning a clear-text message into a data stream which looks like a meaningless
and random sequence of bits (ciphertext).
Decryption: the process of turning ciphertext back into plaintext (revers process of encryption).
Algorithm (cryptographic): also known as cipher; a mathematical function which uses plaintext as the input
and produces ciphertext as the output and vice versa.
Key: a word or phrase that modifies the encryption/decryption process in such a way that knowledge of the
algorithm alone is insufficient to decipher an enciphered message.
Asymmetric Algorithm: an algorithm in which the key used for encryption is different from that used for
decryption. Also known as public key cryptography.
Symmetric Algorithm: an encryption algorithm where the encryption key is the same as the decryption key,
or where one key is easily calculated from the other. The sender and receiver have to agree on a key before
they can communicate securely.
Private Key: the secret part of a private key/public key pair used in public key cryptography. The Private
Key is normally known only to the key owner. Messages are encrypted using the Public Key and decrypted
using the Private Key. For digital signatures, however, a document is signed with a Private Key and
authenticated with the corresponding Public Key.
Public Key: the encryption key is made public but only the person who holds the corresponding private key
can decrypt the message. This concept was first proposed by Diffie and Hellman in 1975.
Man in the Middle Attack (MIMA): is a form of actively listening to or eavesdropping on network traffic of
one or more computer hosts. In this method, the attacking computer will make an independent connection
with each identified computer host or “victim.” Once establishing these connections, the computer will
then relay messages between the victims creating the illusion of each computer communicating with the
other via a secure connection. This dialogue; however, is fully controlled by the rogue computer or
attacker. In order for the attack to be a true MIMA, 100% of the network traffic has to be controlled. The
attack focuses on the lack of mutual authentication between the two victims.
Message Integrity Check (MIC): a cryptographic algorithm value which is computed on a per-message basis,
to allow the integrity of the message to be validated to prevent the MIMA. For encrypt, it is an output
which is transmitted at the end of each message. For decrypt, it is an input which is compared against the
recomputed value. Essentially, it is a secure checksum.
Authentication: the process of identifying an individual, usually based on a username and password. It
makes sure that the individual at the other end (of the network) is who he or she claims to be.
Authorization: is the process of giving individuals access to system objects based on their identity.
Digital Signature: an encrypted message digest which is appended to a plaintext or encrypted message to
verify the identity of the sender. The signature is encrypted with the user's private key and can only be
decrypted with the corresponding public key. The same key pairs may be used for signature and encryption
purposes but separate key pairs for each purpose are usually recommended.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-14

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

Digital Certificate: an electronic "passport" that allows a person, computer or organization to exchange
information securely over the Internet using the public key infrastructure.
X.509 certificate: a digital certificate that uses the widely accepted international X.509 public key
infrastructure (PKI) standard to verify that a public key belongs to the user, computer or service identity
contained within the certificate. The certificate includes the following main subjects:
 User's ID information
 User's public key
 Period of validity
 Digital signature of the issuer
SSL (Secure Sockets Layer): commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message transmission
on the Internet. SSL uses a program layer located between the Internet's Hypertext Transfer Protocol
(HTTP) and Transport Control Protocol (TCP) layers.
PKI (Public Key Infrastructure): enables users of a basically unsecure public network such as the Internet to
securely and privately exchange data and money through the use of a public and a private cryptographic
key pair that is obtained and shared through a trusted authority.
CA (Certificate Authority): is an authority in a network that issues and manages security credentials and
public keys for message encryption. CA checks with a registration authority (RA) to verify information
provided by the requestor of a digital certificate. If the RA verifies the requestor's information, the CA can
then issue a certificate.
Advanced Encryption Standard (AES): is an encryption algorithm for securing sensitive but unclassified
material by U.S. It was developed to find a more robust replacement for the Data Encryption Standard
(DES). Its specification includes an symmetric algorithm using block encryption of 128 bits in size,
supporting key sizes of 128, 192 and 256 bits.
Internet Key Exchange (IKE): is an IPsec (Internet Protocol Security) standard protocol used to ensure
security for virtual private network (VPN) negotiation and remote host or network access.
Diffie-Hellman key exchange: also called exponential key exchange, is a method of digital encryption that
uses numbers raised to specific powers to produce decryption keys on the basis of components that are
never directly transmitted, making the task of a would-be code breaker mathematically overwhelming.
Initialization Vector (IV): a cryptographic algorithm input which varies on a per-message basis to ensure
that no two messages of possibly similar data are ever encrypted the same way. The IV is generated at the
encryptor and sent to the decryptor prior to the message – it is not secret. The IV must be a Nonce
“number used once”, for which a simple message counter is sufficient.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-15

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

10.5 TR10_4EN
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603

Description
The TR10_4EN is a single-slot 10 Gbps transponder card with encryption capabilities. The card maps the
client signal according to G.709 to OTU2/ODU2e/ODU2f. The encryption is performed at the optical
ODU2/2e layer, using an encryption system and sends it to the line. The encryption system encodes the
data with AES-GCM 256 algorithm to ensure a high security level. In addition to its main role as a
transponder, the TR10_4EN provides encryption on the optical (ODU2/e) layer.
The card includes two separate transponders (client and line) providing full functionality in a space saving
form factor and operating in an East/West configuration. The line traffic at OTU2 is encrypted using the AES
(256 bit) algorithm.

Features
 Two pairs of independent 10 Gbps transponders (client + line),for a total capacity of 20 Gbps.
 Multiservice client interfaces, software configurable, supporting:
 10 GbE.
 STM64.
 OTU2/OTU2e.
 FC800/FC1200.
 OC192.
 Supports line for OTU2, OTU2e and OTU2f.
 FEC support:
 Regular FEC on all ports when configured to OTU2/OTU2e/OTU2f (OTU2f only on the line).
 EFEC I4 and I7 on all ports when configured to OTU2/OTU2e/OTU2f.
 Support port protection using splitter/coupler and Y protection.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-16

Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

 Powerful encryption capabilities:

 Wire speed mode with no added latency.
 When installed in two NE peers, they can communicate through a secured line at the ODU2
level, using an encrypted line (encryption is AES-GCM 256).
 NEs provisioned to support such an encrypted line authenticate each other using private/public
key authentication. Private/Public key is generated by the NE.
 NEs provisioned to support an encrypted line exchange symmetric encryption keys for the
encryption algorithm using Diffie-Hellman group 5, 14, and 24 algorithms.
 Key management using IKE:
 IKE messages can be transmitted using GCC0, GCC1, GCC2, OSC or out of band, like
common management packets. Hitless keys change.
 When the Key exchange trigger is sent, in next frame the encrypt and decrypt side uses the
new key.
 Implemented encryption algorithms:
 AES-GCM 256 – Advanced Encryption Standard, key length 256 bits. The AES algorithm is a
symmetric block cipher that can encrypt and decrypt information.
 IV – Initialization Vector. A cryptographic algorithm input which varies on a per-message
basis to ensure that no two messages of possibly similar data are ever encrypted the same
way. The IV is generated at the encryptor and send it to the decryptor prior to the
message – it is not secret. The IV must be a Nonce “number used once”, for which a simple
message counter is sufficient.
 MIC – Message Integrity Check. A cryptographic algorithm value computed on a per-
message basis, to allow the integrity of the message to be validated. For encrypt, it is an
output which is transmitted at the end of each message. For decrypt, it is an input which is
compared against the recomputed value. Essentially, it is a secure checksum.
 Symmetric keys are rotated periodically to increase security. The period is software configurable
from one minute up to one hour in steps of one minute.
 Keys remain synchronized and encrypted traffic experience no hit upon RCP switchover.
 Symmetric keys are not equal on both direction (i.e. KeyA-> B is not the same as KeyB->A).
 Key rotation doesn't create any traffic hit.
 Card encryption logic supports 2 keys in parallel (i.e. Keyn and Keyn+1).
 Minor alarm is rise upon a failure on negotiating the symmetric key.
 Major alarm is rise when the IV counter is full.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-17

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

Card views
General view

Front panel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-18

Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is
no fault in the TR10_4EN.
Port LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
F/L Red LED Lights steadily when a BIT fault is detected in the pluggable
transceiver, or the supply voltage or temperature is Out of Range
(OOR). Blinks when a LOS condition is detected in the port.

Block diagram

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-19

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

10.5.1 Optical encryption in TR10_4EN

This section provides a brief description of traffic encryption/decryption process in Apollo peer NEs,
equipped with TR10_EN.

Stage 1 - creating the NE key pairs and certificate

Creating the NE key pairs and certificate

 The NE can receive the key pairs (private key + public key) in one of the following two modes:
 Full secure (Manual) - the key pairs are created elsewhere and transported to the NE site in an
encrypted file, and then loaded manually through a local craft terminal (LCT).
OR
 Automatic - the LCT or STMS instructs the NE to create the key pairs itself using an internal
generator.
 In both modes, the NE creates and self-signs its X.509 certificate, that contains its public key.
 The private key always remains within the NE in protected non-volatile memory.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-20

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

Stage 2 - distributing the NE certificate to the STMS

Distributing the NE certificate to the STMS

 The STMS obtains the NE certificate based on the two modes:

 Full secure (Manual) - the certificate is physically transported to and locally installed in the
STMS.
 Automatic - the STMS opens an SSL session with the NE (using a temporary default NE
certificate) and then uploads the new certificate.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-21

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

Stage 3 - distributing the certificates to the NE peers

Distributing the certificates to the NE peers

 NE-A and NE-B are defined as peer devices.

 Through manual entry to the STMS of the peer IP addresses.
 From an NMS as part of a trail creation process.
 The STMS distributes the certificates with the public keys over SSL sessions
 NE-A receives NE-B’s Certificate/Public key
 NE-B receives NE-A’s Certificate/Public key

Stage 4– creating a shared key and beginning encryption

Creating a shared key and beginning encryption

 NE-A and NE-B use their private keys and each other’s public keys to create a symmetric session key.
 This is done using Diffie-Hellman Group 5, 14, and 24 algorithms.
 Symmetric key strength is AES256-GCM.
 This session key is used to encrypt the data transported on the WDM channel.
 The keys are changed periodically. The time is configurable (typically keys are changed each
hour).

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-22

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

10.5.2 TR10_4EN protection schemes

The TR10_4EN supports OCH 1 + 1 add and drop equipment protection as well as Y protected add and drop
for facility protection. These protections are activated in less than 50 msec, and operate even when the
main controller (RCP) is not installed or has failed.
OCH 1 + 1 network and hardware protection, is implemented via external splitter/coupler and a built-in
mechanism providing switching capabilities. The OCH protection is activated based on OTN Performance
Monitoring (PM) that leads to signal degrade (SD) or loss of signal (LOS). The following figure shows an
example of OCH 1 + 1 protection for the TR10_4EN.

OCH 1+1 protection scheme for TR10_4EN

Triggers for protection include extracting the TR10_4EN, line or client SFP+ transceiver, or failure of SFP+.
Protection at the service level is supported, using splitters/couplers or Y cables (which reduces the cost of
the solution and saves slots in the passive platform).
In addition internal Y protection in a single card is supported as well, using 2 lines and one client on the
same card. The Y protection is activated based on OTN Performance Monitoring (PM) that leads to signal
degrade (SD) or loss of signal (LOS). Only ports C1 L1, and L2 can be configured for this type of protection.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-23

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

10.6 TR10_12/TR10_12R
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603

Description
The TR10_12/TR10_12R is a single-slot 10 Gbps transponder card that maps the client signals according to
G.709 and transmits a colored signal towards the network. The card includes six transponders (client and
line) providing full functionality in a space saving form factor and operating in an East/West configuration.
They can also be configured as six regenerators between the line ports.

NOTE: The TR10_12 card has been replaced by the TR10_12R. The same feature description
applies to both cards.

Features
 60 Gbps mapping capacity.
 Six pairs of independent 10 Gbps transponders (client + line).
 Client and line ports based on SFP+.
 Supports tunable SFP+ transceivers.
 Supports DWDM, CWDM, and non-color transceivers.
 Multiservice client interfaces, software configurable to support:
 10G LAN
 GFP extended overhead (OH) mapping to ODU2
 BMP mapping to ODU2e (overclocking)
 STM-64/OC-192
 OTU2/OTU2e
 FC800/FC1200
 FC1200 transponder is supported in overclocking mode only with OTU2e line rate.
 FC800 transponder is supported mapping the signal to ODUflex.
 Line ports configurable to support OTU2 and OTU2e.
 Complies with ITU-T standards for 50 GHz and 100 GHz multichannel spacing (DWDM) using fixed or
tunable SFP+ transceiver.
 Supports PM and GCC in-band management, with PM for client side signals in the signals' native layer
(SDH/SONET and Ethernet).

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-24

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

 Provides GFEC and EFEC (I.7) modes towards the line. GFEC is also available on the client side when it
is configured to OTU2 regeneration mode. In addition, the TR10_12/TR10_12R offers an optional
ignore-FEC mode.
 Can be configured for the following applications:
 Six independent transponders. Services in this mode can be configured as either unprotected or
with full equipment protection.
 Y-protected transponder with a single client.
 Up to four Y-protected transponders per card.
 Six independent regenerators using line ports.

Card views
General view

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-25

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

Front panel

Ports
The transponder ports are numbered (0) to (11). Each port can be configured as client or line, with a
maximum of six client ports.

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no
fault in the TR10_12/TR10_12R.
Port LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
F/L Red LED Lights steadily when a BIT fault is detected in the pluggable transceiver, or
the supply voltage or temperature is Out of Range (OOR). Blinks when a
LOS condition is detected in the port.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-26

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

10.7 TR10_12ULL
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603

Description
The TR10_12ULL is a single-slot 10 Gbps transponder card that maps the client signals according to G.709
and transmits a colored signal towards the network. The card has 12 ports:
 Four dedicated for ULL (Ultra Low Latency) transponder channels with very low latency for FC16,
FC12, and ETY10GOC clients.
 Eight ports can be configured as four independent transponders
TR10_12ULL includes six transponders (client and line) providing full functionality in a space saving form
factor and operating in an East/West configuration. The eight regular ports can also be configured as four
regenerators between the line ports.

Features
 40 Gbps mapping capacity.
 Four pairs of independent 10 Gbps transponders (client + line).
 Client and line ports based on SFP+.
 Supports tunable SFP+ transceivers.
 Supports DWDM, CWDM, and non-color transceivers.
 Multiservice client interfaces, software configurable to support:
 10G LAN.
 STM-64/OC-192.
 OTU2/OTU2e.
 FC800/FC1200.
 FC1200 transponder is supported in overclocking mode only with OTU2e line rate.
 FC800 transponder is supported mapping the signal to ODUflex.
 Line ports configurable to support OTU2 and OTU2e.
 Complies with ITU-T standards for 50 GHz and 100 GHz multichannel spacing (DWDM) using fixed or
tunable SFP+ transceiver.
 Supports PM and GCC in-band management, with PM for client side signals in the signals' native layer
(SDH/SONET and Ethernet).

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-27

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

 Provides GFEC and EFEC (I.7) modes towards the line. GFEC is also available on the client side when it
is configured to OTU2 regeneration mode. In addition, the TR10_12ULL offers an optional ignore-FEC
mode.
 Can be configured for the following applications:
 Four independent transponders. Services in this mode can be configured as either unprotected
or with full equipment protection.
 Y-protected transponder with a single client.
 Up to two Y-protected transponders per card.
 Four independent regenerators using line ports.

Card views
General view

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-28

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

Front panel

Ports
The transponder ports are numbered (0) to (11). Each port can be configured as client or line, with a
maximum of six client ports. The limitation of six client ports refers to the eight regular ports only, in
addition of the ULL ports.
The following table describes the TR10_12ULL front panel component functionality.

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no
fault in the TR10_12ULL.
Port LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
F/L Red LED Lights steadily when a BIT fault is detected in the pluggable transceiver,
or the supply voltage or temperature is Out of Range (OOR). Blinks when
a LOS condition is detected in the port.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-29

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

10.7.1 ULL channels for transponder applications

ULL channels for use in ultra-low latency transponder applications are implemented through direct
connections of a pair of line ports in the TR10_12ULL card. The ports are connected via the internal EDC
(Electronic Dispersion Compensation) module, which also features 2 x 2 switching.
Two pairs of line ports in the TR10_12ULL support this functionality:
 (1) and (3)
 (9) and (11)
An example of a ULL channel is shown in the following figure.

ULL channel block diagram example

The non-colored signal is connected to the SFP+ of port (1) on the TR10_12ULL front panel (that acts as a
"client input"). This SFP+ is connected at the other end to the EDC P4 and switched to P3 at the opposite
side of the EDC; the output of this channel (P3 of the EDC) is directly connected to the second SFP+ on one
side; the other side of the SFP+ is connected to port (3) on the TR10_12ULL front panel.
According to the required application, the second SFP+ is selected at the rate of the corresponding client
input signal (FC1200/FC1600, or 10 GbE LAN) or if a colored signal is required at the output, a DWDM SFP+
is selected. This application only connects the signal through the SFP+ transceivers and EDC module without
passing the mapper, forming a ULL channel.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-30

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

The ULL channel is characterized by the following features:

 PM is not supported on these ports, only LOS alarm
 ULL port has a new sub-interface (dummy) to configure XC
 When LOS is detected on one of the ports of the ULL transponder the other port shuts down its laser
 Latency is less than 1 µsec for FC12, FC16, and ETY10GOC clients
The protection scheme for the ULL ports is based on the following principals:
 The protected ports are on two cards located in adjacent slots in the platform
 The card types are identical
 The ports carry identical services
 The port numbers on the two cards are identical
The following figure shows a typical protection scheme for the ULL ports.

Protection scheme for ULL ports

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-31

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

10.8 CMR40B
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603

Description
The CMR40B is a double-slot multiservice combiner card that supports 4 x 10G
LAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e aggregation to OTU-3e. It enjoys enhanced noise tolerance with
improved chromatic dispersion tolerance, and offers good bandwidth efficiency. It reduces the number of
wavelengths, increases capacity, and simplifies management, and can be used in both metro/core and long-
haul networks.
The CMR40B uses a coherent receiver and DP-DQPSK modulation format. The client side utilizes XFPs for
10G interfaces.

Features
 4 x client interface ports supporting:
 STM-64/OC-192
 10 GbE LAN
 Overclocking Sup43.7.1
 10 GbE WAN
 OTU2
 OTU2e
 FC800
 FC1200
 Each client signal can be configured independently of the other clients
 Fully tunable line side DWDM port supporting up to 88 channels, and available in Dual Polarization
Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (DP-DQPSK) modulation format
 Optimized for long-reach transmission over older fiber infrastructures with high PMD
 Complies with ITU-T standards for 50 GHz and 100 GHz multichannel spacing (DWDM)
 Supports PM and GCC in-band management, with PM for client side signals in the signals' native layer
(SDH/SONET and Ethernet)
 OTU3e Long haul line with 10% EFEC I.7 (EFEC7_10)
 OTU-2 client supports FEC and EFEC7
 Full support of RMON on 10 Gbps Ethernet ports
 Standard mapping per ITU-T G.709 Rev.3
 Payload Type (PT) 21 complies with ITU-T G.709, Edition 3
 CD and GDG fiber parameters measured for accurate compensation (can be displayed to the user)
 Supports Client Signal Fail (CSF) alarm for easy client failure identification

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-32

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

Card views
General view

Front panel

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is
no fault in the TR10_4.
Port LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
F/L Red LED Lights steadily when a BIT fault is detected in the pluggable
transceiver, or the supply voltage or temperature is OOR. Blinks when
a LOS condition is detected in the port.
Line LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
LOS Red LED Blinks when a LOS condition is detected in the port.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-33

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

10.9 CMR100 and CMR100L

Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603

Description
The CMR100/CMR100L double-slot combiner (muxponder) interfaces to any combination of ten of the
following client signals through XFPs, and maps them into a 100 Gbps colored line signal for WDM network
transport, according to the G.709 standard: 10GbE/STM64/OC192/FC8/FC10/OTU2/OTU2e. It occupies a
double slot in Apollo platforms.
The CMR100/CMR100L uses DP-QPSK modulation, a coherent receiver, DSP processing, and soft decision
forward error correction, for superior noise tolerance, and an exceptional ability to mitigate CD and PMD
impairments.
The CMR100 is optimized for Ultra Long Haul networking applications, and the CMR100L supports regional
applications. While the TR100L does not support single fiber bi-directional WDM operation, in terms of all
other capabilities, the cards are identical and they are interoperable with each other. The client side utilizes
XFPs for 10G interfaces.
The CMR100/CMR100L offers the following main features:
 10 x client interface ports supporting:
 STM-64/OC-192
 10 GbE LAN
 10 GbE WAN
 OTU 2
 OTU 2e
 FC1200
 FC800
 Each client signal can be configured independently of the other clients
 Fully tunable line side DWDM port supporting up to 88 channels, and available in Non Return to Zero
Diverse Polarization Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (NRZ DP QPSK) modulation format
 Optimized for long reach transmission over older fiber infrastructures with high PMD
 Complies with ITU T standards for 50 GHz and 100 GHz multichannel spacing (DWDM)
 One stage multiplexing according to latest ITU-T standards
 Supports PM and GCC in band management, with PM for client side signals in the signals' native layer
(SDH/SONET and Ethernet)
 OTU 2 and OTU 2e client supports GFEC and EFEC
 Line service configured for SD FEC mode

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-34

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

Card views
General view

Front panel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-35

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

Ports
LED indicators

Marking Item Functions

Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations).
Off when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is
no fault in the CMR100/CMR100L.
Client port LEDs (C1-C10)
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
F/L Red LED Lights steadily when a BIT fault is detected in the pluggable
transceiver, or the supply voltage or temperature is OOR. Blinks when
a LOS condition is detected in the port.
Line LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
LOS Red LED Blinks when a LOS condition is detected in the port.

Block diagram
CMR100/CMR100L functional block diagram

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-36

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

10.9.1 CMR100/CMR100L transceivers

The CMR100/CMR100L client interfaces support the transceivers shown in the following table.

CMR100/CMR100L client transceivers reference table

Transceivers (client interfaces) Description
OTR64_PI3 STM-64/OC-192 transceiver
Intra-office non-colored
Range: 2 km
Wavelength 1310 nm
(1290-1330 nm)
OTR64_PS5 STM-64/OC-192 transceiver
Long-haul non-colored
Range: 40 km
Wavelength 1550 nm
(1529-1560 nm)
OTR64_AL5 STM-64/OC-192 transceiver
Extra haul non-colored
Range: 80 km
Wavelength 1550 nm
(1530-1565 nm)
OTR10_ASxx STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/10G LAN transceiver
8 CWDM channels
Long-haul, colored
Range: 40 km
Wavelength range (1464-1618 nm)
OTR10_ALxx STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/10G LAN transceiver
OTC10_ALxx 8 CWDM channels
Extra haul, colored
Range: 80 km
Wavelength range 1464-1618 nm
OTR103_SR 10.3 Gbps LAN/10G FC transceiver
Range: 300 m
Wavelength: 850 nm
OTR103_LR 10.3 Gbps LAN/10G FC/11.1G LAN + OTU2 transceiver
Range: 10 km
Wavelength: 1310 nm
OTR103_ER 10.3 Gbps LAN/10G FC/11.1G LAN + OTU2 transceiver
Long-haul, Range: 40 km
Wavelength: 1310 nm
OTR103_ZR 10.3 Gbps LAN/10G FC/11.1G LAN + OTU2 transceiver
Extra haul, Range: 80 km
Wavelength: 1550 nm

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-37

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

10.10 CMR100M
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603

Description
The CMR100M is a double-slot combiner card that interfaces to any combination of ten of the following
client signals through SFP+, and maps them into a 100 Gbps colored line signal for WDM network transport,
according to the G.709 standard: 10GbE/STM64/40GbE.
The CMR100M is optimized for metro applications (up to 1200 km without regeneration). The client side
utilizes SFP+ transceivers for 10G interfaces.
The CMR100M works with D-CFP coherent line transceivers that enable transmission of 100Gbps DP-QPSK
modulation, with Flex-Grid capabilities. This transceiver includes a coherent receiver, DSP processing, and
soft decision forward error correction, for superior noise tolerance, as well as an exceptional ability to
mitigate CD and PMD impairments.
The CMR100M line can be deployed with non-colored CFP (instead the coherent CFP) for simple point to
point over dark fiber or any other application. The card supports SR10 or LR4 100G line transmission. The
CMR100M is configured with a 100G CFP on the line side. The target application determines the type of
transceiver chosen. For long haul (LH) applications, an MR1 transceiver is used.
The CMR100M offers the following main features:
 10 x SFP+ based client interface ports supporting:
 STM64/OC192
 10 GbE LAN
 10 GbE WAN
 OTU 2
 OTU 2e
 FC1200
 FC800
 Up to 2 x 40 GbE based QSFP+ client ports at the expense of 4 x 10 G SFP+ ports per each, with the
following options:
 2 x 40 GbE (QSFP+) + 2 x 10 GbE/STM64/OC192/FC800/FC1200/OTU2/OTU2e (SFP+)
 1 x 40 GbE (QSFP+) + 6 x 10 GbE/STM64/OC192/FC800/FC1200/OTU2/OTU2e (SFP+)

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-38

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

 Each client signal can be configured independently of the other clients

 OTU4 line port using a pluggable CFP transceiver (Coherent, SR10 or LR4)
 Fully tunable line side DWDM pluggable supporting:
 Up to 88 channels, and available in Dual Polarization Differential QPSK (DP-DQPSK) modulation
format
 Optimized for metro reach transmission over older fiber infrastructures with high PMD
 Complies with ITU-T standards for 50 GHz and 100 GHz multichannel spacing (DWDM)
 One stage multiplexing according to latest ITU-T standards
 Supports PM and GCC in band management, with PM for client side signals in the signals' native layer
(SDH/SONET and Ethernet)
 SD/HD FEC are supported on the line port
 Supports interoperability with TR100/TR100L in regenerator mode

Card views
General view

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-39

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

Front panel

Ports
The 10 Gb client ports are numbered under the line C1-C10 with numbers from (1) to (10) above each SFP+
housing. The 40 GbE ports are marked C11 and C12 above the QSFP+ housings. When an 40 GbE port is
configured, the corresponding four 10 Gb ports are disabled. For example, if port C11 is provisioned, ports
C1 to C4 are disabled.

LED indicators

Marking Item Functions

Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is
no fault in the CMR100M.
Client port LEDs (C1-C10)
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
F/L Red LED Lights steadily when a BIT fault is detected in the pluggable
transceiver, or the supply voltage or temperature is OOR. Blinks when
a LOS condition is detected in the port.
Line LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
LOS Red LED Blinks when a LOS condition is detected in the port.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-40

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

Block diagram
CMR100M functional block diagram

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-41

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

10.11 TR100/TR100L
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603

Description
The TR100/TR100L double-slot transponder maps a 100 GbE client signal into a 100 Gbps colored line signal
for WDM network transport, according to the G.709 standard. The TR100/TR100L uses DP-QPSK
modulation, a coherent receiver, DSP processing, and soft decision forward error correction, for superior
noise tolerance, and an exceptional ability to mitigate CD and PMD impairments.
The TR100 is optimized for Ultra Long Haul networking applications, and the TR100L supports regional
applications. While the TR100L does not support single fiber bi-directional WDM operation, in terms of all
other capabilities, the cards are identical and they are interoperable with each other.
The TR100/TR100L can be used in regenerator applications when installed adjacent to another
TR100/TR100L card, or in add/drop mode with an IOP protection option. For regenerator applications the
TR100/TR100L is supported only in OPT9624 and only in slots 0, 2, 4, 6, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22. Slots 8 and 10
are not supported for regenerator applications.
The TR100/TR100L supports the following main features:
 Maps 100 GbE client signals according to G.709 clause 17.7.5 into ODU4
 Uses a coherent receiver based DP-QPSK modulation
 Mapping uses timing transparent General Mapping Procedure (GMP)
 Supports transponder and regenerator applications
 Line interface OIF1.1-based transceiver:
 Fully C band tunable 50 GHz channel spacing with 88 channels
 OTU4v compliant
 SD-FEC (Soft Decision FEC)
 Capable to retrofit into existing DWDM infrastructure:
 Supports 50 GHz channel spacing
 Supports up to 24 cascaded ROADMs @ 100 GHz spacing
 Supports up to 18 cascaded ROADMs @ 50 GHz spacing
 Transmission over mixed fiber types
 Same CD/PMD tolerance as current 10G transponders
 Transmission with mixed traffic (10G/40G)
 Reach of up to 2500 km for greenfield installations without in-line DCMs

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-42

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

 Client interface:
 Fixed CFP pluggable transceiver
 Transponder service supports 100GBASE-LR4/SR10 interfaces

Card views
General view

Front panel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-43

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

Ports
LED indicators

Marking Item Functions

Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no
fault in the TR100/TR100L.
Client Port LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
F/L Red LED Blinks when a LOS condition is detected. Lights steadily when a BIT fault is
detected in the CFP pluggable transceiver, or the supply voltage or
temperature is OOR.
Line Port LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
LOS Red LED Lights steadily when a BIT fault is detected in the OIF1.1 transceiver or the
supply voltage or temperature is OOR.

Block diagram
TR100 functional block diagram

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-44

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

10.11.1 TR100 and TR100L applications and options

Transponder applications
The TR100/TR100L can be used in transponder applications that enable efficient transmission and reception
of optical payload signals provided by local user's equipment through the DWDM network. For example, if
the user needs to connect between two 100 GbE routers at a distance of 100 km, direct connection will not
enable the communication. The routers provide digital signals that enable communication to relatively
short distances (300 m to 10 km). To provide a solution to the distance requirement, a TR100/TR100L is
connected to the router at each end. The digital output signals from each router are applied to the CFP
client interface of each TR100/TR100L. The TR100/TR100L processes the digital signals and provides them
as OTU4 optical signals at the line OIF1.1 interfaces. The OIF1.1 transceivers can drive the line signal to
fibers with 100 km spans.

TR100/TR100L transponder application example

Regenerator applications
In a regenerator application, the transponder cleans up and amplifies optical signals transmitted through
the optical line (3R regeneration). The regenerator is used when the required distance is longer than the
transponder maximum reach. Two TR100/TR100L cards residing in adjacent slots on the Apollo platform
are used to implement the regenerator configuration. The following figure shows the connections of the
TR100/TR100L cards in this application. The OIF1.1 transceivers connect to the lines at both ends. The
connection between both cards is made through the platform's backplane. The client is not connected to
the CFP transceivers in this application.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-45

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

TR100/TR100L regenerator connections

TR100/TR100L regenerator application example

Protection options
The TR100/TR100L supports client protection using a splitter/coupler. The active client is selected using the
IOP lines as in other Apollo service cards. Client protection is shown in the following figure.

Client protection with splitter/coupler

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-46

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

10.12 TM100
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603

Description
The TM100 is a single-slot 100G coherent transponder and muxponder card optimized for metro
applications (up to 1200 km without regeneration). When assigned as a transponder (TR100M) the TM100
maps a 100 GbE client signal into a 100 Gbps colored line signal for WDM network transport, according to
the G.709 standard. In addition it can be configured as a muxponder in two modes: to multiplex 10 x 10
GbE clients (MXP100E10) or to multiplex 2 x 40 GbE clients (MXP100E40).
The TM100 supports the new generation of compact pluggables (CFP at the line and CFP2 at the client).
Changes in the card's operation mode is implemented by software configuration to assign it to one of the
three modes (TR100M, MXP100E10 and MXP100E40).
The TM100 supports the following main features:
 Transponder applications (assigned as TR100M):
 Maps 100 GbE client signals according to G.709 clause 17.7.5 into ODU4
 Uses a CFP coherent receiver based DP-DQPSK modulation
 Mapping uses timing transparent General Mapping Procedure (GMP)
 Line interface CFP-based pluggable transceivers:
 Fully C band tunable 50 GHz channel spacing with 88 channels
 OTU4v compliant
 Very low latency SD-FEC (Soft Decision FEC - provides NCG of 11.1 dB)
 Client interface:
 Fixed CFP2 pluggable transceiver
 Transponder service supports LR4/SR10 interfaces
 LR4 long-reach up to 10 km
 SR10 short-reach up to 300 m
 Supports client protection in less than 50 msec, using splitters/couplers
 When there is a failure at the client signal or at the line signal it is replaced by an LF alarm signal
 Hot insertion or removal of transceivers is supported without causing traffic interruption or
errors
 OTU4 port supports one embedded channel for embedded management, user selectable from
GCC0, GCC1, or GCC2

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-47

Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

 Interoperability with CMR100/CMR100L

 10 x 10 GbE muxponder application (card assigned as MXP100E10):
 Uses either a CFP coherent receiver based DP-DQPSK modulation (same as TR100M) or non-
colored CFP (SR10 or LR4) for 100G line transmission
 Supports 10 x ETY10Goc ports at the client side
 CFP2 based SR10 interface (up to 300 m reach) with 10 x 10 GbE independent lanes, using a
special adapter to support 10 clients
 Port protection is not supported in this mode
 2 x 40 GbE muxponder application (card assigned as MXP100E40):
 Uses either a CFP coherent receiver based DP-DQPSK modulation (same as TR100M) or non-
colored CFP (SR10 or LR4) for 100G line transmission
 Supports 2 x 40ETY10G ports at the client side
 CFP2 based SR10 interface with 10 x 10 GbE independent lanes; using a special adapter to
support 4 x 10 GbE for each 40 GbE client (total 2 x40 GbE clients)
 Port protection is not supported in this mode
 Line OTU4 interface supports one embedded channel for embedded management; GCC0, GCC1, or
GCC2 selectable by the user

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-48

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

Card views
General view

General view

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-49

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

Ports
LED indicators

Marking Item Functions

Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed
configurations). Off when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when
there is no fault in the TM100.
Client Port LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
F/L Red LED Blinks when a LOS condition is detected. Lights steadily when a
BIT fault is detected in the CFP2 pluggable transceiver, or the
supply voltage or temperature is OOR.
Line Port LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
F/L Red LED
Blinks when a LOS condition is detected. Lights steadily when a
BIT fault is detected in the CFP pluggable transceiver, or the
supply voltage or temperature is OOR.

Block diagram
TM100 functional block diagram

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-50

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

10.12.1 TM100 applications

TR100M transponder configuration
The TM100 can be configured to operate as a transponder (software assigned as TR100M). Transponder
applications enable efficient transmission and reception of optical payload signals provided by local user's
equipment through the DWDM network. For example, if the user needs to connect between two 100 GbE
routers at a distance of 100 km, direct connection will not enable the communication. The routers provide
digital signals that enable communication to relatively short distances (300 m to 10 km). To provide a
solution to the distance requirement, a TM100 configured as a TR100M is connected to the router at each
end. The digital output signals from each router are applied to the CFP2 client interface (LR4 type for long-
reach up to 10 km; SR10 type for short-reach up to 300 m) of each TM100. The TM100 processes the digital
signals and provides them as OTU4 optical signals at the line CFP interfaces. The CFP transceivers can drive
the line signal to fibers with 100 km spans.

TM100 transponder application (TR100M)

MXP100E10 muxponder configuration

The TM100 can be configured to operate as a 10 x 10GbE muxponder (software assigned as MXP100E10).
As a MXP100E10 muxponder the card supports 10 x 10GbE short-reach client interfaces for an ideal low-
cost solution to aggregate multiple interfaces, for example in a data center, disaster recovery, or triple play
backhaul.
This mode requires a breakout patch cord (MTP24 to 20 x LC connectors) or a patch panel to physically split
the MTP24 ribbon fiber to 10 Tx and Rx interfaces (20 x LC connectors). For further details refer to the
relevant IMM.

TM100 muxponder application (MXP100E10)

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-51

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

MXP100E40 muxponder configuration

Another possible application of the TM100 is as a muxponder for 2 x 40 GbE (software provisioned as
MXP100E40). As a MXP100E40 muxponder the card supports 2 x 40GbE short-reach client interfaces for an
ideal low-cost solution to aggregate 40 GbE clients.
This mode requires a breakout patch cord (MTP24 to 2 x MTP12) in order to physically split the MTP24
ribbon fiber to two MTP12 interfaces. For further details refer to the relevant IMM.

TM100 muxponder application (MXP100E40)

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-52

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

10.13 TM100_2EN
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603

Description
The TM100_2EN is a double-slot 2 x 100G multi-service, minimal size transponder/muxponder card. The
card is enhanced with optional encryption capabilities (license-based) and software add-ons, tailored to
encrypted/unencrypted applications. By default, TM100_2EN is supplied without the encryption option.
Card applications are typically in small regional or metro access networks requiring flexible grooming of
mixed rate services up to OTU4. A very useful application would be adding encryption capabilities for users
connecting to third party networks that do not support encryption.
The TM100_2EN is very similar to the TM200EN in all client port aspects. The main difference is in the line
ports; TM200EN has a single CFP2-based line port, while the TM100_2EN has two QSFP28-based line ports
that can be configured to ODU4. The TM100_2EN works with QSFP28 line transceivers, supporting non-
colored LR4, SR4, and ER4 applications.

TM100_2EN features
 Flexible configuration modes as a muxponder for N x 10G/16G/32G to dual OTU4
 Each service is configurable to operate with or without encryption. Encryption is based on the AES256
and GCM standards. Optional encryption capabilities are license-based.
 GCC support for in-band management.
 Communication channels:
 Embedded management support by GCC0 on line ports (one channel per port).
 Five embedded user-selectable communication channels (GCC0/GCC1/GCC2) per client port.
 Various protection schemes for high redundancy including:
 DWDM network protection based on OLP_S2 or OMSP cards (< 50 mSec switchover for all line
types).
 100G line protection based on OLP_S2 card (< 50 mSec switchover for all line types).
 Port protection (< 50 mSec switchover for all line types) for all LR4 clients
 Each service could be protected/unprotected regardless of other services. Protection is
selectable per port.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-53

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

Card views
General view

Front panel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-54

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

Usage guidelines and assignment rules

The TM100_2EN provides the following configuration options:
 2 x line ports (Ports 0 and 21), based on QSFP28 form factor, for non-colored LR4/SR4/ER4
applications
 Users should first assign a selected line port (0 or 21) to OTU4. The user should then explicitly
configure the corresponding client ports and connects (sub interfaces) to the line port low order
ODUk.
 When a line port is configured to OTU4 it supports up to 80 tributary slots of ODU0. Assignment
of more clients beyond this limit are rejected.
 20 x client ports, numbered from 1 to 20, with three types of ports:
 2 independent QSFP+/QSFP28-based modules.
 The two modules are configured independently.
 Each module includes 4 port openings, numbered 1-4 and 5-8.
 The 4 ports within each module must be configured consistently, either as ETY100G, or as
ETY40G, or as 4 x ETY10GOC ports.
 The full set of 8 x 10GE ports (on both modules) can be operated as 4 fan-out ports.
 4 x SFP+/SFP28-based ports, Ports 9-12, supporting the following port rates:
 10GE/OTU2/2e
 FC8/FC10/FC16/FC32
 STM-64/OC192
[These ports do not support rates ETY100G and ETY40G.]
 8 x SFP+ based ports, Ports 13-20, supporting the following port rates:
 10GE/OTU2/2e
 FC8/FC10/FC16
 STM-64/OC192
[These ports do not support rates ETY100G, ETY40G, and FC32.]
 The TM100_2EN client ports are organized into two groups: Group 1 and Group 2.
 When configuring TM100_2EN ports, the maximum number of ports available in each group is
calculated independently, with each group mapped to a different ODU4.
 When working with OTU4 uplinks, the client ports must all be based on ports in the same group.
For example, when configuring OTU4 on line port 0, which is part of Group 1, then you can assign up
to a maximum of 80 x ODU0 client rates from among the client ports in Group 1. Assignment of more
clients beyond this limit will be rejected.
The allocation of ports per Group is listed in the table at the end of this section, and also marked on
the card's front panel.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-55

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

 The following assignment limitations apply:

 You cannot assign more than 3 x FC32 to the same ODU4.
 You cannot assign more than 1 x ETY40G with an OTU4 line port.
 If port 9 is configured with FC32, then ports 13 and 14 are disabled.
Conversely, if either port 13 or port 14 is already assigned, then you cannot assign FC32 to port
9.
 If port 10 is configured with FC32, then ports 15 and 16 are disabled.
Conversely, if either port 15 or port 16 is already assigned, then you cannot assign FC32 to port
10.
 If port 11 is configured with FC32, then ports 17 and 18 are disabled.
Conversely, if either port 17 or port 18 is already assigned, then you cannot assign FC32 to port
11.
 If port 12 is configured with FC32, then ports 19 and 20 are disabled.
Conversely, if either port 19 or port 20 is already assigned, then you cannot assign FC32 to port
12.

Ports
The TM100_2EN line ports are numbered 0 and 21.
The client ports are numbered from 1 to 20, with three types of ports:
 2 QSFP+/QSFP28-based ports, Ports 1-4 and 5-8
 4 SFP+/SFP28-based ports, Ports 9-12
 8 SFP+ based ports, Ports 13-20
The marking above each port identifies the Transmit (Tx) and Receive signals (Rx). The port LED indicators
are under each port.
The TM100_2EN ports are organized into two groups, Group 1 and Group 2. Port types and rates and group
association are listed in the following table. The information is also marked on the card's front panel.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-56

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

TM100_2EN client and line ports per group

Client port No. Port type Port rates Group

1-4 QSFP+/QSFP28 OTU4/100GE 1
40GE
4 x 10GE
5-8 QSFP+/QSFP28 OTU4/100GE 2
40GE
4 x 10GE
9-10 SFP+/SFP28 10GE / OTU2/2e 1
FC8/FC10/FC16/FC32
STM-64/OC192
11-12 SFP+/SFP28 10GE / OTU2/2e 2
FC8/FC10/FC16/FC32
STM-64/OC192
13-16 SFP+ 10GE / OTU2/2e 1
FC8/FC10/FC16
STM-64/OC192
17-20 SFP+ 10GE / OTU2/2e 2
FC8/FC10/FC16
STM-64/OC192
Line port No.
0 QSFP28 OTU4 1
21 QSFP28 OTU4 2

The port LED indicators are under each port.

LEDs

Marking Item Functions

Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off when the
card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no fault in
the TM100_2EN.
Line (QSFP28) port LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's transmitter is off.
F/L Red LED Blinks when a LOS condition is detected. Lights steadily when a BIT fault is
detected in the CFP pluggable transceiver, or the supply voltage or temperature is
OOR.
Client port (QSFP+/QSFP28/SFP+/SFP28 and SFP+) LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's transmitter is off.
F/L Red LED Blinks when a LOS condition is detected. Lights steadily when a BIT fault is
detected in the SFP+/QSFP+ pluggable transceiver, or the supply voltage or
temperature is OOR.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-57

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

10.14 TM100_2ENB
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603

Description
The TM100_2ENB is a double-slot long 2 x 100G multi-service, minimal-size transponder/muxponder card
for DWDM networks. The card provides a high level of encryption that complies with FIPS 140-2 Level 2
encryption standards, the same encryption capabilities and security features as the TM200ENB; described
in FIPS 140-2 Level 2 security implementation. The traffic of each client port can be configured, by the user,
to be encrypted or not.
The TM100_2ENB is very similar to the TM200ENB in all client port aspects. The main difference is in the
line ports; TM200ENB has a single CFP2-based line port, while the TM100_2ENB has two QSFP28-based line
ports that can be configured to ODU4. The TM100_2ENB works with QSFP28 line transceivers, supporting
non-colored LR4, SR4, and ER4 applications.

TM100_2ENB features
 Flexible configuration modes:
 Muxponder N x 10G/16G/32G to dual 100G
 Muxponder N x 10G/16G/32G
 Dual 100G transponders
 Each service is configurable to operate with or without encryption, using AES256, FIPS 140-2 Level 2,
and GCM standards. Optional encryption capabilities are license-based.
 GCC support for in-band management.
 Communication channels:
 Embedded management support by GCC0 on line ports (one channel per port).
 Five embedded user-selectable communication channels (GCC0/GCC1/GCC2) per client port.
 Various protection schemes for high redundancy including:
 DWDM network protection based on OLP_S2 card (< 50 mSec switchover for all line types).
 DWDM network protection based on OMSP card (< 50 mSec switchover for all line types).
 100G line protection based on OLP_S2 card (< 50 mSec switchover for all line types).
 Port protection (< 50 mSec switchover for all line types) for all client, excluding SR4 transceiver
for QSFP28/QSFP+ clients.
 Each service could be protected/unprotected regardless of other services. Protection is
selectable per port.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-58

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

Card views
Front panel

Usage guidelines and assignment rules

The TM100_2ENB provides the following configuration options:
 2 x line ports (Ports 0 and 21), based on QSFP28 form factor, for non-colored LR4/SR4/ER4
applications
 Users should first assign a selected line port (0 or 21) to OTU4. The user should then explicitly
configure the corresponding client ports and connects (sub interfaces) to the line port low order
ODUk.
 When a line port is configured to OTU4 it supports up to 80 tributary slots of ODU0. Assignment
of more clients beyond this limit are rejected.
 20 x client ports, numbered from 1 to 20, with three types of ports:
 2 independent QSFP+/QSFP28-based modules.
 The two modules are configured independently.
 Each module includes 4 port openings, numbered 1-4 and 5-8.
 The 4 ports within each module must be configured consistently, either as ETY100G, or as
ETY40G, or as 4 x ETY10GOC ports.
 The full set of 8 x 10GE ports (on both modules) can be operated as 4 fan-out ports.
 4 x SFP+/SFP28-based ports, Ports 9-12, supporting the following port rates:
 10GE/OTU2/2e
 FC8/FC10/FC16/FC32
 STM-64/OC192

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-59

Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

[These ports do not support rates ETY100G and ETY40G.]

 8 x SFP+ based ports, Ports 13-20, supporting the following port rates:
 10GE/OTU2/2e
 FC8/FC10/FC16
 STM-64/OC192
[These ports do not support rates ETY100G, ETY40G, and FC32.]
 The TM100_2ENB client ports are organized into two groups: Group 1 and Group 2.
 When configuring TM100_2ENB ports, the maximum number of ports available in each group is
calculated independently, with each group mapped to a different ODU4.
 When working with OTU4 uplinks, the client ports must all be based on ports in the same group.
For example, when configuring OTU4 on line port 0, which is part of Group 1, then you can assign up
to a maximum of 80 x ODU0 client rates from among the client ports in Group 1. Assignment of more
clients beyond this limit will be rejected.
The allocation of ports per Group is listed in the table at the end of this section, and also marked on
the card's front panel.
 The following assignment limitations apply:
 You cannot assign more than 3 x FC32 to the same ODU4.
 You cannot assign more than 1 x ETY40G with an OTU4 line port.
 If port 9 is configured with FC32, then ports 13 and 14 are disabled.
Conversely, if either port 13 or port 14 is already assigned, then you cannot assign FC32 to port
9.
 If port 10 is configured with FC32, then ports 15 and 16 are disabled.
Conversely, if either port 15 or port 16 is already assigned, then you cannot assign FC32 to port
10.
 If port 11 is configured with FC32, then ports 17 and 18 are disabled.
Conversely, if either port 17 or port 18 is already assigned, then you cannot assign FC32 to port
11.
 If port 12 is configured with FC32, then ports 19 and 20 are disabled.
Conversely, if either port 19 or port 20 is already assigned, then you cannot assign FC32 to port
12.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-60

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

Ports
The TM100_2ENB line ports are numbered 0 and 21.
The client ports are numbered from 1 to 20, with three types of ports:
 2 QSFP+/QSFP28-based ports, Ports 1-4 and 5-8
 4 SFP+/SFP28-based ports, Ports 9-12
 8 SFP+ based ports, Ports 13-20
The marking above each port identifies the Transmit (Tx) and Receive signals (Rx). The port LED indicators
are under each port.
The TM100_2ENB ports are organized into two groups, Group 1 and Group 2. Port types and rates and
group association are listed in the following table. The information is also marked on the card's front panel.

TM100_2ENB client and line ports per Group

Client port No. Port type Port rates Group

1-4 QSFP+/QSFP28 OTU4/100GE 1
40GE
4 x 10GE
5-8 QSFP+/QSFP28 OTU4/100GE 2
40GE
4 x 10GE
9-10 SFP+/SFP28 10GE / OTU2/2e 1
FC8/FC10/FC16/FC32
STM-64/OC192
11-12 SFP+/SFP28 10GE / OTU2/2e 2
FC8/FC10/FC16/FC32
STM-64/OC192
13-16 SFP+ 10GE / OTU2/2e 1
FC8/FC10/FC16
STM-64/OC192
17-20 SFP+ 10GE / OTU2/2e 2
FC8/FC10/FC16
STM-64/OC192
Line port No.
0 QSFP28 OTU4 1
21 QSFP28 OTU4 2

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-61

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

The port LED indicators are under each port.

LED indicators

Marking Item Functions

Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed
configurations). Off when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when
there is no fault in the TM100_2ENB.
SECURITY Green/Red (bi-color) LED Described in the table below (as it has multiple states)
Line (QSFP28) port LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
F/L Red LED Blinks when a LOS condition is detected. Lights steadily when a
BIT fault is detected in the CFP pluggable transceiver, or the
supply voltage or temperature is OOR.
Client port (QSFP+/QSFP28/SFP+/SFP28 and SFP+) LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
F/L Red LED Blinks when a LOS condition is detected. Lights steadily when a
BIT fault is detected in the SFP+/QSFP+ pluggable transceiver, or
the supply voltage or temperature is OOR.

SECURITY LED functions

LED state State set by Description

Red CPLD Card tampered. HCPM in reset.
Green SW Card operating in FIPS mode with CSPS loaded.
1.5 sec Green/3.0 sec Red CPLD Initial state after power on.
2.5 sec on/2.5 sec off Red CPLD Low-battery/Tamper-check warning.
1.5 sec Red/3 sec Green CPLD CPLD initialization complete, HCPM reset released, Boot-ROM running.
5.0 sec on/5.0 sec off Green SW IO application initializing and running algorithmic self-tests.
2.5 sec on/2.5 sec off Green SW Algorithmic self-tests passed; hardware self-test.
5.0 sec on/5.0 sec off Red SW Failure in algorithms tests or crypto hardware test.
1.5 sec Red/3.0 sec Green SW CSPS self tests (key pairs and certificates).
1 sec on/1 sec off Red SW Missing CSPS.
2.0 sec Green/2.0 sec Red Unassigned CSPS self-test failure.
1 sec on Red+ Green/1 sec off CPLD CO password missing.
Off (no light) Unassigned
5.0 sec Green/5.0 sec Red SW Transient FIPS failure (e.g. TRNG continuous monitoring failure).

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-62

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

10.15 TM200EN
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603

Description
The TM200EN is a double-slot 200G multi-service, low cost, minimal size transponder/muxponder card for
DWDM networks. The card is enhanced with optional encryption capabilities (license-based) and software
add-ons, tailored to encrypted/unencrypted applications. By default, TM200EN is supplied without the
encryption option.
Card applications are typically in data centers and SAN interconnectivity, as well as expansion of existing
networks with 200G encrypted wavelengths, grooming any mixture of services into OTU4 or OTUC2.
The TM200EN works with D-CFP2 coherent line transceivers, supporting configurable DP-QPSK, 8-QAM, or
16-QAM modulation, with Flex-Grid capabilities. This transceiver includes a coherent receiver, DSP
processing, and soft decision forward error correction, for superior noise tolerance, as well as an
exceptional ability to mitigate CD and PMD impairments.
TM200EN can be configured to operate in two modes (expected types):
 TM200EN - for muxponder applications of OTU or OTUC2, user selectable:
 10GE/40GE/100GE
 FC8/16/32
 STM-64/OC192
 OTU2/2e
 TR10_12EN - for six 10G encrypted transponder applications

TM200EN features
 Flexible configuration modes:
 Muxponder N x 10G/16G/32G to single 100G or 200G
 Muxponder N x 10G/16G/32G/100G to 200G
 Muxponder 2 x 100G to 200G
 Single 100G transponder
 6 x 10G transponders
 Up to 4 x 10G Y-protected (1 x client to 2 x lines)
 Each service is configurable to operate with or without encryption. Encryption is based on the AES256
and GCM standards. Optional encryption capabilities are license-based.
 GCC support for in-band management.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-63

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

 Communication channels:
 Embedded management support by GCC0 on line ports (one channel per port).
 Five embedded user-selectable communication channels (GCC0/GCC1/GCC2) per client port.
 Various protection schemes for high redundancy including:
 WSON restoration using coherent OTU4\OTUC2 wavelengths (< 5 sec switchover).
 DWDM network protection based on OLP_S2 or OMSP cards (< 50 mSec switchover for all line
types).
 100G/200G line protection based on OLP_S2 card (< 50 mSec switchover for all line types).
 Port protection (< 50 mSec switchover for all line types) for all client, excluding SR4 transceiver
for QSFP28/QSFP+ clients.
 Y-protection (<50 mSec switchover) for TR10_12EN mode, up to four protection groups.
 Each service could be protected/unprotected regardless of other services. Protection is
selectable per port.

Card views
General view

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-64

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

Front panel

Usage guidelines and assignment rules

The TM200EN provides the following configuration options:
 1 x line port (Port 0), based on D-CFP2 form factor, for coherent 100/200G transceivers.
 Users should first assign the line port to either OTU4 or OTUC2. The user should then explicitly
configure the corresponding client ports and connects (sub interfaces) to the line port low order
ODUk.
 When the line port is configured to OTUC2, it supports up to 160 tributary slots of ODU0.
Assignment of more clients beyond this limit are rejected.
 When the line port is configured to OTU4 it supports up to 80 tributary slots of ODU0.
Assignment of more clients beyond this limit are rejected.
 20 x client ports, numbered from 1 to 20, with three types of ports:
 2 independent QSFP+/QSFP28-based modules.
 The two modules are configured independently.
 Each module includes 4 port openings, numbered 1-4 and 5-8.
 The 4 ports within each module must be configured consistently, either as ETY100G, or as
ETY40G, or as 4 x ETY10GOC ports.
 The full set of 8 x 10GE ports (on both modules) can be operated as 4 fan-out ports.
 4 x SFP+/SFP28-based ports, Ports 9-12, supporting the following port rates:
 10GE / OTU2/2e
 FC8/FC10/FC16/FC32
 STM-64/OC192
[These ports do not support rates ETY100G and ETY40G.]

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-65

Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

 8 x SFP+ based ports, Ports 13-20, supporting the following port rates:
 10GE / OTU2/2e
 FC8/FC10/FC16
 STM-64/OC192
[These ports do not support rates ETY100G, ETY40G, and FC32.]
 The TM200EN ports are organized into two groups, Group 1 and Group 2.
 When configuring TM200EN ports, the maximum number of ports available in each group is
calculated independently, with each group mapped to a different ODU4.
 When working with an OTU4 uplink, the client ports must all be based on ports in the same
group; with an OTUC2 uplink, ports from both groups are used.
For example, when configuring OTU4 on line port 0, configured as part of Group 1, then you can
assign up to a maximum of 80 x ODU0 client rates from among the client ports in Group 1.
Assignment of more clients beyond this limit will be rejected.
If you configure OTUC2 on line port 0, then you can assign up to a maximum of 160 x ODU0 client
rates from among the client ports in both groups. Assignment of more clients beyond this limit will be
rejected.
The allocation of ports per Group is listed in the table at the end of this section, and also marked on
the card's front panel.
 The following assignment limitations apply:
 You cannot assign more than 3 x FC32 to the same ODU4.
 You cannot assign more than 1 x ETY40G with an OTU4 line port.
 If port 9 is configured with FC32, then ports 13 and 14 are disabled.
Conversely, if either port 13 or port 14 is already assigned, then you cannot assign FC32 to port
9.
 If port 10 is configured with FC32, then ports 15 and 16 are disabled.
Conversely, if either port 15 or port 16 is already assigned, then you cannot assign FC32 to port
10.
 If port 11 is configured with FC32, then ports 17 and 18 are disabled.
Conversely, if either port 17 or port 18 is already assigned, then you cannot assign FC32 to port
11.
 If port 12 is configured with FC32, then ports 19 and 20 are disabled.
Conversely, if either port 19 or port 20 is already assigned, then you cannot assign FC32 to port
12.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-66

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

Ports
The TM200EN line port is numbered 0.
The client ports are numbered from 1 to 20, with three types of ports:
 2 QSFP+/QSFP28-based ports, Ports 1-4 and 5-8
 4 SFP+/SFP28-based ports, Ports 9-12
 8 SFP+ based ports, Ports 13-20
The marking above each port identifies the Transmit (Tx) and Receive signals (Rx). The port LED indicators
are under each port.
The TM200EN ports are organized into two groups, Group 1 and Group 2. Port types and rates and group
association are listed in the following table. The information is also marked on the card's front panel.

TM200EN client and line ports per group

Client port No. Port type Port rates Group

1-4 QSFP+/QSFP28 OTU4/100GE 1
40GE
4 x 10GE
5-8 QSFP+/QSFP28 OTU4/100GE 2
40GE
4 x 10GE
9-10 SFP+/SFP28 10GE / OTU2/2e 1
FC8/FC10/FC16/FC32
STM-64/OC192
11-12 SFP+/SFP28 10GE / OTU2/2e 2
FC8/FC10/FC16/FC32
STM-64/OC192
13-16 SFP+ 10GE / OTU2/2e 1
FC8/FC10/FC16
STM-64/OC192
17-20 SFP+ 10GE / OTU2/2e 2
FC8/FC10/FC16
STM-64/OC192
Line port No.
0 QSFP28 OTU4 1 &2

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-67

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

The port LED indicators are under each port.

LED indicators

Marking Item Functions

Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations).
Off when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is
no fault in the TM200EN.
Line (CFP2) port LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
F/L Red LED Blinks when a LOS condition is detected. Lights steadily when a BIT
fault is detected in the CFP pluggable transceiver, or the supply
voltage or temperature is OOR.
Client port (QSFP+/QSFP28/SFP+/SFP28 and SFP+) LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
F/L Red LED Blinks when a LOS condition is detected. Lights steadily when a BIT
fault is detected in the SFP+/QSFP+ pluggable transceiver, or the
supply voltage or temperature is OOR.

10.15.1 TR10_12EN assignment rules and features

As explained in TM200EN, the TR10_12EN is a user-configurable operation mode of the TM200EN. When
assigning the TR10_12EN, the Chassis View displays the card with Ports 0 to 8 grayed-out. This indicates
that these ports cannot be assigned while working in TR10_12EN mode.
The following rules apply in TR10_12EN operation mode:
 Ports 9 to 12 are always client ports, so the label CLIENT is marked above the port numbers.
 Ports 13 and 14 can be client or line ports, so they have no label except the number of the port.
 Ports 15 to 20 are always line ports, so the label LINE is marked above the port numbers.
 The assignable Ports (9 to 20) can be configured to the following types:
 ETY10G
 ETY10GOC
 STM-64
 OC-192
 FC800
 FC1200

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-68

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

 OTU2
 OTU2e

NOTE: Although ports have dedicated roles, the user can XC any two ports described above.

TR10_12EN provides the basic features of the TR10_12/TR10_12R with the additional capability of
encryption.
In addition the card provides the following functionality:
 Six 10G transponders
 Protection:
 SNCP
 Up to 4 groups of Y Protection
 WSON restoration

10.16 TM200ENB
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603

Description
The TM200ENB is a double-slot long card providing 200G multi-service, minimal size encrypted solution for
DWDM networks. The card provides a high level of encryption that complies with FIPS 140-2 Level 2
encryption standards, described in FIPS 140-2 Level 2 security implementation. The traffic of each client
port can be configured, by the user, to be encrypted or not.
Card applications are typically in data centers and SAN interconnectivity, as well as expansion of existing
networks with 200G encrypted wavelengths, grooming any mixture of services into OTU4 or OTUC2.
The TM200ENB works with D-CFP2 coherent line transceivers, supporting configurable DP-QPSK, 8-QAM, or
16-QAM modulation, with Flex-Grid capabilities. This transceiver includes a coherent receiver, DSP
processing, and soft decision forward error correction, for superior noise tolerance, as well as an
exceptional ability to mitigate CD and PMD impairments.
TM200ENB can be configured to operate in two modes (expected types):
 TM200ENB - for muxponder applications of N x 10G/16G/32G/100G to 100G or 200G user selectable
 TR10_12ENB - for six 10G transponders application

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-69

Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

TM200ENB features
 Flexible configuration modes:
 Muxponder N x 10G/16G/32G to single 100G or 200G
 Muxponder N x 10G/16G/32G/100G to 200G
 Muxponder 2 x 100G to 200G
 Single 100G transponder
 6 x 10G transponders
 Up to 4 10G Y-protected (1 x client to 2 x lines)
 Each service is configurable to operate with or without encryption, using AES256, FIPS 140-2 Level 2,
and GCM standards. Optional encryption capabilities are license-based.
 GCC support for in-band management.
 Communication channels:
 Embedded management support by GCC0 on line ports (one channel per port).
 Five embedded user-selectable communication channels (GCC0/GCC1/GCC2) per client port.
 Various protection schemes for high redundancy including:
 WSON restoration using coherent OTU4\OTUC2 wavelengths (< 5 sec switchover).
 DWDM network protection based on OLP_S2 card (< 50 mSec switchover for all line types).
 DWDM network protection based on OMSP card (< 50 mSec switchover for all line types).
 100G/200G line protection based on OLP_S2 card (< 50 mSec switchover for all line types).
 Port protection (< 50 mSec switchover for all line types) for all client, excluding SR4 transceiver
for QSFP28/QSFP+ clients.
 Y-protection (<50 mSec switchover) for TR10_12EN mode, up to four protection groups.
 Each service could be protected/unprotected regardless of other services. Protection is
selectable per port.
 Encryption keys are rotated by the RCP per NE.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-70

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

Card views
General view

Front panel

Usage guidelines and assignment rules

The TM200ENB provides the following configuration options:
 1 x line port (Port 0), based on CFP2 form factor, for coherent 100/200G transceivers.
 Users should first assign the line port to either OTU4 or OTUC2. The user should then explicitly
configure the corresponding client ports and connects (sub interfaces) to the line port low order
ODUk.
 When the line port is configured to OTUC2, it supports up to 160 tributary slots of ODU0.
Assignment of more clients beyond this limit are rejected.
 When the line port is configured to OTU4 it supports up to 80 tributary slots of ODU0.
Assignment of more clients beyond this limit are rejected.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-71

Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

 20 x client ports, numbered from 1 to 20, with three types of ports:

 2 independent QSFP+/QSFP28-based modules.
 The two modules are configured independently.
 Each module includes 4 port openings, numbered 1-4 and 5-8.
 The 4 ports within each module must be configured consistently, either as ETY100G, or as
ETY40G, or as 4 x ETY10GOC ports.
 The full set of 8 x 10GE ports (on both modules) can be operated as 4 fan-out ports.
 4 x SFP+/SFP28-based ports, Ports 9-12, supporting the following port rates:
 10GE / OTU2/2e
 FC8/FC10/FC16/FC32
 STM-64/OC192
[These ports do not support rates ETY100G and ETY40G.]
 8 x SFP+ based ports, Ports 13-20, supporting the following port rates:
 10GE / OTU2/2e
 FC8/FC10/FC16
 STM-64/OC192
[These ports do not support rates ETY100G, ETY40G, and FC32.]
 The TM200ENB ports are organized into two groups, Group 1 and Group 2.
 When configuring TM200ENB ports, the maximum number of ports available in each group is
calculated independently, with each group mapped to a different ODU4.
 When working with an OTU4 uplink, the client ports must all be based on ports in the same
group; with an OTUC2 uplink, ports from both groups are used.
For example, when configuring OTU4 on line port 0, configured as part of Group 1, then you can
assign up to a maximum of 80 x ODU0 client rates from among the client ports in Group 1.
Assignment of more clients beyond this limit will be rejected.
If you configure OTUC2 on line port 0, then you can assign up to a maximum of 160 x ODU0 client
rates from among the client ports in both groups. Assignment of more clients beyond this limit will be
rejected.
The allocation of ports per Group is listed in the table at the end of this section, and also marked on
the card's front panel.
 The following assignment limitations apply:
 You cannot assign more than 3 x FC32 to the same ODU4.
 You cannot assign more than 1 x ETY40G with an OTU4 line port.
 If port 9 is configured with FC32, then ports 13 and 14 are disabled.
Conversely, if either port 13 or port 14 is already assigned, then you cannot assign FC32 to port
9.
 If port 10 is configured with FC32, then ports 15 and 16 are disabled.
Conversely, if either port 15 or port 16 is already assigned, then you cannot assign FC32 to port
10.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-72

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

 If port 11 is configured with FC32, then ports 17 and 18 are disabled.

Conversely, if either port 17 or port 18 is already assigned, then you cannot assign FC32 to port
11.
 If port 12 is configured with FC32, then ports 19 and 20 are disabled.
Conversely, if either port 19 or port 20 is already assigned, then you cannot assign FC32 to port
12.

Ports
The TM200ENB line port is numbered 0.
The client ports are numbered from 1 to 20, with three types of ports:
 2 QSFP+/QSFP28-based ports, Ports 1-4 and 5-8
 4 SFP+/SFP28-based ports, Ports 9-12
 8 SFP+ based ports, Ports 13-20
The marking above each port identifies the Transmit (Tx) and Receive signals (Rx). The port LED indicators
are under each port.
The TM200ENB ports are organized into two groups, Group 1 and Group 2. Port types and rates and group
association are listed in the following table. The information is also marked on the card's front panel.

TM200ENB client and line ports per group

Client port No. Port type Port rates Group

1-4 QSFP+/QSFP28 OTU4/100GE 1
40GE
4 x 10GE
5-8 QSFP+/QSFP28 OTU4/100GE 2
40GE
4 x 10GE
9-10 SFP+/SFP28 10GE / OTU2/2e 1
FC8/FC10/FC16/FC32
STM-64/OC192
11-12 SFP+/SFP28 10GE / OTU2/2e 2
FC8/FC10/FC16/FC32
STM-64/OC192
13-16 SFP+ 10GE / OTU2/2e 1
FC8/FC10/FC16
STM-64/OC192
17-20 SFP+ 10GE / OTU2/2e 2
FC8/FC10/FC16
STM-64/OC192
Line port No.
0 QSFP28 OTU4 1

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-73

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

The port LED indicators are under each port.

LED indicators

Marking Item Functions

Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations).
Off when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there
is no fault in the TM200ENB.
SECURITY Green/Red (bi-color) Described in the table below (as it has multiple states)
LED
Line (CFP2) port LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
F/L Red LED Blinks when a LOS condition is detected. Lights steadily when a BIT
fault is detected in the CFP pluggable transceiver, or the supply
voltage or temperature is OOR.
Client port (QSFP+/QSFP28/SFP+/SFP28 and SFP+) LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
F/L Red LED Blinks when a LOS condition is detected. Lights steadily when a BIT
fault is detected in the SFP+/QSFP+ pluggable transceiver, or the
supply voltage or temperature is OOR.

SECURITY LED functions

LED state State set by Description
Red CPLD Card tampered. HCPM in reset.
Green SW Card operating in FIPS mode with CSPS loaded.
1.5 sec Green/3.0 sec Red CPLD Initial state after power on.
2.5 sec on/2.5 sec off Red CPLD Low-battery/Tamper-check warning.
1.5 sec Red/3 sec Green CPLD CPLD initialization complete, HCPM reset released, Boot-ROM
running.
5.0 sec on/5.0 sec off Green SW IO application initializing and running algorithmic self-tests.
2.5 sec on/2.5 sec off Green SW Algorithmic self-tests passed; hardware self-test.
5.0 sec on/5.0 sec off Red SW Failure in algorithms tests or crypto hardware test.
1.5 sec Red/3.0 sec Green SW CSPS self tests (key pairs and certificates).
1 sec on/1 sec off Red SW Missing CSPS.
2.0 sec Green/2.0 sec Red Unassigned CSPS self-test failure.
1 sec on Red+ Green/1 sec off CPLD CO password missing.
Off (no light) Unassigned
5.0 sec Green/5.0 sec Red SW Transient FIPS failure (e.g. TRNG continuous monitoring failure).

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-74

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

10.17 FIPS 140-2 Level 2 security implementation

Apollo's TM200ENB and TM100_2ENB cards offer FIPS 140-2 Level 2 encryption capabilities and security
features, described in this section. The encryption, security, and installation details apply to both the
TM200ENB and the TM100_2ENB cards; the examples and figures in these sections are based on the
TM200ENB cards.

10.17.1 FIPS 140-2 Level 2 encryption

Encryption in the optical-layer is a powerful way to ensure secure communication over interconnecting
networks. The TM200ENB and TM100_2ENB cards provide optical encryption via both transponder and
muxponder applications of the card, supporting pre-service encryption of up to 100 Gbps, with line rates of
up to 200 Gbps, without any impact on optical interoperability, scalability, or flexibility. These capabilities
enable a variety of flexible options for optical encryption as a service. The encryption is certified per FIPS
140-2 Security Level 2 US government computer security standards.
As a muxponder, the card combines lower-speed signals into a 200 Gbps line signal. Each client service can
be independently encrypted or unencrypted. Services can be combined on the same line, without
restrictions.
The main features of the TM200ENB/TM100_2ENB encryption engine include:
 Communication between NEs is through a secured line on the ODU sub-interface level, using an
AES256-encrypted line.
 NEs provisioned to support encryption authenticate each other using private/public key pairs.
 NEs exchange symmetric encryption keys for the encryption algorithm using Diffie-Hellman group 5,
14, and 24 algorithms.
 Symmetric keys are the standard choice for parallel encrypted lines between the same peers, whether
on the same card or on different cards.
 Upon RCP HA switchover, keys are synchronized and encrypted; traffic doesn't experience any traffic
hit.
 Replacement of a single RCP doesn't cause any traffic hit.
 In case key rotation has not been completed when the IV (Initialization Vector) counter reaches the
maximum number, traffic is considered insecure, and an alarm is raised.
 Up to ten channels, of the 96 supported, can be configured as encrypted or unencrypted (the
remaining are in bypass mode).
 Bypass mode allows non-encrypted data to bypass the encryption engine without additional latency.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-75

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

10.17.2 Understanding FIPS 140-2 Level 2 security

The TM200ENB/TM100_2ENB cards are high density transponder/muxponder cards that take client traffic,
encrypt it with a high strength cipher, and map it to line side OTN ports. In the reverse direction, traffic
arriving from line ports is de-mapped, decrypted, and then forwarded to the appropriate client port.
The TM200ENB/TM100_2ENB cards are fully compliant, and in some cases even exceed, the FIPS 140-2
Level 2 standard. These cards efficiently implement the FIPS-approved cryptographic algorithms and
functions only while running in FIPS mode. FIPS 140-2 Level 2 compliance includes physical tamper
detection mechanisms which the TM200ENB/TM100_2ENB cards meet and exceed.
The cards are manufactured and shipped to customer sites in a secure way so that any tamper attempts
can be detected. Furthermore, the module must be installed by the Cryptographic Officer (CO) following
detailed guidelines. Secret keys must be installed in a secure manner so they can be accessed and used only
by FIPS-approved cryptographic functions. The cards provide status information through physical and
logical interfaces. Card health and FIPS status can be monitored continuously through a secure
management application. Basic card health and FIPS status is also indicated by LEDs on the front panel.
Specialized and sensitive circuitry on the card can detect tampering. The module can report tamper events
through physical and logical interfaces. For Level-2 compliance, it’s mandatory to generate tamper
indications (such as broken label marks or LED colors). These modules actually exceed this requirement,
since they also attempt to take corrective actions so that critical information is not compromised after a
tamper event.
Three different tamper covers protect components relevant to FIPS functionality. These areas are defined
as "cryptographic boundary" areas, such that all the components within that boundary are covered by a
tamper cover. The following figure shows the block diagram of the TM200ENB, with the cryptographic
areas outlined in blue.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-76

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

TM200ENB block diagram and cryptographic areas

The cover is installed on the PCB in a secure, FIPS-compliant manner. There are three different tamper
covers:
 HCPM tamper cover: Also referred to as the "main" tamper cover. It covers most of the
cryptographically sensitive components on the module, including a CPLD used for control, the main
CPU (called HCPM), the system RAM, etc.
 JTAG tamper cover: Covers the JTAG port. The JTAG port is used only at the manufacturer site, during
a manufacturing or rework procedure, to load the CPLD image or a secure Boot ROM software image
into the components located underneath the HCPM cover. The JTAG port is enclosed in a separate
FIPS-compliant cover. It allows the manufacturer to utilize the JTAG port without touching the main
HCPM cover.
 DEBUG tamper cover: Secured using a FIPS-approved tamper evident sticker. The debug port secured
by this cover can be accessed from the front panel as long as the tamper sticker is not applied.
The following figure shows a general view of the TM200ENB and the location of the tamper covers.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-77

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

TM200ENB tamper covers

HCPM and JTAG covers must remain secured at all times outside manufacturer facilities. Any attempt to
tamper with these covers becomes evident from tamper stickers applied across the covers and the PCB.
Moreover, these tamper covers are electronically monitored by on-board circuitry. Consequently, a tamper
event immediately triggers electronic indications to the card hardware, which then stops its normal
operation until the boards are restored appropriately. As long as the HCPM and JTAG tamper covers are not
breached, we guarantee FIPS 140-2 Level-2 compliant secure operation.
The following figure shows a detail of the JTAG and DEBUG cap detail.

JTAG and DEBUG cap detail

The DEBUG cover must also remain covered with a FIPS compliant tamper-evidence sticker when it’s not in
use by an authorized personnel. The DEBUG cover is an important, but non-critical, component. Sensitive
data in the card is not compromised even if the debug port is left open. The card can function in FIPS mode
even when it’s not covered. This allows cryptographic officers or authorized personnel access to the
console or Ethernet interfaces on the DEBUG port. However, we recommend that customers secure this
cover as well at all times as a good security practice. This further ensures that any unauthorized or
unexpected access by strangers to the DEBUG port can be detected.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-78

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

DEBUG port gadget and secure sticker

10.17.3 FIPS installation procedure and guidelines

NOTE: FIPS Level 2 products require a designated Cryptographic Officer (CO) who is
responsible for all installation and management activities. Specific instructions for the CO are
provided in a separate manual, the User Guide for Cryptographic Officers. This section
includes general guidelines for FIPS module installation and management.

FIPS card installation requires a few steps at the customer site, to be performed only by the responsible
cryptographic officer (CO). This includes the physical module installation, application of tamper detecting
labels on certain surfaces, loading the critical security parameters (CSPs), and periodic inspection and
maintenance tasks.
To guarantee FIPS security, the card must be installed on-site according to the following guidelines. Details
for specific procedure steps are provided in this document.
 The card is shipped from the manufacturer loaded with a trusted boot-ROM image and with the
HCPM and JTAG tamper covers sealed.
 The designated CO at the customer site is responsible for the entire installation process.
 In addition to the sealed tamper covers physically mounted on the card, tamper evident stickers are
provided. Each sticker has a unique serial number.
 Additional dummy-cards can be provided to populate empty slots adjacent to the card. Real (non-
encryption) or dummy cards that surround the encryption card installed in the platform further block
access to the card's PCB surface. It is therefore recommended that customers either install the
encryption card in an end slot (first or last) or install it such that there are other cards (dummy or real)
surrounding the encryption card.
Since sensitive card circuitry is covered by tamper shield installed on the card itself, from a FIPS
perspective the card is safe even without surrounding cards. Nevertheless, dummy card installation is
recommended.
 Stickers and dummy-cards can be ordered as separate parts for the installation process or for later
use.
 The CO is responsible for keeping labels in safe custody, recording their serial numbers, and keeping
track of inventory.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-79

Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

 Upon removing the card from its packaging, the CO must inspect these tamper covers for any gaps or
broken labels. If the seals or covers look suspicious, the CO should not proceed with the installation
and should contact the manufacturer.
 When the encryption card is installed and powered up, the CO connects a CLI terminal with a serial
cable to the debug port. A message is displayed on the screen, indicating that the CPLD password is
invalid and must be configured.
 The CO must then configure a password. The password must be stored in a safe location. There is no
other factory or back-door password. If the CPLD password is lost, the card must be shipped back to
the manufacturer for restoration.
 After the CPLD password is configured, the CPLD logic displays more options on-screen, to either run
CPLD diagnostics or proceed directly with the system boot.
 The CO is the only person authorized to load the {private, public} key-pair owned by the card. This key
pair is essentially the identity of the card and is expected to be globally unique.
 After the card is fully configured, loaded with keys, and operates as expected, the CO must apply
tamper stickers to the relevant components. A tamper sticker should also be applied across the debug
port, unless the port must be left accessible for some other purpose. These are not FIPS
requirements, but a recommended security procedure to help expose unauthorized activities around
the card.
 FIPS installation ends with CSPs loaded and front panel secured.
 If there is subsequently any indication that these stickers were tampered with (without being
accounted for by the CO), this is considered a security breach. The CO should periodically inspect the
front panel for any tamper evidence.
 HCPM or JTAG tamper events are serious security issues. In such cases the card must be sent back to
the manufacturer.
 If stickers are broken but the tamper covers are intact, the CO should consider this as a security event
and proceed with full FIPS re-installation using the CPLD password. In this case it's not required to
send the card back to the manufacturer.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-80

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

10.18 TR200_2
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603

Description
The TR200_2 is a low-cost, single-slot high-density double independent transponder/muxponder that
supports transport of one ETY100G/OTU4 service over OTU4 or two ETY100G/OTU4 services over OTUC2. It
occupies a single slot in OPT96xx platforms. The card maps the ETY100G/OTU4 client signals to OTU4 or
OTUC2.
The TR200_2 works with D-CFP2 coherent line transceivers, supporting configurable DP-QPSK, 8-QAM, or
16-QAM modulation, with Flex-Grid capabilities. This transceiver includes a coherent receiver, DSP
processing, and soft decision forward error correction, for superior noise tolerance, as well as an
exceptional ability to mitigate CD and PMD impairments.
The TR200_2 provides the following main features:
 Transport of one ETY100G/OTU4 service over OTU4 or two ETY100G/OTU4 services over OTUC2.
 Four QSFP28 based client transceivers.
 Two CFP2 based line transceivers.
 Hot insertion/removal of QSFP28/CFP2 service without traffic affecting of other ports in the card.
 Supports packet switching.
 GCC support for in-band management.
 Communication channels:
 One embedded communication channel is supported per line port at the ODU4 GCC rate, even if
the line port is OTUC2.
 Communication channel supported is GCC0.
 Communication channels are not supported at client ports.
 Protection options:
 Switching to protection in under 50 msec.
 WSON restoration using coherent OTU4\OTUC2 wavelengths (< 5 sec switchover).
 DWDM network protection (OTS) based on OLP_S2 or OMSP cards.
 100G/200G line protection (OCHP) based on OLP_S2 card.
 OCH1+1 card protection based on adjacent (< 50 msec switchover for 100G/200G line rates)
with splitter/coupler towards the client. Only single mode clients are supported (LR4 P1).
 Each service can be protected/unprotected regardless of other services. Protection is select-able
based on the port.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-81

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

 Switching to protection is < 50 msec

 Interoperability support:
 In general TR200_2 interoperates with Apollo OPT96xx and OPT99xx service cards at OTU4 level.
 TM100 (OTU4 DP-QPSK, no GCC).
 HIO500 (OTU4 and OTUC2 in all line code modes supported with GCC).
 TM200_EN (OTU4 and OTUC2 in all line code modes supported with GCC) for 100GE client drops
only.

Card views
General view

Front panel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-82

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

LEDs
LED indicators

Marking Item Functions

Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no
fault in the TR200_2.
Client Port (QSFP28) LEDs
(2), (3), (4), Bi-color LED
(5) (Green or Red):
No fault Lights Green when the Laser is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
LOS Blinks Green/Red when a LOS condition is detected and the Laser is on.
Blinks Red when a LOS condition is detected and the Laser is off.
Fault Lights steadily Red when a BIT fault is detected Laser is on or off.
Line Port (CFP2) LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
LOS Red LED Lights steadily when a BIT fault is detected in the OIF1.1 transceiver or
the supply voltage or temperature is OOR.

Block diagram
TR200_2 functional block diagram

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-83

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

10.18.1 TR200_2 applications

The TR200_2 has four main applications:
 LH 100G transponder - in this application the TR200_2 is used as an Apollo main 100G transponder
service card and can replace TM400 (100G mode), TR100 and TM100 (with PTF) cards.
 200G 8QAM muxponder - in the application the TR200_2 is used for big metros, long reach DCI, or
small regional networks as a low cost per bit 100GE transport solution. It replaces TM400 (200G
mode) and further improves the reach.
 200G 16QAM muxponder - in the application the TR200_2 is used for small metros or short reach DCI
networks as a low cost per bit 100GE transport solution. It replaces TM400 (200G mode).
 OTU4 or OTUC2 regenerator - in this application the TR200_2 is used to regenerate OTU4 or OTUC2
signals. In the OTU4 regenerator application the OTU4 is fed to one Line port. Two Client ports
equipped with OTU4/SRDR transceivers and connected between themselves and provide the OTU4
regeneration. The regenerated OTU4 signal is fed from the second Line port.
Similarly, for OTUC2 regenerator application the OTUC2 is fed to one Line port. Two pairs of Client
ports equipped with OTU4/SRDR transceivers are connected between themselves, such that each pair
regenerate an OTU4 signal, totaling an OTUC2 signal. The resulting regenerated OTUC2 signal is
output via the second Line port.
The following figures shows block diagrams of the OTU4 and OTUC2 signals regeneration with the
TR200_2.

OTU4 regenerator application with TR200_2

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-84

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

OTUC2 regenerator application with TR200_2

10.18.2 TR200_2 line and client ports configuration options

The following table describes the line port encoding and FEC type supported configurations.

Line ports configuration

Port No. Port type Encoding FEC type Comments
0,1 OTU4 DP-DQPSK SD-FEC For Interop with AC100M
cards
DP-DQPSK SD-FEC15 Default
DP-DQPSK FEC Low latency
OTUC2 DP-QAM8 SD-FEC15 Default
DP-QAM16 SD-FEC15 --

The following table describes the line port encoding and FEC type supported configurations.

Client ports configuration

Port No. Port type Mapping
2, 3, 4, 5 ETY100G GMP
2, 3, 4, 5 OTU4

OTU4 client port types support FEC only and FEC Ignore is not supported. ETY100G client port types support
RS FEC, depending on the transceiver type.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-85

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

10.19 TM400
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603

Description
The TM400 is a double-slot Flex-grid and Flex-rate transponder/muxponder card designed for ultra-long
haul, metro-long haul, and metro-regional network configurations. It has four client ports and two line
ports supporting line rates of 2 x 200 Gbps, or 2 x 100 Gbps. The card occupies a double (long) slot in the
Apollo supported platforms. The card can be configured to operate in one of two modes: transponder or
muxponder.
TM400 provides a multi-service, cost-effective solution with 100G/200G wavelengths. The card's OTN
framer terminates with two internal transceivers, each directly connected to a line.

Features
 Transponder/muxponder with two independent line ports, supporting OTU4 (100 G) or OTUC2 (200
G).
 High order phase modulation selected for best OSNR and signal reach:
 100 G line - DP-QPSK.
 200 G line - DP-16QAM.
 Four client ports supporting any mix of the following services:
 100 GbE
 OTU4
 10 x 10 GbE (via fanout cable or patch panel)
 Pluggable CFP2 client interface:
 LR4 long-reach up to 10 km (100GE/OTU4)
 SR10 short-reach up to 300 m (OTU4/100GE/10x10GE)
 LR10 up to 10 Km (10x10GE)
 Supports two SD-FEC modes:
 SD-FEC25; provides maximum performance but not compatible with other Apollo cards like:
TM100, CMR100,etc.
 SD-FEC (regular also marked SD-FEC15) for compatibility operation with other Apollo cards.
 Embedded management support by GCC0 on line ports (one channel per port).
 One embedded channel for embedded management, user selectable from GCC0, GCC1, or GCC2 for
client ports.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-86

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

 The four client interfaces are organized in groups of ten ports each: 2 to 11, 12 to 21, 22 to 31 and 32
to 41:
In each group only one port type of similar rate can be accepted; 100G (OTU4 or 100GE), or N x 10G
(N<=10) up to the aggregate bandwidth of 100G (per client).
For example, if port 2 is configured to OTU4, then any configuration to ports 3 to 11 will be rejected.
If port 2 is configured to 10GE, any attempt to configure one of the other ports to 100G will be
rejected.

Card views
General view: TM400

Front panel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-87

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

LEDs
LED indicators

Marking Item Functions

Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed
configurations). Off when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when
there is no fault in the TM400.
Client Port LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
F/L Red LED Blinks when a LOS condition is detected. Lights steadily when a
BIT fault is detected in the CFP2 pluggable transceiver, or the
supply voltage or temperature is OOR.
Line Port LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
LOS Red LED
Blinks when a LOS condition is detected. Lights steadily when a
BIT fault is detected in the TM400 transceiver, or the supply
voltage or temperature is OOR.

Block diagram
TM400 functional block diagram

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-88

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

10.19.1 TM400 configuration options

The TM400 provides 4 CFP2 client ports (100GE/OTU4; ER4/LR4/SR10), including fan out connections for
multiple 10G clients. Up to 400G uplink is provided through 2 line ports by one of the following
configurations:
 1 x 100G DP-4QAM (DP-QPSK) up to 5000 Km
 2 x 100G DP-4QAM (DP-QPSK) up to 5000 Km
 1 x 200G DP-16QAM up to 800 Km
 2 x 200G DP-16QAM up to 800 Km
 1 x 100G DP-4QAM (DP-QPSK) up to 5000 Km + 1 x 200G DP-16QAM up to 800 Km

NOTES:
 Operation of the second line port is subject to software license.
 When line ports are configured for 100G and/or 200G, each port in the pair acts
independently and can be configured for a different path.

Typical configuration options are illustrated in the following figure.

TM400 configuration options

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-89

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

10.19.2 TM400_REG100 regenerator application

The TM400 can be configured as a regenerator by assigning it as TM400_REG100. The two LINE ports are
used to implement the regenerator configuration, while the Client ports are not used.
The functions of the regenerator are to clean up and amplify the optical signals transmitted through the
optical line (3R regeneration). Any attempt to assign the Client ports in the TM400_REG100 mode will be
rejected by the software.
When the TM400 is assigned as regenerator (TM400_REG100), the software implicitly configures both line
ports to operate as independent OTU4 ports. It also configures the cross-connect between the lines for the
regenerator application. The user only has to configure the SD-FEC modes, including:
 SD-FEC15 (regularly marked SD-FEC (legacy))
 SD-FEC25

Block diagram

The default mode of the TM400_REG100 is SD-FEC. With SD-FEC, the card operates with compatibility to
legacy SD-FEC (SD-FEC15) and differential QPSK encoding of other devices for Regional/Long-Haul
applications. SD-FEC25 provides a very high error correction, maximizing the performance of the TM400 for
Ultra Long-Haul applications. This mode increases the Bit Rate, consuming about 25 % more of Over Head
(bandwidth) of the OTU4 frame. The SD-FEC25 is not compatible with legacy SD-FEC, and can be used only
if the peer device is configured to the same mode. In addition, when SD-FEC25 is selected Non Differential
QPSK encoding is used.
In the TM400_REG100, each line can be configured to a different SD-FEC mode, according to the mode of
the peer device connected to the line as follows:
 SD-FEC15 <> SD-FEC15
 SD-FEC25 <> SD-FEC25
 SD-FEC15 <> SD-FEC25
 SD-FEC25 <> SD-FEC15

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-90

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

10.20 TM800
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603

Description
The TM800 is a flexible grid, flexible rate, 800G transponder/muxponder designed to maximize traffic
carrying capacity for any application or line condition. It maps up to 8 x 100GbE or OTU4 clients, on to two
line interfaces that can be configured from 100 Gbps to 400 Gbps in 50 Gbps increments.

TM800 front panel

The TM800 can be configured for use for all applications and in all bit rates and baud rates, including:
 400G metro
 200G long haul
 100G ultra long haul
The TM800 provides software-controllable dials for the modulation scheme (BPSK up to 64QAM), baud rate
(34G to 72G), and transmit power. The TM800 combines this with full spectral flexibility to select a channel
width to always find the “sweet spot” that maximizes the line rate – and thus the services capacity – for any
set of channel conditions. The TM800 features SD-FEC of 15% and 27%, NCG of 12.7dB, and a power
consumption of <0.22W per 1G.
The TM800's technology allows it to offer an unprecedented reach, ranging from 700Km up to 5000Km and
even more, depending on the network configuration.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-91

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no
fault in the TM400.
Client Port LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
F/L Red LED Blinks when a LOS condition is detected. Lights steadily when a BIT fault is
detected in the CFP2 pluggable transceiver, or the supply voltage or
temperature is OOR.
Line Port LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
LOS Red LED
Blinks when a LOS condition is detected.

10.21 TM1200
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608 (requires FCM revision F.00 or higher)
 OPT9603

Description
The TM1200 is a flexible grid, flexible rate, 1.2T transponder/muxponder designed to maximize traffic
carrying capacity for any application or line condition. It maps up to 12 x 100GbE or OTU4 clients, on to two
line interfaces that can be configured from 100 Gbps to 600 Gbps in 50 Gbps increments.
The TM1200 can be configured for use for all applications and in all bit rates and baud rates, including:
 600G DCI
 400G metro
 200G long haul
 100G ultra long haul

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-92

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

The TM1200 provides software-controllable dials for the modulation scheme (BPSK up to 64QAM), baud
rate (34G to 72G), and transmit power. The TM1200 combines this with full spectral flexibility to select the
best channel width to find the “sweet spot” that maximizes the line rate – and thus the services capacity –
for any set of channel conditions. The TM1200 features SD-FEC of 15% and 27%, NCG of 12.7dB, and a
power consumption of <0.22W per 1G.

Card views
General view

Front panel

LEDs

Marking Item Functions

Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed
configurations). Off when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when
there is no fault in the TM400.
Client port LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
F/L Red LED Blinks when a LOS condition is detected. Lights steadily when a
BIT fault is detected in the CFP2 pluggable transceiver, or the
supply voltage or temperature is OOR.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-93

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

Marking Item Functions

Line port LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
LOS Red LED
Blinks when a LOS condition is detected.

10.22 FIO10_5/5B
Supported platform
 OPT9624

Description
FIO10_5 and FIO10_5B are single-slot fabric interface I/O cards that support up to five 10G interfaces using
fixed or tunable pluggable XFP transceivers. Each port of these cards can be configured to serve as either
client or line interface port. The cards are very similar except the support of different traffic rates. FIO10_5
client interface ports accept 10G LAN, STM-64/OC-192, FC800, FC1200, OTU2, or OTU2e signals. Client
signals are mapped to ODU2 or ODU2e (G.709) and cross connected through the central universal fabric to
the line side. FIO10_5B client interface ports accept 10G LAN, STM-64/OC-192, OTU2, or OTU2e signals.
Client signals are mapped to ODU2 or ODU2e (G.709) and cross connected through the central universal
fabric to the line side.

Features
 50 Gbps total capacity
 Five XFP-based client ports
 Line interface signals are terminated to tributary ODUk signals and transmitted through the fabric to
the outgoing side
 Complies with ITU-T standards for 50 GHz and 100 GHz multichannel spacing (DWDM)
 Supports PM and GCC in-band management, with PM for the signals' native layer (SDH/SONET and
Ethernet)
 Supports GFEC, EFEC (I.4 and I.7), and ignore-FEC modes for OTU2/2e signals
 The FIO10_5 client interfaces are multiservice, software configurable, supporting:
 10G LAN
 STM-64/OC-192
 OTU2
 OTU2e
 FC800
 FC1200

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-94

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

 The FIO10_5B client interfaces are multiservice, software configurable, supporting:

 10G LAN
 STM-64/OC-192
 OTU2
 OTU2e
In FIO10_5B the ODU2 sub-interface under OTU2 port is with PT=21. In addition, FIO10_5B supports ODU0
but doesn't support the following:
 ODUSlot
 ODUFlex
 FC1200
 FC800
The OPT96xx platforms support a mix FIO10_5 and FIO10_5B, including in the same cage. It is possible to
configure cross-connects between FIO10_5 and FIO10_5B cards (High order ODUs). It is also possible to
reassign FIO10_5 to FIO10_5B keeping the previous configurations.
In addition, FIO10_5B are fully interoperable with FIO10_5 cards. To interoperate with FIO10_5 cards the
user shall edit PT changing it to 20.

Card views
General view

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-95

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

Front panel: FIO10_5

Front panel: FIO10_5B

The markings Tx (transmit) and Rx (receive) above each port indicate the port's output and input
connections.

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no
fault in the FIO10_5/5B.
Port LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
F/L Red LED Lights steadily when a BIT fault is detected in the pluggable transceiver, or
the supply voltage or temperature is OOR. Blinks when a LOS condition is
detected in the port.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-96

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

10.23 FIOMR_16/16B
Supported platform
 OPT9624
When using FM1000 1 Tbps universal fabric

Description
The FIOMR_16 and FIOMR_16B are single-slot fabric interface I/O cards that support up to 16 low-rate
client interfaces using SFP transceivers. The cards are very similar except the support of different traffic
rates. Each FIOMR_16 port can be configured to STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12, GbE, FC1/FC2/FC4, OTU-1,
STM-16/OC-48, DVB-ASI, SDI, and HD-SDI signals. Client-side signals are mapped to G.709 ODU-k and cross
connected through the central universal fabric to the egress side. Each FIOMR_16B port can be configured
to STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12, STM-16/OC-48, GbE, OTU-1,signals. Client-side signals are mapped to G.709
ODU-k and cross connected through the central universal fabric to the egress side.

Features
 OTU-1 signals are terminated to tributary ODU-k signals and transmitted through the fabric to the
egress side
 OTU-1 ports support GFEC mode
 Supports PM and GCC in-band management, with PM for the signals' native layer (SDH/SONET and
Ethernet)
 Supports subnetwork connection protection with nonintrusive monitoring (SNC-N) for the tributary
signals
The difference between the cards is in the traffic rates they support:
 The FIOMR_16 provides 16 SFP-based client ports, software-configurable to support GbE, 1G FC, 2G
FC, 4G FC, STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12, STM-16/OC-48, and OTU1 services
 The FIOMR_16B provides 16 SFP-based client ports, software-configurable to support GbE, STM-
1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12, STM-16/OC-48, and OTU1 services
In addition, the FIOMR_16B supports ODU1 and ODU0 cross-connections to any other FIOMR_16B and
FIO10_5B. It doesn't support any other type of cross-connection through the central fabric (like ODU2).
FIOMR_16B can work with FIOMR_16B via FIO10_5B or FIO100 only. FIOMR_16 can work with FIOMR_16
via FIO10_5 or FIO100 only.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-97

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

Card views
General view

Front panels: FIOMR_16

Front panels: FIOMR_16B

The port number is indicated under/above each port. The markings T (transmit) and R (receive) near each
port indicate only the port's output and input connections and don't relate to the port LEDs.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-98

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off when
the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no fault
in the FIOMR_16/16B.
Port LEDs
Tx Green LEDs Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's transmitter
is off.
F/L Red LED Lights steadily when a BIT fault is detected in the pluggable transceiver, or
the supply voltage or temperature is OOR. Blinks when a LOS condition is
detected in the port.

10.24 FIO100
Supported platform
 OPT9624 (when using FM1000 1 Tbps universal fabric)

Description
The FIO100 card is a double-slot OTU4v uplink for the 1 Tbps universal fabric of the OPT9624 platform. The
100G OTU-4 is terminated to its tributary signals (ODUk) and cross connected through the fabric to the
egress side. The FIO100 offers the following main features:
 Multiplexing of up to 80 Low Order (LO) ODUk channels into OTU4
 Low order ODUk including: ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU2e, ODUflex, and ODU4
 Line side interface OTU4v using an OIF1.1 module, supporting:
 PM-QPSK modulation
 Bit rate, 120.579 Gbps (OTU4v)
 SD-FEC (provides NCG of 11.1 dB)
 GCC over local bus:
 One GCC0/1/2 channel supported
 Interoperability with CMR100 (for Add and Drop) and TR100 (for regenerator)
 Protection capabilities:
 Employs 1 + 1 Sub Net Connection Protection (SNCP)
 Supports 1+1 Optical Line Protection (OLP)
 ODU4 has a default Payload Type of (PT21)
 The PT for low order ODUk (that are other than ODU4) is PT21

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-99

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

Card views
General view

Front panel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-100

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no
fault in the FIO100.
Port LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
LOS Red LED Blinks when a LOS condition is detected in the port.

10.25 FIO100M
Supported platform
 OPT9624 (when using FM1000 1 Tbps universal fabric)

Description
The FIO100M card is a double-slot OTU4 uplink for the 1 Tbps universal fabric of the OPT9624 platform. The
100G OTU-4 is terminated to its tributary signals (ODUk) and cross connected through the fabric to the
egress side.
The FIO100M offers the following main features:
 Multiplexing of up to 80 Low Order (LO) ODUk channels into OTU4
 Low order ODUk including: ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU2e, ODUflex, and ODU4
 Line side interface OTU4v using an CFP module, supporting:
 PM-QPSK modulation
 Bit rate, 120.579 Gbps (OTU4v)
 SD-FEC (provides NCG of 11.1 dB)
 GCC over local bus:
 One GCC0/1/2 channel supported
 Interoperability with CMR100 (for Add and Drop) and TR100 (for regenerator)
 Protection capabilities:
 Employs 1 + 1 Sub Net Connection Protection (SNCP)
 Supports 1+1 Optical Line Protection (OLP)
 ODU4 has a default Payload Type of (PT21)
 The PT for low order ODUk (that are other than ODU4) is PT21

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-101

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

Card views
General view

Front panel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-102

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

Ports
LED indicators

Marking Item Functions

Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no
fault in the FIO100M.
Port LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
F/L Red LED Lights steadily when a BIT fault is detected in the pluggable transceiver, or
the supply voltage or temperature is OOR. Blinks when a LOS condition is
detected in the port.

Block diagram

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-103

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx advanced Layer 1 service cards

10.26 Pluggable transceiver modules

Apollo supports pluggable optical transceivers (SFP, SFP+, XFP, QSFP, QSFP28, QSFP-DD, CFP, and CFP2) for
all services, in both colored and noncolored interfaces. Transceiver modules are used for the entire
spectrum of interfaces, including intra-office, short range, and long range. The standardized modular design
of the transceiver components facilitates network maintenance and upgrades since interchangeable
transceiver components are utilized throughout the product line. Instead of replacing an entire circuit
board, a single module can be removed or replaced, for a considerable cost savings.
SFP+ and XFP transceivers are available in colored and noncolored, tunable, and fixed versions. The tunable
SFP+/XFP transceivers support 50 GHz spacing and are available for long-haul network configurations.
QSFP+ transceivers support 40GbE with 4x10G fanout, QSFP28 transceivers support 100GbE/OTU4, QSFP-
DD transceivers support up to 400GbE, CFP transceivers are used for client side (100GbE/OTU4) or line
coherent interfaces, and CFP2 transceivers are used for 100 GbE/OTU4 client or fan-out (10GbE or 40GbE)
applications.
All pluggable transceivers are field-replaceable, enabling pay-as-you-grow architecture. Simply remove the
old transceiver and plug in a new one.

Transceiver examples

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 10-104

11 OPT96xx Layer 2 service cards
The following AoC card with L2 switching capabilities is introduced in the current version:
 AoC10_L2: grooms multiple GbE packet flows to GE, 10 GE, or 10 GE wrapped in OTU2e (P2P or ring).
The card occupies a single slot and can be installed in all Apollo platforms. The AoC10_L2 supports the
following features:
 16 x GbE SFP-based ports. These ports are typically client (UNI) ports. Electrical SFPs can be
installed, making the corresponding port 3-speed.
 4 x 10GbE/OTU2e SFP+ based ports with EFEC and tunable SFP+ as uplinks for maximum reach
and 88ch support. These are typically NNI ports, though they can also be used as client ports.

11.1 AoC10_L2
Supported platforms
 OPT9624
 OPT9608
 OPT9603

Description
The AoC10_L2 is an MPLS service card that supports an advanced Ethernet-based metro-core layer,
enabling NG Ethernet applications such as triple play, VPLS business connectivity, 3G Ethernet-based
aggregation, and CoC bandwidth applications. The AoC10_L2 cards provides complete PB (QinQ) and MPLS
switching functionality, offering scalability and smooth interoperability with IP/MPLS core routers.
The AoC10_L2 supports full interoperability with data cards in the NPT, XDM, and BroadGate platforms, as
well as seamless interfacing with external third-party hardware.

Features
 16 SFP-based client ports, support electrical/optical 1 x GbE interfaces (the port type depends on
inserted SFP).
 Configurable 4 SFP+ -based 10 GbE LAN or OTU2e line ports.
 Two additional internal 10 GbE ports for connecting a AoC10_L2 to a mate card via platform
backplane. (Supported only for OPT9624 and OPT9608 platforms).
 Supports new tunable SFP+ transceivers on the line ports.
 Data throughput of 60 Gbps.
 Configurable data switching modes:
 Ethernet PB (QinQ) switch, based on 802.1d/q/ad - default.
 MPLS-TP Layer 2 switch.
 Interoperability with XDM MCS, BG and NPT L2 cards.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 11-1

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx Layer 2 service cards

 General MPLS-TP and Ethernet interoperability with third party datacom equipment.
 Supports Ethernet services including:
 E-LINE Point to Point (P2P) – implemented by VPWS
 E-LAN Multi Point to Multipoint (MP2MP) – implemented by VPLS
 Multicast services
 OAM support:
 Ethernet link OAM
 Ethernet service OAM
 MPLS-TP OAM
 PW OAM
 Port mirroring
 Traffic management including: classifications and mapping, scheduling, and policing.
 Supports In-band management including: Apollo IMG, OSC, and standard Apollo GCC0 bytes of
OTU2e.
 Layer 2 protection mechanisms including:
 Multi ring ERP < 50 msec Ethernet Ring Protection.
 1:1 linear protection < 50msec for bidirectional LSPs.
 Supports RSTP.
 PW redundancy in MPLS-TP (future).
 Supports GFEC and EFEC
 Environmentally friendly green design disables unused components, minimizing energy consumption.

Card views
General view

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 11-2

 Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx Layer 2 service cards

Front panel

A number and arrow are marked near each port LED. The number identifies the port number and the arrow
points to the location of the port in the upper or lower row. The 16 x 1 GbE SFP ports are numbered from 0
to 15. The four 10 GbE SFP+ ports are in the lower row at the left and are numbered from 16 to 19.
The following table describes the AoC10_L2 front panel component functionality.

LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed
configurations). Off when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when
there is no fault in the AoC10_L2.
1 GbE Port LEDs
0 to 15 Bi-color LED Green:
(Green/Yellow)  On - 1 G link is up
 Blinking - link activity
 Off - link is down
Yellow:
 On - 100 M link is up
 Blinking - link activity
 Off - link is down
10 GbE Port LEDs
16 to 19 Bi-color LED Green:
(Green/Red)  On - link is up
 Blinking - link activity
 Off - link is down
Red:
 On - BIT fail
 Blinking - LOS (but BIT is OK)
 Off - BIT is OK and no LOS

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 11-3

Apollo Reference Manual OPT96xx Layer 2 service cards

Block diagram

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 11-4

12 Artemis product line
Artemis units are fully passive optical platforms that complement the Apollo product line. Artemis
platforms offer a low cost, high modularity, and very high density solution. All passive cards can be installed
in the Artemis, saving the Apollo slots for active service or optical cards (amplifiers, ROADMs, service cards,
fabric, etc.).
Network operators can tailor the Artemis platform configuration to meet specific site requirements,
choosing from a range of cage sizes and number of slots as well as two configuration options: fully passive
platform or active platform that can retrieve inventory information.
The passive cage configuration does not require any power feed. The active cage requires a minimal power
feed to retrieve inventory data (card type, revision, cage location) and transmit it to the main Apollo
controller. Note that while the Artemis platform in this configuration is technically considered active, all
cards installed in the cage are still passive and do not require any power feed.
The Artemis product line includes passive optical platforms that address all your passive optical component
needs for all size range and configurations. It is available in the following shelf types:
 Artemis-1P: compact 1U passive shelf with two single slots
 Artemis-2A: compact 2U active shelf with four single slots
 Artemis-2PE: compact 2U passive shelf with four single slots
 Artemis-4A: compact 4U active shelf with eight single slots
The Artemis shelves can be installed in different rack types, including ETSI, 19", and 23". They feature an
extended operating temperature range of 5 ºC to +60 ºC that makes them ideal for deployment in street
cabinets for outdoor applications.
A wide range of CWDM and DWDM Mux/DeMux, OADMs, splitters/couplers, DCFs, and filters are available
for use with the Artemis shelves. In addition Apollo passive cards are also supported in the Artemis.
The passive optical components are available in three different module sizes:
 Single slot
 Double slot
 Quad slot

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 12-1

 Apollo Reference Manual Artemis product line

12.1 Artemis features and functions

Artemis platforms support a wide range of features and functionalities for building an advanced cost-
effective optical network, including:
 Support of both CWDM and DWDM.
 No need for power installation (fully passive elements).
 Used with a range of optical modules, including:
 All filters (OADMs and Mux/DeMux), CWDM and DWDM, include two monitoring points, which is
extremely useful in the process of wavelength equalization.
 Mux/DeMux modules are based on flat-top technology, especially designed to support back-to-back
connectivity, with minimal loss.
 OADMs are based on East-West configuration, allowing network designers and users to use them as
small Mux/DeMux modules.
 Although designed for high density, the Artemis uses LC connectors so that adapters are not required.
 Artemis meets the CE mark, a mandatory requirement in different parts of the globe.

12.2 Artemis platform layout

This section describes the layout of each Artemis platform. Artemis platforms have been designed to
facilitate simple installation and easy maintenance. Live insertion of modules is allowed to support quick
maintenance and repair activities without affecting traffic. The cage design and mechanical practice of all
platforms conform to international mechanical standards and specifications.

12.2.1 Artemis-1P
The Artemis-1P is a 1U platform housed in a 239.5 mm (9.43 in.) deep, 443 mm (17.4 in.) wide, and 43.4
mm (1.7 in.) high equipment cage. The Artemis-1P features a highly flexible structure with a significantly
small footprint. All modules can be inserted even when the platform delivers live traffic without affecting it.

Artemis-1P shelf general view

The Artemis-1P platform has a default configuration of two single slots. These slots can be configured as a
double slot, by removing the divider bracket between the single slots.
The following figure shows the slot numbering of the Artemis-1P.

Artemis-1P slot numbering

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 12-2

 Apollo Reference Manual Artemis product line

12.2.2 Artemis-2A
The Artemis-2A is a 2U platform housed in a 239.5 mm (9.43 in.) deep, 443 mm (17.4 in.) wide, and 87.9
mm (3.46 in.) high equipment cage. The Artemis-2A features a highly flexible structure with a significantly
small footprint. All modules can be inserted even when the platform delivers live traffic without affecting it.
The platform can accommodate a controller card, which enables it to report inventory information. The
Artemis-2A must be connected to a power source to enable the controller card to operate.

Artemis-2A shelf general view

The Artemis-2A supports Artemis passive cards, as well as passive cards of the Apollo product line.
The Artemis-2A platform has a default configuration of four single slots. These slots can be configured as
two double slots or one quad slot by removing the divider brackets between the single slots.

NOTE: Mix of two single slots and one double slot is also supported in the Artemis-2A.

The following figure shows the slot numbering of the Artemis-2A.

Artemis-2A slot numbering

12.2.3 Artemis-2PE
The Artemis-2PE is a 2U platform housed in a 239.5 mm (9.43 in.) deep, 443 mm (17.4 in.) wide, and 87.9
mm (3.46 in.) high equipment cage. The Artemis-2PE features a highly flexible structure with a significantly
small footprint.

ARTEMIS 2PE front view

The Artemis-2PE supports the Artemis passive cards, as well as the passive cards of the Apollo product line.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 12-3

 Apollo Reference Manual Artemis product line

The Artemis-2PE has a default configuration of four single slots. At the customer site, the platform can be
configured, using the appropriate divider brackets, into various slot combinations, including:
 Up to four single slots (default)
 One or two double slots
 One quad slot
 Any combinations of quad, double, or single slots that fit into the platform frame
The following figures illustrate a few of the slot configuration options in the Artemis-2PE.

Artemis-2PE slot layout options

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 12-4

 Apollo Reference Manual Artemis product line

12.2.4 Artemis-4A
The Artemis-4A is a 4U platform housed in a 239.5 mm (9.43 in.) deep, 443 mm (17.4 in.) wide, and 175.8
mm (6.92 in.) high equipment cage. The Artemis-4A features a highly flexible structure with a significantly
small footprint. All modules can be inserted even when the platform delivers live traffic without affecting it.
The platform can accommodate a controller card, which enables it to report inventory information. The
Artemis-4A must be connected to a power source to enable the controller card to operate.

Artemis-4A shelf general view

The Artemis-4A supports Artemis passive cards, as well as passive cards of the Apollo product line.
The Artemis-4A platform has a default configuration of eight single slots. These slots can be configured in
different options to form double slots and quad slots by removing the divider brackets between the single
slots.

NOTE: Any combinations of single slots, double slots, and quad slots are supported in the
Artemis-4A.

The following figure shows the slot numbering of the Artemis-4A.

Artemis-4A slot numbering

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 12-5

13 Accessories
We offer a variety of accessories for efficient and optimal installation of equipment in racks. The main types
of accessories are described in this section. Contact your local sales representative if you must make any
custom modifications to a standard item.

13.1 Power Distribution Units (PDU)

The Power Distribution Unit (PDU) is a family of devices that can provide power to loads with up to 12 kW
power consumption. PDU55AL and PDU77AL also support alarms interface connections.
The PDU family consists of the following units:
 PDU55AL - distributing power for up to 5 loads with 2.4 kW each, including alarms support.
 PDU77AL - distributing power for up to 7 loads, including three loads with 2.4 kW each and 4 with
1200 W each, and including alarms support.
 PDU99 - distributing power for up to 9 loads with up to 2.4 kW each and 12 kW in total, including
circuit breaker tripped alarm support.
The PDU units all have a similar electrical design and differ only in the number of loads that they can feed.
PDU55AL and PDU77AL units have an identical alarms module that provides the alarm functionality. The
PDU99 unit has an integrated CB Tripped alarm circuit.

NOTE: In this manual the generic name PDU or PDUxx is used to describe features and
functions that are common to all three PDU55AL, PDU77AL, and PDU99 units.

A front cover protects the access to the PDU's terminal blocks, power connectors, and circuit breakers. To
gain access to the parts in the PDU this cover must be removed.

NOTE: Maximum operating temperature of the PDU units is 45°C.

The following figure shows a general view of the PDU55AL (the general view of the PDU77AL is similar).
PDU99 has a cover without LEDs.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-1

 Apollo Reference Manual Accessories

PDU55AL general view

13.1.1 PDU55AL
The PDU55AL is a power distribution unit installed in racks for loads (platforms) that consume up to 12 kW.
The PDU55AL performs the following main functions:
 Redundant power distribution for five loads consuming up to 12 kW. The PDU55AL can supply
power to five loads, each with a power consumption of up to 2400 W. Each load works with two
power sources, where one is the main source (A) and the second is an optional protective backup
source (B).
 Bay alarm indications. The PDU55AL includes three alarm indicators, one for each alarm severity.
When alarms of different severities are received simultaneously, the corresponding alarm indications
light simultaneously.
A buzzer is activated whenever an alarm is present in platforms connected to the PDU55AL. The
buzzer can be shut off by pressing an ACO button on the corresponding platform (xTAM card). This
action doesn't clear the alarm.
 Connecting external alarms from three platforms, each platform supporting up to four alarm inputs,
totaling up to 12 alarm inputs in the PDU55AL. Alarm inputs are implemented by optocoupler circuits.
The PDU55AL also supports up to 8 alarm outputs, implemented by relay dry contacts, each with NO
and NC positions. Four alarm outputs are allocated to SHELF 1. SHELF 2 and SHELF 3 have 2 alarm
outputs each.
 Exporting severity alarms. Three separate groups of severity alarms (a group of four (Critical, Major,
Minor, and buzzer) for each platform) are provided via dry contacts for the customer's central alarm
monitoring system.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-2

 Apollo Reference Manual Accessories

 Equipment cable wiring. Use proper cable to feed the equipment, tighten the PDU connectors and
secure two flat screws with a flat screwdriver.
 Feeding cables and wiring. Use proper two hole ring terminal (45° or 90°) for the feeding
connections. Crimp the terminal using proper crimp tools. Add a shrink tube on the neck of each ring
terminal to prevent touching the wiring by accident. Tighten the nuts securely on the PDU connectors
using a ratchet and 10mm socket.

CAUTION: Do not exert excessive tightening torque to secure the connector as this may cause
damage.

The PDU55AL terminal blocks, connectors, and circuit breakers are located on its main board, as shown in
the following figure. The table lists the component functions. The marking in the table correspond to those
in the figures.

NOTE: The description in the table below refers to left side (source A) components of the
PDU55AL. The right side (source B) is a mirror image of the left side and the description is
therefore identical.

PDU55AL main board

PDU55AL main board component functions

Marking Designation Function

1, 2, 3, 4, 5 DC output power Five 5W5 connectors for connecting DC power to the Apollo
connectors platforms (loads) with a power consumption of up to 2400 W.
Circuit breakers Five circuit breaker sockets for inserting (typical 60 A) CBs to
A1 to A5
protect the loads connected to the corresponding output
connectors.
A1 to A5 DC input power terminals For connecting the DC input power to the PDU55AL.
A1 to A5 LED indicators Five Green LEDs. When a LED lights it indicates the presence of
DC input power in the corresponding input power terminals.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-3

 Apollo Reference Manual Accessories

The following figure shows the PDUxxAL Alarms board, and the table lists the functions of the components
corresponding to the figure.

PDUxxAL alarm board

PDUxxAL alarms board component functions

Designation Function
SHELF 1, SHELF 2, SHELF 3 Three 36-pin SCSI connectors, designated SHELF 1, SHELF 2, and SHELF 3
used to connect alarm cables to the Apollo platforms installed in the rack.
These cables transmit alarms from the Apollo platform to the PDUxxAL unit.
ALARM IN/OUT 68-pin SCSI connector, used to connect an alarm cable to the customer
alarm monitoring system. This alarm cable transmits the alarms received
from the Apollo platforms by the SHELF 1, SHELF 2 and SHELF 3 connectors,
including external alarm inputs, external alarm outputs, and Apollo severity
alarms.
TEST Pushbutton for activating the buzzer and turning on the indicators for test
purposes.
ON (power) Green indicator, lights when at least one DC power source is connected to
the PDUxxAL.
CRITICAL Red indicator, lights when the severity of an unacknowledged alarm in the
platforms connected to the PDUxxAL is Critical.
MAJOR Orange indicator, lights when the severity of an unacknowledged alarm in
the platforms connected to the PDUxxAL is Major.
MINOR Yellow indicator, lights when the severity of an unacknowledged alarm in
the platforms connected to the PDUxxAL is Minor.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-4

 Apollo Reference Manual Accessories

13.1.1.1 PDU55AL power supply flow example

An example of the power supply flow for an OPT9914 platform and an OPT9624 is illustrated in the
following figure. This configuration uses three DC outputs to feed the three xPFM-14 (A) and (B) pairs of the
OPT9914. The two other outputs feed the two PFM24 (A) and (B) units of the OPT9624.

PDU55AL power supply flow example

The PDU55AL supplies independent streams of power to five separate loads. Input power circuits (A1 to A5)
for each load is kept completely separate from the input power for the others. Separate input power cables
from the power sources feed into independent circuit breakers on the PDU55AL. (There are a total of ten
circuit breakers on the PDU55AL, supporting redundant power supplies for up to five loads).
The PDU55AL has ten 5W5 DC output connectors for supplying redundant power to the supported
platforms (OPT9914, OPT9624, OPT9608). The maximum power supplied to each output is up to 2400 W.
The connection of the power sources to the PDU55AL is made through ten pairs of 35 mm2 power cables
from the user's power supply sources (five for each source) and circuit breakers do not have to be more
than 60 A, because the maximum power consumption per cable is never more than 2400 W.
Each input circuit is monitored by a LED. The ten LEDs, located at the middle of the main board, enable the
user to view the status of each input circuit at a glance. This saves the need to connect test equipment, in
case troubleshooting is required.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-5

 Apollo Reference Manual Accessories

The nominal DC power voltage is -48 VDC however the input voltage can range from -40.5 VDC to -72 VDC.
The internal circuits of the PDU55AL are powered whenever at least one power source is connected. The
required circuit breakers are included in the installation parts kit supplied with the platforms, and therefore
their current rating is in accordance with the order requirements.

13.1.2 PDU77AL
The PDU77AL is a power distribution unit installed in the rack for loads (platforms) that consume up to 12
kW.
The PDU77AL performs the following main functions:
 Redundant power distribution for seven loads consuming up to 12 kW. The PDU77AL can supply
power to seven loads, three with a power consumption of up to 2400 W and four with a power
consumption of up to 1200 W each. Each load works with two power sources, where one is the main
source (A) and the second is an optional protective backup source (B).
 Bay alarm indications. The PDU77AL includes three alarm indicators, one for each alarm severity.
When alarms of different severities are received simultaneously, the corresponding alarm indications
light simultaneously.
A buzzer is activated whenever an alarm is present in platforms connected to the PDU77AL. The
buzzer can be shut off by pressing an ACO button on the corresponding platform (xTAM card). This
action doesn't clear the alarm.
 Connecting external alarms from three platforms, each platform supporting up to four alarm inputs,
totaling up to 12 alarm inputs in the PDU77AL. Alarm inputs are implemented by optocoupler circuits.
The PDU77AL also supports up to 8 alarm outputs, implemented by relay dry contacts, each with NO
and NC positions. Four alarm outputs are allocated to SHELF 1. SHELF 2 and SHELF 3 have 2 alarm
outputs each.
 Exporting severity alarms. Three separate groups of severity alarms (a group of four (Critical, Major,
Minor, and buzzer) for each platform) are provided via dry contacts for the customer's central alarm
monitoring system.
 Equipment cable wiring. Use proper cable to feed the equipment, tighten the PDU connectors and
secure two flat screws with a flat screwdriver.
 Feeding cables and wiring. Use proper two hole ring terminal (45° or 90°) for the feeding
connections. Crimp the terminal using proper crimp tools. Add a shrink tube on the neck of each ring
terminal to prevent touching the wiring by accident. Tighten the nuts securely on the PDU connectors
using a ratchet and 10mm socket.

CAUTION: Do not exert excessive tightening torque to secure the connector as this may cause
damage.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-6

 Apollo Reference Manual Accessories

The following figure shows the front panel of the PDUxxAL, and the table lists the functions of the front
panel components corresponding to the figure callouts.

NOTE: The description in the table below refers to left side (source A) components of the
PDU77AL. The right side (source B) is a mirror image of the left side and the description is
therefore identical.

PDU77AL main board

PDU77AL main board component functions

Marking Designation Function

1, 2, 3, DC output power Three 5W5 connectors for connecting DC power to the Apollo
connectors platforms (loads) with a power consumption of up to 2400 W.
4, 5, 6, 7 DC output power Four three pin terminal blocks for connecting DC power to the Apollo
terminal blocks. platforms (loads) with a power consumption of up to 1200 W. .
Circuit breakers sockets Three circuit breaker sockets for inserting (typical 60 A) CBs to protect
A1 to A3
(type A) the loads connected to the corresponding output connectors.
C1 to C4 Circuit breakers sockets Four circuit breaker sockets for inserting (typical 30 A) CBs to protect
(type B) the loads connected to the corresponding output terminal blocks.
A1 to A5 DC input power For connecting the DC input power to the PDU77AL.
terminals
A1 to A5 LED indicators Five Green LEDs. When a LED lights it indicates the presence of DC
input power in the corresponding input power terminals.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-7

 Apollo Reference Manual Accessories

The following figure shows the PDUxxAL Alarms board, and the table lists the functions of the components
corresponding to the figure.

PDUxxAL alarm board

PDUxxAL alarms board component functions

Designation Function
SHELF 1, SHELF 2, Three 36-pin SCSI connectors, designated SHELF 1, SHELF 2, and SHELF 3 used to
SHELF 3 connect alarm cables to the Apollo platforms installed in the rack. These cables
transmit alarms from the Apollo platform to the PDUxxAL unit.
ALARM IN/OUT 68-pin SCSI connector, used to connect an alarm cable to the customer alarm
monitoring system. This alarm cable transmits the alarms received from the Apollo
platforms by the SHELF 1, SHELF 2 and SHELF 3 connectors, including external alarm
inputs, external alarm outputs, and Apollo severity alarms.
TEST Pushbutton for activating the buzzer and turning on the indicators for test
purposes.
ON (power) Green indicator, lights when at least one DC power source is connected to the
PDUxxAL.
CRITICAL Red indicator, lights when the severity of an unacknowledged alarm in the
platforms connected to the PDUxxAL is Critical.
MAJOR Orange indicator, lights when the severity of an unacknowledged alarm in the
platforms connected to the PDUxxAL is Major.
MINOR Yellow indicator, lights when the severity of an unacknowledged alarm in the
platforms connected to the PDUxxAL is Minor.

13.1.2.1 PDU77AL power supply flow example

The PDU77AL supplies independent streams of power to three separate loads from three (A1 to A3) out of
the five input circuits. Input power for each load is kept completely separate from the input power for the
others. Separate input power cables from the power sources feed into independent circuit breakers on the
PDU77AL. The maximum power supplied to each output is up to 2400 W. The circuit breaker rating for this
power is 60 A. The backup for these outputs is via input circuits (B1 to B3) and the corresponding output
connectors of Source B.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-8

 Apollo Reference Manual Accessories

The two other input power circuits (A4 and A5) supply power to four loads as follows:
 The input A4 splits to two output terminals blocks C1, C2 of 30A max each (corresponding to 1200 W
each).
 The input A5 splits to two output terminals blocks C3, C4 of 30A max each (corresponding to 1200 W
each).
The backup circuits (B4 and B5) supply power to four corresponding loads as follows:
 The input B4 splits to two output terminals blocks D1, D2 of 30A max each (corresponding to 1200 W
each).
 The input B5 splits to two output terminals blocks D3, D4 of 30A max each (corresponding to 1200 W
each).
An example of the power supply flow for OPT9914, OPT9603, and OPT9608 platforms is illustrated in the
following figure. This configuration uses three DC outputs to feed the three xPFM-14 (A) and (B) pairs of the
OPT9914. The other outputs (connecting through terminal blocks) are used to feed the two PFM units of
two OPT9608 (A) and (B) and a PFM03 of an OPT9603 (A) and (B).

PDU77AL power supply flow example

Each input circuit is monitored by a LED. The ten LEDs, located at the middle of the main board, enable the
user to view the status of each input circuit at a glance. This saves the need to connect test equipment, in
case troubleshooting is required.
The nominal DC power voltage is -48 VDC however the input voltage can range from -40.5 VDC to -72 VDC.
The internal circuits of the PDU77AL are powered whenever at least one power source is connected. The
required circuit breakers are included in the installation parts kit supplied with the platforms, and therefore
their current rating is in accordance with the order requirements.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-9

 Apollo Reference Manual Accessories

13.1.3 PDU99
The PDU99 is a power distribution unit installed in the racks for loads (platforms) that consume up to 12
kW.

PDU99 general view

NOTE: Maximum operating temperature of the PDU99 unit is 45°C.

WARNINGS:
 PDU99 must be installed only above concrete or other non-combustible surfaces.
 Only trained, qualified personnel should install, maintain, or replace the PDU99

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-10

 Apollo Reference Manual Accessories

The PDU99 performs the following main functions:

 Redundant power distribution for nine loads consuming up to 12 kW: The PDU99 can supply power
to nine loads, with a power consumption of up to 2400 W.
 Alarm indications: The PDU99 includes alarm indication of a tripped circuit breaker by a Red LED and
a dry contact per source. The Red LED and the corresponding relay activates only if there is a load
connected to the relevant circuit breakers.
 Feeding cables and wiring: Use proper two hole lug terminal (45° or 90°) for the feeding connections.
 Equipment cable wiring. Use proper cable to feed the equipment, tighten the PDU terminal block
connectors and secure two flat screws for each equipment (+/-) with a flat screwdriver.
The PDU99 can be powered with either:
 Single wire connection from an external power supply, using one terminal lug LCDX3/0-14AH-X to the
PDU99 input
or
 Two wire connection from an external power supply, using two terminal lugs LCDX1/0-14AH-X to the
PDU99 input.
The following figure shows the front panel of the PDU99, and the table lists the functions of the front panel
components corresponding to the figure callouts. Front panel components are accessed by lifting the
PDU99 front cover.

NOTE: The description in the table below refers to left side (source A) components of the
PDU99. The right side (source B) is a mirror image of the left side and the description is
therefore identical.

PDU99 main board front view

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-11

 Apollo Reference Manual Accessories

PDU99 main board component functions

Marking Designation Function

1 to 9 DC output power terminal Nine power terminal pairs for connecting DC power to the
blocks platforms (loads) with a power consumption of up to 2400
W. Up to 5x60A connections on each source.
A1 to A9 Circuit breakers sockets Nine circuit breaker sockets for inserting CBs to protect the
(source A) loads connected to the corresponding output connectors.
The CB should be up to 60 A each and up to 300 A in total.
Ds 1 LED indicators Two green LEDs. LED lights ON indicates the presence of
Ds 2 DC input power in the corresponding input power source.
Ds 1 is for source A and ds 2 is for source B.
Ds 3 LED indicators Two red LEDs. LED lights ON indicates that one of the
Ds 4 circuit breakers is tripped. Ds 3 indicates source A CB fell
and ds 4 indicates that source B CB fell.

PDU99 main board back view

PDU99 main board component functions

Marking Designation Function

A1 to A4 DC input power terminals Terminals for connecting the DC input power to the
PDU99.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-12

 Apollo Reference Manual Accessories

13.1.3.1 PDU99 power supply flow example

An example of the power supply flow for an OPT9914 platform and an OPT9624 is illustrated in the
following figure. This configuration uses three DC outputs to feed the three xPFM-14 (A) and (B) pairs of the
OPT9914. The two other outputs feed the two PFM24 (A) and (B) units of the OPT9624. PDU99 can
distribute power to all types of our platforms as well as 3rd party products.

PDU99 power supply flow example

Each input source is monitored by a green LED. The two LEDs, located at the middle of the main board,
enable the user to view the status of each input source.
The nominal DC power voltage is 48 VDC, however the input voltage can range from -40.5 VDC to 60 VDC.
The internal circuits of the PDU99 are powered whenever at least one power source is connected. The
required circuit breakers are included in the installation parts kit supplied with the platforms, and therefore
their current rating is in accordance with the order requirements.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-13

 Apollo Reference Manual Accessories

13.2 RAP-E
The RAP-E is a power distribution and alarm panel installed in the rack for platforms that consume more
than 3000 W.

NOTE: The RAP-E supports power supply for any platform that consumes more than 3000 W
in any of the following product lines:
 Apollo product line
 Neptune product line
 XDM product line

The RAP-E performs the following main functions:

 Redundant power distribution for one or two platforms. The RAP-E can support either one or two
platforms. Each platform works with two power sources, where one is the main source (A) and the
second is an optional protective backup source (B).
In the default configuration, the RAP-E supplies independent streams of power to two separate
platforms. Input power for one platform is kept completely separate from the input power for the
second. Separate input power cables from the power sources feed into independent circuit breakers
on the RAP-E unit. (There are a total of eight circuit breakers on the RAP-E, supporting redundant
power supplies for up to two platforms.) An example of the power supply flow for two OPT9624
platforms is illustrated in the following figure.

Example of RAP-E connections to two OPT9624

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-14

 Apollo Reference Manual Accessories

An example of the power supply flow for two XDM-3000 platforms is illustrated in the following
figure. Note that in the case of XDM-3000 only three out of the four DC circuits of the RAP-E are used.

Example of RAP-E connections to two XDM-3000

The RAP-E has eight 5-pin DC output connectors for supplying redundant power to the supported
platforms. The maximum power supplied to each platform is up to 4500 W, in accordance with the
platform type.
Note that with the default configuration, the power cables from the user's power supply sources to
the RAP-E do not have to be more than 25 mm2 thick, and the circuit breakers do not have to be more
than 65A, because the maximum power consumption per cable is never more than 2250 W.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-15

 Apollo Reference Manual Accessories

 Redundant power distribution for one platform. The RAP-E can support power supply to one
platform. In this case the platform works with two power sources, where one is the main source (A)
and the second is an optional protective backup source (B). Separate input power cables from the
power sources feed into independent circuit breakers on the RAP-E unit. (There are a total of four
circuit breakers installed in this case). The power supply flow for a single platform is illustrated in the
following figure.

RAP-E redundancy connections to a single platform

NOTE: The following connection options are possible:

 Optimal power connection: Works with four 25 mm2 power cables to support two
OPT9624 platforms, with maximum power of 4500 W each. Or, works with two 25 mm2
power cables to support one OPT9624 platform, with a maximum of 4500 W.
 Single cable connection: Works with a single 25 mm2 power cable to support a single
OPT9624 platform only, with maximum 2200 W for that platform. This requires the use
of a metal bridge, designed with two circuit breakers, and two power cables connected
from the RAP-E to the platform.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-16

 Apollo Reference Manual Accessories

The nominal DC power voltage is -48 VDC ranging to -72 VDC. The internal circuits of the RAP-E are
powered whenever at least one power source is connected. The presence of DC power within the
RAP-E is indicated by a POWER ON indicator.
Each DC power circuit of each platform is protected by two circuit breakers that also serve as a power
on/off switch for the corresponding circuit. The required circuit breakers are included in the
installation parts kit supplied with the platforms, and therefore their current rating is in accordance
with the order requirements.
The circuit breakers are installed during the RAP-E installation. To prevent accidental changing of a
circuit breaker’s state, the circuit breakers can be reached easily after opening the front cover of the
RAP-E. The circuit breaker state (ON or OFF) can be seen through openings in the RAP-E cover.
 Bay alarm indications. The RAP-E includes three alarm indicators, one for each alarm severity. When
alarms of different severities are received simultaneously, the corresponding alarm indications light
simultaneously.
A buzzer is activated whenever an alarm is present in platforms connected to the RAP-E. The buzzer
can be shut off by pressing an ACO button on the corresponding platform. This action doesn't clear
the alarm.
 Connecting external alarms from two platforms, each platform supporting up to four alarm inputs
and four alarm outputs (via dry contacts) to the customer's central alarm monitoring system.
Customers who wish to define external alarms should refer to the explanation of the dry contacts
electrical maximum rating requirements for external alarms in the System Specification.
Note that the RAP-E supports up to eight input and output external alarms. These alarms are
allocated four to each platform.
 Exporting severity alarms. Two separate groups of severity alarms (a group of four (Critical, Major,
Minor, and buzzer) for each platform) are provided via dry contacts for the customer's central alarm
monitoring system.
The following figure shows the front panel of the RAP-E, and the table lists the functions of the front panel
components corresponding to the figure callout numbers.

RAP-E front panel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-17

 Apollo Reference Manual Accessories

RAP-E front panel component functions

No. Designation Function

1 SOURCE A Opening for the four circuit breakers (two per Apollo platform
installed in the rack). These circuit breakers are used as ON/OFF
power switches and overcurrent protection for the DC power source
A.
2 TEST Pushbutton for activating the buzzer and turning on the indicators
for test purposes.
3 POWER ON Green indicator, lights when at least one DC power source is
connected to the RAP-E.
4 CRITICAL Red indicator, lights when the severity of an unacknowledged alarm
in the platforms connected to the RAP-E is Critical.
5 MAJOR Orange indicator, lights when the severity of an unacknowledged
alarm in the platforms connected to the RAP-E is Major.
6 MINOR Yellow indicator, lights when the severity of an unacknowledged
alarm in the platforms connected to the RAP-E is Minor.
7 Buzzer (concealed under Operates when at least one unacknowledged Major or Critical alarm
cover) is present in the platforms connected to the RAP-E.
8 SOURCE B Same as Item 1 for DC source B.

The RAP-E connectors are located on the circuit board, as shown in the following figure. The table lists the
connector functions. The index numbers in the table correspond to those in the figures.

RAP-E connectors

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-18

 Apollo Reference Manual Accessories

RAP-E connector functions

No. Designation Function

1, 2, 3, 4 Output 1, Output 2, Four 5-pin D-type connectors, designated Output 1, Output 2,
Output 3, and Output 4 Output 3, and Output 4, used to connect DC power to the Apollo
DC output power platforms.
5 ALARM IN/OUT 68-pin SCSI connector, used to connect an alarm cable to the
customer alarm monitoring system. This alarm cable transmits the
alarms received from the Apollo platforms by the SHELF 1 and
SHELF 2 connectors, including external alarm inputs, external alarm
outputs, and Apollo severity alarms.
6, 7 SHELF 1 and SHELF 2 Two 36-pin SCSI connectors, designated SHELF 1 and SHELF 2, used
to connect alarm cables to the Apollo platforms installed in the rack.
These cables transmit alarms from the Apollo platform to the RAP-E
unit.

13.3 xRAP-100
The xRAP-100 is a power distribution and alarm panel for platforms installed in racks.

NOTE: The xRAP-100 supports power supply for the following product lines:
 BG product line
 XDM-100
 OPT96xx product line

The xRAP-100 performs the following main functions:

 Power distribution for up to four platforms. The nominal DC power voltage is -48 VDC or -60 VDC.
The xRAP-100 supports connection to two separate DC power sources, where one is the main power
input (A) and the second is an optional protective backup power input (B). This enables power source
redundancy to platforms that support this feature. The CB rating installed in the xRAP-100 for feeding
a single platform is max. 35 A. The total power that can be provided by the xRAP-100 is max. 5.2 kW.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-19

 Apollo Reference Manual Accessories

xRAP-100 power supply flow

Each power source can be connected to the xRAP-100 with a dual input line; we will designate this
option as dual input power cable configuration (for feeding platforms like the OPT96xx product line).
However, in the default configuration, the xRAP-100 is supplied with bridge components, connecting
the negative terminals of the two power input lines. This enables users to connect the unit with an up
to 50 mm2 single input power cable. When feeding with dual input power cable configuration is
preferred, the bridge components must be removed.
Power is connected through four independent circuit breakers to three 3-pin and one 5-pin output
connectors for feeding the platforms. The total power that can be provided by the unit is 5.2 kW
maximum. The power is equally distributed via each input power line: 2600 W to two 3-pin
connectors (up to 1300 W per platform), and 2600 W to the third 3-pin and to the 5-pin connectors.
The 5-pin output power connector can feed a high-power platform (for example, XDM-1000 requiring
2200 W). In such a case, the third 3-pin connector is able to provide the rest of the power (in this
example, 2600 - 2200 = 400 W). We recommend not using the third 3-pin connector when a high-
power platform is connected.

NOTE: The xRAP-100 can provide power to four 9600 platforms. In this case, three of them
are connected to the 3-pin and one to the 5-pin D-type connectors.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-20

Apollo Reference Manual Accessories

Note that with the dual input cable configuration, the power cables from the user's power supply
sources to the xRAP-100 do not have to be more than 25 mm2 thick, and the circuit breakers do not
have to be more than 32A, except for the circuit breaker connected to the 5-pin connector that can
be up to 65A because the maximum power consumption per cable is never more than 2600 W. The
xRAP-100 reflects the response to the need of customers who are not able to support 50 mm2 feeding
power cables when connecting four platforms.

NOTE: Users who prefer to work with a single power cable from their main power supply (and
optionally, a single power cable from the protective power supply) can still work with a single
cable if they:
 Work with a single 25 mm2 power cable to support two platforms only, with a maximum
of 2600 W for both platforms, where each platform is limited to a maximum of 1300 W
per platform.
 Work with a single 25 mm2 power cable to support four platforms, where each platform
is limited to a maximum of 650 W per platform. This configuration option requires the
use of the metal bridge component supplied for this purpose.
 Work with a single 50 mm2 power cable to support four platforms with a maximum of
1300 W for each platform. This configuration option requires the use of the metal bridge
component supplied for this purpose.

The nominal DC power voltage is -48 VDC ranging to -72 VDC. The internal circuits of the xRAP-100 are
powered whenever at least one power source is connected. The presence of DC power within the
xRAP-100 is indicated by a POWER ON indicator.
Each DC power circuit of each platform is protected by a circuit breaker that also serves as a power
on/off switch for the corresponding circuit. The required circuit breakers are included in the
installation parts kit supplied with the platforms, and therefore their current rating is in accordance
with the order requirements. To prevent accidentally changing a circuit breaker state, the circuit
breakers can be reached only after removing the xRAP-100 front cover. The circuit breaker state
(ON/OFF) can be seen through openings in the cover.

NOTE: For connecting an OPT96xx platform to the 5-pin connector, use a 5-pin D-type male to
2-pin D-type female cable.

 Bay alarm indications: The xRAP-100 includes three alarm indicators, one for each alarm severity.
When alarms of different severities are received simultaneously, the different alarm indications light
simultaneously.

NOTE: BG platforms support only two alarm indications: Major and Minor.

A buzzer is activated whenever a Major or Critical alarm is present in a XDM platform connected to
the xRAP-100 or a Major alarm in a BG or OPT96xx platform connected to the xRAP-100.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-21

 Apollo Reference Manual Accessories

 Connection of alarms from up to four supported platforms, each with maximum four alarm inputs
and two alarm outputs.
The following figure shows the front panel of the xRAP-100, and the table lists the functions of the front
panel components corresponding to the figure callout numbers.

xRAP-100 front panel component functions

No. Designation Function

1 SOURCE A Four circuit breakers (designated SHELF 1, SHELF 2, SHELF 3, and SHELF 4 – one
per platform installed in the rack). These circuit breakers are used as ON/OFF
power switches and overcurrent protection for the DC power source A.
-- Buzzer (concealed Operates when at least one unacknowledged Major or Critical alarm is present
under cover) in the platforms connected to the xRAP-100.
2 TEST Pushbutton for activating the buzzer and turning on the indicators for test
purposes.
3 POWER ON Green indicator, lights whenever at least one DC power source is connected to
the xRAP-100.
4 CRITICAL Red indicator, lights when the severity of an alarm in the platform connected
to the xRAP-100 is Critical.
5 MAJOR Orange indicator, lights when the severity of an alarm in the platform
connected to the xRAP-100 is Major.
6 MINOR Yellow indicator, lights when the severity of an alarm in the platform
connected to the xRAP-100 is Minor.
7 SOURCE B Same as Item 1 for DC source B.

The xRAP-100 connectors are located on its circuit board, as shown in the following figure. The table lists
the connector functions. The index numbers in the table correspond to those in the figure.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-22

 Apollo Reference Manual Accessories

xRAP-100 connectors

xRAP-100 connectors

No. Designation Function

1, 2, 3, 4 Shelf alarms Four 36-pin SCSI connectors designated SHELF 1, SHELF 2, SHELF 3,
and SHELF 4, for connecting alarm input and output lines to the
platforms and other equipment installed in the rack
5 ALARM IN/OUT 68-pin SCSI connector, for connecting alarm input and output lines
to the customer alarm monitoring facility
6, 7, 8 Platforms DC input power Three 3-pin D-type connectors designated Shelf 1, Shelf 2, and
Shelf 3 for connecting DC power to regular power platforms
9 Shelf DC input, high power 5-pin D-type connector designated Shelf 4 for connecting a high or
regular power platform

13.4 RAP-4B
The RAP-4B is a power distribution and alarm panel for platforms installed in racks.

NOTE: The RAP-4B supports operation with BG, XDM (100, 300, 900), Neptune, and OPT96xx
platforms.

The RAP-4B performs the following main functions:

 Power distribution for up to four protected platforms installed on the same rack. The nominal DC
power voltage is 48 VDC or 60 VDC. Since the supported platforms can use redundant power sources,
the RAP-4B supports connection to two separate DC power circuits.
Each DC power circuit of each platform is protected by a circuit breaker, which also serves as a power
on/off switch for the corresponding circuit. The required circuit breakers are included in the
installation parts kit supplied with the platforms, and therefore their current rating is in accordance
with the order requirements. The CB rating installed in the RAP-4B for feeding a single platform is
max. 35 A. The total power that can be provided by the RAP-4B is max. 4 x 1.1 kW (4.4 kW).

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-23

 Apollo Reference Manual Accessories

NOTE: The maximum power that can be supplied by the RAP-4B to a single platform is not
more than 1.1 kW.

The circuit breakers are installed during the RAP-4B installation. To prevent accidentally changing a
circuit breaker state, the circuit breakers can be reached only after removing the RAP-4B front cover.
The circuit breaker state (ON/OFF) can be seen through translucent covers.
 Bay alarm indications: The RAP-4B includes three alarm indicators, one for each alarm severity. When
alarms of different severities are received simultaneously, the different alarm indications light
simultaneously.

NOTE: BG platforms support only two alarm indications, Major and Minor.

A buzzer is activated whenever a Major or Critical alarm is present in an XDM platform or a Major
alarm in a BG or 96xx platform connected to the RAP-4B.
 Connection of alarms from up to four platforms, with max. four alarm inputs and two alarm outputs.
The following figure shows the front panel of the RAP-4B, and the table lists the functions of the front panel
components corresponding to the figure callout numbers.

RAP-4B front panel

RAP-4B front panel component functions

No. Designation Function

1 SOURCE A Four circuit breakers (designated PLATFORM 1, PLATFORM 2, PLATFORM 3, and
PLATFORM 4 – one per platform installed in the rack). These circuit breakers are
used as ON/OFF power switches and overcurrent protection for the DC power
source A.
--- Buzzer Operates when at least one unacknowledged Major or Critical alarm is present in
(concealed the platform connected to the RAP-4B.
under cover)
2 TEST Pushbutton. Press to activate the buzzer and turn the indicators on for test
purposes.
3 POWER Green indicator; lights when at least one DC power source is connected to the RAP-
4B.
4 CRITICAL Red indicator; lights when the severity of at least one of the alarms in the platform
connected to the RAP-4B is Critical.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-24

 Apollo Reference Manual Accessories

No. Designation Function

5 MAJOR Orange indicator; lights when the severity of at least one of the alarms in the
platform connected to the RAP-4B is Major.
6 MINOR Yellow indicator; lights when the severity of at least one of the alarms in the
platform connected to the RAP-4B is Minor.
7 SOURCE B Same as Item 1 for DC source B.

The RAP-4B alarm connectors are on its circuit board, as shown in the following figure. The table lists the
connector functions. The index numbers in the table correspond to those in the figure.

Rap-4B alarm connectors on the circuit board

RAP-4B connector functions

No. Designation Function

1, 2, 3, 4 Platform alarms Four 36-pin SCSI connectors designated PLATFORM 1, PLATFORM 2,
PLATFORM 3, and PLATFORM 4, for connecting alarm input/output lines
from the platforms to the RAP-4B.
5 ALARM IN/OUT 68-pin SCSI connector, for connecting alarm input lines from the
customer's equipment to the platforms, and alarm output lines from the
platforms to the customer alarm monitoring facility.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-25

 Apollo Reference Manual Accessories

13.5 AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 power system

The AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 power system is a high efficient and extreme compact system that provides an
optimal solution for space-critical, low power telecommunication applications, requiring flexible DC power
supplies.
The main components of the power system are three rectifier units, each capable of supplying up to 850 W
at a nominal voltage of 48 VDC.
Each power system includes three DPR-850B-48 rectifier units, an CSU-502 controller unit, two battery
circuit breakers, and six load circuit breakers, all enclosed in an 437.4 x 270 x 43.4 mm (W x D x H)
miniature platform. All connections to the system are made from the rear of the unit.
The rectifiers are connected in parallel in a redundant (n+1) load-sharing mode. The current-sharing mode
enables each rectifier to supply an equal load current, thus increasing system reliability. In case a failure
occurs in one of the units, the current drawn from the other rectifiers is increased to supply the required
load current. The DPR-850B-48 is designed for online replacement (hot-swappable) to support
non-traffic-affecting operation of telecommunication equipment.
In addition, to support high availability, the system has an option to connect backup batteries. In this case,
while the system is operating normally it also charges the batteries in addition to supplying power to the
load. If the AC source fails, the batteries, which are connected on the rectifier output bus, supply the load
current.
The state-of-the-art power supply is designed to match constant-power characteristics of modern telecom
loads, and thus reduces the number of rectifiers required in battery backed-up systems. The AC/DC-
DPS850-48-3 features a modular architecture for easy system maintenance and repair.

AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 power system, general view

The AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 system has connectors for connecting the load, batteries, AC source, and the
system alarms, at the rear of the unit. It also includes circuit breakers that protect the power supply against
load overcurrent at the battery and rectifier outputs.
The CSU-502 module provides control and monitoring functions. It is supplied preconfigured, ready for
immediate use. It supports system voltage, load current, status, and alarms that can be changed and
displayed on the LCD display.
The AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 platform is preconfigured for fast installation and setup. All system settings are
fully software-configured and stored in transferable configuration files for repeated one-step system setup.
The AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 platform is supplied with two kits of brackets for installation in 19" or ETSI racks.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-26

 Apollo Reference Manual Accessories

The following main features are supported by the AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 power system:
 19"/ETSI power platform for 48 VDC @ 2250 W (max.) in non-redundant application
 Single phase 100-240 VAC input source
 Three DPR-850B-48 rectifier units
 Light weight plug-in modules for simple installation and maintenance
 Hot swappable rectifier and control modules
 Front access to the circuit breakers and control module for simplified operation and maintenance

13.5.1 AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 front view

The AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 front view is shown in the following figure.

AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 front view

The following table describes the AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 front view components.

AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 front component functions

Designation Component Function

LD1 to LD6 Load DC voltage circuit Act as ON/OFF switches for connecting loads LD1 to LD6 to
breakers. Ratings: the system DC voltage bus. Protect the system from load
LD1, LD2 = 12 A overcurrent.
LD3, LD4 = 20 A
LD5, LD6 = 30 A
BAT1, BAT2 Battery circuit breakers, 50 Act as ON/OFF switches for connecting two battery systems
A each to the DC voltage bus. Protect the system from battery
overload.
Controller unit Provides control, provisioning, configuration, and display for
CSU-502
the system.
SNMP Remote control connector, Provides SNMP communication with the CSU 502 for
interface RJ-45 (optional per order) controlling the system from remote (via a modem).
DPR-850B-48 Rectifier unit 850 W
Provides AC to DC power conversion for the system. Up to
three units can be installed in a platform. The system max.
power is 2250 W.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-27

 Apollo Reference Manual Accessories

13.5.2 AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 rear view

The AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 general rear view is shown in the following figure.

AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 general rear view

To enable understanding enlarged views of sections on the rear panel are provided in the following figures.
The AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 detailed battery and load connections are shown in the following figure.

AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 battery and load connections

The AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 AC source and alarm connections are shown in the following figure.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-28

 Apollo Reference Manual Accessories

AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 AC source and alarm connections

The following table describers the AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 rear panel component functions (connections).

AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 rear panel component functions

Designation Component Function

TA RJ-45 connector Connects the Ambient temperature sensor to the system. The
sensor with an appropriate cable is supplied, by default, with the
system. If not connected, Ambient Temperature will not affect the
power supply control system.
TB RJ-45 connector Connects the BAT1 temperature sensor to the system. The sensor
with an appropriate cable is supplied, by default, with the system.
It must be connected, in case backup batteries are used.
LOAD1 to Screw terminal Each terminal provides load connection to the system DC output
LOAD6 socket, 2-positions (6 bus. The recommended cable cross-section for connecting the
places) loads are:
 LOAD1 and LOAD2, AWG 14 (2.5 mm2)
 LOAD3 and LOAD4, AWG 12 (4 mm2)
 LOAD5 and LOAD6, AWG 10 (10 mm2).
BAT 2 and Screw terminal Connects the corresponding BAT 2 and BAT 1 battery packs to the
BAT 1 socket, 2-positions (2 system DC output bus. The recommended cable cross-section for
places) connecting the each battery pack is AWG 6 (16 mm2).
ALARM D-type, 26-pin, Connects the Systems alarm output signals. The signals are
SIGNAL female connector delivered by six sets of relay dry contacts.
PE, L, N, Terminal socket, Connects the AC source input voltage to the system:
3-positions  PE - Ground
 L - Line
 N - Neutral
The connections must be made with 3 x AWG 14 (2.5 mm2) cables.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-29

 Apollo Reference Manual Accessories

13.6 AC/DC PS 6/8.7kW power system

The AC/DC PS 6/8.7kW power system is an ideal solution for supplying high power to telecommunication
applications requiring compact, efficient, and flexible DC power supplies. The main components of the
power system are two types of rectifier units, one capable of supplying up to 2 kW and the other up to 2.9
kW at a nominal voltage of 48 VDC.
We offer two types of the power system as described in the following table.

AC/DC PS 6/8.7kW configurations

System Designation Rectifier type Max. system power
AC/DC PS 6kW DPR 2000 6 kW
AC/DC PS 8.7kW DPR 2900 8.7 kW

The two power systems are identical in features, functionality, and physical dimension and differ only in the
maximum output power capability.

IMPORTANT: Each AC/DC PS 6/8.7kW system must be equipped with rectifiers of the same
type. Mixing rectifiers of different types is not allowed. For example, if an AC/DC PS 6kW is
configured, the three rectifiers must be DPR 2000.

Each power system includes a number of DPR 2000/DPR 2900 rectifier units, an CU-19C A controller unit,
and a Power Distribution Unit (PDU), all enclosed in a 482 x 299 x 88 mm (W x D x H) platform. All
connections to the system are made from the rear on the PDU.
The rectifiers are connected in parallel in a redundant (n+1) load-sharing mode. The current-sharing mode
enables each rectifier to supply an equal load current, thus increasing system reliability. In case a failure
occurs in one of the units, the current drawn from the other rectifiers is increased to supply the required
load current. The DPR 2000/DPR 2900 is designed for online replacement (hot-swappable) to support
non-traffic-affecting operation of telecommunication equipment.
In addition, to support high availability, the system has an option to connect to two sets of backup
batteries. In this case, while the system is operating normally it also charges the batteries in addition to
supplying power to the load. If the AC source fails, the batteries, which are connected on the rectifier
output bus, supply the load current.
The state-of-the-art power supply is designed to match constant-power characteristics of modern telecom
loads, and thus reduces the number of rectifiers required in battery backed-up systems. The AC/DC PS
6/8.7kW features a modular architecture for easy system maintenance.
The AC/DC PS 6/8.7kW system PDU has terminals for connecting the load, battery, AC source, and system
alarms. It also includes circuit breakers that protect the power supply against load overcurrent at the
battery and rectifier outputs.
The CU-19C A module provides control and monitoring functions. It is supplied preconfigured, ready for
immediate use. It supports system voltage, load current, status, and alarms that can be changed and
displayed on the LCD display.
The AC/DC PS 6/8.7kW platform is preconfigured for fast installation and setup. All system settings are fully
software-configured and stored in transferable configuration files for repeated one-step system setup.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-30

 Apollo Reference Manual Accessories

13.6.1 AC/DC PS 6/8.7kW front view

The AC/DC PS 6/8.7kW front view is shown in the following figure.

AC/DC PS 6/8.7kW front view

The following table describes the AC/DC PS 6/8.7kW front view components.

AC/DC PS 6/8.7kW front component functions

Designation Component Function

AC I/P AC circuit breaker, 2P-50 A Acts as an ON/OFF switch for connecting the power system
to the AC source and protects the AC source from AC/DC PS
6/8.7kW overload.
L1 to L6 Load DC voltage circuit Act as an ON/OFF switch for connecting loads L1 to L6 to the
breakers, 1P-50A system DC voltage bus. Protects the system from load
overcurrent.
Bat1, Bat2 Battery circuit breakers, Act as an ON/OFF switch for connecting two battery
1P-100 A systems to the DC voltage bus. Protects the system from
battery overload.
CU-19C A Controller unit Provides control, provisioning, configuration, and display for
the system.
SNMP Remote control connector, Provides SNMP communication with the CU-19C A for
interface RJ-45 (optional per order) controlling the system from remote (via a modem).
DPR 2000 or Rectifier unit (2 kW or 2.9 Provides AC to DC power conversion for the system. Up to
DPR 2900 kW) three units can be installed in a platform. The type of the
unit determines the system max. power.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-31

 Apollo Reference Manual Accessories

13.6.2 AC/DC PS 6/8.7kW rear view

The AC/DC PS 6/8.7kW general rear view is shown in the following figure.

AC/DC PS 6/8.7kW general rear view

To facilitate understanding enlarged views of sections on the rear panel are provided in the following
figures.
The AC/DC PS 6/8.7kW detailed dry contact relay and sensor connections are depicted in the following
figure.

Relay dry contact and sensor connections

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-32

 Apollo Reference Manual Accessories

The AC/DC PS 6/8.7kW detailed battery and load connections are shown in the following figure.

Battery and load connections

The AC/DC PS 6/8.7kW AC power source connections are shown in the following figure.

AC source connections

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-33

 Apollo Reference Manual Accessories

The following table describers the AC/DC PS 6/8.7kW rear panel component functions (connections).

AC/DC PS 6/8.7kW rear panel component functions

Designation Component Function

TB2 Not used Not used
TB1 Terminal socket, 2-positions Connects the Bat1 temperature sensor to the system. The
sensor with an appropriate cable is supplied, by default,
with the system. It must be connected, in case backup
batteries are used.
TA Terminal socket, 2-positions Connects the Ambient temperature sensor to the system.
The sensor with an appropriate cable is supplied, by default,
with the system. If not connected, Ambient Temperature
will not affect the power supply control system.
Relay1 to Push terminal socket, Each terminal provides connection to three dry contacts
Relay6 3-positions (6 places) (relay):
 NO - Normally Open
 NC - Normally Closed
 COM - Common
The connections must be made with wires of up to 22 AWG.
Battery2 Screw terminal socket, Connects the Battery2 pack to the system DC output bus.
2-positions The connections must be made with cables of up to 25 mm2.
Battery1 Screw terminal socket, Connects the Battery1 pack to the system DC output bus.
2-positions The connections must be made with cables of up to 25 mm2.
LOAD1 to Screw terminal socket, Each terminal provides load connection to the system DC
LOAD6 2-positions (6 places) output bus. The connections must be made with cables of
up to 16 mm2.
Screw terminal socket, Connects the AC source input voltage to the system:
L, N, 3-positions  L - Line
 N - Neutral

 - Ground
The connections must be made with 3 x 10 mm2 cables.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-34

 Apollo Reference Manual Accessories

13.7 Fiber storage accessories

Fiber spoolers and Fiber Storage Trays (FSTs) are used to store excess of various optical fibers. We provide
FSTs for 19”, ETSI, and ANSI racks.

13.7.1 FST
When optical modules are used, platforms can be supplied with an FST where a length of surplus optical
fiber is stored to enable hot module replacement without disconnecting fibers from other modules in the
platform. The FST can hold up to 48 fibers, where the fiber size is 3 m x 2 mm (10 ft. x 0.08 in.).
The FST can be opened in two positions:
 Halfway (first click when pulling the tray out)
 Completely (to enable threading of the fibers in the tray)

FST top view

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-35

 Apollo Reference Manual Accessories

13.7.2 Fiber spooler

The fiber spooler is used to roll and store excess optical fibers. Depending on the spooler configuration,
several hundreds of optical fibers can be stored (each stored fiber can be max. 2.5 meters (8.1 ft. long). The
following figure shows a front view of the spooler.

Spooler front view

The spooler units are attached to the rack frame using the two anchoring panels on the two sides. Fiber
cables are wrapped in a figure-eight pattern around the four storage posts in the spooler. These posts are
large enough to accommodate a large number of fibers that can be part of a typical installation. The
following figure illustrates the depth of the fiber storage area available within the spooler.

Spooler side view

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-36

 Apollo Reference Manual Accessories

13.8 FMT-1U patch panel

The FMT-1U is a patch panel shelf that can host up to four FMT4F fiber connection modules. The shelf is 1U
high and can be installed in ETSI or 19" racks. In addition, the unit includes two fiber supports (one at each
side) to help neatly route of the fibers connected to the FMT4F modules.
The FMT-1U supports the following FMT4F types:
 FMT4F-10x10G-MM
 FMT4F-2x4x10G-SM
 FMT4F-2x4x10G-MM
The FMT4F modules are described in the following sections.

13.8.1 FMT4F-10x10G-MM fiber connection module

The FMT4F-10x10G-MM fiber connection module can connect up to 10 x 10GE clients of TM100 (configured
as MXP100E10 muxponder), TM400, and HIO500 cards to end users. The client ports on these cards use
CPF2-SR10 transceivers with an MTP24 connector. This connector is connected by an MTP24 to MTP24
fiber patch cord to the IN connector on the FMT4F-10x10G-MM panel. The module converts the MTP24
interface to standard 20 x LC connectors. Each pair of LC connectors connects to a 10 GbE (Tx and Rx) end
user interface with a pair of LC to LC MM patch fibers, totaling 10 x 10 GbE.
The slim size of the FMT4F-10x10G-MM provides an elegant solution for high density installations which
require 100 Gbps to 10 x 10 Gbps connectivity. The following figure shows a general view of the FMT4F-
10x10G-MM module.

FMT4F-10x10G-MM general view

The front panel of the FMT4F-10x10G-MM is depicted in the following figure.

FMT4F-10x10G-MM front panel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-37

 Apollo Reference Manual Accessories

13.8.2 FMT4F-2x4x10G-SM fiber connection module

The FMT4F-2x4x10G-SM fiber connection module connects up to 2 x 4 x 10GE clients of TM200EN/B cards
to end users. The client ports on these cards use QSFP+-LR10 transceivers with an MTP12 connector. This
connector is connected by an MTP12 to MTP12 fiber patch cord to the IN 1 connector on the FMT4F-
2x4x10G-SM panel. The module converts the MTP12 interface to standard 8 x LC connectors on the upper
row of the unit. Each pair of LC connectors connects to a 10 GbE (Tx and Rx) end user interface with a pair
of LC to LC SM patch fibers. Similarly, the lower IN 2 MTP12 connector connects to another client interface
of a TM200EN/B with an MTP12 to MTP12 fiber patch cord. The end user 10 GbE interfaces connect to the
lower row of the LC connectors.
The FMT4F-2x4x10G-SM supports connection to up to 8 x 10 GbE end user interfaces. The transceivers
(LR10) and fiber types are suitable for long reach applications.
The slim size of the FMT4F-2x4x10G-SM provides an elegant solution for high density installations which
require 80 Gbps to 8 x 10 Gbps connectivity. The following figure shows a general view of the FMT4F-
2x4x10G-SM module.

FMT4F-2x4x10G-SM general view

The front panel of the FMT4F-2x4x10G-SM is shown in the following figure.

FMT4F-2x4x10G-SM front panel

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-38

 Apollo Reference Manual Accessories

13.8.3 FMT4F-2x4x10G-MM fiber connection module

The FMT4F-2x4x10G-MM fiber connection module connects up to 2 x 4 x 10GE clients of TM200EN/B cards
to end users. The FMT4F-2x4x10G-MM has very similar design, functionality and features as the FMT4F-
2x4x10G-SM. The differences are that the Multi-Mode version is used for short range applications were the
transceivers on the card client ports are QSFP+-SR and the end user fibers are MM type. For a detailed
description of the module see FMT4F-2x4x10G-SM fiber connection module.

13.9 Cable guiding accessories

We offer a wide range of accessories for guiding cables and fibers in rack installations.

13.9.1 Fiber/cable guide

Fiber/Cable guides are dual-purpose units that can be used for fiber and cable routing. They help to neatly
route fibers connected to the front panels of modules installed in racks into ducts on the rack sides. The
guide also helps keep the recommended bending radius of the routed fibers to prevent fiber break or signal
degradation within the fiber.
The fiber/cable guide has a significant advantage over a guide dedicated only to fibers or only to cables, as
you have the choice to route fibers and cables separately or together for equipment with mixed optical and
electrical interfaces.
Routing the fibers through fiber guides cancels the load on the optical connectors resulting from the fibers’
weight. It also enables optimal distribution of fiber bundles according to the location of the cards they
serve, and comfortable card removal for maintenance or repair purposes.
The use of fiber/cable guides gives an organized look and feel to the system, especially in installations with
multiple fibers/cables.
We offer two types of fiber/cable guides:
 Upper fiber/cable guide - for routing fibers/cables connected to interfaces in the upper part of the
equipment
 Lower fiber/cable guide - for routing fibers/cables connected to interfaces in the lower part of the
equipment
These fiber/cable guides are available for both ETSI and 19" equipment racks and can also be adapted for
use in other racks. The 19" guides can be installed in ANSI 19" racks using a spacer adapter kit. The ETSI
guides can be installed in ANSI 23" racks using a bracket kit.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-39

 Apollo Reference Manual Accessories

Upper fiber/cable guide

The upper fiber/cable guide is always installed above the platform and serves cards/modules installed in
the upper part of the platform.

Upper fiber/cable guide

The guide has two types of radius-limiting elements:

 Fixed radius limiter
 Adjustable radius limiter
For efficient fiber (or cable) routing, the radius limiters are located on both sides of the guide so that they
can handle fibers/cables entering the guide from either side. In addition, the guide has openings that
facilitate the path of fibers and cables to the required route towards the rack's cable conduits or fiber
channels.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-40

 Apollo Reference Manual Accessories

Lower fiber/cable guide

The lower fiber/cable guide is always installed below the platform, and serves cards/modules installed in
the lower part of the platform. In general the lower and upper fiber/cable guide are similar.

Lower fiber/cable guide

The lower fiber/cable guide has two types of radius-limiting elements:

 Fixed radius limiter
 Adjustable radius limiter
For efficient fiber (or cable) routing, the radius limiters are located on both sides of the guide so that they
can handle fibers/cables entering the guide from either side. In addition, the guide has openings that
facilitate the path of fibers and cables to the required route towards the rack's cable conduits or fiber
channels. The main difference between the upper and lower fiber/cable guides is that the latter also has a
cable support that helps neatly route fibers/cables and supports their weight.
The smart design of the upper and lower fiber/cable guides enables the technical staff to maintain and
repair the required hardware (card/module) without affecting traffic on adjacent cards/modules. This is
due to the fixed and adjustable radius limiters.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-41

 Apollo Reference Manual Accessories

13.9.2 Fiber bridges

Fiber bridges are used to route fiber bundles horizontally between both sides of a rack and between
equipment units. The bridge can support up to 400 x 2 mm fibers.
We offer fiber bridges for ETSI and 19” racks. They are very similar. The following figure shows the fiber
bridge for an ETSI rack.

Fiber bridge general view

13.10 External fiber duct

External fiber ducts can be added to our optical ETSI rack to expand its fiber capacity by up to 1500 fibers.
The ducts can be added to either one side, or both sides simultaneously. The ducts include internal fiber
spoolers that help manage the large fiber capacity.
The dimensions of the duct are 150 mm width, 306 mm depth, and 2200 mm height. Note that adding
ducts to the rack increases its width. For example, if you add ducts on both sides, the rack width increases
by 150 x 2 = 300 mm. The following figure shows the external fiber duct.

External fiber duct

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 13-42

14 Protection and restoration mechanisms
Protection is of the utmost importance in the high-capacity traffic transmitted through WDM systems.
Apollo's high-level reliability is achieved through a comprehensive set of protection schemes implemented
at different network levels. Protection schemes are provided per physical component as well as at Layer 0,
Layer 1, and Layer 2 network levels.
Equipment redundancy is available for all units (common units, traffic units, I/O cards, fabrics, and network
connections). Automatic protection switching is initiated by a robust internal built-in test (BIT) diagnostic
system. Layer 0 protection includes optical line and WSS ROADM-based protection mechanisms.
Layer 1 protection mechanisms include various forms of line protection, SNC-N, DNI, and DRI protection
schemes, protection based on the AoC card, and a complete range of OCH protection mechanisms.
PB protection mechanisms include RSTP and ERP protection, as well as CCN, LLCF, and selective FDB
flushing, ensuring enhanced performance in a dynamic network setting. MPLS protection mechanisms
include 1:1 linear protection, LAG, and PW redundancy. Apollo also offers essential ASON GMPLS-based
restoration mechanisms.
Network operators can choose a combination of protection schemes optimized for their specific network
configuration and functionality. For example, consider a typical metro network that mixes EPL services at
the access layer with shared PB network at the core. This network design enables operators to offer the
most cost-effective access technology, while the shared PB networks at the edge and metro-core offer the
benefits of shared infrastructure and MP2MP services. This very common network configuration may utilize
a mixture of L2 RSTP/MSTP and SNCP protection schemes. Some of the Apollo protection mechanisms are
introduced in this section.

14.1 OMSP 1:1 protection

Apollo features a fiber protection scheme based on either signal power degradation or LOS, providing line
protection for P2P optical links with minimal insertion loss (less than 3 dB). In the event of a fiber cut, the
Optical Multiplexer Section Protection (OMSP) optical switch automatically switches traffic to the
protection fiber in under 50 msec. Protection can be configured to revert automatically to the main fiber
upon repair. OMSP protection is generally used for fiber spanning in linear topologies. A pilot tone monitors
the protection fiber. We offer the OMSP card for this protection scheme.
This low-cost approach protects all DWDM channels simultaneously without hardware redundancy. The
OMSP operates independently of data rates, protocols, or number of channels, and provides protection for
future upgrades when additional DWDM channels are added to the network.

OMSP protection

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 14-1

 Apollo Reference Manual Protection and restoration mechanisms

14.2 OLP 1+1 protection

Apollo's optical line protection (OLP) is a 1+1 protection module based on signal power degradation, signal
failure (SF), or loss of signal (LOS). OLP 1+1 provides <50 msec protection that can be configured to revert
automatically to the main fiber upon repair.

Fiber protection
The OLP_2S card can be used to provide fiber protection for all services. You can configure which fiber pair
(for example, either A or B in the following figure) should be the 'main' pair by default. OLP fiber protection
offers the advantage of a lower cost than classic OMSP fiber protection, but with a slightly higher insertion
loss (5 dB).

Fiber protection (LOS)

Most optical line redundancy offers protection against fiber breaks. Apollo's OLP cards can also use the
backplane IOP lines to detect line faults based either on complete signal failures (SF), or on a degradation in
OTN data quality (DQ), from an OTUk port in the adjacent service card, as illustrated in the following figure.
This feature can be configured for service cards and OLP cards in adjacent slots, with SF monitoring enabled
and the fiber connectivity defined accordingly.

Fiber protection (SF)

NOTES:
 In the OPT9603, fiber protection on signal failure is not supported for double slot cards
like the CMR100M.
 When configuring fiber protection on signal failure for single slot cards like the TR200_2,
the card must be placed in slot U1 and the OLP card must be assigned to slot U2.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 14-2

 Apollo Reference Manual Protection and restoration mechanisms

Oscillation prevention
When a fault is initially detected, the OLP immediately initiates a protection switch. However, to avoid
oscillations, the next switch is allowed only after one minute, a third switch is allowed only after two
minutes, and so on. Each switching incident increases the waiting time, up to a maximum of 64 minutes.
When all faults are cleared, with a clean stabilization time of 7 seconds, the waiting time is also reset.

Service card protection

The OLP_2S card can be used to provide service card protection for up to two services. The OLP card
provides protection against fiber cuts only. Protection can be based on service card PM parameters, with
automatic switching upon signal degradation.

Service card line protection

Client side protection

OLP card protection can be configured at the client side, where the OLP card is located between the client's
router and the client-side ports of the service cards. The OLP cards select the line path to be used for that
client. This configuration, usually working at 1310 nm wavelength, provides total 1+1 redundancy
protection for the line and service cards from network and/or equipment failures.
The following figure illustrates a typical card configuration. Note that this protection can be configured with
exclusively our equipment, and it is also appropriate for networks that include both our and 3rd party
regions.

Client side protection

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 14-3

 Apollo Reference Manual Protection and restoration mechanisms

14.3 OCH protection

Apollo provides port protection very similar to its path protection mechanism. By using double
transponder/combiner cards, a dual-traffic path goes around the ring and is received by both the main and
the protection transponder/combiner. Both perform continuous PM to ensure channel integrity.
If PM on the main transponder/combiner does not indicate a problem, a message is sent through the
backplane to the protection transponder/combiner for it to shut down its laser to the client, thereby
ensuring transmission to the client from only one transponder/combiner (the main). Protection switching
to the protection transponder/combiner occurs automatically when a failure is detected by the main
transponder/combiner.
The protected channels in the following figure are user selected.

OCH 1+1 port protection

OCH port protection is currently the most popular optical protection method for the optical layer. The
mechanism transports each optical channel in two directions, clockwise and counterclockwise. The shortest
path is defined as the main or working channel; the longer path as the protection channel.
The main benefit of OCH port protection is its ability to separately choose the shortest path as the working
path for each channel. There are no dedicated working and protection fibers. Each fiber carries traffic with
both working and protection signals in a single direction.
The OCH 1+1 port protection scheme provides separate protection for each channel. For SDH/SONET, GbE,
and 10G, protection switching is based on PM parameters. Switching criteria can be Loss of Signal (LOS),
Loss of Frame (LOF), or Degraded Signal (SD). The switch-to-protection mode is automatic when a
malfunction is detected in a single channel. This is very convenient as users can choose the client ports to
be protected, as well as the main or protection paths. Switch-to-protection time in the OCH 1+1 port
protection scheme is less than 50 msec.

NOTES:
 Multi-mode transceivers cannot be used to configure OCH 1+1 port protection, because
the signal intensity could be below the sensitivity lower limit of the transponder.
 In platforms from the OPT96xx family, port protection must be configured between cards
in adjacent slots (#N and #N+2), assigning matching port numbers on the two cards.
 In platforms from the OPT99xx family, port protection can be configured between any two
ports on any two cards in any two slots. The slots do not have to be adjacent, and the port
numbers do not have to be identical.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 14-4

 Apollo Reference Manual Protection and restoration mechanisms

14.4 SNC-N protection

The SNC-N point serves as a ‘bridge/switch’ point within a trail. In the transmit direction, the trail is split
into two independent routes (1+1 bridging). In the receive direction, a selection is made between these two
incoming routes (switching), based on signal quality criteria.
Protection based on ODU1/2/3 PM, is provided in less than 50 msec, and can be either revertive or
non-revertive. The traffic protection source and sink points are SNC-N points. Client traffic protection may
also employ SNC-N points (on the egress and ingress sides).

SNC-N points

SNC-N points may exist at the trail endpoints and also within the network. SNC-N protection is relevant for
all Apollo platforms, configured with or without matrix cards, since SNC-N points exist in both service and
matrix cards.

14.5 Y-protection for network traffic on 10G cards

Network traffic protection protects against network failures within the trail which carries the traffic,
working with the assumption that the protected trail is conveyed over two independent network
paths/routes. In network traffic protection, the trail is bridged to different paths at the traffic protection
source point. At the traffic protection sink point, the traffic protection mechanism chooses one of the
incoming paths. Protection switching criteria are based on incoming signal quality. Switch-to-protection
time is less than 50 msec.
On its own, network traffic protection provides protection from the point the service/trail leaves the source
card to the point it enters the sink card. Network traffic protection may also be combined with other
protection types described in the following sections.
The 10G service cards can operate in line (facility) protection mode, with a single 10 Gbps client connected
to two lines. This mode protects the network from fiber cuts.
In line protection mode, the signal is transmitted and received on both lines. Only one of the signals
received by the card is processed and forwarded to the client side. The choice of which signal to process is
based on PM parameters for the OTU2 signal.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 14-5

 Apollo Reference Manual Protection and restoration mechanisms

Y-protection example with TR10_4

14.6 Client traffic protection

Client traffic protection protects against failures which occur in the connection between the network
equipment (Apollo) and the client's equipment. Client traffic protection uses dual connectivity between the
Apollo NE and the client's equipment, including two client entry ports in two distinct Apollo cards, two fiber
connections, and two ports at the client's equipment.
In client traffic protection, the service is sent to two client ports on the egress side of the Apollo NE. On the
ingress side, one of the client's entry ports is chosen. Protection switching criteria are based on incoming
signal quality and module (SFP/XFP) extraction. Switch-to-protection time is less than 50 msec.
Input selection criteria depend on the client type.

Independent network traffic and client traffic protection

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 14-6

 Apollo Reference Manual Protection and restoration mechanisms

14.7 Combined network traffic and equipment

protection
Equipment protection protects against card/module failures. The purpose of equipment protection is to
allow service continuation in the event of failure or extraction of the service source/sink card or
module/transceiver. By nature, equipment protection involves two adjacent cards protecting each other.
Port protection is activated on a per-service basis, using an external splitter/coupler to connect two Apollo
client-side ports (one on each Apollo card) to the client’s equipment. A pair of cards assigned to protect at
least one service, as described above, is considered a protection card pair. Note that on the same
protection card pair, some services may have port protection while other services may be unprotected or
protected with other types of protection, such as client traffic protection.
If PM on the main card does not indicate a problem, a message is sent through the backplane to the
protection card to shut down its laser to the client, thereby ensuring transmission to the client from only
one transponder/muxponder (the main). Switching to the protection transponder/muxponder occurs
automatically when a failure is detected by the main transponder/muxponder. Protection, based on
ODU0/1/2/3, is provided in less than 50 msec, and can be either revertive or non-revertive. These
protection mechanisms are relevant for all Apollo platforms, configured with or without matrix cards.

Combined network traffic (SNC-N) and equipment protection

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 14-7

 Apollo Reference Manual Protection and restoration mechanisms

14.8 ODU DNI and DRI protection

The universal fabric can be used to provide multi-ring connectivity on a single node (DRI) or dual node (DNI)
basis. DNI and DRI protection schemes provide robust protection in under 50 msec that keeps traffic
moving without interruption even in the face of two fiber cuts (one in each ring).
Signals from both sides (East/West) of one ring are transmitted to both sides (East/West) of the second
ring. Based on ODU signal PM, both sides decide which signal to process.
The following figure displays a simple DRI configuration, with a single node serving as the connection point
between two rings.

DRI protection at the universal fabric

The following figure displays a simple DNI configuration, with two independent NEs serving as the
connection points between two rings. Each NE receives traffic either from other NEs in the same ring or
from NEs in the other ring. Based on SNC-N at the ODU level, NEs decide which signal to process.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 14-8

 Apollo Reference Manual Protection and restoration mechanisms

DNI protection at the universal fabric

ODU DNI and DRI protection is relevant for all Apollo platforms, configured with or without matrix cards.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 14-9

 Apollo Reference Manual Protection and restoration mechanisms

14.9 WSS ROADM protection

ROADM configurations facilitate implementation of advanced protection schemes such as N+1 Path
dynamic restoration and protection, 1+1 Forever protection and restoration in under-50 msec, and optical
Dual Node Interface/Dual Ring Interface (DNI/DRI). This unique all-optical protection can handle and
overcome multiple fiber cuts - ideal for mesh-based networks and topologies.
Apollo provides preplanned fixed protection against multiple fiber cuts or an NE failure along the main and
protection routes by using WSS switching capabilities with a single transponder/combiner card. Additional
protection against transponder/combiner failure requires a combination of both OCH 1+1 and WSS
restoration.
When configuring WSS ROADM restoration, the client transponder/combiner connects via optical splitter to
a ROADM WSS array with up to nine routing possibilities in the WSS add/drop node. Protection route(s) can
be active at all times, so reducing the total restoration time as switching to protection only requires an
update of the relevant ROADM port in the drop site.

N+1 protection
The following illustrates a typical example of N+1 optical protection based on the WSS ROADM. This
configuration includes one main route and two protection routes, segments of which can be used for
restoration. For each working primary route, up to 15 secondary routes can be configured. All the routes
are set automatically through the management system. If the primary working route fails, the system
switches automatically to the Secondary 1 route. If the Secondary 1 route also fails, the Secondary 2 route
is automatically activated. Protection routes can be kept active and dedicated to shorten restoration time.

WSS ROADM N+1 protection

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 14-10

 Apollo Reference Manual Protection and restoration mechanisms

1+1 forever protection

Optical 1+1 Forever protection is similar to OCH 1+1 protection with the added advantage of providing
protection for more than one fiber cut. Optical 1+1 Forever protection is an extension of the traditional
OCH 1+1 protection, where failure in the main or protection path results in sub-50 msec switching by the
transponders. After this switching the failed path(s) are restored, returning the network to full OCH 1+1
protection. This enables continuing OCH 1+1 protection against multiple fiber cuts.

WSS ROADM 1+1 Forever

Optical DRI
Optical DRI protection uses a single NE to bridge two rings. In a typical example of optical DRI protection, a
single connection point is used to close two rings, providing protection for scenarios that include two fiber
cuts. Optical DRI trails are created automatically by LightSOFT.

Optical DRI classic protection model

Traditional protection schemes rely upon configuration of two paths, main and protection. Traffic is simply
switched from the main path to the protection path if there are any (one or more) fiber cuts in the main
path. Optical DRI topologies improve upon the traditional model by protecting against fiber cuts in both the
main and protection paths.
Optical DRI configures additional links between the main and protection paths to provide multiple alternate
route possibilities between the main and protection paths. This is illustrated in the following figure.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 14-11

 Apollo Reference Manual Protection and restoration mechanisms

Optical DRI classic protection model

The preceding figure portrays two endpoints linked by main and protection paths. Two links are configured
between the two paths, represented by the X-shape link topology in the center of the figure. The first fiber
cut on the main path (labeled A), triggers a switch at both endpoints from the main path to the protection
path. A second fiber cut on the protection path (labeled B), triggers a switch at the appropriate points from
the protection path back to the main path. After each fiber cut, the optical equipment used at the
DRI-configured nodes at either end of the DRI links must also switch their internal Rx/Tx settings
accordingly.

Optical DNI enhanced protection model

Classic optical DNI configurations require two fiber links between the main and protection paths. Under
certain circumstances, such as complex or distant topologies, it may be difficult to ensure two fiber
connections between the paths. Therefore, we have designed an enhanced optical DNI configuration that
can be implemented with a single fiber link between the two paths. This is illustrated in the following
figure.

Optical DNI enhanced protection model

With enhanced optical DNI, a single BD link is configured between the two paths. The OCH trail is defined as
asymmetrical, using a different channel in each direction. This prevents signal overlapping over the link
connecting the two paths.
Using WSS for restoration is exceptionally cost effective for 40G and 100G wavelengths as no OEO cross
connection is necessary. Routing is completed optically automatically by the WSS ROADM according to the
wavelength provisioning via LightSOFT.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 14-12

 Apollo Reference Manual Protection and restoration mechanisms

14.10 ASON, WSON, and SSON GMPLS-based

restoration
Transmission network solutions underwent a tremendous evolution in technology over the years. In
addition to dramatically increasing the bandwidth and reach of the network, there has been significant
progress automating service provisioning and management. The intelligent Generalized Multiprotocol Label
Switching (GMPLS) control plane enhances networks by adding restoration to the sub-50 msec protection
schemes and automated service provisioning. The Automatic Switched-Transport Network (ASTN)
architecture boosts network capabilities, thereby further reducing CAPEX and OPEX.
Apollo platforms offer Automatic Switched Optical Network (ASON) restoration using GMPLS technology
for Optical Transport Network (OTN) trails with dynamic service provisioning, as well as Wavelength
Switched Optical Network (WSON) and Spectrum Switched Optical Networks (SSON) restoration for OCH
trails.
Our innovative networking framework enables carriers to reduce CAPEX and OPEX by efficiently planning
and operating intelligent networks using ASON, WSON, and SSON capabilities, based on NG transmission
technology and a GMPLS control plane. ASON, WSON, and SSON offer the ability to control and manage
transmission networks more flexibly, conveniently, and effectively. For example, the WSON/SSON control
plane considers the optical values of alternative restoration paths, based on intelligent analysis of standard
metrics such as OSNR, length, latency, cost, and number of hops. ASON decisions are based on similar sets
of metrics.
The distributed dynamic routing capability enables rapid cost-effective creation of new nodes and increases
in bandwidth, without the extensive offline operations usually required.
Apollo's ASTN architecture, compliant with ITU-T G.8080, is composed of three main layers or planes:
 Transport plane: Represents the switching equipment. The transport plane carries the client payload
over a trail that consists of the connection endpoints plus any number of intermediate NEs along the
trail.
 Control plane: Represents the processing engines within each Apollo RCP. The control plane software
inter-operates with the transport plane via a connection control interface (CCI). Control plane
processors transmit management information over a dedicated DCN (inbound or outbound),
connected through internal network-to-network interfaces (I-NNIs).
 Management plane: Represents the interface with client equipment. The management plane is
implemented over the UNI where the connections that can be configured over other domains (such as
other carriers, other layers, or third party equipment) are expanded. A dedicated
management-to-network interface (MNI) is used between the control plane and the NMS.
Key components of the Apollo management and control suite include automatic topology discovery,
resource dissemination, point-and-click connection provisioning, user-initiated automatic setup, E2E
performance management, and path protection and restoration across an OTN network.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 14-13

 Apollo Reference Manual Protection and restoration mechanisms

Network management via the control plane, especially when combined with advances in DWDM hardware
such as ODU-XC fabric for OTN switching or multi-degree ROADMs with colorless, directionless, and
contentionless (CDC) switching for OTN transport (or both), give operators the following benefits:
 Network availability: Availability is improved, as the network is tolerant of multiple failures, with the
ability to reroute wavelengths without complex re-planning exercises and service calls.
 Network optimization: Network topology is modified over a period of time, as service requirements
change. The optical-aware WSON/SSON control plane helps to optimize and reduce or eliminate
network fragmentation.
 Wavelength on demand: Time to market is significantly improved with rapid service setup. There is
no need for complicated network planning; a simplified GUI as well as script-oriented (CLI) User-
Network Interface (UNI) allows users to dynamically demand wavelength services across DWDM
networks.
 Cost savings: With this intelligent control plane, operators can now efficiently use the benefits of
switching components such as ODU-XC fabric or ROADMs, and reduce the number of ODUs or
wavelengths and I/O service cards needed in the network. Affecting the lowest layer in the network,
this directly translates to savings not just in DWDM equipment, but also in ports at higher-layer
equipment (cross-connects and routers), resulting in tremendous CapEx savings for operators.
 Value-added services: The control plane provides dynamic rerouting capabilities, allowing service
providers to offer services with new SLA levels in addition to their present modes of operations.
Our platforms provide a variety of bandwidth-efficient protection and restoration schemes, while
supporting ring, mesh, and point-to-point network topologies. Recovery modes include a range of
protection mechanisms and mesh restoration modes. ASON/WSON/SSON capabilities offer new types of
restoration schemes, increasing network survivability with, for example, optical 1++ protection for very high
CoS services, and optical 1+1 and 1+R protection for low CoS services.
Our platforms offer control plane architecture, capable of offering intelligent services in mesh transport
networks over colorless, directionless, and contentionless configurations. This is achieved by adding a
GMPLS control plane that enhances network functionality by adding restoration to the sub-50 msec
protection schemes for multiple failure (optical 1++ services) and automated service provisioning. It also
adds other capabilities that contribute to reduced CAPEX and OPEX. The Apollo control plane architecture,
protocols, and functionalities are described in this section.
The ASON/WSON/SSON family solutions are based on the "Add-On" concept, adding unique capabilities to
existing and new networks. Expandable and scalable, the inter-compatible product line supports seamless
integration of NEs with dynamic E2E WSON/SSON-based applications.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 14-14

 Apollo Reference Manual Protection and restoration mechanisms

14.10.1 Apollo optical control plane architecture

The need for intelligent optical networking in carrier networks triggered an ongoing effort by leading
standardization bodies, including the ITU-T, IETF, and OIF, towards a unified control plane architecture. By
adopting proven protocols and approaches, a unified architecture standard would lead to development of a
new generation of transmission networks that enable fast provisioning and restoration along multiple
carrier domains using infrastructure from multiple vendors.
The ITU-T focuses on the switched transport control plane, developing the ASTN umbrella of specifications.
The set of ASTN standards includes WSON architecture, as well as multiple generic and specific standards
addressing issues such as call connection management (signaling), discovery and link management, routing,
and others. WSON adds a new facet to the complex ASON/GMPLS domain, introducing the colors or
wavelength associated with each service and taking into account the physical optical impairments that
were ignored/neglected in the OTN layer.
Apollo implements ASON and WSON-compliant network architecture (ITU-T G.8080). The following figure
illustrates a high-level view of the ASON/WSON architecture, composed of three layers or planes:
 Transport plane
 Control plane
 Management plane

ASON/WSON architecture

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 14-15

 Apollo Reference Manual Protection and restoration mechanisms

The IETF has defined the well-known GMPLS architecture and protocols, extending MPLS for
circuit-switching and other non-IP-based systems. GMPLS protocols include signaling protocols (RSVP-TE),
routing protocols (OSPF-TE), and others.
The GMPLS protocols enable advanced switching platforms such as Apollo to add “intelligence” by
integrating a control plane.
The OIF focuses on integration and interoperability issues by defining the User to Network Interface (UNI)
and the External Network to Network Interface (E-NNI). These standards cover the gaps between ASON,
WSON and GMPLS architectures, enabling a smoother integration of carrier networks.

Control plane interfaces

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 14-16

 Apollo Reference Manual Protection and restoration mechanisms

14.10.1.1 Transport plane

The transport plane represents the switching equipment. This carries the client payload between endpoints
of a connection (trail) over any number of NEs. The transport plane is responsible for transporting the
services, including switching and multiplexing, fault detection, and restoration. The transport plane is
implemented through the assembly of intelligent components and subsystems that make up switching
elements and line systems. The transport plane also includes gateways for service adaptation.
Apollo supports ASON functionality through three different platforms, providing a choice of ODU-XC fabric
sizes (1T, 5.6T, or 16T) with line rates ranging from 10G up to 200G per channel.

Network configuration offering ASON restoration options

Apollo supports WSON functionality through built-in DWDM layers based on state-of-the-art ROADM
modules with colorless, directionless, contentionless, and gridless (Flex-Grid) configurations (CDCF).
 Directionless switching enables the ROADM to automatically select the direction of the add/drop
wavelength without having to physically visit the site and connect the fiber to the required port.
 Colorless switching enables remote wavelength retuning of add/drop wavelengths, again, without the
need visit the site. With this architecture, an add/drop port can be assigned to any wavelength and
coupled to any direction(s) in a fully flexible fashion. The colorless feature is implemented utilizing the
TFA card, drop configured for direct colorless operation.
 Contentionless switching means that two or more services can be transmitted from the site in
different directions using the same wavelength channel.
 Gridless/flexible grid network, as defined in the G.694.1 WDM wavelength grid specification. This
standard divides the wavelengths available in the C-band spectrum into 'slices', with a granularity of
12.5 GHz. Flex-Grid's finer granularity enables optimal usage of the available bandwidth. Groups of
12.5GHz spacing can be combined into whatever size is required, including Super Channel spectral
widths of N x 12.5 GHz, accommodating any combination of optical carriers, modulations, and data
rates.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 14-17

 Apollo Reference Manual Protection and restoration mechanisms

WDM cards can be added in any of Apollo slots in the same cage with or without the ODU-XC fabric and
service cards. 10G, 40G, and 100G channels are supported with a choice of 100 GHz spacing (48 channels)
and 50 GHz spacing (96 channels) or flexible grid network design. Both mixed and pure coherent networks
are available.
The Apollo transport plane supports standard-compliant Automatic Discovery and DCN, critical for the
implementation of ASON and WSON architecture.

14.10.1.2 Control plane

The control plane enables mesh restoration and intelligent optical networking. The control plane consists of
individual processors (control plane instances) running control plane software and interconnected via
communication channels to create an overlay plane that controls the switching elements. The control plane
is mainly responsible for creating the original connections as well as restoration in response to failed
connections. The control plane software interoperates with the transport place via a CCI (Connection
Control Interface), and control plane processors are interconnected with an I-NNI interface over a
dedicated DCN (in- or outbound). A signaling communication network (SCN) transmits the control plane
instances between all NEs and the management system.
The control plane in the Apollo is integrated within the RCP controller card. Each Apollo shelf may be
equipped with two RCP cards for 1:1 protection, avoiding a SPoF.

Path computation
The protection and restoration capabilities of links and the Shared Risk Link Groups (SRLG) associated with
links can also be advertised by the routing protocols. Based on the Physical layer, SRLG constrains the
information and capabilities provided by the GMPLS routing and signaling protocols. The path computation
algorithm CSPF (Constrained Shortest Path First) can select disjointed paths based on link, node, or SRLG
diversity.

Enhanced WSON restoration

The WSON control plane considers the optical values of alternative restoration paths, based on intelligent
analysis of standard metrics such as OSNR, length, latency, cost, and number of hops. WSON restoration
uses LightPULSE data to calculate an optically validated restoration path. OSNR values at the endpoints are
crucial to ensure that restored services will actually be able to maintain the highest SLA.
One of the control plane objectives is to reuse the main-LSP resources for the restoration-LSP where
possible. When working with Flex-grid, there might be scenarios where only part of the resources can be
reused.

Enhanced optical path finder

LightSOFT PathFinder enables end-to-end route selection of an optical trail. PathFinder finds a trail
candidate using traditional metrics (distance, cost, etc.) or 'OSNR weight' criterion. PathFinder uses
LightPULSE data to obtain these metric values and calculate the expected OSNR before provisioning,
alerting the network operator if the OSNR is under the transceiver threshold. Once PathFinder suggests a
trail path, network operators can decide whether to accept the proposed trail or recalculate it.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 14-18

 Apollo Reference Manual Protection and restoration mechanisms

Set maximum to restoration

A user can restrict the maximum trail hop count, the maximum trail cost, the maximum trail length, and the
maximum latency. Maximum values can be configured system-wide, or individual values can be specified
per trail.

14.10.1.3 Management plane

The management plane provides provisioning and operation (FCAPS) functions of NEs in the transport
plane. The management plane is expanded to accommodate the operations, administration, maintenance,
and provisioning (OAM&P) of control plane-related functionalities. Components of the control plane are
modeled as managed entities within the management plane, fitting into the existing OAM architecture to
minimize disruption to existing operational procedures.
All our transmission equipment is managed by a single management system, LightSOFT. The LightSOFT NMS
features a unique multidimensional approach to managing today's converged networks. LightSOFT handles
one physical layer and several technological layers, including SDH/SONET, Ethernet, OTN, and optical.
LightSOFT offers on-demand service provisioning, pinpoint bandwidth allocation, and dramatic reductions
in equipment and operating costs that multiple management systems often require. It does this by
providing complete network management from a single platform, including configuration, fault
management, performance management, administrative procedures, maintenance operations, and security
control.
LightSOFT simplifies provisioning and day-to-day monitoring of optical services. Information on light paths,
wavelengths, channel availability, rates, is available through lists of optical links and trails. LightSOFT
provides fully automated optical trail provisioning, eliminating the need for operator intervention at the
EMS level. Automatic trail provisioning is also vital in networks based on ROADMs and ODU cross-connects.
ASON and WSON working at the wavelength and sub-wavelength levels allow creation of complex mesh
and ring network topologies. LightSOFT and STMS, working at the NMS and EMS levels, are coordinated
with the LightPLAN planning tool for full plug and play automation.

Plug and play life cycle

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 14-19

 Apollo Reference Manual Protection and restoration mechanisms

14.10.2 Multiple protection and restoration schemes

The unique value proposition of ASON/WSON for carriers is the ability to improve existing network
resiliency by introducing the well-known restoration approach of IP networks. Service re-establishment in
case of failure has been a key feature of transmission networks, which offer service protection in less than
50 msec.
Adding ASON/WSON to transmission networks brings added benefits without affecting the already superior
performance of today's network. With ASON/WSON restoration, the network itself monitors services and
restores them in the event of failure. (The ASON/WSON control plane is capable of restoring services in
case of multiple network failures.) Furthermore, the existing network capacity is utilized more efficiently by
sharing protection resources.
Our management applications support a range of protection schemes, allowing network planners to
balance the time needed for protection switching against the amount of resources that must be dedicated
to protection. For mission-critical services, distributed restoration mechanisms enable 50 msec service
recovery and dedicated protection. For less critical services, distributed shared mesh restoration schemes
can be implemented. For efficient use of installed resources, pre-emptible services can be established using
the protecting resources.
Our management applications support coexistence of multiple protection and restoration schemes,
described in this section.

Apollo control plane restoration modes

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 14-20

 Apollo Reference Manual Protection and restoration mechanisms

1++ (Gold) protection

1++ (Gold) protection enables creation of a protected (ODU or LP) 1++ bidirectional trail for high priority
services. In the event of a problem on the main path, traffic is switched to the protection path within
50 msec. During restoration, an additional restoration path is also created, to provide a restoration option
for any subsequent problem that might occur on the same path. Sub-50 msec restoration times are
maintained "forever" for any number of failures, as long as valid restoration paths are available.
This protection scheme is an extension of the traditional 1+1 path protection, with failure in the main or
protection path resulting in restoration of the failed path. 1++ protection has the advantage of providing
recovery from multiple consecutive failures. This option exceeds the five nines standard, providing high
service availability with no service downtime, since ASON/WSON continuously builds a new protection trail
after each fiber cut. This protection scheme is the most bandwidth consuming, since traffic is duplicated at
all times.

1+1+R (Silver) protection

1+1+R (Silver) protection provides <50ms SNCP-based restoration on the first fiber cut via the ASON/WSON
control plane. Any subsequent fiber cuts are restored within a few seconds. This option is less bandwidth
consuming than 1++ (Gold) protection, providing additional protection while allowing for efficient use of
network resources.
1+R (Bronze) protection creates an unprotected 1+R bidirectional trail. In the event of a problem on the
main path, the system finds an alternative path using existing free resources. There is no SNCP switching
and traffic is restored dynamically within a few seconds.
Recovery paths are protected in the same way as the main path. New recovery paths can be implemented
as long as additional paths satisfying current criteria can be found. 1+R is also known as reroute restoration.

1+R (Bronze) protection

1+R is an improvement over the corresponding unprotected option of regular SDH/SONET in that service is
restored dynamically on an alternate path within seconds, without operator intervention. Typically, traffic
is restored within one to two seconds. In more complex restoration topologies that contain a large number
of ASON/WSON nodes, restoration time can reach up to four seconds maximum.
All ASON/WSON CoSs can be used in conjunction with underlying protection (for example, multiroute OCH
trails).

1+1 path protection

1+1 path protection is based on SNC-N path protection, with the network allocating a protection trail for
each working trail. The protection trail is activated automatically in case of failure, restoring service in less
than 50 msec.

1+0 unprotected trails

In the event of a problem on the main path, unprotected trails do not benefit from SNCP switching and
traffic fails.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 14-21

 Apollo Reference Manual Protection and restoration mechanisms

14.10.3 Priority and preemption

The setup priority also defines the relative importance of the LSPs on the same restoration route. During
fault recovery, the setup priority determines the order in which LSPs are serviced. Higher-priority LSPs tend
to be re-established first and therefore enjoy more optimal path selection.
When there is not insufficient bandwidth to establish a more important LSP, you may choose to tear down
a less important existing LSP to free the necessary bandwidth. You do this by preempting the existing LSP.

14.11 Equipment protection

Apollo provides the following protection schemes for common unit equipment:
 The fan units are protected 1:n.
 The power supply is protected 1+1.
 The main controller is protected 1:1.
 The 1 Tbps universal fabric is protected 3:1.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 14-22

15 Management system
The Apollo product line is managed by the LightSOFT multidimensional NMS, the STMS, and the Apollo CLI,
with an intuitive user-friendly GUI that makes new services easy to deploy and supervise.

15.1 LightSOFT NMS management

Our powerful network management suite, LightSOFT, is a unified NMS that provisions, monitors, and
controls all NEs and layers. Multiple transmission technologies are controlled: each is represented as a layer
(Ethernet/MPLS, OTN, optics, and SDH/SONET) in addition to the physical layer (fibers, copper, etc.). This
approach enables you to manage multiple technology layers independently of the physical layer.
E2E tunnels, services, and trails are supported across the products, allowing services to be set that start, for
example, at the Neptune and terminate at an XDM or Apollo. LightSOFT also supports top-down service and
tunnel provisioning, reducing the time needed to provision new services.
Multidimensional LightSOFT manages our complete family of EMSs and enables you to assume full control
of all equipment in your network, including:
 NPT family of All-Native transport platforms for the metro
 Apollo family of NG transport platforms
 XDM family of multiservice transport platforms for the metro aggregation and metro core
 BroadGate family of multiservice transport for the metro access
 Multivendor networks

One management system

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 15-1

 Apollo Reference Manual Management system

LightSOFT offers on-demand service provisioning, pinpoint bandwidth allocation, and dramatic reductions
in equipment and operating costs that multiple management systems often require. It does this by
providing complete network management from a single platform, including configuration, fault
management, performance management, administrative procedures, maintenance operations, and security
control. Within one integrated management system, LightSOFT's network manager enables you to fully
control all your NEs regardless of their manufacturer, and view the complete network at a glance. Multiple
operators can simultaneously configure the network without any conflicts.
Network provisioning, particularly in the data era, has become very complex. For example, tunnels must be
pre-provisioned with various protection schemes. Service configuration requires setting multiple
parameters for each service. LightSOFT offers a number of powerful automation tools to ease the
provisioning process, thereby saving valuable OPEX for service providers. More services can be created in
the same amount of time, which is directly reflected in revenues. Automation tools include automatic
creation of tunnels per network or per service, automatic creation of bypass tunnels, reusable templates,
automatic configuration of the tunnels needed for mesh topologies, and more.
LightSOFT's comprehensive, E2E perspective supports comprehensive definition of MPLS tunnels, Ethernet
services, and SDH/SONET and optical trails, for primary and protection paths. LightSOFT supports all types
of trails and links (MoT, MoE, EoS, ETY, SDH/SONET, optical), protection schemes, and user constraints.
Simply point and click to connect any two endpoints, even in the most complex topology. LightSOFT
provides powerful trail reconstruction options to reconcile discrepancies between different layers, as well
as batch traffic management capabilities. LightSOFT provides smoothly integrated management for packet,
optical, and MSPP-based platforms.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 15-2

 Apollo Reference Manual Management system

15.1.1 Layered architecture maximizes flexibility

Our management concept is based on a layered architecture in accordance with the ITU-T M.3010 standard
for compliant layer architecture.
Separate layers make up the management structure as follows:
 The lowest level, the Network Element Layer (NEL), constitutes the embedded agent software of the
NEs.
 The second layer, the Element Management Layer (EML), controls many individual NEs.
 The third layer, the Network Management Layer (NML), controls the main network management
functions.

LightSOFT layered architecture management concept

LightSOFT functions at the NML while STMS functions at the EML. A northbound interface can connect
either STMS or LightSOFT to your Operations Support System (OSS).
At the NEL, the Apollo features the local craft terminal (LCT) system, providing fast easy connectivity to the
NE and enabling access to configuration and management functions through a user-friendly GUI as well as
an efficient CLI.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 15-3

 Apollo Reference Manual Management system

15.1.2 Graphic user interface

The LightSOFT GUI provides a powerful yet easy-to-use tool for managing your network. The GUI combines
security, configuration, maintenance, and performance management tools with fault handling, E2E trail
definition, and database backups for uninterrupted and reliable network operation.
Multi-layer topology views enable you to display the topology of each technology layer independently of
the topology of the physical layer.

LightSOFT main window

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 15-4

 Apollo Reference Manual Management system

15.1.3 Topology management

NEs can be deployed in a wide range of topologies, including single or multiple rings with appendages and
composite mesh topologies. You do not have to specify the type of topology in advance: simply define and
add NEs and LightSOFT creates the appropriate network plan. You move intuitively from an overall survey
of the network to detailed status and control views of any NE, transmission level, system card, or trail.
LightSOFT makes it possible to manage NEs at multiple layers. It distinguishes between the managed
elements (MEs) that make up the network and the logical elements (LEs) these MEs represent. You can:
 Focus on MEs when creating and deleting NEs (physical layer).
 Focus separately on the logical topology available at each technology level (Ethernet/MPLS, OTN,
optical, or SDH/SONET) when managing traffic (technology layer).
In IP/MPLS networks, the LightSOFT topology map includes IP/MPLS routers, ports with IP capabilities over
logical interfaces (LIFs), LAGs, IP network links between routers, and third party routers, listed as IP/MPLS
UMEs.
Two types of LAG modes are supported: Load Sharing or 1:1 Protection. A typical LAG configuration is
illustrated in the following port properties window.

Properties for Port - ETH/MPLS tab

Whenever an ME is added to the network at the physical layer, an LE is automatically projected into the
relevant technology layer. If an ME contains ports that belong to multiple technologies, LEs are created at
each technology layer containing only the ports relevant to that layer. Nested groups are supported and
can be defined differently in the various layers.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 15-5

 Apollo Reference Manual Management system

15.1.4 DWDM trails

OTN technology offers a range of rates up to 600 Gbps.
OTN interfaces are supported through the following types of trails:
 Optical Multiplex Section (OMS) trails at the foundation level carry multiple wavelengths, running
through Optical Transmission Section (OTS) ports. OTS ports are configured on equipment with more
than one wavelength supporting OMS interfaces. These ports are used, for example, in amplifiers or
DCF cards, or in OADM or Mux/DeMux cards for channelization purposes.
 Optical Channel (OCH) trails represent a single channel, running on top of OMS trails between the
appropriate Optical Transport Unit (OTU) ports, and possibly running through Optical Channel Ports
(OCHP) used for single-wavelength OCH interfaces. OTU ports are configured for port rates ranging
from OTU1 to OTUC2.
 Optical Data Unit (ODU) trails usually represent server trails for lower-rate Lightpath services running
on top of OCH trails, between appropriate OTU ports. An ODU trail can also act as a service for
comparable OTU services running between appropriate OTU ports.
 Lightpath (LP) trails represent an end-to-end service, running over ODU or OCH trails, between client
ports. If the line rate is equivalent to the client rate, then the LP runs directly over an OCH trail. If the
line rate is greater than the client rate, then the LP runs over an ODU server trail which runs over the
underlying OCH trail.
In a typical optical network, components are configured into a hierarchy of OMS, OCH, ODU, LP trails, as
illustrated in the following figure:

Hierarchy of optical trails

OMS trails run at the most basic, foundation level between multiplexing devices (MDs).
They can be unidirectional or bidirectional. They behave as server trails that carry multiple OCH trails in
fixed groups. DWDM is typically configured for 8, 16, 32, 44, 48, 88, 96 or flex-grid channel groups. CWDM
is configured for 4 or 8 channels. Amplifiers may be included in the path of an OMS trail.
Multiple OMSs, connected in tandem, cause alarms to be reported only with respect to the directly
associated OMS trail segments and not at other segments along the path.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 15-6

 Apollo Reference Manual Management system

LightSOFT also supports ODU packet trails, a special type of ODU server trail used to carry data traffic over
the OTN. These packet trails can have a main and a secondary component – the secondary trail enables
LAG-based resiliency of packet connectivity upon a failure of one of the two links – and their bandwidth
may be hitlessly adjusted, as per ITU recommendation G.7044. Each endpoint of an ODU packet trail is
always connected to a VPP (Virtual Packet Port), a virtual data port used to pass data traffic over the OTN.
Hitless Adjustment of ODUflex (HAO) is a set of protocols which enables the user to perform bandwidth
resizing of the ODU packet server trail without a traffic hit, hence the name. HAO is defined in ITU G.7044.
HAO is initiated from LightSOFT, with participation of STMS at the EMS level.
LightSOFT simplifies provisioning and day-to-day monitoring of optical services. Information on light paths,
wavelengths, channel availability, rates, is available from optical links and optical trail lists.
LightSOFT provides fully automated optical trail provisioning, eliminating operator intervention at the EMS
level. Automatic trail provisioning is also vital in networks based on ROADMs and ODU cross-connect that
allow creation of complex mesh and ring network topologies at the wavelength and sub-wavelength levels.
The following features are especially valuable:
 Point-and-click functionality for optical trail creation and activation of optical services for all types of
trails, including OMS, OCH, ODU, LightPath (LP), EoS over optics, protected and unprotected, P2P, and
P2MP (drop-and-continue).
 Top-down trails provisioning beginning at the NMS level with LightSOFT (creating trails) and
automatically continuing down to the EMS (implementing details).
 Rapid trail creation, with a choice of either:
 Fully automatic pathfinding, where you specify the endpoints and LightSOFT chooses the
optimal path for both main and protection segments.
 Fully manual, where you specify the exact trail path and LightSOFT completes the trail
provisioning tasks.
 Combination, where you specify the trail endpoints and specific segments of the path and
LightSOFT automatically completes the rest of the path route and provisioning.
 Sophisticated ODU multiplexing capabilities that provide the following benefits:
 Support of lower granularity ODU0 - 125Gbps (PT21).
 Flat ODU hierarchy means that ODUk can sit directly on an ODU4 trail.
 High order ODU trails can include ODUk trails of various rates. Rates do not need to be of a
single, uniform type.
 Choice of ODU interfaces provide greater efficiency of resource usage.
 GCT split single-card LEs on technology layers (such as the optical layer) directly opening the internal
card view.
 Utilization tables showing the state of the channels through a DWDM or CWDM OMS trail, helping
you decide which channel to utilize.
 Availability maps and tables and sophisticated maintenance tools enhance trail provisioning and
management.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 15-7

 Apollo Reference Manual Management system

 Optical network control parameters (s) are utilized by our platforms to enable proper gain setting and
power equalization along the entire network. s are a set of optical parameters generated
independently at a terminal or ROADM node, and are transmitted periodically through the entire
network, from one optical card to the next and from one node to the next, following the actual optical
transmission direction.
 OSNR Weight, estimated OSNR value assigned per OMS trail, calculated internally by LightSOFT, based
on the physical signal parameters. Higher OSNR values correlate with better signal quality. Assigning a
greater priority to OSNR Weight values means that PathFinder gives these values greater importance
when provisioning an OCH trail. OSNR levels can be displayed in LightSOFT on demand for any existing
Apollo trail or link.
You can automatically acquire all OMS, ODU, OCH, LP, and EoS trails in a single optical trail discovery
operation. This is especially useful when the system is first installed. Optical trails can also be provisioned
by the OSS via NBI.

15.1.5 Optical trail provisioning and management

Different optical components may require specific network management capabilities. LightSOFT provides all
the tools necessary for effective network design, configuration, and management of all components. For
example:
 LightSOFT utilizes specific payload objects (SPOs) when supporting trails using the multiprotocol AoC
or OMCM cards. LightSOFT also supports P2MP LightPaths for AoC and OMCM25 cards.
 If a wavelength (line port) is connected to a multiplexer or ROADM, LightSOFT provides enhanced
validation, preventing mistakes during link creation.
 LightSOFT displays the reason why an optical trail is classified as a Flex trail, allowing you to detect
and correct it. Flex trails are non-classified trails with non-standard trail patterns.
Route selection for optical trails can be fully automatic using LightSOFT’s PathFinder algorithm, fully manual
using LightSOFT’s GUI, or partially automated. PathFinder selects the optimal main path based on the
minimum hops criterion. You can apply route constraints, such as segments that must be included. This
algorithm takes into consideration wavelength switching within the topology.
For maximum protective value, PathFinder selects protection path routes that offer the maximum diversity
from the main traffic paths, as illustrated in the following example.

Main and protection trails highlighted

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 15-8

 Apollo Reference Manual Management system

LightSOFT verifies the correctness of the endpoints and user-selected trails. Parameters such as Forward
Error Correction (FEC) and line code are checked, significantly reducing the chance of configuration errors.
Once a path is selected, optical XCs are automatically provisioned on the NEs along the trail.
LightSOFT provides a table with a list of available frequencies across multiple OMS trails, making it simple
to select the frequency used at trail endpoints.

Frequency availability table

Creating and editing optical trails in single and bulk operations is possible using the XML file import feature.
To enable proper gain setting and power equalization along the entire network, Apollo utilizes optical
network control parameters (s), a set of optical parameters transmitted periodically. They are generated
independently at a terminal or ROADM node, and are transmitted through the entire network.
LightSOFT enables LS operator to check the OSNR level of an optical trail during its creation and select a
different path if so indicated.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 15-9

 Apollo Reference Manual Management system

15.1.6 LightPath availability maps

LightSOFT includes enhanced availability maps for OCH via LightPath. These maps show resource
availability, ensuring that link capacity suits the required services.
First check the area in which you wish to create a new trail to verify that the links have enough capacity.
The following figure shows a simple availability map for a network fragment after a traffic segment was
added.

Availability map after additional trails added

Network availability information can be exported to external applications in CSV format using a command
line.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 15-10

 Apollo Reference Manual Management system

15.1.7 Control map

LightSOFT has a Control Map, which enables the operator to visualize the management channels. It enables
the operator to view the route of the management communication channel between STMS and all Apollo
NEs in the network. It also provides information on the transport layers of each span of the management
channel (GCC, external DCN, OSC, VLAN using L2 cards).

Control map

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 15-11

 Apollo Reference Manual Management system

15.1.8 Management security mechanisms

We are committed to incorporating powerful, advanced security technology and methodology across the
full range of our product offering. For example, the data cards, through the LightSOFT NMS and the EMS
software, support a full range of features to keep your network running smoothly and protect it from
unauthorized and malicious use. Supported features include:
 Cluster solution that provides high availability and load balancing, essential features for large
networks and/or mission-critical management.
 Remote Database Replication (RDR), a field-proven flexible redundancy mechanism providing full
network management backup capabilities for Disaster Recovery Plans (DRPs).
 Customer Network Management (CNM), enabling SPs to lease exclusive network resources to
customers for self-management. This sophisticated scheme allows both the autonomous end
customer and the SP to concurrently manage alarms and performance, provision services, and handle
maintenance operations on the resources.
Additional key security enhancements are now in development and will be implemented in upcoming
releases. The STMS can be upgraded to apply enhanced security settings to the EMS, and to selected NEs
managed by the EMS. Communication channels between entities with enhanced security settings are
secured and information is sent via SSH2 protocol.

15.1.9 Management interfaces

Communications between the user and the management system is through a choice of interfaces.
The standard CORBA-based interface complies with the MultiTechnology Network Management (MTNM)
information model developed by the TeleManagement Forum (TMF), a consortium of all major telecom
equipment vendors. LightSOFT works with both north- and southbound CORBA-based interfaces for
managing third-party equipment or being managed by upper-level management systems. The EML level
supports the same interface, northbound.
An SNMP alarm gateway is available for sending alarms from the NMS/EMS to an OSS application that can
handle SNMP traps.
LightSOFT provides additional interfaces, such as export of current alarms via FTP, email, or SMS,
import/export of XCs/NEs and platform configurations, and database access. In addition, the EML level
supports interfaces such as retrieval of daily performance files, export of device inventory and alarms in
HTML format, and Java RMI for integration with third-party OSS/NMS solutions.

Client/Server architecture
The LightSOFT network management suite implements an advanced client/server software architecture
that supports a large number of processes. The NMS server can be run on either single or multiple
workstations. This distributed architecture enables you to scale easily, as well as provide high availability
and load balancing. LightSOFT supports dozens of concurrent clients. The multiconfigurator feature of
LightSOFT gives each operator the means to initiate sessions and manage the network simultaneously,
either in whole or in part.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 15-12

 Apollo Reference Manual Management system

15.2 Shade Tree Management System (STMS)

Shade Tree Management System (STMS) is the element management, service provisioning, and monitoring
solution for the Apollo series. STMS provides Fault, Configuration, Administration, Performance, and
Security (FCAPS) management. It offers powerful service management capabilities for a complete suite of
Wavelength Division Multiplexing (WDM) and Optical Transport Network (OTN) services.
 Integrated management: STMS includes smooth integration with the LightSOFT® management system.
STMS can also be operated in standalone mode on a Linux PC, a cost-effective management option
for small networks.
 Intelligent troubleshooting: STMS offers advanced troubleshooting tools to detect and resolve
network issues, such as Ethernet, WDM, and OTN service failures, misconfiguration, incorrect
software versions, and disconnected interfaces. STMS reduces the time to provision, deploy, and
define network elements, cards and interfaces by providing a user-friendly GUI to simplify the
configuration process.
 Efficient preconfiguration: STMS supports preconfiguration of cards and interfaces. After installing
the actual equipment, STMS verifies the configuration, and sends notification if there is a
configuration mismatch.
 Comprehensive reports: STMS gathers, processes, and stores statistical information that is collected
by the network elements to generate complete and accurate performance management reports.

Multiple management modes

STMS offers three management options:
 E2E network management solution, for larger, more complex networks, including smooth integration
with LightSOFT and the added benefits of the LightPLAN planning tools.
 Independent small network management solution, with STMS providing all the necessary NMS layer
functionality.
 Local management for individual equipment, offering a cost-effective solution for specific
configuration niches.

STMS management options

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 15-13

 Apollo Reference Manual Management system

STMS functions at the EMS level, featuring:

 Smooth integration with LightSOFT at the NMS level.
 Plug&Play functionality for easy commissioning and deployment of Apollo networks.
 Powerful optical management capabilities.
 Comprehensive set of management tools for:
 Installation.
 NE commissioning (including slot assignment, IP routing, and DCN configuration).
 Port and XC provisioning.
 Troubleshooting.
 Performance monitoring in STMS provides 15-minute and 24-hour PM on all optical interfaces and
sub-interfaces.
 Best-of-breed fault, configuration, accounting, performance, and security (FCAPS) management,
including alarm and event management, inventory, security management, and system administration.

ONCP monitoring and analysis

LightPulse, LightSOFT's sophisticated network-wide power equalization capability, is based on STMS's
optical network control parameters (ONCPs), a set of optical parameters transmitted periodically through
the entire network. ONCP data includes advanced channel and link parameters beyond power, such as
OSNR, dispersion, and other estimated parameters that can be used to dynamically monitor and control the
network. ONCP data analysis enables the following network functionalities:
 Power/gain control in EDFA, ROADM, and FOADM cards.
 Real time diagnostics.
 Span/connection loss diagnostics.
 Performance diagnostics, including channel OSNR, dispersion, polarization mode dispersion (PMD),
and nonlinear phase.
 Performance verification for a preinstalled trail.
The result is simplicity, easier network operation, and significant savings of time and money in terms of real
time fault management, since instead of sending a technician to a remote site with expensive testing
equipment, you have the information and control you need even from afar.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 15-14

 Apollo Reference Manual Management system

Optical parameters

Fiber connectivity
STMS supports fiber connectivity, for easy creation of links bottom-up to LightSOFT. Fiber connectivity can
be defined either bottom up (defined in STMS, and automatically uploaded to LightSOFT, or top-down
(defined in LightSOFT during topology link creation, and automatically downloaded to STMS). The STMS GUI
enables easy configuration of optical cross connections. When creating links in the STMS, fiber connectivity
information is uploaded to LightSOFT by default. LightSOFT creates the relevant topology links and updates
the link parameters accordingly.
Additional features include:
 Optical protection (port and SNCP)
 PM/FM profiles (shelf/card assignment and port/transceiver configuration)
 Actual/Expected comparison for equipment preconfiguration
 Inventory, maintenance, and port loopback operations
 Timing configurations
 Alien wavelength support enables installation and configuration of third party transceivers

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 15-15

 Apollo Reference Manual Management system

15.2.1 STMS key features

STMS features a rich set of provisioning, monitoring, and management capabilities.
 Carrier class network management: STMS works in a highly-available, warm-standby, redundant
configuration, eliminating a single point of failure (SPOF) and allowing carriers to minimize downtime.
STMS clients are synchronized with the STMS CLI to enable operators and engineers to coordinate and
enable troubleshooting. STMS uses efficient configuration change events sent from the device to the
STMS that communicate only with those configuration parts that changed.

 Comprehensive network planning: The comprehensive and accurate data stored in the STMS
database enable effective network planning. Managed device, inventory, and available slot reports
assist capacity planning and inventory control. Device-monitoring capabilities prevent problems from
reaching a critical stage by providing proactive monitoring of components, such as CPU utilization, file
system size, memory usage, and device temperature, sending alerts when thresholds are exceeded.
 LightSOFT integration: STMS can be integrated with LightSOFT to support inventory management,
alarm management, WDM and OTN service management. It supports Multi Technology Network
Management (MTNM) CORBA-based interface. In addition, the rest of STMS functionality is available
with GUI cut-through (GCT). LightSOFT delivers comprehensive support and management capabilities
across multiple layers, networks, and technologies. The GCT enables LightSOFT to open an STMS
window in a specific context and allows the LightSOFT operator to get to it quickly, thus providing a
mechanism for performing any operation that is available in STMS but not in LightSOFT.
 Lite Packet support: STMS supports Apollo's Lite Packet feature, which provides MEF-compliant
Ethernet services over an ODU XC domain. Lite Packet includes the following capabilities:
 LAG-based resiliency for packet connectivity
 I/O port protection for packet ports that are not participating in a LAG configuration
 BW on demand for packet connectivity, also known as hitless BW adaptation for ODUflex
(GFP-F)

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 15-16

Apollo Reference Manual Management system

 Report generation: You can generate various types of reports using STMS. The reports are saved in
HTML format to the reports directory on the STMS server and can be viewed using a web browser.
You can change the default reports directory as required. The following STMS reports are available:
 Managed devices: General information about managed NEs. Reports can be generated for the
STMS domain (listing all managed NEs), for a group (listing all of the NEs in that group), or for a
single NE.
 Inventory: General information about populated card cage slots. Reports can be generated for
the STMS domain (listing all managed NEs), for a group (listing all of the NEs in that group), or
for a single NE.
 Available slots: List of available (empty) card cage slots. Reports can be generated for the STMS
domain (listing all managed NEs), for a group (listing all of the NEs in that group), or for a single
NE.
 Customers: Information about the logical interfaces and E Line services assigned to customers.
Reports can be generated for all customers (listing the interfaces and services assigned to each
customer in your network) or for a single customer (listing only the interfaces and services
assigned to that customer).
 Interface utilization: Utilization information about logical interfaces. Reports can be generated
for a single logical interface or for a single customer (listing all of the logical interfaces assigned
to that customer).
 Security management: Security management features enable easy creation and management of
STMS users and permissions. The Action Log module also provides monitoring capabilities for security
management. Only users defined with Administrator and Security privileges have access to all of the
security management options. Other users are limited to minimal access to security settings.
 ASON/WSON protection and restoration: ASON/WSON-protected trails are created and managed at
the NMS level through LightSOFT. STMS offers the ability to view ASON/WSON-related information
for a selected NE.
 License management: A License Manager manages STMS licenses. Some STMS features are only
available if the relevant license has been purchased. Use the License Manager to view a list of
available features and to update licensing as required.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 15-17

 Apollo Reference Manual Management system

15.3 CLI configuration

Our platforms support a fully functional CLI capable of configuring, monitoring, troubleshooting, and
debugging any configurable and measurable parameter. CLI uses a transaction-based mechanism. CLI can
be run in multiple sessions, and supports multiple users. For example, if you enter configuration mode
while other users are editing the configuration, the CLI displays a list of users who are editing the
configuration and the amount of time they have been idle.

15.3.1 Command line interface

CLI is the primary device management interface, whether a user is logged in from a console or from a
remote location via Telnet or a secure shell. CLI starts automatically when you log into the device, either
from the console or via Telnet or SSH. The intuitive text-based command interface features:
 Operation and configuration modes
 Hierarchical command and configuration structure
 Context-sensitive help
 Command completion
CLI commands are organized in a hierarchical structure. Common keyboard commands can be used to
navigate within the hierarchy, such as CTRL-W to erase words, or CTRL-A/CTRL-E to go to the beginning or
end of the line.

CLI commands

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 15-18

 Apollo Reference Manual Management system

CLI operates in two modes:

 Operation:
Initial login is in operation mode. Use operation mode commands to view, monitor, and troubleshoot
the system as it is running. Commands are organized into a hierarchical structure. Commands with
similar functions are grouped together under a common command name and start with the same
word.
The following figure illustrates the command structure. For example, all commands that reset
statistics or connections begin with clear.

 Configuration:
In configuration mode, you create and edit the configuration of the device, such as interfaces, routing
protocols, routing policy, and CoS parameters. Configuration changes are not implemented until the
user commits them, at which time the changes are pushed out to the hardware.
The configuration statements are also organized into a hierarchical structure. Because the
configuration is structured, you view the configuration statement and determine the command you
would use to set, edit, or delete the statement.
For example, the command to configure a Gigabit Ethernet interface with an IP address is set
interfaces ge-ts1/0 unit 0 family inet address 172.18.1.154/24
When you display the configuration, it displays as:
interfaces {
ge-ts1/0 {
unit 0 {
family inet {
address 172.18.1.154/24;
}
}
}
}
The structure of the command statements also allow you to edit and delete parts of the statements at
different levels. For example, to delete only the IP address from the previous configuration, you type:
delete interfaces ge-ts1/0 unit 0 family inet address
172.18.1.154/24
To delete the entire configuration for interface ge-ts1/0, you type:
delete interfaces ge-ts1/0
CLI is also used to load NE configuration files and/or XML files. Initial NE installation or NE expansion is
faster and easier when loading an NE configuration generated by a planning tool.
Most of the debug, output, and show commands are very similar to JunOS CLI, which purposely makes the
24 x 7 first line support of the product very familiar.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 15-19

 Apollo Reference Manual Management system

15.4 Integration with other products

The Apollo has been designed to integrate smoothly with networks that are based on 3rd party equipment.
You can build multivendor networks with a free flow of management information between Ethernet/MPLS,
SDH/SONET, OTN, and other complementary access, radio, and switching products.

15.5 DC power management

The DC power management feature provides the capability of measuring and displaying the values of DC
power consumption of each Apollo card installed in an OPT99xx platform and the DC power value of the full
platform. The DC power values can be monitored on the Apollo management system (STMS, LightSOFT,
CLI).
The DC power management is supported in the Apollo OPT99xx family and provides the following
functions:
 Display of online measured DC power values for each card inserted in the platform.
 Display of online measured DC power value of the platform with existing cards (inserted and
assigned).
 The measurement results are stored in the xRCP/xRCP1 database.
 Supported management systems include:
 STMS
 CLI
 LightSOFT (cut-through to the level of STMS)
 In cards with fixed transceivers, they are considered as part of the card.
 For cards with pluggable transceivers the value is displayed as a single figure for the card.
 Events that trigger a refresh or update in the DC power stored value include:
 Inserting a card/transceiver.
 Extracting a card/transceiver.
 Assignment of a card/transceiver.
 Unassignment of a card/transceiver.
 Change in fan speed level.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 15-20

16 Embedded management
Network operators face serious operation challenges as they deploy converged networks including optical
and data capabilities. The main challenges are provisioning, fault management, maintenance and
performance monitoring. These are even more important as strict SLA requirements increase, and
operators must have the capability to efficiently detect, isolate, and troubleshoot E2E network
performance and connectivity. Usually, network management is applied from outside the network.
Embedded management brings a new dimension, as it is from within the network and the NEs.
The Apollo embedded management provides comprehensive tools for operators to cope with these
challenges successfully, and includes the following main functions:
 Equipment management
 FCAPS, related to the following:
 Fault management
 Configuration
 Administration/Accounting (not applicable for the Apollo)
 PM
 Security
 Fiber connectivity with embedded power control equalization
 Ease of use
Embedded management enables enhanced maintenance and repair capabilities, including rapid fault
allocation, shorter equipment downtime, and fewer traffic-affecting incidences. Due to built-in fault
management, the user can detect malfunctioning equipment in a much shorter time.

16.1 Equipment management

Apollo supports equipment entities management of Field Replaceable Units (FRUs). The Apollo managed
equipment is divided into three main groups:
 Shelves
 Cards
 Pluggable transceivers

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 16-1

 Apollo Reference Manual Embedded management

16.1.1 Shelf types

Apollo equipment includes passive and service shelf types:
 Passive optical shelf: Accommodates passive I/O cards, with or without a controller card. Such shelf
doesn’t require any configuration commands in order to operate its cards. Thus a controller is not a
must and the shelf can operate without it. If a controller is added to the shelf, it provides inventory
management capabilities (future function). Examples of passive shelves are Artemis-1P and Artemis-
2A.
 Service shelf: Requires a controller card in order to operate the platform and its cards. It includes
several card categories:
 Common cards like controller cards, fan units, power supply, fabric cards.
 Service cards like AoC10, CMR40B, TR10_4
 Optic cards like Amplifiers, ROADMs
 Passive optic cards like Mux/DeMux, DCFs, OADMs
 Layer 2 data cards (future release)
Examples of service shelves are: OPT9624, OPT9608, OPT9603.

16.1.2 Card types

The Apollo cards include the following main categories:
 Common cards
 Passive optical cards
 Optical cards
 Service cards
 L2 data cards
Common cards: Provide the common functionality of a shelf such as: controller cards, fan units, fabric
cards.
Passive optical cards: All optical cards that don’t require power for their operation. Such cards don’t have
VOA and continue to operate even if they are plugged out from a shelf, for example, Mux/DeMux, DCFs.
Optical cards: Optical cards that need power for their operation, for example, amplifier cards, ROADMs.
Service cards: Cards supporting different type of services with and/or without interface to the fabric cards.
Examples:
Service cards with no interface to fabric are: TR10_4, AOC10, and CMR40B.
FIO10_5, FIOMR_16, FIO100 and FIO100M are service cards with interface to the fabric.
L2 data cards: Support L2 functionality.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 16-2

 Apollo Reference Manual Embedded management

16.1.3 Transceiver types

Transceivers are used only for optical/electrical (O/E) conversion and are part of service cards, L2 data
cards, and cards having SFPs.
The following transceivers are supported:
 Extractable single transceiver
 Non-extractable transceiver
Extractable single transceiver: Managed as part of a port entity. Any transceiver failure is handled as an
equipment alarm of the port. Examples are, SFP, XFP.
Third party transceivers can be used for non-OTN ports.
Non-extractable transceiver: Managed as part of a port entity. Failure in the transceiver generates a failure
on the port and on its supporting equipment.

16.1.4 Equipment hierarchy

Apollo equipment hierarchy is a model that implies configuration, ordering of equipment, and/or relations
between entities for alarm management. The following figure depicts this model.

Equipment hierarchy model

Equipment hierarchy also includes modules that are extractable with multiple transceivers. Port is a bundle
of equipment and/or L1 interfaces and services. When the port contains transceiver FRU, it reports
equipment alarms. Only in such a case is the port part of equipment hierarchy.

16.1.5 Equipment entities

Equipment entities for management are divided into the following groups:
 Equipment holder:
 Shelf, such as passive shelf and service shelf
 Slot
 Cards
 Ports having pluggable transceiver, such as XFP and SFP

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 16-3

 Apollo Reference Manual Embedded management

16.1.5.1 Apollo slot occupation size

All Apollo shelves (service shelves and/or optic shelves) comply with the following slot occupation types:

Double slot card

 Double-wide slot

Double-wide slot card

 Quad slot

Quad slot card

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 16-4

 Apollo Reference Manual Embedded management

The slot numbering is identical for single-slot cards and double-slot cards in both service shelves (e.g.
OPT9624, OPT9608) and passive shelves (e.g. Artemis-1P, Artemis-4A).
The following figure depicts the identical slot numbering in the case of double-slot card.

Double slot numbering

The slot numbering is different in double-wide cards as shown in the following figure.

Double-wide slot numbering

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 16-5

 Apollo Reference Manual Embedded management

The slot numbering is different in quad cards as shown in the following figure.

Quad slot numbering

16.1.6 Transport entities

Transport entities in Apollo are divided into two main groups:
 Port entity: Bundles transceiver equipment and/or interfaces for transmission (extractable or
soldered physical ports), for example, STM-64 port, OTU2 port, 1GFC port, 10 GbE port.
 L1 interface entity: Standardized unit that is part of SDH/SONET or OTN payload, including its
management overhead and synchronization, for example, in OTN (ODU1, ODU2, OCH).
Apollo transport entities support the following technologies:
 OTN
 SDH/SONET
 Fiber Channel (FC)
 Ethernet
 Constant Bit Rate (CBR)

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 16-6

 Apollo Reference Manual Embedded management

The L1 interface is created automatically by the NE on top of a port entity, as shown in the following figure.

L1 interface entity

The L1 interface may have hierarchy in the case of OTN technology, as shown in the following figure.

L1 interface hierarchy

16.1.7 Compliance with "Green" requirements

The Apollo shelves have been designed to save power and be as eco-friendly (“Green”) as possible. In
addition to the overall design approach to use components consuming minimal power and high-efficiency
power supplies. Green requirements is a built in feature in the NE and it is operated without operator
intervention. The following features minimize power consumption:
 The installed shelves are automatically discovered by the NE embedded management (future).
 Each slot reports its inventory to management. If equipment is plugged into an unassigned slot or
there is a mismatch between the plugged equipment and the slot assignment, the NE moves the card
into shut down mode that consumes minimal power. In case of mismatch between the assigned slot
and the plugged in equipment the NE generate Equipment Mismatch alarm.
 Each transceiver reports its inventory to management. If the transceiver is plugged into an
unconfigured port or there is a mismatch between the actual transceiver and the configured one, the
NE powers off the transceiver in order to save power.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 16-7

 Apollo Reference Manual Embedded management

16.1.8 Inventory information

Each Apollo FRU (shelf, card, pluggable transceiver) is equipped with a non-volatile memory (ID-PROM) that
stores its inventory information. The inventory information can be retrieved via a CLI or STMS command.
Inventory attributes of each FRU includes the information listed in the following table.

Inventory attributes for Apollo FRUs

Inventory attributes Shelf Card Pluggable transceiver
Type   
Serial number   
Part number N/A N/A 
Size N/A number of slots occupation N/A
Vendor name   
Vendor date code N/A N/A 
HW revision   
HW option  Replaces ST "hardware configuration" N/A
SW version N/A Boot SW version N/A

Inventory information of a main shelf also provides inventory information of subtending passive shelves.

16.1.9 Auto discovery

Apollo supports auto discovery of each FRU that is plugged in and reports its inventory to the CLI and/or
external management system. Currently, ST supports discovery for pluggable FRUs that have a CPU and/or
pluggable cards whose location is known, such as fan units. Inventory information can be retrieved before
configuration. Managed shelves (subtending and/or passive with controller card) are also discovered.
An unassigned slot behaves as follows:
 New inserted FRU is discovered and reported to the external management system.
 Any FRU insertion into the slot is detected.
 Inserted I/O card:
 Performs power up BIT.
 Inventory information includes BIT status.
 Upon BIT completion the card is set to consume minimal power.
Configured slot behavior:
 Empty slot generates "unequipped" alarm.
 Insertion of a matched FRU clears the alarm.
 Insertion of a mismatched FRU causes a "mismatch" alarm.
 Insertion of a mismatched transceiver causes a "mismatch" alarm associated to its transmission
entity.
 Insertion of an I/O card:
 Performs power up BIT.
 Periodically Performs background BIT.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 16-8

 Apollo Reference Manual Embedded management

16.2 Fault management

Changes in the NE are notified via the following notification types:
 Alarm notifications requiring operator involvement, reported concurrently in three different
methods:
 Automatic output message to external management system after stabilization period.
 Visual indicator in the NE.
 Audible/visible indicators at central office under control of the NE.
Typical alarm examples include: LOS, LOF, Equipment Out, Equipment Mismatch, and 15-min
threshold-crossing alert (TCA) reports.
 Non-alarm notifications informing the operator of a change in the system. These notifications are
sent as automatic output messages to the external management system without waiting for a
stabilization period.
Typical examples include a protection switching event or a 1-day TCA.
Both alarm and non-alarm notifications are reported to STMS and also via SNMP to external management
systems using an SNMP agent.
Alarms generated by Apollo are classified as:
 Transmission: Alarms associated with a malfunction of any transmission path. The Apollo supports a
full set of alarms in compliance with applicable standards.
 Communication: Alarms associated with the procedures and/or processes required to convey
information from one point to another.
 Timing: Alarms associated with a malfunction of any Apollo timing source.
 Equipment: Alarms associated with any hardware malfunction.
 Environment: Alarms mainly associated with a condition relating to an enclosure in which the
equipment resides. Alarm types in this category are: temperature too high, low power in the power
supply board, etc.
 Processing error: Alarms mainly associated with a software or processing fault.
 SW processing: Alarms associated the same as processing error alarms but related to SW.
 QoS: Alarms mainly associated with degradation in the QoS. The causes may be: Excessive Response
Time, Exceeded Queue Size, reduced BW, Excessive Retransmission Rate, Threshold Crossed,
Degraded Performance, and Congestion.
A system of severity levels is used to prioritize the alarms in the order of urgency:
 Critical: Always requires immediate attention.
 Major: Gives notice that attention is required, but does not require attention outside normal working
hours.
 Minor: Does not require attention after normal hours.
 Warning: Malfunction warning or unreleased maintenance action.
 Non-alarmed: Extended severity for transient condition reports (such as protection switch events,
timing-switching, or 1-day TCA reports).

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 16-9

 Apollo Reference Manual Embedded management

In addition to the management interfaces listed previously, some additional optional means can be
provided for alarms control and display:
 Terminal displays, including LEDs that indicate malfunctions of specific plug-in units or transmission
paths
 Alarm contacts, delivering critical, major, and minor alarm indications to the station alarm bus
 Four input alarm and four output alarm dry contacts, to be explicitly configured by the user. By
default there is no configuration of external dry contacts.
 Rack alarm buzzer with station acknowledgment mechanism.
 Alarm server, delivering network aggregated alarms from LightSOFT to the operator's Central
Monitoring Station (CMS).
 Alarm inputs from in-station devices (such as security sensors, fire detectors, external monitoring
equipment) and other in-station telecommunication equipment (like flexible multiplexers and DWDM
units).
Each managed entity (such as a card, port, or interface) that supports fault management functionality
works with a severity profile, a list of all alarm and non-alarm notifications that can be suppressed. Using
the severity profile, a user can modify the severity of each alarm and suppress reporting of selected alarm
or non-alarm reports.
Apollo NEs also provide log functionality:
 All reported alarms are logged to a persistent NE alarm log.
 All non-alarm reports (if so configured in the severity profile) are logged to a persistent NE event log.
There are several levels of alarm report suppression:
 Per specific alarm: Suppressed by changing the reporting attribute of the specific alarm in a specific
severity profile.
 Per managed entity: Suppressed by changing the alarm master mask attribute value.
 AINS: Suppressed until getting into service for the first time (future).
Current reported alarms can be retrieved via CLI, STMS, and SNMP requests. In addition, CLI and STMS
allow retrieval of reported and non-reported alarm conditions per managed entity.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 16-10

 Apollo Reference Manual Embedded management

16.3 Configuration management

The Apollo platform, provides enhanced configuration features, including
 User configuration
 Implicit configuration
 Pre-planned and manual configuration
 Transactions
 Rollback operations
Configuration is performed using the CLI and/or STMS. The configuration features are described in the
following sections.

16.3.1 Apollo platforms minimal configuration

The Apollo requires minimal NE configurations in order to operate, including equipment entities and
definition of NE attributes, such as default password of newly defined users. The minimal equipment
configuration is required only for Apollo service shelves (OPT9624 and OPT9608). The shelf that is
controlled by external management is named Main shelf and must have the following minimal installed
FRUs:
 1 x RCP controller card
 2 x PFM power supply units
 1 x FCM cooling unit in the FCM slot
 1 x CEM card (for OPT9624 only)

NOTE: In order to comply with availability requirements it is highly recommended to have

redundancy of RCP and PFM.

The above minimal equipment configuration is also applicable for subtending service shelves.
The Apollo NEs support live insertion and extraction of equipment without affecting traffic.

16.3.2 User configuration

As part of Apollo platforms installation, the user is required to configure parameters for I/O and fabric card
slots. The common equipment cards like controller, power supply, and fan cards are implicitly configured by
the NE. For a detailed description of this feature, see Implicit Configuration.
In addition, there are other instances when the user must configure equipment entities, for example, cards
with unique multiple configuration of the supported entities. User configuration is also required in Pre-
planned and Manual Configuration.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 16-11

 Apollo Reference Manual Embedded management

16.3.3 Implicit configuration

Implicit configuration is the ability of an NE to configure equipment and/or supported entities without
operator intervention. This feature is supported by the Apollo.
Implicit configuration is applied to:
 Main service shelf with minimal equipment configuration (the shelf itself, RCP, fan units, and PFMs)
 Cards with unique configuration of supported entities
 Ports with unique configuration of their supported entities
Implicit configuration of equipment: As part of implicit configuration, the main shelf configures the
minimal equipment configuration, including its RCP, fan unit (FCM) and power supplies (PFMs) to their
default values. In addition, the main shelf configures RCPs of subtending shelves to their default values, and
controller cards of subtending passive shelves.
Cards with unique configuration of supported entities: The user sets the card type and all ports, and
supported entities are implicitly configured to their default values. Examples are all the cards belonging to
passive optics cards (e.g., DCFs, splitters/couplers), amplifiers, some ports in Add ROADMs, and service
cards having non-FRU transceivers. This category also includes cards with multiple configurations. In this
case, the user sets the card type, and the card is configured to its default values; the supported entities are
not configured. For example, client cards, line cards, transponders.
Ports with unique configuration of supported entities: The user configures the port type, and all supported
entities are implicitly configured. For example, service cards, data cards, and ROADMs.

16.3.4 Preplanned and manual configuration

Apollo platforms support preplanned and manual configuration initiated by the user. The following modes
are supported:
 Manual configuration, performed by a single command from the CLI.
 Transfer of a configuration file to the Apollo NE to be saved and executed, immediately or later.
 Performing the configuration by the user sending command by commend from external management.
As part of manual configuration, the user can perform the following activities:
 Assigning an ID number to subtending service and passive shelves.
 Creation and configuration an empty slot.
 Deletion of a populated slot and assignment to another FRU.
 Modification of a populated slot to another FRU type.
The user can configure multiple entities of the same type, using the Copy command via the CLI or STMS. For
example, if the user has configured a slot, he doesn't have to repeat the changes manually to another slot
in the same or other shelves. He can use this slot as a template and copy it's configuration to another slot.
This functionality is also supported for cards and shelves of the same type.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 16-12

 Apollo Reference Manual Embedded management

16.3.5 Transactions
Apollo supports transactions, enabling the user to perform several configuration activities in a single set of
commands. Transaction can be composed of a single or several changes followed by the "commit"
command. The result of a transaction can be "OK" or "Fail". Partial successful configuration is impossible.
The order of commands is not mandatory as long as all commands are part of the same transaction.
The following are examples of successful and failed transactions:

Example 1
1. To assign on slot u2 trp10-4 and configure port 1 as otu2, use the following set of commands:
 Set chassis slot u2 phye-tr10-4 port 1 port-type otu2
2. To assign on slot u3 tr10-4 and configure port 2 as otu2, use the following set of commands:
 Set chassis slot u3 phye-tr10-4 port 2 port-type otu2
3. To define fiber connectivity between the above two ports, use the following set of commands:
 Set chassis slot u2 phye-tr10-4 port 1 fiber-connectivity internal bidirectional peer-slot u3 peer-
port 2
 Commit
The result of these transactions will be: Successful transaction

Example 2
 To define fiber connectivity between two ports u2 and u3, use the following set of commands:
 Set chassis slot u2 phye-tr10-4 port 1 fiber-connectivity internal bidirectional peer-slot u3 peer-
port 2
 Commit
The result of these transactions will be: Transaction fails (because the cards and ports are not
defined)

16.3.6 Rollback operations

Apollo platforms support rollback functionality. This enables the operator to load a previously committed
configuration out of the nine most recent copies of committed configurations. Rollback functionality is used
by issuing the "rollback" command, the number of the committed recent configuration, and the "commit"
command.
Rollback is used in several cases, for example:
 After a failed implicit configuration
 Failed configuration operations
 Failed XC operation
 Failed command
 Failed deletion operation

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 16-13

 Apollo Reference Manual Embedded management

16.4 Performance monitoring

Apollo as a transport system provides PM interval collection on its transport entities, such as ports and
interfaces. PM collection is applied for both L1 service cards and/or photonic cards with monitoring points.
Apollo also supports PM on the OSC-100M ports used for in-band management.
The NE collects PM information every 15 minutes, and at the end of each day, the historical PM information
from each entity. The collected information is stored in a non-volatile memory in the NE in one zipped file
per each PM interval.
The NE can store up to 95 historical PM files for 15-minute intervals and 7 historical PM files for 1-day
intervals.
Any external managed system can acquire the PM files from the NE.
PM profiles contain a list of PM threshold setting values configured for each technology. Only entities
supporting PM interval functionality can be associated with a PM profile. By default, PM is enabled.

NOTE: A future function is Apollo support of PM intervals on L2 data cards. Therefore, at this
stage, their ports have no association with a PM profile and PM is always disabled.

PM TCA reports follow transport system standards as follows:

 15-minute TCAs are reported as standing condition reports (having alarm severity types).
 1-day TCAs are reported as transient condition reports (having non-alarmed severity type).
 PM TCAs are defined in the severity profile for each technology, following the alarms and events
approach.
 Current interval and historical PM information per entity can be retrieved upon user request. Current
intervals and historical intervals have a suspect flag attribute notifying if the interval information is
reliable or not.
 The flag is enabled by configuration changes on the monitored entities (e.g., resetting counters, PM
updates).
PM for L2 data cards is supported by continuous counters collection. These counters can be configured by
the user to collect information every 2, 4, or 6 hours.

16.5 Security
The Apollo platforms support the following security features:
 Authentication and password manipulation: Authentication is performed according to the user ID
and a complex password. Features password aging (range from 1 to 360 days) and protects the NE
from denial of service attacks.
 User privileges: Users are explicitly granted permission to create, configure, and delete interfaces,
customers, and services. Service operators can also enable and disable interfaces and services.
 Separate resource domains per user, down to the port level.
 Audit log.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 16-14

 Apollo Reference Manual Embedded management

16.6 Fiber connectivity

Fiber connectivity provides the connectivity between ports connected by fibers or cables. Two types of
fiber connectivity are defined in the Apollo system:
 Intra (internal) connectivity: connectivity inside the NE, for example:
 Connectivity between cards residing on the same shelf
 Connectivity between a card on a service shelf (OPT9624, OPT9608) and a card in a passive shelf
(Artemis)
 Inter (external) connectivity: connectivity with NE neighbors

Fiber connectivity types

Applications that rely on fiber connectivity configuration include:

 Power control and equalization
 Diagnostic information (fiber loss, dispersion, OSNR)
 LightSOFT top-down application
 NE alarm correlation (future function)

16.6.1 Power control and equalization

Two main criteria must be met to achieve optimal results - maximum range without exceeding a given bit
error rate:
 Each component in the network must operate at its optimal design point
 The total available power must be divided equally among the optical channels (wavelengths)
These criteria are met by simultaneously applying two approaches:
 Power control, which ensures that the correct total signal power is achieved at all the relevant points
 Equalization, which ensures that each channel receives its correct share of the total signal power
Fiber connectivity configuration defines the physical topology of the network.
Based on the topology of the WDM ports (i.e., OTS ports, OTUk ports), the NE prepares the appropriate
optical information for each one of the ports in order to achieve power and channel equalization.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 16-15

 Apollo Reference Manual Embedded management

The RCP card in each NE processes and controls the optical components having internal fiber connectivity
configuration. It uses the in-band communication channels (i.e., GCC or OSC) to convey the optical
information for optical components that are external fiber connected. The following figure shows the
power control and equalization in the network.

Power control and equalization

In addition, the measured signal values are processed by management which uses an advanced algorithm
to adjust power levels in the entire network in an optimal way, and to automatically compensate for
changes such as span loss over the network operational lifetime. The algorithm also analyzes operational
conditions, such as number of channels, span loss, and accumulated noise, and the configuration
parameters of the various optical components, and compares them with various user-defined and
automatically generated thresholds to determine the optimal conditions and the method used to respond
to changes.

16.6.2 Diagnostic information

Optical measurements and/or estimations are collected by the NE using the physical topology defined via
fiber connectivity. Detailed information on each optical port can be retrieved upon user request. Optical
measurements with high importance (e.g., min. power, max. power, actual span loss) are handled as PM
counters and follow the PM functionality.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 16-16

 Apollo Reference Manual Embedded management

16.6.3 LightSOFT top-down information

LightSOFT top-down information acquires fiber connectivity configuration from the NE for NMS link
creation in trail configuration. As part of the creation of trails, in addition to XC, LightSOFT also sends the
fiber connectivity configuration to the NE.
Fiber connectivity configuration can be provided by LightSOFT, CLI users, and/or STMS, and offline via the
planning tools.

Top-down information transfer

The STMS station downloads the NE configuration and intra connectivity information to XML files, and
sends them to LightSOFT. LightSOFT exports the network topology, services, trails, and intra node
connectivity information to Planning Tools via XML. Planning Tools processes the information and the
updated information is sent back to LightSOFT, retrieved by the STMS, and updates the NE.

16.6.4 NE alarm correlation

Network alarm correlation is handled by the NMS. Apollo, as an embedded management device, should
provide an advanced fault detection and repair, and is required to report only the root cause alarms and
not the affected alarms. Fiber connectivity configuration allows the NE to provide an advanced algorithm
for NE alarm report correlation. An example of this important function is shown in the following figure.

Alarm correlation example

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 16-17

 Apollo Reference Manual Embedded management

In case the ROADM card is reset or pulled out of its slot, the NE would normally generate a ROADM alarm
and all cards connected to the ROADM would also generate alarms. It would be very difficult for the user to
identify the problem. The alarm correlation feature ensures that only the root cause of the failure
generates an alarm, making troubleshooting much easier and more accurate.

16.6.5 Alien lambda

As part of power equalization, it is important to take into account the optical impairments of third-party
and/or non-Apollo connected lambdas.
This is achieved by explicit configuration of the optical parameters of the alien lambda. In this case, fiber
connectivity configuration is marked as external and unspecified.

Alien lambda solution

The user can use the parameters to manually configure the power control and equalization system
accordingly, so that critical optical parameters are considered by the system and power control and
equalization is maintained.

16.6.6 Fiber connectivity to external equipment

Apollo ports may be connected to test equipment and/or other families. In this case the fiber connectivity
is defined as external, but the peer port information is irrelevant. Fiber connectivity is external and
unspecified.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 16-18

 Apollo Reference Manual Embedded management

16.7 Built-In Test (BIT)

The BIT hardware and its related software assist in the identification of any faulty card in the system. BIT
checks are performed during power up and at periodic intervals afterwards.
There are three BIT levels:
 BIT failed: Card devices don’t work (or partially work); service is affected.
 BIT degraded: Service might be somewhat affected (for example, higher degree of BER).
 BIT slightly degraded: Service not affected but there is some unusual or non-optimal behavior (for
example, a heated device). This level usually doesn’t require immediate technician attention.
Unsuccessful BIT raises an alarm according to the BIT level, including a list of all associated error codes and
some explanation.
Based on this information, the technician decides how to fix the problem.

16.8 Ease of use

Apollo embedded management provides enhanced features that makes operation of the system very
simple, easy, and user-friendly. These features include:
 The user assigns a card or configures a port; the NE implicitly configures the supported entities and
updates the STMS.
 The user configures a port number and port type; the NE implicitly configures the port layers.
 Apollo platforms support plug-and-play. Using auto-discovery, each plugged FRU is detected and its
inventory reported.
 Fiber connectivity supports several applications:
 Power equalization.
 Diagnostic.
 Alarm correlation (future).
 Unified planning tools support:
 Network resources optimization and simplified operation.
 Download of NE configuration, intra-connectivity, and network topology.
 Simplified network expansion.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 16-19

17 Maintenance
The Apollo family is a fully redundant all-in-one system that eliminates and replaces interconnections and
cables with a few ultra-reliable optical connections in a self-contained integrated package. As a result, the
Apollo inherently provides high reliability.
Operating features and benefits of the Apollo include:
 Redundancy of all subsystems and optional switchover to protection, offering the operator
uninterrupted service.
 Comprehensive alarms system, detecting and reporting transmission and equipment malfunctions.
 Loopback capabilities on the transmission interfaces and a sophisticated BIT feature facilitating quick
and accurate fault location, so minimizing mean time to repair (MTTR).
 Maintenance configuration functions controlled by the management system.

NOTE: All installation instructions, technical specifications, restrictions, and safety warnings
are provided in the Apollo Installation and Maintenance Manuals. See these manuals for
specific instructions before beginning any Apollo platform installation.

17.1 Maintenance operations

The NE generates event notifications to any external management system of maintenance activities in the
NE. Maintenance operation can be issued on cards, ports, L1 interfaces, and protection groups. The
following sections describe these operations.

17.2 Built-In Test

The BIT hardware and its related software assist in the identification of any faulty card in the system.
Outputs provide:
 Fault detection
 Maintenance alarms
 Redundancy switching
 System reset
 Bypass (when applicable)
 Management reports
On-card dedicated test circuits implement the BIT procedure under the control of an integrated software
package.
The RCP cards perform the BIT procedures on all signal paths and busses. The RCPs also monitor the slave
processors on the other Apollo cards by means of test messages.
A BIT program is automatically activated after the Apollo is switched on. It is performed for both the
initialization and normal operation phases.

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 17-1

 Apollo Reference Manual Maintenance

BIT testing covers general tests (including card presence tests and periodic sanity checks of I/O card
processors), traffic path tests, RCP environment tests, data tests, and more. The BIT detects traffic-affecting
failures as well as failures in other system cards, including invisible failures in non-operating redundant
cards.

17.3 Alarms system

Alarms generated by the Apollo are classified as:
 Transmission: Alarms associated with a malfunction of any transmission path. The Apollo supports a
full set of alarms in compliance with applicable standards.
 Timing: Alarms associated with a malfunction of any Apollo timing source.
 Equipment: Alarms associated with any hardware malfunction.
The network administrator assigns severity levels to each alarm type:
 Critical: Always requires immediate attention.
 Major: Gives notice that attention is required, but does not require attention outside normal working
hours.
 Minor: Does not require attention after normal hours.
In addition to the management interfaces listed previously, additional optional means can be provided for
alarms control and display:
 Local displays, including LEDs that indicate malfunctions of specific plug-in units or transmission paths
 Alarm contacts, delivering critical, major, and minor alarm indications to the station alarm bus
 Rack alarm buzzer with station acknowledgment mechanism
 Alarm server, delivering network aggregated alarms from LightSOFT to the operator's Central
Monitoring Station (CMS)
 Alarm inputs from in-station devices (such as security sensors, fire detectors, external monitoring
equipment) and other in-station telecommunications equipment (like flexible multiplexers and
DWDM units)

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 17-2

 Apollo Reference Manual Maintenance

17.4 Troubleshooting
In the event of an alarm, troubleshooting procedures are used to determine the severity and location of the
problem and the appropriate alarm-clearing action.
Alarms are handled first by severity and then by type. In order of priority, alarm types are:
 Equipment
 Transmission
 Timing
Each card is a standalone unit. By adopting our modular system concept, the customer's planning and
maintenance personnel achieve flexible and efficient operation. By following a simple procedure,
maintenance personnel can quickly replace faulty cards or other assemblies. Faulty units are then sent for
repair to the assigned Customer Support Center. The easy maintenance concept of Apollo allows the user
to perform these repairs and test actions:
 Connecting/disconnecting cable fibers to/from the Apollo
 Removing/inserting any cards in Apollo cards cage when power is on
 Connecting/disconnecting power cable(s) to/from the system
 Performing system test procedures
 Removing/inserting I/O modules

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 17-3